User Manual

Original Instructions

SMC-50 Soft Starters

Bulletin 150
Important User Information
Read this document and the documents listed in the additional resources section about installation, configuration, and
operation of this equipment before you install, configure, operate, or maintain this product. Users are required to
familiarize themselves with installation and wiring instructions in addition to requirements of all applicable codes, laws,
and standards.

Activities including installation, adjustments, putting into service, use, assembly, disassembly, and maintenance are
required to be carried out by suitably trained personnel in accordance with applicable code of practice.

If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may
be impaired.

In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from
the use or application of this equipment.

The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and
requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or
liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams.

No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or
software described in this manual.

Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation,
Inc., is prohibited

Throughout this manual, when necessary, we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations.

WARNING: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous
environment, which may lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.

ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property
damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you identify a hazard, avoid a hazard, and recognize the consequence.

IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.

Labels may also be on or inside the equipment to provide specific precautions.

SHOCK HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that dangerous
voltage may be present.

BURN HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that surfaces may
reach dangerous temperatures.

ARC FLASH HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a motor control center, to alert people to
potential Arc Flash. Arc Flash will cause severe injury or death. Wear proper Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). Follow ALL
Regulatory requirements for safe work practices and for Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).
 Table of Contents

Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
About This Publication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Summary of Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Additional Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Chapter 1
Product Overview Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Starting Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Soft Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Linear Speed Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Torque Control Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Current Limit Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Selectable Kickstart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Pump Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Dual Ramp Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Full Voltage Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Preset Slow Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Integral Motor Winding Heater (starting feature) . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Stopping Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Coast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Soft Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Linear Speed Deceleration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Pump Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Braking Control Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
SMB—Smart Motor Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Slow Speed with Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Accu-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
External Braking Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Internal Bypass Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Solid-state Running Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
SCR Control - Normal Run Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
SCR Control – Energy Saver Run Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
External Bypass – Optional Run Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Emergency Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Resistor Loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Motor and Starter Protection Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Starter Protection Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Metering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Motor Protection Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Controller Parameter Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 3

Table of Contents

Configuration by Keypad and LCD Display (Human Interface

Module Cat. No. 20-HIM-A6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Configuration by PC Programmable Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Parameter Configuration Option Module (Cat. No.150-SM6) 33
Control Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Standard Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Optional Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Standard and Optional Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Optional PTC, Ground Fault, and Current Transformer Interface
Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Chapter 2
Wiring Wiring Terminal Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Power Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Grounding Provision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Protective Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Additional Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Power Wiring with External Bypass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Line-connected Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Delta-connected Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Control Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Standard Control Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Control Wiring Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Standard Controller Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Soft Stop, Pump Control, and Smart Motor Braking (SMB) . . . . . . 67
Slow Speed with Braking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Preset Slow Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Fan Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Integrated Bypass Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Solid-state Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Upgraded Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Chapter 3
Operating Modes Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Motor Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Motor Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Resistive Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Three-phase Balanced Loads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Starting Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Linear Speed (Linear Acceleration). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Soft Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Selectable Kickstart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

4 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Table of Contents

Current Limit Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Full Voltage Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Torque Control Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Pump Control Start and Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Additional Start Features—Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Dual Ramp Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Start Timer (Start Delay). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Timed Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Backspin Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Motor Winding Heater Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Stopping Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Coast-to-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Soft Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Linear Speed (Linear Deceleration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Smart Motor Braking (SMB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Preset Slow Speed and Slow Speed with Braking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Accu-Stop™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
External Braking Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Running Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Internal Bypass Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Solid-state (SCR) Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
External Bypass Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Energy Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Emergency RUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Sequence of Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Chapter 4
Special Application Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Considerations Design Philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Line Voltage Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Current and Thermal Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Mechanical Shock and Vibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Noise and Radio Frequency (RF) Immunity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Altitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Pollution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Atmospheric Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Motor Overload Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Multiple Motors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Special Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
SMC-50 Motor Winding Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
External . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Stall Protection and Jam Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Power Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 5

Table of Contents

Power Factor Correction Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Altitude De-rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Isolation Contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Application Uses for SMC-50 Controller Power Structures. . . . . . 117
SMC-50 Solid-state Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
SMC-50 Controller with Integrated Bypass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
SMC-50 Controller with External Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Chapter 5
Protection and Diagnostic Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Functions 20-HIM-A6, 20-HIM-C6S, and Configuration Software . . . . 122
Enabling Starter and Motor Faults and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Enabling Option Module Functional Faults and Alarm . . . . . . 125
Protection and Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Overload—Fault and Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Underload—Fault and Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Line Power Undervoltage Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Line Power Overvoltage Protection—Fault and Alarm . . . . . . 131
Current Imbalance Protection—Fault and Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Voltage Unbalance Protection—Fault and Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Phase Reversal Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
High and Low Line Power Frequency Protection—
Fault and Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Stall Protection—Fault and Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Jam Detection—Fault and Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Real Power Protection (MWatts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Motor Over Power Real—Fault and Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Motor Under Power Real—Fault and Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Reactive Power Protection (MVAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Motor Over Power Reactive Positive (Motor Consumed)—
Fault and Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Motor Under Power Reactive Positive (Motor Consumed)—
Fault and Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Motor Over Power Reactive Negative (Motor Generated)—
Fault and Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Motor Under Power Reactive Negative (Motor Generated)—
Fault and Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Apparent Power Protection (MVA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Motor Over Power Apparent—Fault and Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Motor Under Power Apparent—Fault and Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . 142
Power FactorProtection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Motor Power Factor (PF)—Fault and Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Excessive Starts/Hour Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Motor Starts/Hour—Fault and Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Preventive Maintenance Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Preventive Maintenance (PM) Hours Protection—
Fault and Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

6 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Table of Contents

PM Starts Protection—Fault and Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Line Loss Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Silicon-Controlled Rectifier (SCR) Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Shorted SCR Fault—Phase A, B, or C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
SCR Overtemperature—Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Open SCR Gate Fault and Alarm—Phase A, B, or C . . . . . . . . 146
Open Bypass—Phase A, B, or C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Power Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Power Quality Fault and Alarm—Phase A, B, or C . . . . . . . . . . 147
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) Fault and Alarm. . . . . . . . 147
Power Pole Overtemperature—Fault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Open Load—Fault and Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Current Transformers (CT) Loss—Fault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Locked Rotor—Fault and Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Expansion Module Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Expansion Device Removed Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Expansion Device Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Expansion Module Incompatible Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Real Time Clock (RTC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Battery Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Configuration Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Configuration Change—Fault and Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
I/O Configuration—Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Buffers and Storage Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Non-volatile Storage (NVS) Fault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Fault Buffer and Fault Storage Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Alarm/Event Buffer and Alarm/Event Storage Parameters . . . 152
Auto Restart from Fault Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Chapter 6
Programming Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Human Interface Module (HIM)
(Cat. No. 20-HIM-A6 or 20-HIM-C6S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Password Modification Using the HIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Parameter Access Level Modification Using the HIM . . . . . . . 158
Parameter Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
RAM (Random Access Memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
ROM (Read-only Memory)—Set Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
EEPROM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Using the START UP Configuration Tool
(20-HIM-A6 or 20-HIM-C6S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Parameter Search and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Parameter Search and Configuration by Parameter Number. . 165
Parameter Search and Configuration by File-Group Structure 166
Parameter Configuration - Using the Setup File Group . . . . . . . . . . 168
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 7

Table of Contents

Soft Start and Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Current Limit Start with Simple Stop Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Linear Acceleration (Linear Speed) Start with Stop. . . . . . . . . . 171
Torque Start with Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Pump Start with Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Full Voltage Start with Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Dual Ramp Start with Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Start Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Stop Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Slow Speed with Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Accu-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Parameter File-Group Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
SMC-50 Controller Option Module Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Basic Configuration using the HIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
150-SM4 Digital I/O Option Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
150-SM6 Parameter Configuration Option Module. . . . . . . . . 193
150-SM2 PTC, Ground Fault, and External
Current Transformer Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Parameter Configuration Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Using the Parameter Configuration Module (150-SM6) . . . . . 196

iChapter 7
Metering Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Viewing Metering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Resetting Metering Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Metering Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Current. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Power Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Energy Savings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Elapsed Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Running Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Motor Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Actual Start Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Peak Start Current. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Total Starts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Line Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Current Imbalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Voltage Unbalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

8 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Table of Contents

Chapter 8
Optional HIM Operation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
HIM Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
HIM Control Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
CopyCat Function of the 20-HIM-A6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Chapter 9
Communications Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Communication Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
HIM Keypad and Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Connecting the HIM to the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Control Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Logic Mask Enable/Disable using a HIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Loss of Communication with DPI Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Default Input/Output Communication Configuration . . . . . . . . . 219
Variable Input/Output Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
SMC-50 Controller—Bit Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Reference/Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Parameter Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Scale Factors for PLC Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Display Text Unit Equivalents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Configuring DataLink™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Criteria for Using DataLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Updating Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Chapter 10
Diagnostics Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Protection Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Diagnostic LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Fault Display (20-HIM-A6). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Clear Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Fault and Alarm Buffer - Parameter List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Accessing the Fault and Alarm Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Accessing the Fault and Alarm Buffers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Auxiliary Relay Output Fault or Alarm Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Chapter 11
Troubleshooting Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Power Module Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Shorted SCR Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Appendix A
Parameter Information SMC-50 Controller Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
150-SM6 PCM Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 9

Table of Contents

150-SM4 Digital I/O Module Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

150-SM2 Ground Fault Module Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
150-SM3 Analog I/O Module Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Appendix B
Option Modules Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Cat. No. 150-SM4 Digital I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Optional Cat. No. 150-SM3 Analog I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Cat. No. 150-SM2 Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC), Ground-
Fault, and External Current Transformer Option Module . . . . . . . 281
Cat. No. 150-SM6 Parameter Configuration Module (PCM) . . . . 287

Appendix C
Using DeviceLogix Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Function Block Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Macro Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Bit and Analog I/O Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Bit Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Bit Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Analog Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Data Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
DeviceLogix Scratchpad Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
SMC-50 Controller DeviceLogix
Input Datalinks (P337…P342) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Program Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Example 1: Selector Switch Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Example 2: Diverter Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Example 3: Wet Well Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Appendix D
Real Time Clock (RTC) Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Replacement
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

10 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Preface

About This Publication This user manual provides you with the information that is required to
program and operate your SMC-50™ soft starter.

The SMC-50 soft starter is a reduced voltage soft starter that uses a state-of-
the-art microprocessor- based control module. By using six back-to-back
silicon-controlled rectifiers (SCRs) (two per phase), the SMC-50 soft starter
provides controlled acceleration, operation/run, and deceleration of standard
three-phase squirrel-cage induction or Wye-Delta (6-lead) motors. Power
structures are available with an integral bypass contactor or without (solid-
state).

The user manual assumes that the installer is a qualified person with previous
experience and basic understanding of electrical terminology, configuration
procedures, required equipment, and safety precautions.

For safety of maintenance personnel and others who might be exposed to

electrical hazards associated with maintenance activities, follow all local
safety-related work practices (such as NFPA 70E, Part II in the United States).
Maintenance personnel must be trained in the safety practices, procedures, and
requirements that pertain to their respective job assignments.

Terminology Throughout this publication, we also refer to the SMC-50 soft starter as the
SMC-50 controller. These terms are interchangeable.

General Precautions
WARNING:
• Only personnel familiar with the controller and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation, startup, and subsequent
maintenance of the system. Failure to do this may result in personal injury and/or equipment damage.

• Hazardous voltage is present in the motor circuit even when the SMC-50 controller is off. To avoid shock hazard, disconnect the main power before
working on the controller, motor, and control devices such as Start-Stop push buttons. Procedures that require parts of the equipment to be
energized during troubleshooting, testing, etc., must be performed by properly qualified personnel, using appropriate local safety work practices
and precautionary measures.

• Failure of solid-state power switching components can cause overheating due to a single-phase condition in the motor. To prevent injury or
equipment damage, the use of an isolation contactor or shunt trip-type circuit breaker on the line side of the SMC controller is recommended. This
device should be capable of interrupting the motor’s locked-rotor current.

• Hazardous voltages that can cause shock, burn, or death are present on L1, L2, L3, T1, T2, and T3. For Internal bypass units, hazardous voltages are
also present on T4, T5, and T6. Power terminal covers for units rated 90…180 A (solid state) and 108…480 A (integrated bypass) can be
installed to prevent inadvertent contact with terminals. Disconnect the main power before servicing the motor controller, motor, or associated
wiring.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 11

Preface

ATTENTION:

• Static control precautions are required when you install, test, service, or repair the assembly. The controller contains electrostatic discharge (ESD)
sensitive parts and assemblies. Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed. If you are not familiar with static
control procedures, See applicable ESD protection handbooks.

• Stopping modes, such as braking, are not intended to be used as an emergency stop. You are responsible for determining which stopping mode is
best suited to the application. See the applicable standards for emergency stop requirements.

• Pump and linear deceleration stopping modes may cause motor heating. Depending upon the mechanical dynamics of the system, select the
lowest stopping time setting that satisfactorily stops the motor.

• Slow speed running is not intended for continuous operation. This is due to reduced motor cooling.

• Two peripheral devices can be connected to the direct programming interface (DPI™) port that is located in the control module. The maximum
output current through the DPI port is 560 mA.
NOTE: A Human Interface Module (HIM) located in the control module HIM port/bezel (See Figure 9) also draws power from the DPI port.

• Disconnect the controller from the power source when installing or inspecting protective or capacitor modules. These modules should be
inspected periodically for damage or discoloration. Replace module if it is damaged or the clear sealant or components are discolored.

• Additional considerations may be required for EMC compliance. See Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) on page 42.

ATTENTION:

• The controller must be correctly applied and installed. If applied or installed incorrectly, damage to the components or the reduction in product
life may occur. The system may malfunction if the following wiring or application errors occur: undersizing the motor, using an improperly sized
controller, using an incorrect or inadequate AC supply, excessive ambient temperatures, or power quality.

• You must program the Motor Overload parameter to provide proper protection. Overload configuration must be properly coordinated with the
motor.

• This product has been designed and tested as Class A equipment for electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Use of this product in domestic
environments may cause radio interference, in which case, the installer may need to employ additional mitigation methods.

• Disconnect the controller from the motor before you measure insulation resistance (IR) of the motor windings. Voltages used for insulation
resistance testing can cause silicon-controlled rectifier (SCR) failure. Do not make any measurements on the controller with an insulation
resistance (IR) or Megger tester.

• To protect the Smart Motor Controller (SMC) and/or motor from line voltage surges, protective modules may be placed on the line, load, or both
sides of the SMC controller. Do not place protective modules on the load side of the SMC controller when using an inside-the-delta motor
connection or with pump, linear deceleration, or braking control.

• The controller can be installed on a system with power factor correction capacitors (PFCC). The PFCCs must only be on the line side of the
SMC controller. Installing PFCCs on the load side results in SCR damage and failure.

• The ground fault sensing feature of the SMC-50 controller is intended for monitoring purposes only and not as a ground fault circuit interrupter
for personnel protection as defined in Article 100 of the NEC. The ground fault sensing feature has not been evaluated to UL 1053.

• After a short circuit occurs, you must verify device functionality.

This product contains a sealed lithium battery that may need to be replaced during the life of the product.
At the end of its life, the battery that is contained in this product should be collected separately from any unsorted municipal waste.
The collection and recycling of batteries helps to protect the environment and contributes to the conservation of natural resources as valuable
materials are recovered.

12 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Preface

Perchlorate material – special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/

hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

This perchlorate warning only applies to primary Lithium Manganese Dioxide

(LiMnO2) cells or batteries, and products containing these cells or batteries,
sold or distributed in California, USA.

ATTENTION: There is a danger of explosion if the lithium battery or real-time clock module in this product is incorrectly replaced. Do not
replace the battery or real-time clock module unless power has been removed and the area is known to be nonhazardous.
Replace the battery only with an equivalent CR2032 coin-cell battery.
Do not dispose of the lithium battery or real-time clock module in a fire or incinerator. Dispose of used batteries in accordance with local
regulations.
For safety information on the handling of lithium batteries, including handling and disposal of leaking batteries, see Guidelines for Handling
Lithium Batteries, publication AG 5-4.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 13

Preface

Summary of Changes This manual includes new information about the SMC-50 controller with
internal bypass option. It also updates and corrects information from previous
revisions.

This manual includes enhanced information about operating modes, wiring,

and application profiles.

This manual removes information about specifications, spare parts, and

accessories that has moved to the technical data publication, 150-TD009.

Additional Resources These documents contain additional information concerning related products
from Rockwell Automation.
Resource Description
SMC-50 Controller Quick Start Guide, publication 150-QS003 Provides basic setup information for the SMC-50 controller.

SMC-50 Controller Technical Data, publication 150-TD009 Provides comprehensive selection and technical information for SMC-50 controller and
accessories.
Enclosed SMC Controllers Selection Guide, publication 150-SG012 Provides selection information about enclosed SMC controller products.
SMC-50 Control Module Replacement Instructions, publication 150-IN078 Provides instructions for replacing the SMC-50 control module.
PowerFlex™ 20-HIM-A6 and 20-HIM-C6S HIM (Human Interface Module) user manual,
publication 20HIM-UM001. Provides comprehensive user information for 20-HIM human interface modules.

20-COMM-D DeviceNet Adapter user manual, publication 20COMM-UM002. Provides comprehensive user information for 20-COMM-D DeviceNet adapter.
20-COMM-C Series B / 20-COMM-Q Series A ControlNet Adapter user manual, Provides comprehensive user information for 20-COMM-C ControlNet and 20-COMM-Q
publication 20COMM-UM003. ControlNet (Fiber) adapters.
20-COMM-P ProfibusAdapter user manual, publication 20COMM-UM006. Provides comprehensive user information for 20-COMM-P Profibus adapter.
20-COMM-S RS-485 DF1 Adapter user manual, publication 20COMM-UM005. Provides comprehensive user information for 20-COMM-S RS-485 DF1 adapter.
20-COMM-I Interbus Adapter user manual, publication 20COMM-UM007. Provides comprehensive user information for 20-COMM-I Interbus adapter.
PowerFlex 20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP Adapter user manual, publication 20COMM-UM010. Provides comprehensive user information for 20-COMM-E EtherNet/IP adapter.
20-COMM-ER Dual-Port EtherNet/IP™ Communication Adapter user manual, Provides comprehensive user information for 20-COMM-ER Dual-Port EtherNet/IP
publication 20COMM-UM015. Communication adapter
20-COMM-H RS485 HVAC Adapter user manual, publication 20COMM-UM009. Provides comprehensive user information for 20-COMM-H RS485 HVAC adapter.
20-COMM-K CANopen Adapter user manual, publication 20COMM-UM012. Provides comprehensive user information for 20-COMM-K CANopen adapter.
Product Certifications website,
Provides declarations of conformity, certificates, and other certification details.
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/certification/overview.page

You can view or download publications at

http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/literature-library/overview.page.
To order paper copies of technical documentation, contact your local
Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative.

14 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Chapter 1

Product Overview

Introduction The SMC-50™ Smart Motor Controller is a micro-processor based soft starter
that is designed to maximize the efficiency of motor starts and stops. The
SMC-50 controller uses six silicon-controlled rectifiers (SCRs) (two per
phase) to vary the conduction period and control the voltage (torque) to the
motor during starting, running, and stopping. The starter has many advanced
power monitoring and motor/starter protection features to help increase
overall reliability. Product scalability is enabled by its three connection ports
(Port 7, 8, and 9) to house additional I/O, network communication, or
parameter configuration modules (a maximum of three modules). Scalability
continues into the configuration of the controller via different options: a
multilingual 20- HIM-A6 controller or a panel-mount keypad with LCD
display featuring more advanced configuration features, and software that is
PC based and network capable (such as Connected Components Workbench™
Software) with optimal configuration features. The front panel of the SMC-50
controller features a single, multicolored LED status indicator that provides
both diagnostics and controller status information and a Push-to- Reset/Hold-
to-Test push button which allows manual reset of an actual fault condition, and
initiates a tuning cycle or test for fault.

Figure 1 - SMC-50 Controller Indicators and Port Locations

Bezel for optional
20-HIM-A6
Reset/Test
Status LED

Port 7

Port 8

Port 9

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 15

Chapter 1 Product Overview

Features • Internal bypass or solid-state control available

• 108…480 A range for devices with internal bypass; 90…520 A range for
solid-state devices
• Rated voltage: 200…690V AC
• Nine standard start modes
• Three expansion ports to install option modules
• Built-in electronic motor overload protection
• Current and voltage sensing on each phase
• Metering
• DPI Communication Protocol
• Parameter configuration options
• Energy saver mode
• Logging of the last 100 events with time stamp
• Network communication (option)
• External bypass as an option
• Conformally coated PCBs

Starting Modes The SMC-50 Smart Motor Controller provides the following starting modes
of operation as standard:

Starting Modes
Soft Start Pump Control Mode
Linear Speed Acceleration Dual Ramp Start
Torque Control Start Full Voltage Start
Current Limit Start Preset Slow Speed
Selectable Kickstart Integral Motor Winding Heater (starting feature)

Soft Start

This method covers the most general applications. The motor is given an initial
torque setting, which is user adjustable. From the initial torque level, the
output voltage to the motor is steplessly increased (ramped) during the
acceleration ramp time, which is user-adjustable. A user-adjustable current
limit value is also available. This limits the current throughout the soft start.

TIP A motor’s torque curve is not a linear function and depends on both applied
voltage and current. As such, if the soft starter ramped voltage applied to
the motor is sufficient for it to develop torque high enough to overcome the
inertia of the load, the motor could quickly accelerate to full speed in less
than the configured ramp time when using the Soft Start mode.

16 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Product Overview Chapter 1

Figure 2 - Soft Start Timing Diagram

Current Limit
100%

% Voltage
Initial Ramp Time
Torque

Start Run
Time (seconds)

Linear Speed Acceleration

With this type of starting mode, the motor acceleration is at a constant rate.
The controller accelerates the motor in a linear fashion from the off (0 speed)
condition to full speed condition in the time configured in the user-defined
ramp time. This is done using a proprietary motor speed feedback algorithm to
sense motor speed.
• NOTE: An external speed sensor is NOT required.

This starting mode presents the least amount of stress on mechanical

components. An initial torque value is configured to define a motor starting
value. A current limit value is also available to limit the starting current
throughout the linear acceleration start maneuver.

Figure 3 - Linear Speed Acceleration Timing Diagram

Current Limit

100%

Linear Acceleration Linear Deceleration

% Speed

Ramp Time Stop Time

Start Run Stop

Time (seconds)

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 17

Chapter 1 Product Overview

Torque Control Start

This method provides a torque ramp from a user-adjustable, initial motor

starting torque to a user-adjustable, maximum torque over the defined starting
ramp time. The torque control mode provides a more linear starting ramp than
a soft start, potentially resulting in less stress on mechanical components and a
more time controlled ramp. A current limit value is also available to limit the
starting current throughout the torque start.

Figure 4 - Torque Control Start Timing Diagram

Current Limit

Max. Motor Torque

100%
% Rated Motor Torque

Torque
Ramp

Starting Ramp Time

Torque

Start Run Soft Stop

Time (seconds)

Current Limit Start

This method provides a current limit controlled start by maintaining a

constant current to the motor and is used when it is necessary to limit the
maximum starting current. The starting current and current limit starting ramp
time is user-adjustable. Current Limit Start can also be used in conjunction
with Soft Start, Torque Control, and Linear Speed Acceleration Starts.

Figure 5 - Current Limit Start Timing Diagram

600%

Current Limit
% Full Load Current

50%

Start
Time (seconds)

18 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Product Overview Chapter 1

Selectable Kickstart

The kickstart feature provides a boost at startup to break away loads that may
require a pulse of current/torque to get started. It is intended to provide a
current/voltage pulse for a short period of time. Kickstart is available in Soft
Start, Current Limit, Pump, and Torque Control modes.

Figure 6 - Selectable Kickstart Timing Diagram

Kickstart
100% Level

Coast-to-Rest
% Voltage

Soft Stop

Kickstart
Time
Initial
Torque

Start Run Soft Stop

Time (seconds)

Pump Control Mode

This mode is used to reduce surges in a fluid piping system and the resulting
fluid hammer or check valve slam caused by starting a centrifugal pump at full
voltage and full speed. This mode also reduces pump cavitations, increasing
pump life. To provide these benefits, the SMC-50 controller’s microprocessor
generates a motor starting curve which follows the starting characteristics of a
centrifugal pump and monitors operation during start to ensure reliable pump
starts.

Figure 7 - Pump Control Mode Timing Diagram

100%
Motor Speed

Pump Start Run Pump Stop

Ramp Time Stop Time
Time (seconds)

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 19

Chapter 1 Product Overview

Dual Ramp Start

This method is useful on applications with varying loads, starting torque, and
start time requirements. Dual Ramp Start gives you the ability to select
between two separate start profiles via any programmable auxiliary input. Each
start profile can use any of the available starting modes.

Figure 8 - Dual Ramp Start Timing Diagram

Current Limit 2
Current Limit 1
% Voltage 100% Ramp Time 2

Initial
Torque 2

Ramp Time 1
Initial
Torque 1

Start 1 Run 1
Start 2 Run 2
Time (seconds)

Full Voltage Start

This method is used in applications requiring across-the-line starting. The

SMC-50 controller performs like a solid-state across-the-line contactor. Full
inrush current and locked-rotor torque are realized. The SMC-50 controller
may be programmed to provide a full voltage start in which the output voltage
to the motor reaches full voltage in five cycles.

Figure 9 - Full Voltage Start Timing Diagram

100%
% Voltage

Time (seconds)

20 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Product Overview Chapter 1

Preset Slow Speed

This feature/function can be used on applications that require slow speed

moves for positioning material. The Preset Slow Speed can be set from 1%
(low), up to 15% (high) in 1% increments of base speed. Forward or reverse
movement is enabled through programming the sign (±) of the percent speed.
No reversing contacts are required. To ensure accurate stops, braking is also a
part of this function. Two independent preset slow speed parameters can be
programmed for both speed and direction.

Figure 10 - Preset Slow Speed Timing Diagram

100%
Motor Speed

Forward
15% - High

1% - Low
Start Run
-1% - Low

-15% - High
Reverse Time (seconds)

Integral Motor Winding Heater (starting feature)

This function eliminates the need for additional hardware to heat the motor
from a cold start and enables using a small amount of motor current switched
to each motor phase in sequence to heat the windings. Heating can be time
based or activated by configurable input. The winding heat level is also
configurable.

Stopping Modes The SMC-50 Smart Motor Controller provides the following Stopping Modes
of operation as standard:

Stopping Modes
Coast Linear Speed Deceleration
Soft Stop Pump Stop

Coast

Configuring the stop mode to coast sets the controller to perform a motor
coast-to-stop maneuver.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 21

Chapter 1 Product Overview

Figure 11 - Coast-to-Stop Timing Diagram

100%
Coast-to-Rest

% Voltage
Stop Time

Run Soft Stop

Time (seconds)

Soft Stop

The Soft Stop mode can be used in applications requiring an extended stop
time. The voltage ramp down time is user-adjustable from 0...999 seconds.
This load stops when the programmed stop time has elapsed or the voltage
ramp drops to a point where the load torque is greater than the motor torque.

Figure 12 - Soft Stop Timing Diagram

100%
% Voltage

Stop Time

Run Soft Stop

Time (seconds)

Linear Speed Deceleration

Configuring the motor stop mode to Linear Speed Deceleration mode

commands the motor to stop from full speed to zero speed following a linear
ramp based on the user-configured stop time. A current limit value is also
available to limit the stopping current throughout the Linear Speed
Deceleration maneuver.

22 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Product Overview Chapter 1

Figure 13 - Linear Speed Deceleration Timing Diagram

Current Limit

100%

Linear Acceleration Linear Deceleration

% Speed
Ramp Time Stop Time

Start Run Stop

Time (seconds)

Pump Stop

Just as starting a centrifugal pump at full voltage causes fluid hammer and
check valve slam, stopping a centrifugal pump that is running at full speed can
also produce the same results. The SMC- 50 controller's Pump Stop mode
generates a motor stop curve, which follows the stop characteristics of a
centrifugal pump. This results in the gradual decrease in motor speed.

Figure 14 - Pump Stop Timing Diagram

100%
Motor Speed

Pump Start Run Pump Stop

Ramp Time Stop Time
Time (seconds)

The SMC-50 Smart Motor Controller provides the following braking control
Braking Control Modes(1) modes of operation as standard:

Braking Control Modes

SMB—Smart Motor Braking Accu-Stop
Slow Speed with Braking External Braking Control

(1) Not intended to be used as an emergency stop. Refer to the applicable standards for emergency stop requirements.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 23

Chapter 1 Product Overview

SMB—Smart Motor Braking(1)

This mode provides motor braking for applications that require the motor to
stop faster than a coast-to-rest. Braking control with automatic zero speed
shutoff is fully integrated into the design of the SMC-50 controller. This
design facilitates a clean, straight-forward installation and eliminates the
requirement for additional hardware (for example, braking contactors,
resistors, timers, and speed sensors). The micro-processor based braking system
applies braking current to a standard squirrel-cage induction motor. The
strength of the braking current is programmable from 0…400% of full-load
current.

Figure 15 - SMB Timing Diagram

100% Smart Motor Braking

Coast-to-Rest
Motor Speed

Stop Time

Start Run Brake Automatic Zero-

Time (seconds) speed Shutoff

Slow Speed with Braking(1)

Slow Speed with Braking is used on applications that require slow speed (in the
forward or reverse direction) for positioning or alignment and also require
braking control to stop. Slow Speed adjustments are ±1% …±15% in 1%
increments of base speed. Braking current is adjustable from 0…400%.

Figure 16 - Slow Speed with Braking Timing Diagram

100%
Braking

Coast-to-Rest
Motor Speed

1…15%

Slow Start Run Stop

Speed
Time (seconds)

(1) Not intended to be used as an emergency stop. Refer to the applicable standards for emergency stop requirements.

24 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Product Overview Chapter 1

Accu-Stop(1)(2)

This control is used in applications requiring controlled position stopping.

During stopping, braking torque is applied to the motor until it reaches the
configured preset slow speed value (±1…±15%) and holds the motor at this
speed until a stop command is given. Braking torque is then applied until the
motor reaches zero speed. Braking current is programmable from 0…400% of
full-load current.

Figure 17 - Accu-Stop Timing Diagram

100%

Braking
Motor Speed

Slow Speed

Coast-to-Rest

1…15% 1…15%

Slow Start Run Brake Slow Speed

Speed Braking
Time (seconds)

External Braking Control(1)

An external braking device can be used to externally brake a motor controlled

by the SMC-50 controller. The external braking device is activated using one of
the SMC-50 controller's auxiliary relays configured for “Ext Brake” with the
stop mode parameter set to “Ext Brake”. The relay is energized when the “Stop”
command is given and stays on until the time configured in the “Stop Time”
parameter counts down to zero.

Internal Bypass Modes The SMC-50 controllers with internal bypass uses its power section SCRs to
start and stop a squirrel-cage induction motor. The basic operation of the
SCRs is to switch on (conduct) for a certain percentage of the 50/60 Hz AC
sine wave to control the amount of voltage applied to the motor. By using
special control algorithms and motor feedback to manage the voltage applied,
the SMC-50 controller can perform various starting, stopping and braking
control modes as outlined in previous sections of this document. During
normal run operation the SMC-50 controller with internal bypass closes the
internal bypass contactor(s) when the motor is up-to-speed. This reduces heat
because the motor current is now flowing through the internal bypass
contactor and not through the SCRs.
(1) Not intended to be used as an emergency stop. Refer to the applicable standards for emergency stop requirements.
(2) Accu-Stop is not included as a parameter/function like that of the SMC-Flex. However, the Accu-Stop function can be
accomplished with the Smart Motor Braking Stop Option and Slow Speed with Braking functions.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 25

Chapter 1 Product Overview

Solid-state Running Modes The SMC-50 controllers with solid-state power structures provide the
following running modes of operation as standard:

Running Modes
SCR Control—Normal Run Operation External Bypass—Optional Run Operation
SCR Control—Energy Saver Run Operation Emergency Run

• Note: These modes are only available on solid-state power structures. They are not
available on units with internal bypass.

SCR Control - Normal Run Operation

The SMC-50 controller uses its power section SCRs to start, run, and stop
(except for Coast-to-Stop) a squirrel-cage induction motor. The basic
operation of the SCRs is to switch on (conduct) for a certain percentage of the
50/60 Hz AC sine wave, as directed by the SMC- 50, to control the amount of
voltage applied to the motor. By using special control algorithms and motor
feedback to manage voltage supplied, the SMC-50 controller provides the
previously outlined motor starting, stopping, and braking control modes.
During the normal run operation, the SMC-50 controller power section SCRs
are conducting for 100% of the 50/60 Hz AC sine wave to provide the motor
specified full load current (FLA/FLC) voltage and the resulting torque.

SCR Control – Energy Saver Run Operation

The Energy Saver Run Operation function is typically used in applications

where the running motor is lightly loaded or unloaded for an extended period
of time. With the Energy Saver Run Operation function enabled, the SMC-50
controller continuously monitors motor load using internal feedback to
control its SCRs, which reduces the voltage applied to the motor. This
potentially reduces power consumption. A parameter is provided to display the
possible energy saved as a percent.

External Bypass – Optional Run Operation

An external bypass contactor can be used to carry the motor running current.
In this running mode, the SCRs are only used for starting and potentially
stopping depending on the stop mode selected. The SMC-50 controller
controls the external bypass using one of its auxiliary relay outputs. When the
SMC-50 controller is used in the external bypass mode with the contacts of the
external bypass contactor closed, you have the option of using the SMC-50
controller's internal or external current sensing capabilities. If using external
current sensing so that metering, alarm/fault, etc. conditions are reported to
the controller during run operation, an external Bulletin 825-MCM Converter
Module is required to interface with the 150-SM2 Option Module. This
configuration enables the SMC-50 controller's current-related motor
protection features to be used (for example, external overload not required).

26 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Product Overview Chapter 1

• NOTE: If this configuration is not used, a means of external motor protection is required
when using an external bypass contactor.

If the bypass kit is used (Frames C and D only), the SMC-50 controller is used
for current sensing, metering, alarm/fault conditions, etc. and neither a
Bulletin 825-MCM converter module nor a Cat. No. 150-SM2 are required.

Emergency Run

When one of the SMC-50 controller's inputs is configured for Emergency Run
and that input is activated, all system faults are disabled. This prevents the
system from being shut down by a fault.

Resistor Loads

The SMC-50 solid-state controller can control directly connected resistive

loads utilizing phase angle control based on a reference value. If this control
method is selected the SMC-50 controller varies the output voltage in response
to the changing reference source. This reference source is programmable and
extremely flexible. This mode is typically used for resistive heating applications.

Motor and Starter Protection The SMC-50 controller

provides both motor and
Features starter alarms and faults.
An alarm condition is
intended to provide an
alert that a potential
system issue, or fault is
pending to allow time to
take corrective action. A
fault is intended to
protect equipment from
damage by shutting that
equipment down and/or
removing power. The
SMC-50 controller lets
you individually enable
or disable motor and starter alarms and faults by bit (On/Off ) selection.
Alarm and fault trip points are typically user-configurable to allow for
application dependence. In addition, many alarms and faults provide a separate
user-configurable alarm and fault time delay parameter to limit nuisance trips
and shutdowns.

The SMC-50 controller has a separate Fault Buffer and Alarm Buffer to
maintain a Fault/Alarm history. In addition to the fault/alarm code and
description, a time and date stamp is provided by the SMC-50 controller's Real

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 27

Chapter 1 Product Overview

Time Clock (RTC). The Fault Buffer holds the last five faults which provide
the time and date; the Alarm Buffer holds the last 100 alarm events which
detail the time, date, parameter change, Start, Stop, Coast, Slow Speed
Operation, Alarm, Fault, and Fault Reset.

As standard, the SMC-50 controller enables manual reset of a fault from the
PUSH-TO-RESET/HOLD-TO-TEST button, located adjacent to the LED
status indicator. Fault indication and reset can also be performed from an
optional controller bezel and/or panel-mount HIM or from PC software (such
as Connected Components Workbench software).

Starter Protection Features

Undervoltage Protection

The SMC-50 controller's Undervoltage Protection can sound an alarm or halt

(fault) motor operation if a drop in the incoming line voltage is detected. The
undervoltage trip level is adjustable as a percentage of the programmed line
voltage from 0…100%. To eliminate nuisance trips, a programmable
undervoltage trip delay time of 0.1…99.0 seconds can also be programmed.
The line voltage must remain below the undervoltage trip level during the
programmed delay time.

Overvoltage Protection

If a rise in the incoming line voltage is detected, the SMC-50 controller’s

Overvoltage Protection can sound an alarm or halt (fault) motor operation.
The overvoltage trip level is adjustable as a percentage of the programmed line
voltage, from 100…199%. To eliminate nuisance trips, a programmable
overvoltage trip delay time of 0.1…99.0 seconds can also be programmed. The
line voltage must remain above the overvoltage trip level during the
programmed delay time.

Voltage Unbalance Protection

Voltage unbalance is detected by monitoring the three-phase supply voltage

magnitudes in conjunction with the rotational relationship of the three phases.
The SMC-50 controller halts motor operation when the calculated voltage
unbalance reaches the user-programmed trip level. The voltage unbalance trip
level is programmable from 0…25% unbalance.

In addition to the faults and alarms that were already discussed, the following
are also available:
• Phase Reversal (CBA Connection)
• Parameter Configuration Change
• Frequency High and Low
• Open SCR Gate
• Line Loss with Phase Identification
• Poor Voltage Power Quality—THD V

28 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Product Overview Chapter 1

Metering System

Power and operational monitoring parameters include:

• Current—The RMS current value is provided for each phase, plus the
average current of all three.
• Voltage—The RMS line-to-line and line-to-neutral voltage values are
provided while the motor is running and when stopped. The average of
all three is also provided.
• Line Frequency—The SMC-50 controller measures and provides user
access to the line frequency (Hz).
• Power—Real, reactive, and apparent power values are calculated for each
phase plus the total for all 3 phases. In addition, the current power
demand and the maximum power demand is provided.
• Power Factor—The value of the power factor is provided for each phase
and as a total of all three.
• Peak Starting Current—The SMC-50 controller stores the peak average
RMS motor current consumed for the last 5 start cycles.
• Total Harmonic Distortion (THD)—The SMC-50 controller
calculates and provides user access to the THD for the 3 line voltages
and 3 motor currents, along with the average value of each.
• Voltage Unbalance—The calculation of the voltage unbalance signal is
provided.
• Current Imbalance—The calculation of the current imbalance signal is
provided.
• Energy Savings—The SMC-50 controller provides the percentage of
energy saved when it is running the motor in the Energy Savings mode.
• Motor Torque—Electromechanical motor torque is calculated based on
current and voltage feedback from the motor.
• Motor Speed—The SMC-50 controller provides a calculated estimate of
motor speed in percent of full speed when operating in the linear speed
acceleration starting or deceleration stopping mode.
• Elapsed Time and Elapsed Time 2—An elapsed time meter is provided
to account for the total accumulated hours the motor has been running.
You can reset the meter. Elapsed Time 2 cannot be user reset and holds
after 50,000 hours have elapsed.
• Running Time—The running time meter accumulates time (in hours)
from the point the motor start command is given up to the point the
motor stop command is issued. When a new start command is given, the
meter resets to zero and begins accumulating time again.
• Actual Start Time—The unit stores the actual time it takes to complete
a start cycle (motor start command issued until motor is up-to speed).
The last five start times are stored as parameters for user access and in
the Alarm Buffer as events.
• Total Starts—The total starts counter increments on every successful
start (no prestart fault occurred) and cannot be reset. The maximum
value is 65,635.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 29

Chapter 1 Product Overview

Communications
Figure 18 - SMC-50 Controller Control Module—Shown without Cover
Port 7 Port 2 (and 3, when you use a splitter)
HIM Bezel

HIM Port

Port 8
SMC-50 control module
Port 9 (shown without cover)
Port 4

Device Peripheral Interface (DPI) Protocol

The SMC-50 Soft Starter communicates in the same manner as the

Allen-Bradley® SMC Flex™ and drive products using the DPI protocol. This
enables almost any DPI-supported Human Interface Module (HIM), PC
software (such as Connected Components Workbench software), or network
communications module (20-COMM-xx) to be used with the SMC-50
controller. The SMC-50 controller supports four DPI ports for
communication devices. Port #1 is located in the controller bezel for the front-
mounted HIM. Port #2, located on the top of the controller, supports a second
and third device via Port #3 when a DPI splitter is used. Port #4, located
directly below the controller bezel, is dedicated to a 20-COMM-xx network
communications module when inserted into the space alloted for controller
option Port #9. All four communication ports can be used simultaneously.

DeviceLogix™

DeviceLogix is an embedded control technology in selected Allen-Bradley

products that can control outputs and manage status information on board a
device. The SMC-50 controller with DeviceLogix technology can help
improve system performance and productivity by controlling outputs and
managing status and information within the SMC-50 controller. Processing
information within the controller can speed up reaction time, which reduces
dependency on network throughput and provides an option for decision
making if communication with the main controller is lost.

30 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Product Overview Chapter 1

Motor Protection Features

Electronic Motor Overload Protection

As standard, the SMC-50 controller incorporates electronic motor overload

protection. This is accomplished electronically with an I2t algorithm.
Overload Protection is intended to protect the motor, motor controller, and
power wiring against overheating caused by excessive overcurrent. The
SMC-50 controller meets applicable requirements as a motor overload
protective device. It is not intended to protect against a short-circuit condition.

The SMC-50 controller’s overload protection is programmable, providing you

maximum flexibility. The Overload Trip class is either OFF or is configurable
from 5 to 30. The overload is programmed by entering the motor full-load
current rating, service factor, and selecting the trip class. Thermal memory
accurately models motor operating temperature. Ambient temperature
insensitivity is inherent in the electronic design of the overload. You can also
set a timer to disable the overload function during motor starts; another timer
lets you monitor the amount of time remaining before the overload trip occurs.
Manual or automatic reset of an overload is configurable.

Stall Protection and Jam Detection

Motors can experience locked-rotor currents and develop high torque levels in
the event of a stall or a jam. These conditions can result in winding insulation
breakdown or mechanical damage to the connected load. The SMC-50
controller provides both stall protection and jam detection for enhanced
motor and system protection. A jam level (as a percent of motor FLC) is
configurable for both an alarm and motor shutdown (fault). In addition, both
stall and jam conditions provide the ability to set a delay time before initiating
an alarm (jam only) or motor shutdown (fault).

Underload Protection

Utilizing the Underload Protection of the SMC-50 controller, an alarm can be

sounded or motor operation can be halted (fault) if a drop in current is sensed.

The SMC-50 controller provides an adjustable underload trip setting from

0…99% of the programmed motor full-load current rating with an adjustable
trip delay time of 0.1…99.0 seconds.

Excessive Starts Per Hour

The SMC-50 controller lets you program the allowed number of starts within
a one-hour sliding window (up to 99). This helps eliminate motor stress caused
by repetitive starting during a short time period. An alarm or fault can be
enabled using the single configured value.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 31

Chapter 1 Product Overview

User-Configurable Alarms and Faults

In addition to the previous motor alarms and faults, the following can also be
configured:
• Apparent Power
• Current Imbalance
• Power Quality(1)
• Open Load(1)
• Power Quality Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) Current
• OverPower
– Real
– Reactive Consumed
– Reactive Produced
• UnderPower
– Real
– Reactive Consumed
– Reactive Produced
• Power Factor Over
– Leading
– Lagging
• Power Factor Under
– Leading
– Lagging

The SMC-50 controller also has user-configurable motor alarms and faults
that you can use to indicate required or planned maintenance.
• Planned Maintenance Hours
• Planned Maintenance Starts

Controller Parameter The SMC-50 controller's starting, stopping, and running operations are
configured/programmed by changing the settings of a functionally predefined
Configuration set of parameters. Several different configuration tools are available to perform
this.
• NOTE: A configuration tool is not shipped with the SMC-50 controller. You must order the
configuration tool separately.

(1) Contains no parameters to configure.

32 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Product Overview Chapter 1

Configuration by Keypad and LCD Display (Human Interface Module

Cat. No. 20-HIM-A6)
The upper right portion of the SMC-50
controller has a dedicated bezel and DPI
port for the Cat. No. 20-HIM-A6. The
20-HIM-A6 features an LCD display to
show parameter data values, detailed
diagnostic alarm/fault information,
numeric keypad with function keys to
enter parameter data values and navigate
to the different SMC-50 controller
parameter menus, null parameter
configuration and diagnostic display, and
the ability to set up SMC-50 Controller
Option Modules. SMC-50 Smart Motor Controller with 20-HIM-A6

Optional extension cables and control cabinet door mounting kits are available
to mount the HIM off the SMC-50 controller.

Configuration by PC Programmable Software

Connected Components Workbench PC software provides network

connectivity between the PC and the SMC-50 controller and configurability
of the full set of parameters of the SMC-50 controller. To achieve connectivity,
the PC can be directly connected to the SMC- 50 DPI Port #2 (or #3 using a
splitter) with (1) a 1203-SSS AnaCANda™ RS232 to DPI device or (2) a 1203-
USB DPI to USB device.

Parameter Configuration Option Module (Cat. No.150-SM6)

The Parameter
Configuration
Option Module
inserts into any one
of the SMC-50
controller's three
option ports (Port
150-SM6 Parameter Configuration Module 7, 8 or 9). The 150-
SM6 features three
sets of 8-position ON/OFF DIP switches and five sets of 16-position rotary
switches. These switches allow for configuration of several key motor
parameters (for example, start and stop modes, ramp time, motor FLA, etc.)
for limited setup of simple applications. In addition, the 150-SM6 features
three diagnostic LED status indicators to display key alarms and faults. Only
one 150- SM6 is allowed per SMC-50 controller.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 33

Chapter 1 Product Overview

• NOTE: After parameter configuration is complete, the 150-SM6 can be removed from the
SMC-50 controller. This enables one module to configure multiple SMC-50 controllers.

When using a Cat. No. 150-SM6 PCM to configure the SMC-50 controller, it
should be noted that the following features, functions, and modes are not
configurable:
• Full voltage start
• Torque ramp start
• External brake stop
• Option card I/O configuration (Cat. No. 150-SM… option modules)
• External bypass
• Specialized output relay configuration (for example, network control,
DeviceLogix, auxiliary control)
• Specialized operation modes/features
– Dual ramp, motor winding heater, emergency run
– Overload select (Class)
– Adjustment of slow speed set point

Parameters that are not defined and therefore are not configurable by the Cat.
No. 150-SM6 PCM can be configured through other means (Human Interface
Module (HIM), Connected Components Workbench Software,
DriveExplorer™ or DriveExecutive™ software), if necessary.

Control Inputs and Outputs Standard Inputs(1)

The SMC-50 controller comes standard with two 24V DC inputs. The control
functionality of each input is user-configurable as follows: Start, Coast, Stop
Option (for example, Soft Stop, Pump Stop), Start/Coast, Start/Stop, Slow
Speed, Overload Select, Fault Input (N.O.), Fault Input (N.C.), Clear Fault,
Emergency Run, Dual Ramp Profile Select, and Start Motor Heater function.
The status of any input is readable via communications.

(1) All standard and optional I/O terminal blocks are removable.

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Product Overview Chapter 1

Optional Inputs(1)

A Cat. No. 150-SM4

Digital I/O option module
contains four 120/240V
AC inputs and can be
inserted into any of the
three control module
option ports (three modules
maximum per control
module). The control
functionality of each input
is user configurable and
identical to the standard
inputs. The status of any
SMC-50 Smart Motor Controller with 150-SM4 input is readable via
communications.

A Cat. No. 150-SM3 Analog I/O option module provides two analog inputs
(voltage or current) and can be inserted into any of the three control module
option ports (three modules maximum per control module). The control
functionality of each input is user configurable. The status of any input is
readable via communications.

Standard and Optional Outputs(1)

The SMC-50 controller comes standard with two relay outputs. By adding a
Cat. No. 150-SM4 Digital I/O Option Module, three additional relay outputs
are provided (three option modules maximum per control module). The
control functionality of each relay output is user-configurable as follows:
Normal (Start Enabled), Up-To-Speed, Fault, Alarm, External Bypass, External
brake, Auxiliary Control, Network 1-4, and Fan Control. Each output also
includes a user-configurable on and off delay timer (10.0 seconds maximum)
and the ability to invert the state of the contact. Network control of each
output is also provided. By adding a Cat. No. 150-SM3 Analog I/O module,
two analog outputs (voltage of current) are provided.

(1) All standard and optional I/O terminal blocks are removable.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 35

Chapter 1 Product Overview

Optional PTC, Ground Fault(1), and Current Transformer Interface

Capability(1)

The Cat. No. 150-

SM2 Option Module
features PTC, ground
fault, and external
current transformer
interface capability.
The PTC feature
enables connection to
150-SM2 Option Module external PTC
temperature sensors
to monitor motor winding temperature and feedback data to the SMC- 50. A
SMC-50 controller Alarm and/or Fault can be configured to trip if the PTC
set point is exceeded. The ground fault feature enables controller detection and
enunciation of a possible system ground fault which could indicate a pending
motor winding failure (for example, insulation breakdown). A Bulletin 825-
CBCT External Ground Fault (Core Balance) Sensor is also required to
interface with the 150- SM2 to fully enable this feature.

When the SMC-50 controller is used in the external bypass mode with the
contacts of the external bypass contactor closed, you have the option of using
the SMC-50 controller's internal or external current sensing capabilities. If
using external current sensing so that metering, alarm/fault, etc. conditions are
reported to the controller during run operation, an external Bulletin 825-
MCM Converter Module is required to interface with the 150-SM2 Option
Module.

(1) The ground fault sensing feature of the SMC-50 controller is intended for monitoring purposes only. It is not to be used as a
ground fault circuit interrupter for personnel protection as defined by Article 100 of the NEC. The sensing feature has not been
evaluated to UL 1053.

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Chapter 2
Wiring
This chapter illustrates basic wiring configurations for the SMC-50 controller.

Wiring Terminal Locations The SMC-50 controller wiring terminal locations are shown in Figure 19.
Incoming three-phase power connections are made to terminals L1/1, L2/3,
and L3/5. Load connections to motors are made to T1/2, T2/4, and T3/6.

Figure 19 - Wiring Terminal Locations

L1/1 L2/3 L3/5

Incoming Three-phase Power Connections
(1)

L1/1 L2/3 L3/5

T1/2 T2/4 T3/6

(1)
T1/2 T2/4 T3/6

Load Connections to Motors (2)

(1) See publication 150-TD009 for lug information.

(2) Inside-the-delta connected motors require an additional delta distribution block.

For controllers rated 210…520 A, a grounding nut (size 1/4-20) is provided for
grounding per applicable local codes.

Power Wiring See the product nameplate for device-specific information.

SMC-50 controller power structures use solid-state SCR designs that are
capable of interfacing with 200...480V AC or 200...690V AC (690V line and
600V inside-the-delta) motors. Both the internally bypassed and solid-state
power structures are available. Verify ratings of unit before application.

The power structure incorporates three-phase true current-sensing and

overtemperature protection. You can use an external bypass contactor if it is
required for your application.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 37

Chapter 2 Wiring

ATTENTION: Failure of solid-state power switching components can cause

overheating due to a single-phase condition in the motor. To prevent injury
or equipment damage, the following is recommended:
Use an isolation contactor or shunt trip type circuit breaker on the line side of
the SMC-50. This device should be capable of interrupting the motor’s locked
rotor current.
Wire the isolation contactor’s control relay to an auxiliary relay output contact
on the SMC-50. This will achieve coordinated operation with the SMC-50. The
auxiliary relay contact should be programmed for the “normal” condition. See
Chapter 5, Programming, for additional information.

Typical power wiring diagrams for both line and inside-the-delta connections
are shown in Figure 20.

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Wiring Chapter 2

Figure 20 - Power Wiring Diagrams

Diagrams per NEMA Symbology
Line connection with Inside-the-Delta connection Delta connection with
isolation contactor with isolation contactor shorted SCR protection
(default mode) (optional mode) (optional mode)

SMC-50 controller
with internal bypass

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
K1 (1) K1 (1)

T5
SMC-50 solid-state T4
controller T6

SMC-50 SMC-50 SMC-50 K1

controller controller controller
(2)
T6 T4 T5
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3

Motor Motor Motor

Diagrams per IEC Symbology

Line connection with Inside-the-Delta connection Delta connection with
isolation contactor with isolation contactor shorted SCR protection
(default mode) (optional mode) (optional mode)

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
SMC-50 controller
with internal bypass 1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5

2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6
1 3 5 1 3 5
(1) (1)
K1 K1
2 4 6 2 4 6
SMC-50 solid-state V2
controller U2
W2
1 3 5 1 3 5 1 3 5
1 3 5
SMC-50 SMC-50 K1
controller SMC-50 controller (2)
controller 2 4 6
2 4 6
2 4 6 2 4 6 U1 V1 W1 W2 U2 V2
U V W U1 V1 W1

3~ 3~ 3~
Motor Motor Motor
(1) Contactor must be fully rated for motor Hp/kW and FLA.
(2) For North American applications, size the contactor per the motor Hp and FLA. For IEC applications, size the contactor per the
motor AC-1 or AC-3 rating. The short-circuit rating of the contactor must be similar to that of the SMC-50 controller.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 39

Chapter 2 Wiring

Power lugs are required for devices rated 108…480 A (internal bypass) and
90…520 A (solid-state). These lugs are sold in kits. Each kit contains three lugs.
Table 1 through Table 4 list the number and type of lugs required.

Table 1 - SMC-50 Integrated Bypass Devices Connection Lug Information for Line/Wye
Connected Motors

Lug Kit Wire Strip Max No. Lugs/Pole Tightening Torque

Cat. No. Rating [A] Cat. Conductor Range
No. Length [mm] Line Side Load Side Wire - Lug Lug - Busbar
16…120 mm2 31 N•m 17 N•m
150-S108…, 150-S135… 108…135 199-LF1 18…20 1 1
(#6…250 MCM) (275 lb•in) (150 lb•in)
16…120 mm2 31 N•m 23 N•m
150-S201…, 150-S251… 201…251 199-LF1 18…20 2 2
(#6…250 MCM) (275 lb•in) (200 lb•in)
25…240 mm2 42 N•m 28 N•m
150-S317…, 150-S361…, 150-S480… 317…480 199-LG1 18…25 2 2
(#4…500 MCM) (375 lb•in) (250 lb•in)

Table 2 - SMC-50 Integrated Bypass Devices Connection Lug Information for Inside-the-Delta
Connected Motors

Lug Kit Max No. Lugs/Pole Tightening Torque

Cat. No. Rating [A] Conductor Range
Cat. No. Line Side Wire - Lug Lug - Busbar
25…240 mm2 42 N•m 17 N•m
150-S108…, 150-S135… 187…234 1494R-N15 1
(#4…500 MCM) (375 lb•in) (150 lb•in)
50…120 mm2 31 N•m 23 N•m
150-S201…, 150-S251… 348…435 1494R-N14 2
(1/0…250 MCM) (275 lb•in) (200 lb•in)
95…240 mm2 34 N•m 28 N•m
150-S317…, 150-S361…, 150-S480… 549…831 150-LG5MC 1
(3/0…500 MCM) (300 lb•in) (250 lb•in)

Table 3 - Solid-state SMC-50 Controller Power Wiring Information, Line/Wye and

Inside-the-Delta Configurations

Lug Kit Wire Strip Max No. Lugs/Pole Tightening Torque

Cat. No. Rating [A] Conductor Range
Cat. No. Length [mm] Line Side Load Side Wire - Lug Lug - Busbar
90…180 (Line/Wye) 16…120 mm2 31 N•m 23 N•m
150-SB… 199-LF1 18…20 1 1
155…311 (Delta) (#6…250 MCM) (275 lb•in) (200 lb•in)
210…320 (Line/Wye) 16…120 mm2 31 N•m 23 N•m
150-SC… 199-LF1 18…20 2 2
363…554 (Delta) (#6…250 MCM) (275 lb•in) (200 lb•in)
361…520 (Line/Wye) 25…240 mm2 42 N•m 28 N•m
150-SD… 199-LG1 18…25 2 2
625…900 (Delta) (#4…500 MCM) (375 lb•in) (250 lb•in)

Table 4 - Solid-state SMC-50 Controller Delta Distribution Block Wiring Information

Tightening Torque Conductor Range Wire Strip Length [mm]

Cat. No. Quantity Lug Kit Cat. No.
Line Load Line Load Line Load
2
42 N•m 25…240 mm Allen-Bradley
150-SB… 3 35 35
(375 lb•in.) (#4…500 MCM) 1492-BG
67.8 N•m 31 N•m 54…400 mm2 16…120 mm2 Top Row = 23 Marathon Special
150-SC… 1 45
(600 lb•in.) (275 lb•in.) (1/0…750 MCM) (#6…250 MCM) Bottom Row = 48 Products 1353703
67.8 N•m 67.8 N•m 54…400 mm2 54…400 mm2 Marathon Special
150-SD… 3 45 45
(600 lb•in.) (600 lb•in.) (1/0…750 MCM) (1/0…750 MCM) Products 1352702

Grounding Provision Provision for connecting a field-installed grounding conductor is provided on

solid-state units that are rated 210…520 A. The grounding location is
identified by the green grounding nut (size 1/4-20) that is located near the
bottom mounting plate of the controller.

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Wiring Chapter 2

Protective Modules You should install a protective module (see Figure 21) containing MOVs
(Metal Oxide Varistors) to protect the SMC-50 power components from
electrical transients and/or electrical noise.

You can install protective modules controllers rated from 200…600V to

protect the power components from electrical transients. The protective
modules clip voltage transients that are generated on the lines to prevent such
surges from damaging the SCRs. The use of MOVs is highly recommended, as
480V and 600V MOVs offer maximum protection of 1400V and 1600V
respectively.
• NOTE: Protective modules are not available for 690V applications.

Figure 21 - Protective Module

PR
OT
EC
TIV
EM
OD
ULE
MA
X. L
INE M
VO ADE IN
LTA U
GE .S.A

ATTENTION: You can place protective modules on the line, load, or both
sides of the SMC-50 controller. However, protective modules must not be
placed on the load side of the SMC-50 controller when using inside-the-
delta motor connections or with pump, linear speed, or braking control.

There are two general situations that may occur that could indicate the need
for using the protective modules.

1. Transient Spikes — Transient spikes will typically occur on the lines

feeding the SMC-50 controller or feeding the load from the SMC-50
controller. Transient spikes are created on the line when devices are
attached with current- carrying inductances that are open-circuited. The
energy stored in the magnetic field is released when the contacts open
the circuit. Examples of these include lightly loaded motors,
transformers, solenoids, full voltage starters, and electromechanical
brakes.
2. Fast-rising Wavefronts — If the SMC-50 controller is installed on a
system that has fast-rising wavefronts present, although not necessarily
high peak voltages, protective modules may be needed. Additionally, if
the controller is on the same bus as other SCR devices (such as AC/DC
drives, induction heating equipment, or welding equipment), the firing
of the SCRs in those devices can cause noise.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 41

Chapter 2 Wiring

ATTENTION: When you install or inspect the protective module, make sure
that the controller has been disconnected from the power source. The
protective module should be inspected periodically for damage or
discoloration. Replace if necessary.

Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC) ATTENTION: This product has been designed for Class A equipment. Use of
the product in domestic environments may cause radio interference, in
which case the installer may need to employ additional mitigation methods.

The following guidelines are provided for EMC installation compliance.

Enclosure

Install the product in a grounded metal enclosure.

Wiring

Wire in an industrial control application can be divided into three groups:

power, control, and signal. The following recommendations for physical
separation between these groups is provided to reduce the coupling effect:
• Different wire groups should cross at 90° inside an enclosure.
• Minimum spacing between different wire groups in the same tray should
be 16 cm (6 in.).
• Wire runs outside of an enclosure should be run in conduit or have
shielding/armor with equivalent attenuation.
• Different wire groups should be run in separate conduits.
• Minimum spacing between conduits containing different wire groups
should be 8 cm (3 in.).
• For additional guidelines, please see the installation instructions, Wiring
and Ground Guidelines, publication DRIVES-IN001.

Additional Requirements
• Wire earth ground to control terminal #3 control ground.
• Use shielded wire for PTC and ground fault input.
• Terminate shielded wires to the control module terminal #3 control
ground.
• Ground fault CT must be inside or within 3 m (9.84 ft.) of metal
enclosure.

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Wiring Chapter 2

• When you use an external HIM, you must place a ferrite core around the
HIM cable. Use Fair-Rite Products Corp. part no. 0431167281 or
equivalent.
• When you use 240V AC control voltage, you must place a ferrite core
around the line/neutral supply wires at the control module. Use Fair-
Rite Products Corp. part no. 0431164281 or equivalent.
• When you use 120V AC control on a solid-state D-frame unit, (361,
420, or 520 A), you must place a ferrite core around the line/neutral
supply wires at the control module. Use Fair-Rite Products Corp. part
no. 0431164281 or equivalent.
• When you use a solid-state B-frame unit, (90, 110, 140, or 180 A), you
must install the 150-SMCAP module on the 3-phase line terminals (L1,
L2, L3).
• When you use a 150-SM2 option module, you must place a ferrite core
around any or all sensor wires, such as PTC or ground fault. Use Fair-
Rite Products Corp. part no. 0431167281 or equivalent.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 43

Chapter 2 Wiring

Power Wiring with External You can use both the internal bypass and solid-state power structure versions of
the SMC-50 controller with an external bypass contactor. Figure 22 through
Bypass Figure 26 show typical wiring diagrams for line-and inside-the-delta-
connected configurations.

All diagrams are valid for both solid-state and internal bypass power structures
unless otherwise noted.

Line-connected Motors
Figure 22 - Line-connected Motor Wiring Diagram using Bul. 825 Converter Module and Cat.
No. 150-SM2 Devices with Bypass Contactor
L1 L2 L3

Branch Protection Device

(Circuit Breaker or Fused Disconnect)

825-MCMxx (1)

SCR Fusing

L1/1 L2/3 L3/5

AC-3 or AC-1 Rated
Bypass Contactor (3)
SMC-50 Controller

T1/2 T2/4 T3/6

T2
T1 T3
Motor
(2)

(1) The 825-MCMxx provides current feedback to the SMC-50 controller when RUN in Bypass Operation. A Cat. No.150-SM2 is also
required. For 30…180 A, use Cat. No. 825-MCM180; For 181…520 A, use Cat. No. 825-MCM20 and user-supplied CTs with 5 A
secondary.
(2) Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state (controller stopped), some form of upstream line power isolation is
recommended if maintenance is required on the motor. See the isolation contactor application information for details.
(3) Bypass must be controlled by an auxiliary contact of the SMC-50 controller that is configured to external bypass.

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Wiring Chapter 2

Figure 23 - Line-connected Motor Wiring Diagram for Cat. No. 150-SC… or 150-SD… Devices
with Bypass Contactor and Bypass Bus Kit (Solid-state Power Structures Only)
L1 L2 L3

Branch Protection Device

(Circuit Breaker or Fused Disconnect)

SCR Fusing

(1)
L1/1 L2/3 L3/5
AC-3 or AC-1 Rated
Bypass Contactor (3)
SMC-50 Controller

T1/2 T2/4 T3/6

T2
T1 T3
Motor
(2)

(1) SMC-50 controller Bypass Bus Kit Cat. No. 150-SCBK or -SDBK is required.
(2) Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state (controller stopped), some form of upstream line power isolation is
recommended if maintenance is required on the motor. See the isolation contactor application information for details.
(3) Bypass must be controlled by an auxiliary contact of the SMC-50 controller that is configured to external bypass.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 45

Chapter 2 Wiring

Figure 24 - Line-connected Motor Wiring Diagram with Bypass Contactor and External
Overload
L1 L2 L3

Branch Protection Device

(Circuit Breaker or Fused Disconnect)

Isolation Contactor A (1)

SCR Fusing
L1/1 L2/3 L3/5 Bypass Contactor (3)

SMC-50 Controller

Thermal Magnetic (4)

T1/2 T2/4 T3/6 Overload Relay

Isolation Contactor B (1)

T2
T1 Motor T3
(2)

(1) Isolation Contactors A and B are required if bypass is used for emergency START, STOP, and RUN operation.
(2) Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state (controller stopped), some form of upstream line power isolation is
recommended if maintenance is required on the motor. See the isolation contactor application information for details.
(3) Bypass must be controlled by an auxiliary contact of the SMC-50 controller that is configured to external bypass.
(4) Overload is required.
NOTE: Bypass must be fully rated to motor Hp/kW and FLA.

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Wiring Chapter 2

Delta-connected Motors
Figure 25 - Delta-connected Motor Wiring Diagram using Bul. 825 Converter Module and Cat.
No. 150-SM2 Devices with Bypass Contactor
L1 L2 L3

Branch Protection Device

(Circuit Breaker or Fused Disconnect)
Isolation Contactor A (1)
L1 L2 L3
Delta Distribution Block (5)
T6 T4 T5

SCR Fusing
825-MCMxx (2)

L1/1 L2/3 L3/5

AC-3 or AC-1 Rated (3) (4)
Bypass Contactor
SMC-50 Controller

T1/2 T2/4 T3/6

T2
T1 T3
Motor
T4 T6
T5

(1) Isolation contactor required.

(2) The 825-MCMxx provides current feedback to the SMC-50 controller when RUN in Bypass Operation. A Cat. No.150-SM2 is also
required. For 30…180 A, use Cat. No. 825-MCM180; For 181…520 A, use Cat. No. 825-MCM20 and user-supplied CTs with 5 A
secondary.
(3) Configuration not acceptable for emergency RUN off bypass.
(4) Bypass must be controlled by an auxiliary contact of the SMC-50 controller that is configured to external bypass.
(5) Delta distribution block needed for solid-state power structures only.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 47

Chapter 2 Wiring

Figure 26 - Delta-connected Motor Wiring Diagram for Cat. No. 150-SC… or 150-SD… Devices
with Bypass Contactor and Bypass Bus Kit (Solid-state Power Structures Only)
L1 L2 L3

Branch Protection Device

(Circuit Breaker or Fused Disconnect)
Isolation Contactor A (1)
L1 L2 L3
Delta Distribution Block
T6 T4 T5

SCR Fusing

(2)
L1/1 L2/3 L3/5
AC-3 or AC-1 Rated (3) (4)
Bypass Contactor
SMC-50 Controller

T1/2 T2/4 T3/6

T2
T1 T3
Motor
T4 T6
T5

(1) Isolation contactor required.

(2) SMC bypass bus kit (Cat. No. 150-SCBK or -SDBK) is required.
(3) Configuration not acceptable for emergency RUN off bypass. Note: controller FRN 3.001 or higher is required.
(4) Bypass must be controlled by an auxiliary contact of the SMC-50 controller that is configured to external bypass.

Control Wiring Standard Control Terminal Block

SMC-50 controllers come standard with two 24V DC digital on/off inputs
and two relay outputs for auxiliary control functions. The standard digital I/O
wiring terminal block is on the upper right portion of the SMC-50 controller.
The terminal block is removable.

Control Wiring Specifications

The following table provides the specifications for all SMC-50 controller
control wiring and option module terminal blocks. Each wiring terminal
accepts a maximum of two wires.

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Wiring Chapter 2

Table 5 - Control Wiring Specifications

Wire Size 0.2...2.5 mm2 (#24...14 AWG)

Maximum Torque 0.8 N•m (7 lb•in.)
Maximum Wire Strip Length 7 mm (0.27 in.)
Screw Type M3 Slotted

SHOCK HAZARD: To prevent the risk of electrical shock, disconnect all power
sources from the controller and option module before you install or service it.
Install the controller and option module in a suitable enclosure and keep it
free of contaminants.

Figure 27 - Standard Control Terminal Block Identification

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
-L2 +L1

Internal DC Common
Internal +24V DC

In1 DC

In2 DC

Enable I/O
Aux 2 Aux 1

Control Power
24V DC Inputs Relay Outputs
and Ground (1)

(1) See the controller nameplate to verify the control power ratings (120/240V AC or 24V DC).

ATTENTION: IN1 DC (terminal 11) and IN2 DC (terminal 10) are 24V DC
inputs on controllers rated 120/240V AC and on controllers rated 24V DC.
Voltages that exceed the specified input range may cause damage to the
controller.

Terminal Number Description

1 (1) (2) Control Power +L1
2(1)(2) Control Power Common -L2
3 Ground — To connect to the system/control ground point.
4 (1)(3) Auxiliary Relay Contact #1—rated 3 A @ 120V AC, 1.5 A @ 240V AC
5 (1)(3) Auxiliary Relay Contact #1—rated 3 A @ 120V AC, 1.5 A @ 240V AC
6 (1)(3) Auxiliary Relay Contact #2—rated 3 A @ 120V AC, 1.5 A @ 240V AC
7 (1)(3) Auxiliary Relay Contact #2—rated 3 A @ 120V AC, 1.5 A @ 240V AC
8 DC Internal I/O Power, DC Common
9 Enable I/O
10 (1)(4) Input #2 (24V DC) (range 15…30V DC)
11 (1)(4) Input #1 (24V DC) (range 15…30V DC)
12 +24V DC Internal I/O Power
(1) RC snubbers are required when inductive loads are connected to terminal.
(2) See the controller nameplate to verify the control power ratings (120/240V AC or 24V DC)
(3) When set to external bypass mode, the auxiliary contact is used to control a properly sized external contactor and overload once
the motor is at full speed.
(4) Do not connect any additional loads to this terminal. Parasitic loads may cause problems with operation.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 49

Chapter 2 Wiring

Standard Controller Wiring Diagrams

Figure 28 through Figure 50 show typical wiring diagrams for the SMC-50
controller in various applications.

Figure 28 - For Standard 3-Wire Control—DC Inputs, No DPI Control

T1/2 L1/1
SMC-50 Controller Fast-acting SCR Circuit
3-phase AC line
fuses (optional) (1) Protective
power
Device
Motor (1) (6)
T2/4 L2/3 (1)

T3/6 L3/5

120V/240V AC Control Transformer with fuse or (2)

120/240V AC Power Supply or
(1)
24V DC Power Supply

Stop
(1)

Start
(1)

(5)

(3) (4) (2)

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Internal +24V DC

In2 DC

Internal DC Common
Enable I/O
In1 DC

-L2 +L1
Aux 2 Aux 1

Control Power and

Ground
Control Module Standard I/O
(1) Customer supplied.
(2) See the controller nameplate to verify control power input ratings (100...240V AC or 24V DC).
(3) Terminal 11 (In 1 DC) 24V DC input configured for START input using Parameter 56.
(4) Terminal 10 (In 2 DC) 24V DC input configured for COAST, STOP option, etc. using Parameter 57.
NOTE: The controller generates an I/O configuration fault if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is selected
for COAST or STOP.
(5) A customer-supplied jumper is required to enable standard I/O operation.
(6) Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state (controller stopped), some form of off-stream line power isolation is
recommended if maintenance is required on the motor. See the Isolation Contactor Applications diagram for details.
NOTE: In addition to a small amount of leakage current flowing through an SCR in the off-state, failure of one or more solid-state
power switching components allows uncontrolled current to flow to the winding(s) of the motor. This could potentially result in
overheating or damage to the motor. To prevent potential personal injury or equipment damage, the installation of an isolation
contactor or shunt trip-type circuit breaker capable of interrupting the motor’s locked rotor current on the line side of the
SMC-50 controller is recommended. Operation of the isolation device should be coordinated using one of the SMC-50 controller
Aux contacts configured to NORMAL.

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Wiring Chapter 2

Figure 29 - For 2-Wire Control with Stopping Capability—DC Inputs, No DPI Control

T1/2 L1/1
SMC-50 Controller Fast-acting SCR fuses (1) Circuit
(optional) (Optional) Protective
Device 3-phase AC line power
Motor (1) (5)
T2/4 L2/3 (1)

T3/6 L3/5

120V/240V AC Control Transformer (2)

with fuse or
(1) 120/240V AC Power Supply or
24V DC Power Supply

Start/Stop

(1)

(4)

(3) (2)
(6)
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Internal +24V DC

In1 DC

In2 DC

Enable I/O

Internal DC Common

-L2 +L1
Aux 2 Aux 1

Control Power and

Ground
Control Module Standard I/O
(1) Customer supplied.
(2) See the controller nameplate to verify control power input ratings (100...240V AC or 24V DC).
(3) Terminal 10 (In 2 DC) 24V DC N.O. input is configured for START/STOP or START/COAST using Parameter 57 (contact closed start
initiated, contact open, stop initiated). When using START/STOP or START/COAST, a N.O. input contact must be used.
NOTE: The controller generates an I/O configuration fault if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is selected
for COAST or STOP.
(4) A customer-supplied jumper is required to enable controller standard I/O operation.
(5) Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state (controller stopped), some form of upstream line power isolation is
recommended if maintenance is required on the motor. See the Isolation Contactor Applications diagram for details.
(6) Configure In1 (Input 1—Parameter 56) to "Disable".
NOTE: In addition to a small amount of leakage current flowing through an SCR in the off-state, failure of one or more solid-state
power switching components allows uncontrolled current to flow to the winding(s) of the motor. This could potentially result in
overheating or damage to the motor. To prevent potential personal injury or equipment damage, the installation of an isolation
contactor or shunt trip-type circuit breaker capable of interrupting the motor’s locked rotor current on the line side of the
SMC-50 controller is recommended. Operation of the isolation device should be coordinated using one of the SMC-50 controller
Aux contacts configured to NORMAL.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 51

Chapter 2 Wiring

Figure 30 - For 2-Wire Control with Stopping Capability—AC Inputs, No DPI Control

T1/2 L1/1
SMC-50 Controller Fast-acting SCR fuses (1) Circuit
(optional) (Optional) Protective
Device 3-phase AC line power
Motor (1) (4)
T2/4 L2/3 (1)

T3/6 L3/5
120V/240V AC Control Transformer (2)
with fuse or
(1) 120/240V AC Power Supply

Start/Stop
(1) (3)

(2)
(6) (6)
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Internal +24V DC

In1 DC

In2 DC

Enable I/O

Internal DC Common

-L2 +L1
Aux 2 Aux 1

Control Module Standard I/O Control Power and

Ground

(5)
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12
InA1

InA2

InA3

InA4

InCOM

NC
AuxA1 AuxA2 AuxA3

AC Inputs Auxiliary Relay Outputs

150-SM4 Option I/O Module

(1) Customer supplied.

(2) See the controller nameplate to verify control power input ratings (100...240V AC).
(3) Terminal A1 (InA1) 100...240V AC N.O. input is configured for START/STOP or START/COAST using Parameter 7-2 (control module
port number 7) (contact closed, start initiated, contact open, stop initiated). When using START/STOP or START/COAST, a N.O.
input contact must be used.
NOTE: The controller generates an I/O configuration fault if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is selected
for COAST or STOP.
(4) Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state (controller stopped), some form of upstream line power isolation is
recommended if maintenance is required on the motor. See the Isolation Contactor Applications diagram for details.
(5) The order of the terminal numbers for the option I/O module can be reversed depending on which expansion slot option I/O
module is located in on the control module. However, the function associated with the terminal number remains the same.
(6) Configure both In1 (Input 1—Parameter 56) and In2 (Input 2—Parameter 57) to "Disable".
NOTE: In addition to a small amount of leakage current flowing through an SCR in the off-state, failure of one or more solid-state
power switching components allows uncontrolled current to flow to the winding(s) of the motor. This could potentially result in
overheating or damage to the motor. To prevent potential personal injury or equipment damage, the installation of an isolation
contactor or shunt trip-type circuit breaker capable of interrupting the motor’s locked rotor current on the line side of the
SMC-50 controller is recommended. Operation of the isolation device should be coordinated using one of the SMC-50 controller
Aux contacts configured to NORMAL.

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Wiring Chapter 2

Figure 31 - For Dual Ramp Applications—AC and DC Inputs

T1/2 L1/1 Circuit

SMC-50 Controller Fast-acting SCR fuses Protective
(optional) (Optional) (1) Device 3-phase AC line power
Motor (1) (7) T2/4 L2/3 (1)

T3/6 L3/5
120V/240V AC Control Transformer (2)
(1) with fuse or
120/240V AC Power Supply
(1)
Ramp 2 Ramp 1 (5)

Stop (1)

Start
(1)
(6)
(2)
(3) (4)

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
-L2 +L1
Internal DC Common
Internal +24V DC

In1 DC

In2 DC

Enable I/O

Aux 2 Aux 1

Control Power and

Ground
Control Module Standard I/O
(5) (9) (9)
9 (9)
9 (8)
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12
NC
InA1

InA2

InA3

InA4

InCOM

AuxA1 AuxA2 AuxA3

AC Inputs Auxiliary Relay Outputs

150-SM4 Option I/O Module
(1) Customer supplied.
(2) See the controller nameplate to verify control power input ratings (100...240V AC).
(3) Terminal 11 (In 1 DC) 24V DC input configured for START input using Parameter 56.
(4) Terminal 10 (In 2 DC) 24V DC input configured for COAST, STOP option, etc. using Parameter 57.
NOTE: The controller generates an I/O configuration fault if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is selected
for COAST or STOP.
(5) Terminal A1 (INA1) 100...240V AC input is configured for Dual Ramp using Parameter 7-2 (control module port 7).
(6) A customer supplied jumper is required to enable controller I/O operation.
(7) Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state (controller stopped), some form of off-stream line power isolation is
recommended if maintenance is required on the motor. See the Isolation Contactor Applications diagram for details.
(8) The order of the terminal numbers for the option I/O module can be reversed depending on which expansion slot option I/O
module is located in on the control module. However, the function associated with the terminal number remains the same.
(9) Ensure that InA2, InA3, and InA4 are configured to "Disable" [Default].
NOTE: In addition to a small amount of leakage current flowing through an SCR in the off-state, failure of one or more solid-state
power switching components allows uncontrolled current to flow to the winding(s) of the motor. This could potentially result in
overheating or damage to the motor. To prevent potential personal injury or equipment damage, the installation of an isolation
contactor or shunt trip-type circuit breaker capable of interrupting the motor’s locked rotor current on the line side of the
SMC-50 controller is recommended. Operation of the isolation device should be coordinated using one of the SMC-50 controller
Aux contacts configured to NORMAL.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 53

Chapter 2 Wiring

Figure 32 - For Dual Ramp—AC Inputs

T1/2 L1/1
Circuit
SMC-50 Controller Fast-acting SCR fuses (1) Protective
(optional) Device 3-phase AC line power
Motor (1) (6) T2/4 L2/3 (1)

T3/6 L3/5
120V/240V AC Control Transformer with fuse or (2)
(1) 120/240V AC Power Supply

(1) (5)
Ramp 2 Ramp 1

Stop
(4) (1)

Start
(1) (3)

(8) (8) (2)

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
-L2 +L1
Internal +24V DC

In1 DC

In2 DC

Enable I/O

Internal DC Common

Aux 2 Aux 1

Control Power and

Control Module Standard I/O Ground

(7)
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12
NC
InCOM
InA1

InA2

InA3

InA4

AuxA1 AuxA2 AuxA3

AC Inputs Auxiliary Relay Outputs
150-SM4 Option I/O Module
(1) Customer supplied.
(2) See the controller nameplate to verify control power input ratings (100...240V AC).
(3) Terminal A3 (InA3) 100...240V AC input configured for START input using Parameter 7-4 (control module port 7).
(4) Terminal A2 (InA2) 100...240V AC input configured for COAST, STOP option, etc. using Parameter 7-3 (control module port 7).
NOTE: The controller generates an I/O configuration fault if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is selected
for COAST or STOP.
(5) Terminal A1 (InA1) 100...240V AC input is configured for Dual Ramp using Parameter 7-2 (control module port 7).
(6) Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state (controller stopped), some form of off-stream line power isolation is
recommended if maintenance is required on the motor. See the Isolation Contactor Applications diagram for details.
(7) The order of the terminal numbers for the option I/O module can be reversed depending on which expansion slot the option I/O
module is located on the control in the control module. However, the function associated with the terminal number remains the
same.
(8) Configure both In1 (Input 1—Parameter 56) and In2 (Input 2—Parameter 57) to "Disable".
NOTE: In addition to a small amount of leakage current flowing through an SCR in the off-state, failure of one or more solid-state
power switching components allows uncontrolled current to flow to the winding(s) of the motor. This could potentially result in
overheating or damage to the motor. To prevent potential personal injury or equipment damage, the installation of an isolation
contactor or shunt trip-type circuit breaker capable of interrupting the motor’s locked rotor current on the line side of the
SMC-50 controller is recommended. Operation of the isolation device should be coordinated using one of the SMC-50 controller
Aux contacts configured to NORMAL.

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Wiring Chapter 2

Figure 33 - For Start/Stop Control via HIM or Communications

T1/2 L1/1
Fast-acting SCR (1) Circuit
SMC-50 Controller fuses (optional) 3-phase AC line
Protective
Device power
Motor (1) (5) T2/4 L2/3
(1)

T3/6 L3/5

120V/240V AC Control Transformer with fuse or (2) (1)

120/240V AC Power Supply or
24V DC Power Supply

(3) (3)
(4) (4) (2)

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Internal DC Common
Internal +24V DC

In1 DC

In2 DC

Enable I/O

-L2 +L1
Aux 2 Aux 1

Control Module Standard I/O Control Power and

Ground
(1) Customer supplied.
(2) See the controller nameplate to verify control power input ratings (100...240V AC or 24V DC).
(3) Configure both In1 (Input 1—Parameter 56) and In2 (Input 2—Parameter 57) to "Disable".
NOTE: If terminal 10 and 11 are required for a non Stop/Start function (e.g. slow speed), see Parameter 56 and Parameter 57
Communication Control word bits 0-5 for options.
(4) For DPI operation, if the start/stop operation is done via communications (DPI port, 20-COMM module, or HIM) the appropriate bit
(0...4) in the Logic Mask, Parameter 148, must be set. See Chapter 9 for additional details.
(5) Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state (controller stopped), some form of off-stream line power isolation is
recommended if maintenance is required on the motor. See the Isolation Contactor Applications diagram for details.
NOTE: In addition to a small amount of leakage current flowing through an SCR in the off-state, failure of one or more solid-state
power switching components allows uncontrolled current to flow to the winding(s) of the motor. This could potentially result in
overheating or damage to the motor. To prevent potential personal injury or equipment damage, the installation of an isolation
contactor or shunt trip-type circuit breaker capable of interrupting the motor’s locked rotor current on the line side of the
SMC-50 controller is recommended. Operation of the isolation device should be coordinated using one of the SMC-50 controller
Aux contacts configured to NORMAL.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 55

Chapter 2 Wiring

Figure 34 - For Retrofit Applications— AC Inputs, No DPI Control

T1/2 L1/1
Fast-acting SCR fuses (1) Circuit
SMC-50 Controller (optional) M Protective
Device 3-phase AC line power
Motor (1) (5) T2/4 L2/3 (1)
M
T3/6 L3/5
Existing Motor Starter 120V/240V AC Control
(1)(6) Transformer with fuse or
(1) 120/240V AC Power Supply (2)

(1)(6)
Stop
(1) (4) OL

Start (1)
(1) (3) M

(9) (9) (7) (2)

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
-L2 +L1
Internal +24V DC

In1 DC

In2 DC

Enable I/O

Internal DC Common

Aux 2 Aux 1

Control Power and

Control Module Standard I/O Ground

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 (8)

NC
InCOM
InA1

InA2

InA3

InA4

AuxA1 AuxA2 AuxA3

AC Inputs Auxiliary Relay Outputs

150-SM4 Option I/O Module
(1) Customer supplied.
(2) See the controller nameplate to verify control power input ratings (100...240V AC).
(3) Terminal A2 (InA2) 100...240V AC input configured for START input using Parameter 7-3 (control module port 7).
(4) Terminal A1 (InA1) 100...240V AC input configured for Coast, Stop Option, etc, using Parameter 7-2 (control module port 7).
NOTE: The controller generates an I/O configuration fault if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is
configured for COAST or STOP.
(5) Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state (controller stopped), some form of upstream line power isolation is
recommended if maintenance is required on the motor. In this example, the Existing Motor Starter fulfills that requirement.
(6) Due to existing motor starter overload protection, the overload protection should be disabled in the SMC-50 controller.
(7) Set Aux 1 to NORMAL using Parameter 172. NORMAL = Aux 1 contact closes to energize the M coil with the START push button and
will open to de-energize it when the stop maneuver, initiated by the stop push button, is complete.
(8) The order of the terminal numbers for the option I/O module cam be reversed depending on which expansion slot it is located in
on the control module. However, the function associated with the terminal number remains the same.
(9) Configure both In1 (Input 1—Parameter 56) and In2 (Input 2—Parameter 57) to "Disable".

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Wiring Chapter 2

Figure 35 - For Retrofit Applications – DC Inputs, No DPI Control

T1/2 L1/1
Circuit
Fast-acting SCR fuses (1) M Protective
SMC-50 Controller (optional) 3-phase AC line
Device
power
(1)
Motor (1) (6) T2/4 L2/3
M
T3/6 L3/5
Existing Motor Starter 120V/240V AC Control (2)
(1)(7) Transformer with fuse or
(1) 120/240V AC Power Supply
or
24V DC Power Supply

(1)(7)
Stop OL
(1) (4)
M (1)

Start
(1)

(5)
(8) (2)
(3)

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Internal +24V DC

In1 DC

In2 DC

Internal DC Common
Enable I/O

-L2 +L1
Aux 2 Aux 1

Control Power and

Control Module Standard I/O Ground

(1) Customer supplied.

(2) See the controller nameplate to verify control power input ratings (100...240V AC or 24V DC).
(3) Terminal 11 (In1 DC) 24V DC input is configured for START input using Parameter 56.
(4) Terminal 10 (In2 DC) 24V DC input configured for COAST, STOP OPTION, etc. using Parameter 57.
NOTE: The controller generates an I/O configuration fault if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is
configured for COAST or STOP.
(5) A customer-supplied jumper is required to enable the controller I/O operation.
(6) Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state (controller stopped), some form of upstream line power isolation is
recommended if maintenance is required on the motor. In this example, the existing Motor Starter fulfills that requirement.
(7) Due to existing motor starter overload protection, the overload protection should be disabled in the SMC-50 controller.
(8) Set Aux 1 to NORMAL using Parameter 172. NORMAL = Aux 1 contact closes to energize the M coil with the START push button
and will open to de-energize it when the stop maneuver, initiated by the stop push button, is complete.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 57

Chapter 2 Wiring

Figure 36 - For Isolation Contactor Applications—DC Inputs

T1/2 L1/1
Fast-acting SCR fuses (1) Circuit
SMC-50 Controller Protective
(optional) 3-phase AC line
Device power
Motor (1) (6) (1)
T2/4 L2/3

T3/6 L3/5
(1)
Isolation Contactor
120V/240V AC Control (2)
Transformer with fuse or
(1) 120/240V AC Power
Supply or
24V DC Power Supply

Stop (1) (4)

(1)
IC
Start
(1)

(5)

(3) (7) (7) (2)

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
-L2 +L1
Internal +24V DC

In1 DC

In2 DC

Internal DC Common
Enable I/O

Aux 2 Aux 1

Control Module Standard I/O Control Power and

Ground

(1) Customer supplied.

(2) See the controller nameplate to verify control power input ratings (100...240V AC or 24V DC).
(3) Terminal 11 (In1 DC) 24V DC input is configured for START input using Parameter 56.
(4) Terminal 10 (In2 DC) 24V DC input configured for COAST, STOP OPTION, etc. using Parameter 57.
NOTE: The controller generates an I/O configuration fault if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is
configured for COAST or STOP.
(5) A customer-supplied jumper is required to enable the controller I/O operation.
(6) Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state (controller stopped), some form of upstream line power isolation (for
example, the Isolation Contactor used in this diagram) is recommended if maintenance is required on the motor.
(7) Configure Aux 1 to NORMAL using Parameter 172. NORMAL = Aux 1 contact closes to energize the IC coil with the START push
button and will open to de-energize it when the stop maneuver, initiated by the stop push button, is complete.
NOTE: In addition to a small amount of leakage current flowing through an SCR in the off-state, failure of one or more solid-state
power switching components allows uncontrolled current to flow to the winding(s) of the motor. This could potentially result in
overheating or damage to the motor. To prevent potential personal injury or equipment damage, the installation of an isolation
contactor (as shown in this diagram) or shunt trip-type circuit breaker capable of interrupting the motor’s locked rotor current
on the line side of the SMC-50 controller is recommended. Operation of the isolation device should be coordinated using one of
the SMC-50 controller Aux contacts configured to NORMAL.

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Wiring Chapter 2

Figure 37 - For Isolation Contactor Applications—AC Inputs

T1/2 L1/1
Fast-acting SCR fuses (1) Circuit
SMC-50 Controller (optional) Protective 3-phase AC line
Device power
Motor (1) (5)
T2/4 L2/3 (1)

T3/6 L3/5
Isolation Contactor (1)
120V/240V AC Control (2)
(1) Transformer with fuse or
120/240V AC Power Supply

Stop
(1) (4)

Start IC (1)
(1) (3)

(8) (8) (6) (2)

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Internal DC Common
Internal +24V DC

In1 DC

In2 DC

Enable I/O

-L2 +L1
Aux 2 Aux 1

Control Power and

Control Module Standard I/O Ground

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 (7)

InCOM
InA1

InA2

InA3

InA4

NC
AuxA1 AuxA2 AuxA3
AC Inputs Auxiliary Relay Outputs
150-SM4 Option I/O Module
(1) Customer supplied.
(2) See the controller nameplate to verify control power input ratings (100...240V AC).
(3) Terminal A2 (InA2) 100...240V AC input is configured for START input using Parameter 7-3 (control module port 7).
(4) Terminal A1 (InA1) 100...240V AC input configured for COAST, STOP OPTION, etc. using Parameter 7-2 (control module port 7).
NOTE: The controller generates an I/O configuration fault if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is
configured for COAST or STOP.
(5) Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state (controller stopped), some form of upstream line power isolation (for
example, the isolation contactor used in this diagram) is recommended if maintenance is required on the motor.
(6) Configure Aux 1 to NORMAL using Parameter 172. NORMAL = Aux 1 contact closes to energize the IC coil with the START push
button and will open to de-energize it when the stop maneuver, initiated by the stop push button, is complete.
(7) The order of the terminal numbers for the option I/O module can be reversed depending on which expansion slot it is located in on
the control module. However, the function associated with the terminal number remains the same.
NOTE: In addition to a small amount of leakage current flowing through an SCR in the off-state, failure of one or more solid-state
power switching components allows uncontrolled current to flow to the winding(s) of the motor. This could potentially result in
overheating or damage to the motor. To prevent potential personal injury or equipment damage, the installation of an isolation
contactor (as shown in this diagram) or shunt trip-type circuit breaker capable of interrupting the motor’s locked rotor current
on the line side of the SMC-50 controller is recommended. Operation of the isolation device should be coordinated using one of
the SMC-50 controller Aux contacts configured to NORMAL.
(8) Configure both In1 (Input 1—Parameter 56) and In2 (Input 2—Parameter 57) to "Disable".

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 59

Chapter 2 Wiring

Figure 38 - For Shunt Trip Applications—DC Inputs

T1/2 L1/1
Fast-acting SCR fuses (1) Circuit
SMC-50 Controller Protective 3-phase AC line
(optional)
Device power
Motor (1) (6)
T2/4 L2/3 (1)

T3/6 L3/5

120V/240V AC Control Transformer with fuse or (2)

120/240V AC Power Supply or (1)
24V DC Power Supply

Stop
(1) (4) (1) ST
Start (1)

(5)
(3) (7) (2)

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
-L2 +L1
Internal DC Common
Internal +24V DC

In1 DC

In2 DC

Enable I/O

Aux 2 Aux 1

Control Power and

Control Module Standard I/O Ground

(1) Customer supplied.

(2) See the controller nameplate to verify control power input ratings (100...240V AC or 24V DC).
(3) Terminal 11 (In1 DC) 24V DC input is configured for START input using Parameter 56.
(4) Terminal 10 (In2 DC) 24V DC input configured for COAST, STOP OPTION, etc. using Parameter 57.
NOTE: The controller generates an I/O configuration fault if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is
configured for COAST or STOP.
(5) A customer-supplied jumper is required to enable the controller I/O operation.
(6) Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state (controller stopped), some form of upstream line power isolation is
recommended if maintenance is required on the motor. See the Isolation Contactor Application for details.
(7) Configure Aux 1 to FAULT using Parameter 172. During a controller fault condition, the Aux 1 contact closes to energize the Shunt
Trip (ST) coil.
NOTE: In addition to a small amount of leakage current flowing through an SCR in the off-state, failure of one or more solid-state
power switching components allows uncontrolled current to flow to the winding(s) of the motor. This could potentially result in
overheating or damage to the motor. To prevent potential personal injury or equipment damage, the installation of an isolation
contactor or shunt trip-type circuit breaker capable of interrupting the motor’s locked rotor current on the line side of the
SMC-50 controller is recommended. Operation of the isolation device should be coordinated using one of the SMC-50 controller
Aux contacts configured to NORMAL.

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Wiring Chapter 2

Figure 39 - For Shunt Trip Applications—AC Inputs

T1/2 L1/1 Circuit

Fast-acting SCR fuses (1) Protective
SMC-50 Controller 3-phase AC line
(optional) Device power
Motor (1) (5) T2/4 L2/3 (1)

T3/6 L3/5
120V/240V AC Control Transformer with fuse
(1) or (2)
120/240V AC Power Supply

(4) Stop
(1)

Start (1) ST
(3) (1)

(8) (8) (6) (2)

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
-L2 +L1
Internal +24V DC

In1 DC

In2 DC

Enable I/O

Internal DC Common

Aux 2 Aux 1

Control Power and

Control Module Standard I/O Ground

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 (7)

InCOM
InA1

InA2

InA3

InA4

NC
AuxA1 AuxA2 AuxA3

AC Inputs Auxiliary Relay Outputs

150-SM4 Option I/O Module
(1) Customer supplied.
(2) See the controller nameplate to verify control power input ratings (100...240V AC).
(3) Terminal A2 (InA2) 100...240V AC input is configured for START input using Parameter 7-3 (control module port 7).
(4) Terminal A1 (InA1) 100...240V AC input configured for COAST, STOP OPTION, etc. using Parameter 7-2 (control module port 7).
NOTE: The controller generates an I/O configuration fault if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is
configured for COAST or STOP.
(5) Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state (controller stopped), some form of upstream line power isolation is
recommended if maintenance is required on the motor. See the Isolation Contactor Application for details.
(6) Configure Aux 1 to FAULT using Parameter 172. During a controlled fault condition the Aux 1 contact closes to energize the Shunt
Trip (ST) coil.
(7) The order of the terminal numbers for the option I/O module can be reversed depending on which expansion slot it is located in
on the control module. However, the function associated with the terminal number remains the same.
NOTE: In addition to a small amount of leakage current flowing through an SCR in the off-state, failure of one or more solid-state
power switching components allows uncontrolled current to flow to the winding(s) of the motor. This could potentially result in
overheating or damage to the motor. To prevent potential personal injury or equipment damage, the installation of an isolation
contactor or shunt trip-type circuit breaker capable of interrupting the motor’s locked rotor current on the line side of the
SMC-50 controller is recommended. Operation of the isolation device should be coordinated using one of the SMC-50 controller
Aux contacts configured to NORMAL.
(8) Configure both In1 (Input 1—Parameter 56) and In2 (Input 2—Parameter 57) to "Disable".

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 61

Chapter 2 Wiring

Figure 40 - For Single-speed Reversing Applications—DC Control

Fwd
T1/2 L1/1
Fast-acting SCR fuses
SMC-50 Controller Circuit
(optional) (1) 3-phase AC line
Protective power
Motor (1) (5) Device
T2/4 L2/3
(1)

T3/6 L3/5

Rev
Reversing Contactor (1)
120V/240V AC Control (2)
Transformer with fuse or
(1) 120/240V AC Power Supply or
24V DC Power Supply

OFF
F R E-Stop
(1)
F
(1) R
Rev (1)
(1)
R
Fwd (1) F
(4)
(3) (6) (2)

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
-L2 +L1
Internal +24V DC

In1 DC

In2 DC

Enable I/O

Internal DC Common

Aux 2 Aux 1

Control Power and

Control Module Standard I/O Ground

(1) Customer supplied.

(2) See the controller nameplate to verify control power input ratings (100...240V AC or 24V DC).
(3) Terminal 11 (In1 DC) 24V DC input is configured for START/COAST using Parameter 56.
NOTE: The controller generates an I/O configuration fault if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is
configured for COAST or STOP.
(4) A customer-supplied jumper is required to enable the controller I/O operation.
(5) Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state (controller stopped), some form of upstream line power isolation is
recommended if maintenance is required on the motor. In this example, the reversing contactor provides isolation.
(6) Configure In2DC (Input 2 - Parameter 57) to "Disable".
NOTE: The SMC-50 controller minimum transition time for reversing is 0.5 s. The SMC-50 controller phase reversal must be disabled in
reversing applications.

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Wiring Chapter 2

Figure 41 - For Two-speed Applications—DC Control

(7) L
T1/2 L1/1 Circuit
Fast-acting SCR fuses Protective 3-phase AC line
H(6) SMC-50 Controller (optional) (1) Device power
L (1)
T2/4 L2/3
H
(6)
Motor (1) (8)
L
T3/6 L3/5
(7)
H

H 120V/240V AC Control (2)

(1) Transformer with fuse or
H 120/240V AC Power Supply or
(1) (1) 24V DC Power Supply
Two-Speed Motor (1)
Starter HOL LOL
Stop
(1) Low High
(5) (1)
(1) H
L L
1 sec L
(5) H (1) (1) L (1)
1 sec
H
H
(2)
(3) (4)
(9)

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
-L2 +L1
Internal +24V DC

In1 DC

In2 DC

Enable I/O

Internal DC Common

Aux 2 Aux 1

Control Power and

Control Module Standard I/O Ground

(1) Customer supplied.

(2) See the controller nameplate to verify control power input ratings (100...240V AC or 24V DC).
(3) Terminal 11 (In1 DC) 24V DC input is configured for START/COAST using Parameter 56.
NOTE: The controller generates an I/O configuration fault if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is
configured for COAST or STOP.
(4) A customer-supplied jumper is required to enable the controller I/O operation.
(5) Customer-supplied timers with hard contact are required to accept DC power.
(6) Two-speed consequent pole operations.
(7) The SMC-50 controller overload must be disabled.
(8) Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state (controller stopped), some form of upstream line power isolation is
recommended if maintenance is required on the motor. See the Isolation Contactor Application for details.
NOTE: In addition to a small amount of leakage current flowing through an SCR in the off-state, failure of one or more solid-state
power switching components allows uncontrolled current to flow to the winding(s) of the motor. This could potentially result in
overheating or damage to the motor. To prevent potential personal injury or equipment damage, the installation of an isolation
contactor or shunt trip-type circuit breaker capable of interrupting the motor’s locked rotor current on the line side of the
SMC-50 controller is recommended. Operation of the isolation device should be coordinated using one of the SMC-50 controller
Aux contacts configured to NORMAL.
(9) Configure In2DC (Input 2 - Parameter 57) to "Disable".

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 63

Chapter 2 Wiring

Figure 42 - For SMC Start, Run, On Bypass—DC Inputs

T1/2 L1/1 Circuit

Fast-acting SCR fuses Protective

825-MCMxx
SMC-50 Controller 3-phase AC line
(optional) (1) Device
power
Motor (1) (6) T2/4 L2/3 (1)

(7)
T3/6 L3/5
120V/240V AC Control Transformer (2)
(1) with fuse or
120/240V AC Power Supply or
24V DC Power Supply
Bypass Contactor (1) (10
Stop
(4) (1) (1)
BC (10)
Start
(1) (3) (5)
(9) (2)

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Internal +24V DC

In1 DC

In2 DC

Enable I/O

Internal DC Common

-L2 +L1
Aux 2 Aux 1

Control Power and

Control Module Standard I/O Ground

150-SM2 Option Module (8)

RG25U
TB2 TB3 Female TB4
TB2 TB3 RG25U (7) TB4
Male

(1) Customer supplied.

(2) See the controller nameplate to verify control power input ratings (100...240V AC or 24V DC).
(3) Terminal 11 (In1 DC) 24V DC input is configured for START input using Parameter 56.
(4) Terminal 10 (In2 DC) 24V DC input configured for COAST, STOP OPTION, etc. using Parameter 57.
NOTE: The controller generates an I/O configuration fault if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is
configured for COAST or STOP.
(5) A customer-supplied jumper is required to enable the controller I/O operation.
(6) Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state (controller stopped), some form of upstream line power isolation is
recommended if maintenance is required on the motor. See the Isolation Contactor Applications for details.
(7) In Bypass Contactor RUN operation, the 825-MCM and the 150-SM2 provide current-based protective feedback features including
overload. Only the cable provided with the 825-MCM converter can be used in this configuration. The maximum cable length is
4 m, thus the 825-MCM must be located within 4 m of the SMC-50 controller.
(8) The order of the terminal numbers for the 150-SM2 module can be reversed depending on which expansion slot it is located in the
control module. However, the function associated with the terminal number remains the same.
(9) The Aux 1 relay output is configured for external bypass using Parameter 172.
(10) In North America, size the bypass contactor per the motor Hp and FLA. In IEC, size the bypass contactor per the motor AC-1 rating.
The short-circuit rating of the bypass contactor must be similar to the SMC-50 controller.
NOTE: In addition to a small amount of leakage current flowing through an SCR in the off-state, failure of one or more solid-state
power switching components allows uncontrolled current to flow to the winding(s) of the motor. This could potentially result in
overheating or damage to the motor. To prevent potential personal injury or equipment damage, the installation of an isolation
contactor or shunt trip-type circuit breaker capable of interrupting the motor’s locked rotor current on the line side of the
SMC-50 controller is recommended. Operation of the isolation device should be coordinated using one of the SMC-50 controller
Aux contacts configured to NORMAL.

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Wiring Chapter 2

Figure 43 - Hand-OFF-Auto Control with Start/Stop Push Buttons—AC Control

T1/2 L1/1 Circuit

Fast-acting SCR fuses (1)
SMC-50 Controller (optional) Protective 3-phase AC line
Device power
Motor (1) (4)
T2/4 L2/3 (1)

T3/6 L3/5
120V/240V AC Control Transformer with fuse (2)
or
(1) 120/240V AC Power Supply

Off (1) Stop Start (1)

Hand Auto

C C
(1) (1)
Auto Device

C
(2)
(6) (6)
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Internal +24V DC

In1 DC

In2 DC

Internal DC Common
Enable I/O

-L2 +L1
Aux 2 Aux 1

Control Power and

Ground
(3) Control Module Standard I/O

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 (5)

InCOM
InA1

InA2

InA3

InA4

NC
AuxA1 AuxA2 AuxA3

AC Inputs Auxiliary Relay Outputs

150-SM4 Option I/O Module
(1) Customer supplied.
(2) See the controller nameplate to verify control power input ratings (100...240V AC).
(3) Terminal A1 (InA1) 100...240V AC input is configured for START/STOP or START/COAST using Parameter 7-2 (control module port 7,
Start = Input High, Coast/Stop = Input Low).
NOTE: The controller generates an I/O configuration fault if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is
configured for COAST or STOP.
(4) Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state (controller stopped), some form of upstream line power isolation is
recommended if maintenance is required on the motor. See the Isolation Contactor Applications diagram for details.
(5) The order of the terminal numbers for the option I/O module can be reversed depending on which expansion port it is located in
on the control module. However, the function associated with the terminal number remains the same.
(6) Configure both In1 (Input 1—Parameter 56) and In2 (Input 2—Parameter 57) to "Disable".
NOTE: In addition to a small amount of leakage current flowing through an SCR in the off-state, failure of one or more solid-state
power switching components allows uncontrolled current to flow to the winding(s) of the motor. This could potentially result in
overheating or damage to the motor. To prevent potential personal injury or equipment damage, the installation of an isolation
contactor or shunt trip-type circuit breaker capable of interrupting the motor’s locked rotor current on the line side of the
SMC-50 controller is recommended. Operation of the isolation device should be coordinated using one of the SMC-50 controller
Aux contacts configured to NORMAL.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 65

Chapter 2 Wiring

Figure 44 - For Hand-OFF-Auto (DPI) with Start/Stop Push Buttons—AC I/O

T1/2 L1/1 Circuit

SMC-50 Controller Fast-acting SCR fuses (1) Protective 3-phase AC line
(optional) Device power
Motor (1) (5)
T2/4 L2/3 (1)

T3/6 L3/5
120V/240V AC Control Transformer with fuse or
Off (1) 120/240V AC Power Supply (2)
Hand Auto (1)

(8)
Stop
(8)
(1)

Start (1)
(2)
(7) (7)
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
-L2 +L1
Internal +24V DC

In1 DC

In2 DC

Enable I/O

Internal DC Common

Aux 2 Aux 1

Control Power and

Control Module Standard I/O Ground

(3) (4)

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 (6)

InA1

InA2

InA3

InA4

InCOM

NC
AuxA1 AuxA2 AuxA3

AC Inputs Auxiliary Relay Outputs

150-SM4 Option I/O Module
(1) Customer supplied.
(2) See the controller nameplate to verify control power input ratings (100...240V AC).
(3) Option I/O Terminal A2 (InA2) 100...240V AC input is configured for START input using Parameter 7-4 (control module port 7).
(4) Option I/O Terminal A3 (InA3) 100...240V AC input configured for COAST, STOP OPTION, etc. using Parameter 7-3 (control module
port 7).
NOTE: The controller generates an I/O configuration fault if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is
configured for COAST or STOP.
(5) Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state (controller stopped), some form of upstream line power isolation is
recommended if maintenance is required on the motor. See the Isolation Contactor Applications diagram for details.
(6) The order of the terminal numbers for the option I/O module can be reversed depending on which expansion port it is located in
on the control module. However, the function associated with the terminal number remains the same.
(7) Configure both In1 (Input 1—Parameter 56) and In2 (Input 2—Parameter 57) to "Disable".
NOTE: In addition to a small amount of leakage current flowing through an SCR in the off-state, failure of one or more solid-state
power switching components allows uncontrolled current to flow to the winding(s) of the motor. This could potentially result in
overheating or damage to the motor. To prevent potential personal injury or equipment damage, the installation of an isolation
contactor or shunt trip-type circuit breaker capable of interrupting the motor’s locked rotor current on the line side of the
SMC-50 controller is recommended. Operation of the isolation device should be coordinated using one of the SMC-50 controller
Aux contacts configured to NORMAL.
(8) The switch is closed in this position.

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Wiring Chapter 2

Soft Stop, Pump Control, and The following figure shows the typical wiring diagrams for the Soft Stop, Pump
Control, and SMB options.
Smart Motor Braking (SMB)
Figure 45 - Soft Stop, Pump Stop, or Braking Control Option, AC Control

T1/2 L1/1 Circuit

SMC-50 Controller Fast-acting SCR fuses (1) Protective 3-phase AC line
(optional) Device power
Motor (1) (5)
T2/4 L2/3 (1)

T3/6 L3/5
120V/240V AC Control Transformer with fuse or
(1) 120/240V AC Power Supply (2)
Stop (1)

Start
(1)
Option Stop (1)

(2)

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
-L2 +L1
Internal DC Common
Internal +24V DC

In1 DC

In2 DC

Enable I/O

Aux 2 Aux 1

(8) (8)
Control Power and
Ground
Control Module Standard I/O

(5) (3) (4)

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 (7)

NC
InA4
InA2

InA3
InA1

InCOM

AuxA1 AuxA2 AuxA3

AC Inputs Auxiliary Relay Outputs

150-SM4 Option I/O Module
(1) Customer supplied.
(2) See the controller nameplate to verify control power input ratings (100...240V AC).
(3) Option I/O Terminal A2 (InA2) 100...240V AC input is configured for START input using Parameter 7-3 (contact module port 7).
(4) Option I/O Terminal A3 (InA3) 100...240V AC input configured for COAST using Parameter 7-4 (contact module port 7).
NOTE: The controller generates an I/O configuration fault if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is
configured for COAST or STOP.
(5) Option I/O module Terminal A1 (InA1) 120/240V AC input is configured for STOP OPTION using Parameter 7-2 (contact module
port 7).
(6) Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state (controller stopped), some form of upstream line power isolation is
recommended if maintenance is required on the motor. See the Isolation Contactor Applications diagram for details.
NOTE: In addition to a small amount of leakage current flowing through an SCR in the off-state, failure of one or more solid-state
power switching components allows uncontrolled current to flow to the winding(s) of the motor. This could potentially result in
overheating or damage to the motor. To prevent potential personal injury or equipment damage, the installation of an isolation
contactor or shunt trip-type circuit breaker capable of interrupting the motor’s locked rotor current on the line side of the
SMC-50 controller is recommended. Operation of the isolation device should be coordinated using one of the SMC-50 controller
Aux contacts configured to NORMAL.
(7) The order of the terminal numbers for the option I/O module can be reversed depending on which expansion port it is located in
on the control module. However, the function associated with the terminal number remains the same.
(8) Configure both In1 (Input 1—Parameter 56) and In2 (Input 2—Parameter 57) to "Disable".

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 67

Chapter 2 Wiring

Slow Speed with Braking Figure 46 - For Isolation Contactor with STOP Option Applications, AC Inputs

T1/2 L1/1 Circuit

SMC-50 Controller Fast-acting SCR fuses (1)
Protective 3-phase AC line
Motor (1) (6) (optional)
Device power
T2/4 L2/3
(1)

T3/6 L3/5
Isolation
Contactor 120V/240V AC Control Transformer with fuse or
(1) (7) 120/240V AC Power Supply (2)
(1)
Option Stop
(1)
Stop
(1)
(1)
Start IC
(1)

(9) (9) (7) (2)

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
-L2 +L1
Internal +24V DC

In1 DC

In2 DC

Enable I/O

Internal DC Common

Aux 2 Aux 1

Control Power and

Ground
Control Module Standard I/O

(5) (4) (3)

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 (8)
InA4
InA2

InA3
InA1

InCOM

NC
AuxA1 AuxA2 AuxA3
AC Inputs Auxiliary Relay Outputs
150-SM4 Option I/O Module
(1) Customer supplied.
(2) See the controller nameplate to verify control power input ratings (100...240V AC).
(3) Option I/O Terminal A3 (InA3) 100...240V AC input is configured for START input using Parameter 7-4 (control module port 7).
(4) Option I/O Terminal A2 (InA2) 100...240V AC input configured for COAST using Parameter 7-3 (control module port 7).
NOTE: The controller generates an I/O configuration fault if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is
configured for COAST or STOP.
(5) Option I/O module Terminal A1 (InA1) 100...240V AC input is configured for STOP OPTION using Parameter 7-2 (control module
port 7).
(6) Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state (controller stopped), some form of upstream line power isolation (for
example, the one shown in this diagram) is recommended if maintenance is required on the motor.
NOTE: In addition to a small amount of leakage current flowing through an SCR in the off-state, failure of one or more solid-state
power switching components allows uncontrolled current to flow to the winding(s) of the motor. This could potentially result in
overheating or damage to the motor. To prevent potential personal injury or equipment damage, the installation of an isolation
contactor or shunt trip-type circuit breaker capable of interrupting the motor’s locked rotor current on the line side of the
SMC-50 controller is recommended. Operation of the isolation device should be coordinated using one of the SMC-50 controller
Aux contacts configured to NORMAL.
(7) Configure Aux1 to NORMAL using Parameter 172. NORMAL = Aux1 contact closes to energize the IC coil with the START push
button and open to de-energize when the stop maneuver, initiated by the STOP push button, is complete.
(8) The order of the terminal numbers for the option I/O module can be reversed depending on which expansion port it is located in
on the control module. However, the function associated with the terminal number remains the same.
(9) Configure both In1 (Input 1—Parameter 56) and In2 (Input 2—Parameter 57) to "Disable".

68 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Wiring Chapter 2

Figure 47 - For Isolation Contactor and Slow Speed with Braking Application— AC Control

T1/2 L1/1 Circuit

SMC-50 Controller Fast-acting SCR fuses (1) Protective 3-phase AC line
(optional) Device power
Motor (1) (9) T2/4 L2/3 (1)
1
T3/6 L3/5
Isolation (1) 120V/240V AC Control Transformer with fuse or
Contactor (1) 120/240V AC Power Supply (2)
Brake (1)

Slow Speed
(1)
(1)
Stop (1) IC

Start (1)
(7) (2)
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
-L2 +L1
Internal +24V DC

In1 DC
In2 DC

Enable I/O
Internal DC Common

Aux 2 Aux 1
(9) (9)

Control Power and

Control Module Standard I/O Ground

(5) (6) (4) (3)

(8)
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12
NC
InA2

InCOM
InA4
InA1

InA3

AuxA1 AuxA2 AuxA3

AC Inputs Auxiliary Relay Outputs
150-SM4 Option I/O Module
(1) Customer supplied.
(2) See the controller nameplate to verify control power input ratings (100...240V AC).
(3) Option I/O Terminal A4 (InA4) 100...240V AC input is configured for START input using Parameter 7-5 (control module port 7).
(4) Option I/O Terminal A3 (InA3) 100...240V AC input configured for COAST, etc. using Parameter 7-4 (control module port 7).
NOTE: The controller generates an I/O configuration fault if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is
configured for COAST or STOP.
(5) Option I/O module Terminal A1 (InA1) 100...240V AC input is configured for STOP OPTION using Parameter 7-2 (control module
port 7). Set STOP MODE, Parameter 65, to SMB.
(6) Option I/O module Terminal A2 (InA2) 100...240V AC input is configured for SLOW SPEED using Parameter 7-3 (control module
port 7).
(7) Configure Aux1 to NORMAL using Parameter 172. NORMAL = Aux1 contact closes to energize the IC coil with the START push
button and open to de-energize when the stop maneuver, initiated by the STOP push button, is complete.
(8) The order of the terminal numbers for the option I/O module can be reversed depending on which expansion port it is located in
on the control module. However, the function associated with the terminal number remains the same.
(9) Configure both In1 (Input 1—Parameter 56) and In2 (Input 2—Parameter 57) to "Disable".
NOTE: In addition to a small amount of leakage current flowing through an SCR in the off-state, failure of one or more solid-state
power switching components allows uncontrolled current to flow to the winding(s) of the motor. This could potentially result in
overheating or damage to the motor. To prevent potential personal injury or equipment damage, the installation of an isolation
contactor (as shown in this diagram) or shunt trip-type circuit breaker capable of interrupting the motor’s locked rotor current
on the line side of the SMC-50 controller is recommended. Operation of the isolation device should be coordinated using one of
the SMC-50 controller Aux contacts configured to NORMAL.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 69

Chapter 2 Wiring

Preset Slow Speed Figure 48 - For Preset Slow Speed Control—AC I/O

T1/2 L1/1 Circuit

Fast-acting SCR fuses (1) 3-phase AC line
SMC-50 Controller Protective
(optional) power
Motor (1) (6) Device
T2/4 L2/3 (1)

T3/6 L3/5
120V/240V AC Control Transformer with fuse or
(1) 120/240V AC Power Supply (2)

Slow Speed (1)

Stop (1)

Start (1)

(2)
(8) (8)
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
-L2 +L1
Internal +24V DC

Enable I/O
In1 DC
In2 DC

Internal DC Common

Aux 2 Aux 1

Control Power and

Ground
Control Module Standard I/O

(5) (4) (3)

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 (7)
InCOM
InA1

InA2

InA3

InA4

NC
AuxA1 AuxA2 AuxA3
AC Inputs Auxiliary Relay Outputs
150-SM4 Option I/O Module
(1) Customer supplied.
(2) See the controller nameplate to verify control power input ratings (100...240V AC).
(3) Option I/O Terminal A3 (InA3) 100...240V AC input is configured for START input using Parameter 7-4 (control module port 7).
NOTE: The controller generates an I/O configuration fault if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is
configured for COAST or STOP.
(4) Option I/O Terminal A2 (InA2) 100...240V AC input configured for COAST, Stop Option, etc. using Parameter 7-3 (control module
port 7).
(5) Option I/O terminal A1 (InA1) 120/240V AC input configured for SLOW SPEED using Parameter 7-2 (control module port 7)
(6) Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state (controller stopped), some form of upstream line power isolation is
recommended if maintenance is required on the motor. See the Isolation Contactor Applications diagram for details.
(7) The order of the terminal numbers for the option I/O module can be reversed depending on which expansion port it is located in
on the control module. However, the function associated with the terminal number remains the same.
(8) Configure both In1 (Input 1—Parameter 56) and In2 (Input 2—Parameter 57) to "Disable".
NOTE: In addition to a small amount of leakage current flowing through an SCR in the off-state, failure of one or more solid-state
power switching components allows uncontrolled current to flow to the winding(s) of the motor. This could potentially result in
overheating or damage to the motor. To prevent potential personal injury or equipment damage, the installation of an isolation
contactor or shunt trip-type circuit breaker capable of interrupting the motor’s locked rotor current on the line side of the
SMC-50 controller is recommended. Operation of the isolation device should be coordinated using one of the SMC-50 controller
Aux contacts configured to NORMAL.

70 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Wiring Chapter 2

Figure 49 - For Preset Slow Speed Control for Hand-OFF-Auto (DPI) —AC I/O

T1/2 L1/1 Circuit

SMC-50 Controller Fast-acting SCR fuses (1) Protective 3-phase AC line
(optional) Device power
Motor (1) (6)
1 T2/4 L2/3 (1)
1
T3/6 L3/5
120V/240V AC Control Transformer with fuse or
120/240V AC Power Supply (2)
Off (1)
Auto (DPI) Hand
Hand Start (1)
(1) (9)

(9)
Hand Stop
(9)
Slow Speed (1)
(1)

(8) (8) (2)

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Internal +24V DC

In1 DC
In2 DC

Enable I/O

Internal DC Common

-L2 +L1
Aux 2 Aux 1

Control Power and

Control Module Standard I/O Ground

(5) (3) (4)

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 (7)

InA1

InA2

InA3

InA4

InCOM

NC
AuxA1 AuxA2 AuxA3
AC Inputs Auxiliary Relay Outputs
150-SM4 Option I/O Module
(1) Customer supplied.
(2) See the controller nameplate to verify control power input ratings (100...240V AC).
(3) Option I/O Terminal A2 (InA2) 100...240V AC input is configured for START input using Parameter 7-3 (control module port 7).
NOTE: The controller generates an I/O configuration fault if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is
configured for COAST or STOP.
(4) Option I/O Terminal A3 (InA3) 100...240V AC input configured for COAST, Stop Option, etc. using Parameter 7-4 (control module
port 7).
(5) Option I/O Terminal A1 (InA1) 120/240V input configured for SLOW SPEED using Parameter 7-2 (control module port 7).
(6) Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state (controller stopped), some form of upstream line power isolation is
recommended if maintenance is required on the motor. See the Isolation Contactor Application diagram for details.
(7) The order of the terminal numbers for the option I/O module can be reversed depending on which expansion port it is located in
on the control module. However, the function associated with the terminal number remains the same.
(8) Configure both In1 (Input 1—Parameter 56) and In2 (Input 2—Parameter 57) to "Disable".
NOTE: In addition to a small amount of leakage current flowing through an SCR in the off-state, failure of one or more solid-state
power switching components allows uncontrolled current to flow to the winding(s) of the motor. This could potentially result in
overheating or damage to the motor. To prevent potential personal injury or equipment damage, the installation of an isolation
contactor or shunt trip-type circuit breaker capable of interrupting the motor’s locked rotor current on the line side of the
SMC-50 controller is recommended. Operation of the isolation device should be coordinated using one of the SMC-50 controller
Aux contacts configured to NORMAL.
(9) The switch is closed in this position.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 71

Chapter 2 Wiring

Figure 50 - Accu-Stop—AC I/O

T1/2 L1/1 Circuit

SMC-50 Controller Fast-acting SCR fuses (1) Protective 3-phase AC line
(optional) Device power
Motor (1) (6)
T2/4 L2/3 (1)
1
T3/6 L3/5
(8) 120V/240V AC Control Transformer with fuse or
(1) 120/240V AC Power Supply (2)

Start Stop
(1) (1)

Slow Speed

(1)

(9) (9) (2)

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
-L2 +L1
Internal DC Common
Internal +24V DC

In1 DC

In2 DC

Enable I/O

Aux 2 Aux 1

Control Power and

Control Module Standard I/O Ground

(5) (4) (3)

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 (7)
NC
InCOM
InA1

InA2

InA3

InA4

AuxA1 AuxA2 AuxA3

AC Inputs Auxiliary Relay Outputs
150-SM4 Option I/O Module

(1) Customer supplied.

(2) See the controller nameplate to verify control power input ratings (100...240V AC).
(3) Option I/O Terminal A3 (InA3) 100...240V AC input configured for SLOW SPEED, Stop Option, etc. using Parameter 7-4 (control
module port 7).
NOTE: The controller generates an I/O configuration fault if any input is configured for START or SLOW speed and no input is
configured for COAST or STOP.
(4) Option I/O Terminal A2 (InA2) 100...240V AC input is configured for SART input using Parameter 7-3 (control module port 7).
(5) Option I/O Terminal A1 (InA1) 120/240V Input configured for COAST using Parameter 7-2 (control module port 7).
(6) Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state (controller stopped), some form of upstream line power isolation is
recommended if maintenance is required on the motor. See the Isolation Contactor Applications diagram for details.
(7) The order of the terminal numbers for the option I/O module can be reversed depending on which expansion port it is located in
on the control module. However, the function associated with the terminal number remains the same.
(8) Configure Stop Mode to SMB using Parameter 65; Braking Current using Parameter 69; Slow Speed using Parameter 72; and Slow
Brake using Parameter 73 (Parameter 73 = 0 results in Coast).
(9) Configure both In1(Input 1 - Parameter 56) and In2 (Input 2 - Parameter 57) to DISABLE.
NOTE: In addition to a small amount of leakage current flowing through an SCR in the off-state, failure of one or more solid-state
power switching components allows uncontrolled current to flow to the winding(s) of the motor. This could potentially result in
overheating or damage to the motor. To prevent potential personal injury or equipment damage, the installation of an isolation
contactor or shunt trip-type circuit breaker capable of interrupting the motor’s locked rotor current on the line side of the
SMC-50 controller is recommended. Operation of the isolation device should be coordinated using one of the SMC-50 controller
Aux contacts configured to NORMAL.

72 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Wiring Chapter 2

Fan Wiring Fans for the SMC-50 controllers should be wired according to the instructions
in this section.

Integrated Bypass Units

For units with integrated bypass, you should wire the fans as shown in
Figure 51.

Figure 51 - Fan Wiring—Integrated Bypass Units

120V AC (Factory Set) 240V AC (Optional)

1 1
Using 150-SCMD Module 2 2 Using 150-SCMD Module
120V AC, 240V AC,
(120…240V AC Control)
3 1-phase ~ 3
1-phase ~ (120…240V AC Control)

4 4

24V DC

Using 150-SCMR Module +

(24V DC Control) 24V DC
—

Solid-state Units

Solid-state units do not require any additional wiring. The fans are connected
internally.

Upgraded Units

For SMC Flex controller-to-SMC-50 controller control upgrades, the fans

remain connected as they were in the SMC Flex controller. You do not need to
change any wiring.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 73

Chapter 2 Wiring

Notes:

74 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Chapter 3

Operating Modes

Operation The SMC-50 controller with an internal bypass power structure can operate
standard squirrel-cage induction motors rated 27…480 A or star-delta
(wye-delta) type motors rated 47…831 A operated inside-the-delta.

The SMC-50 controller with a solid-state power structure can operate standard
squirrel-cage induction motors rated 30…520 A or star-delta (wye-delta) type
motors rated 52…900 A operated inside-the-delta.

IMPORTANT Verify line and control voltage values on the product before applying power.

Motor Configuration Line-connected wye, line-connected delta, and inside-the-delta motor

configurations are possible with the SMC-50 controller. The motor tuning
feature of the SMC-50 controller automatically determines the motor
connection. Motor tuning is done automatically by the controller on initial
motor start or forced to occur by the user. You can also enter the configuration of
the Motor Connection, Parameter 44, into the SMC-50 controller. You must
enter the Motor Line Voltage rating, Parameter 46, into the controller to enable
the motor protection features to function (default 480V).

Motor Tuning The SMC-50 controller performs the motor tuning process on the initial start
sequence of the motor. Motor tuning includes the identification of the motor
parameters and the detection of the motor connection type (Line or Delta). The
SMC-50 controller uses the motor tuning data in its control algorithm. During
the tuning process, the motor does not turn and makes some audible noise,
including pulsing and buzzing. The time to complete the tuning process is
approximately 10 to 20 seconds, but varies based on the size and characteristics of
the individual motor being used. After successful completion of the tuning
process, the motor starts based on the user-programmed start profile. If you
interrupt the tuning process by giving a stop command or removing power from
the unit, the tuning process repeats on the next start command. Subsequent starts
of the motor after a successful tuning do not perform the tuning process.

Note: With some generators, you may have difficulty with the motor tuning. If
so, try tuning the motor while it is connected to line power. Contact Rockwell
Automation technical support if you need assistance.

After the initial successful tuning of the motor, You can re-start the process via
one of the following methods:

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 75

Chapter 3 Operating Modes

1. Change the status of Force Tuning, Parameter 194, to TRUE by using a

configuration tool (such as a HIM) with the motor stopped. During the
next start cycle, the tuning process occurs and Parameter 194 will change
back to FALSE. OR
2. Press the "HOLD TO TEST/PUSH TO RESET" push button, located
on the front of the controller, for ten seconds with the motor stopped.
During the next start cycle, the tuning process occurs. The controller’s
status LED will flash amber, indicating that Tuning occurs on the next
start cycle. OR
3. When the controller processes a "Load Factory Defaults" command via
Parameter Management, Parameter 229.

TIP If a motor that is smaller or larger than normal is used for initial system
testing, you must perform a motor tuning cycle on the motor used in the
final installation.

Table 6 lists Parameter 194 Force Tuning along with the key motor parameters
checked by the SMC-50 controller during a motor tuning cycle.

Table 6 - Key Motor Parameters Checked During a Motor Tuning Cycle

Parameter Minimum/Maximum
Parameter Name Default Value Access Units
Number Values
194 Force Tuning FALSE/TRUE TRUE R/W —
195 Stator R 0.00…50.00 0.00…50.00 Ohms
196 Total R 0.00…50.00 0.00…50.00 Ohms
197 Coupling Factor 0.00…10.00 0.00…10.00 R
198 Inductance 0.00…1000.00 0.00…1000.00 mH
45 Motor Connection Line/Delta Line —

Resistive Loads The resistive load feature lets you control voltage from 1…100% of full voltage
with simple settings.
• Setting the Load Type, Parameter 347 to Resistive.
• Select the reference source, Ref Source Parameter 348 to either Output V
Ref (Output Voltage Reference), analog card 150-SM3 input or
DeviceLogix output.

If the Ref Source is selected in Parameter 348, then you need to set Output V Ref
using Parameter 349. You also need to set the line voltage, Parameter 46, and
Motor FLC, Parameter 78.

The Motor FLC when resistive load is selected is actually resistance full load
current; you need to calculate this if you do not know the value for the load. If
needed, You can also set Current Limit Level, Parameter 53, to limit the amount
of current that is supplied to the resistors. You can change the value of the
reference source while the SMC-50 controller is in a run state.

76 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Operating Modes Chapter 3

ATTENTION: You can not use the resistive load feature on motor loads.

Three-phase Balanced Loads

Figure 52 - Delta- and Wye-connected Resistive Loads

Variable Definition IL
R Resistance
R1 Branch 1 resistance
R2 Branch 2 resistance Delta
R1 R2 Ep EL = Ep
R3 Branch 3 resistance IL = 1.73 x Ip
EL Line voltage Ip = IL/1.73
EL
EP Phase voltage Ip P = ILx EL x 1.73 x PF
W = 1.73 x ILx EL
IL Line current
IP Phase current
W Wattage Note: With resistive loads, PF = 1.0
and therefore P = W
PF Power factor R3 IL

Wattage Calculations:
Wye: W=EL2/R = 3(Ep2)/R
Delta: W = 3(EL2)/R

Ip Wye
R1 Ep IL = Ip
EL = 1.73 x Ep
EL Ep = EL/1.73
P = ILx EL x 1.73 x PF
W = 1.73 x ILx EL
R3

R2
IL

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 77

Chapter 3 Operating Modes

Figure 53 - Delta Configuration for SMC-50 Controller

SMC-50 Controller Power Section

Figure 54 - Grounded Wye Configuration for SMC-50 Controller

SMC-50 Controller Power Section

Figure 55 - Inside-the-Delta Configuration for SMC-50 Controller

78 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Operating Modes Chapter 3

Table 7 - SMC-50 Controller Resistive Load Parameters

Parameter Minimum/Maximum Default

Parameter Name Access Unit
Number Values Value
347 Load Type Motor/Resistive Motor —
Output V Ref
P7 In1
P7 In2
P8 In1
348 Ref Source P8 In2 Output V Ref —
P9 In1
P9 In2 Read/Write
DLX Output 1
DLX Output 2
349 Output V Ref 1…100 1 %
46 Line Voltage 0…700 400 Volts
53 Cur Limit Level 50…600 350 %FLC
78 Motor FLC(1) 1.0…2200.0 1.0 Amps
(1) You must calculate Motor FLC for the resistive load current based on the watts, voltage and configuration.

Starting Modes Overview

The SMC-50 controller starting mode is configured using Starting Mode,

Parameter 49. The available starting modes are: Soft Start [default], Current
Limit, Torque Ramp, Linear Speed (Linear Acceleration), Pump Start, and Full
Voltage.

Linear Speed (Linear Acceleration)

Set Starting Mode (Parameter 49) = Linear Speed.

The SMC-50 can start the motor following a timed linear ramp. The Ramp
Time, Parameter 50, is selectable from 0.0…1000.0 seconds and determines the
time the motor will ramp from a zero speed to full speed condition. An Initial
Torque value, Parameter 51, sets the starting torque supplied to the motor from
the controller. A current limit setting (50…600% selectable of motor FLC) is also
available. If the controller reaches the current limit setpoint, the acceleration
ramp will stop. When the unit comes out of current limit, the linear ramp will
resume.

TIP Kickstart is not available with this starting mode.

Figure 56 provides a graphical example of a linear acceleration and Table 8

provides a list of linear acceleration parameters.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 79

Chapter 3 Operating Modes

Figure 56 - Linear Speed Acceleration Timing Diagram

Current Limit

100%

Linear Acceleration Linear Deceleration

% Speed Ramp Time Stop Time

Start Run Stop

Time (seconds)

Table 8 - Linear Acceleration Mode Parameter List

Parameter Parameter Name Minimum/Maximum Values Default Value Access Units

Number
50 Ramp Time 0.0…1000.0 10.0 SEC
51 Initial Torque 0…90 70 %LRT
53 Cur Limit Level 50…600 350 R/W %FLC
78 Motor FLC 1.0…2200.0 1.0 Amps
199 Speed PGain 0…10000 1000 —

Soft Start

Set Starting Mode (Parameter 49) = Soft Start. This is the factory default value.

This mode has the most general applications. The motor is given an initial torque
setting using Parameter 51, which is user-adjustable from 0…90% of locked rotor
torque. From the initial torque level, the output voltage to the motor is linearly
increased during the acceleration ramp time. The acceleration ramp time is
adjustable from 0…1000 seconds using Parameter 50.

During soft start, a current limit override (50…600% FLC) is also available to
limit current throughout the start cycle using Parameter 53. The controller has
Up-to-Speed (UTS) detection to determine when the motor is at full speed. If
the motor reaches UTS before the end of the ramp time, the SMC-50 controller
applies full voltage to the motor and the soft start is ended. The UTS level can be
configured in percent of the SMC-50 controller’s applied motor voltage using
Parameter 186. The full Soft Start parameter list can be found in Table 9.

TIP If the controller is detecting UTS too soon, the UTS level should be increased.
This typically occurs in very high efficiency motors. If the controller is
detecting UTS too late or not at all, the UTS level should be lowered. This
typically occurs in very low efficiency motors. See Timed Start on page 88
for additional details.

80 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Operating Modes Chapter 3

Figure 57 - Soft Start Timing Diagram

Current Limit
100%

% Voltage
Initial Ramp Time
Torque

Start Run
Time (seconds)

Table 9 - Soft Start Mode Parameter List

Parameter Minimum/Maximum
Parameter Name Default Value Access Units
Number Values
50 Ramp Time 0.0…1000.0 10.0 SEC
51 Initial Torque 0…90 70 %LRT
53 Cur Limit Level 50…600 350 %FLC
54 Kickstart Time 0.0…2.0 0.0 SEC
R/W
55 Kickstart Level 0.0…90 0.0 %LRT
182 Start Delay 0.0…30 0.0 SEC
186 UTS Level 0…100 75 %
78 Motor FLC 1.0…2200.0 1.0 Amps

Selectable Kickstart

This feature provides a torque (current) boost at startup to break away loads that
require a pulse of high torque to get started. The amount of torque pulse is
selectable from 0…90% of locked rotor torque using Kickstart Level, Parameter
55. The time duration for the selectable kickstart is user-adjustable from
0.0…2.0 seconds using Kickstart Time, Parameter 54.

Kickstart is available in Soft Start, Current Limit, Pump, and Torque Control
starting modes.

Figure 58 provides a graphical representation of Kickstart. Table 10 provides the

Kickstart Mode Parameter List.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 81

Chapter 3 Operating Modes

Figure 58 - Selectable Kickstart Timing Diagram

Kickstart
100% Level

Coast-to-Rest

% Voltage
Soft Stop

Kickstart
Time
Initial
Torque

Start Run Soft Stop

Time (seconds)

Table 10 - Kickstart Mode Parameter List

Parameter Parameter Name Minimum/Maximum Values Default Value Access Units

Number
54 Kickstart Time 0.0…2.0 0.0 SEC
R/W
55 Kickstart Level 0.0…90 0.0 %LRT

Current Limit Start

Set Starting Mode (Parameter 49) = Current Limit.

This starting mode provides a true current limit start, and is used when it is
required to limit the maximum starting current to the load. This is accomplished
using Current Limit Level, Parameter 53, which is user-adjustable from
50…600% of the motor full load current rating (FLC) and Ramp Time,
Parameter 50, which is user-adjustable from 0.0…1000.0 seconds. For current
limit, the Ramp Time is the time the controller will hold the current limit level
until switching to full voltage. If the controller senses that the motor has reached
the UTS condition during the current limit starting mode, the current limit ramp
will end. As with Soft Start, the UTS level can be modified to account for load or
motor characteristics. If Ramp Time has expired and UTS is not achieved, the
SMC-50 controller will hold the current limit until UTS is reached, a Motor
Overload Trip, or Starter Overtemp Fault occurs. Kickstart is also available with
current limit.

Figure 59 provides a graphical depiction of a Current Limit Start. Table 11

provides a list of Current Limit Start parameters.

82 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Operating Modes Chapter 3

Figure 59 - Current Limit Start Timing Diagram

600%

Current Limit

% Full Load Current

50%

Start
Time (seconds)

Table 11 - Current Limit Start Parameter List

Parameter Parameter Name Minimum/Maximum Values Default Value Access Units

Number
50 Ramp Time 0.0…1000.0 10.0 SEC
53 Cur Limit Level 50…600 350 %FLC
54 Kickstart Time 0.0…2.0 0.0 SEC
55 Kickstart Level 0.0…90 0.0 R/W %LRT
182 Start Delay 0.0…30 0.0 SEC
186 UTS Level 0.0…100 75 %
78 Motor FLC 1.0…2200.0 1.0 Amps

Full Voltage Start

Set Starting Mode (Parameter 49) = Full Voltage.

This starting mode is used for applications requiring across-the-line starting. The
controller supplied voltage to the motor will reach full voltage within five AC
line cycles (0.08 s at 60 Hz and 0.1 s at 50 Hz).

Figure 60 - Full Voltage Start Timing Diagram

100%
% Voltage

Time (seconds)

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 83

Chapter 3 Operating Modes

Torque Control Start

Set Starting Mode (Parameter 49) = Torque Ramp.

This motor starting method provides a torque ramp from an initial starting
torque level to a maximum torque level over the start time. The torque levels are
entered in percent of rated motor torque. This requires that the Rated Torque
parameter be configured to the motor’s rated torque. The torque start operating
mode requires motor tuning to function properly. Tuning can be forced manually
or it will otherwise be performed automatically the first time the motor is started.
See Motor Tuning on page 75.

Figure 61 - Torque Control Start Timing Diagram

Current Limit

Max. Motor Torque

100%
% Rated Motor Torque

Torque
Ramp

Starting Ramp Time

Torque

Start Run Soft Stop

Time (seconds)

Table 12 provides a list of Torque Control Start parameters.

Table 12 - Torque Start Mode Parameter List

Parameter Parameter Name Minimum/Maximum Values Default Value Access Units

Number
305 Starting Torque 0…300 100 %
52 Max Torque 0…300 250 %
50 Ramp Time 0.0…1000.0 10.0 SEC
47 Rated Torque 0…10000 10 N·m
48 Rated Speed 750, 900, 1500, 1800, 3600 1800 R/W rpm
53 Cur Limit Level 50…600 350 %FLC
54 Kickstart Time 0.0…2.0 0.0 SEC
55 Kickstart Level 0.0…90 0.0 %LRT
78 Motor FLC 1.0…2200.0 1.0 A

84 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Operating Modes Chapter 3

Pump Control Start and Stop

Set Starting Mode (Parameter 49) = Pump Start.

Set Stop Mode (Parameter 65) = Pump Stop.

This control mode helps to reduces surges (fluid hammer) during the starting and
stopping of a centrifugal pump by smoothly accelerating and decelerating the
motor. As such, starting and stopping parameters are typically configured
together. The microprocessor analyzes the motor variables and generates
commands that control the motor and reduce the possibility of surges occurring
in the system.

The starting time (Ramp Time, Parameter 50) is programmable from

0.0…1000.0 seconds and the stopping time (Stop Time, Parameter 66) is
programmable from 0…999 seconds when the Pump Stop mode is selected from
Parameter 65.

ATTENTION: Pump stopping is not intended to be used as an emergency stop.

See the applicable standard for emergency stop requirements.

ATTENTION: Pump stopping may cause motor heating depending on the

mechanical dynamics of the pumping system. Therefore, select the lowest
stopping time setting that will satisfactorily stop the pump.

Figure 62 - Pump Control Mode Timing Diagram

100%
Motor Speed

Pump Start Run Pump Stop

Ramp Time Stop Time
Time (seconds)

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 85

Chapter 3 Operating Modes

Table 13 - Pump Start Control Mode Parameter List

Parameter Parameter Name Minimum/Maximum Values Default Value Access Units

Number
50 Ramp Time 0.0…1000.0 10.0 SEC
51 Initial Torque 0…90 70 %LRT
67 Backspin Timer 0…999 0 SEC
R/W
54 Kickstart Time 0.0…2.0 0.0 SEC
55 Kickstart Level 0.0…90 0.0 %LRT
78 Motor FLC 1.0…2200.0 1.0 Amps

Table 14 - Pump Stop Mode Parameter List

Parameter Parameter Name Minimum/Maximum Values Default Value Access Units

Number
66 Stop Time 0.0…999.0 0.0 SEC
R/W
68 Pump Pedestal 0.0…50.0 0.0 %

TIP Pump Pedestal, Parameter 68, lets you modify the internal pump control
algorithm for special application conditions.
For example, if overload trips persist during stopping, either reduce the Stop
Time, Parameter 66, or increase the Pump Pedestal in 5% increments. Try
not to exceed 40%

Additional Start Features— Dual Ramp Start

Functions
This feature is useful for applications that have varying loads (and therefore
varying starting feature requirements). Dual Ramp lets you select between two
separate start profiles with separately adjustable ramp times, initial torque
settings, etc. to best meet the application needs.

The second start profile is enabled by configuring one of the controller auxiliary
inputs to Dual Ramp and activating that input. When the Start command is then
activated, the second start profile will begin.

86 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Operating Modes Chapter 3

Figure 63 - Dual Ramp Start Timing Diagram

Current Limit 2
Current Limit 1
100% Ramp Time 2

% Voltage
Initial
Torque 2

Ramp Time 1
Initial
Torque 1

Start 1 Run 1
Start 2 Run 2
Time (seconds)

Table 15 - Dual Ramp Start Mode Parameter List

Parameter Parameter Minimum/Maximum Values Default Value Access Units

Number Name
Full Voltage, Current Limit, Soft
49 Starting Mode Start, Linear Speed, Torque Soft Start
Ramp, Pump Start
50 Ramp Time 0.0…1000.0 10.0 SEC
51 Initial Torque 0…90 70 %LRT
52 Max Torque 0…300 250 %
53 Cur Limit Level 50-600 350 %FLC
54 Kickstart Time 0.0…2.0 0.0 SEC
55 Kickstart Level 0.0…90 0.0 %LRT
305 Starting Torque 0…300 100 %
Full Voltage, Current Limit, Soft R/W
58 Starting Mode 2 Start, Linear Speed, Torque Soft Start
Ramp, Pump Start
59 Ramp Time 2 0.0…1000.0 10.0 SEC
60 Initial Torque 2 0…90 70 %LRT
61 Max Torque 2 0…300 250 %
62 Cur Limit Level 2 50…600 350 %FLC
63 Kickstart Time 2 0.0…2.0 0.0 SEC
64 Kickstart Level 2 0…90 0.0 %LRT
306 Starting Torque 2 0…300 100 %
182 Start Delay 0…30 0 SEC

Start Timer (Start Delay)

This feature lets you set a user-configurable start (0…30 s) delay from the point
when the start command is enabled until the start sequence actually occurs. This
feature applies to any start mode.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 87

Chapter 3 Operating Modes

Timed Start

Timed Start, Parameter 183, forces the starting profile to complete the entire
user-configured ramp time before applying full voltage. In some starting modes
(for example, soft start) and with certain loads (for example, lightly loaded
motor), an early UTS condition can be generated placing the SMC-50 controller
in full-voltage start, which might cause excessive current. Setting Timed Start to
"Enable" forces all starts to complete the configured Ramp Time, Parameter 50.

Backspin Timer

A Backspin Timer, Parameter 67, is provided in order to avoid starting a motor

into a backspin condition, which may result in motor shaft damage. The
user-configured time begins to count down after a stop maneuver is complete. All
start inputs are ignored until the backspin timer has timed out.

Motor Winding Heater Function

The Motor Winding Heater function provides low levels of current to each of the
motor windings to preheat a cold motor before starting. To avoid thermally
stressing a single motor winding, the SMC-50 controller cycles the heating
current to each of the phases. This feature provides a programmable heating level,
heating time, and a control (terminal block) input which can be used to start the
process.

TIP Configuration of control module inputs is done via Input 1, Parameter 56, or
Input 2, Parameter 57. If a 150-SM4 Optional Digital I/O Module is
configured, its inputs can also be used for the motor winding heater
function.

Table 16 - Motor Winding Heater Parameter List

Parameter Parameter Name Minimum/Maximum Values Default Value Access Units

Number
220 Heating Time 0…1000 0 SEC
R/W
221 Heating Level 0…100 0 %

The motor winding heater function can be activated after a valid start command
is received. After a valid start, the activation of the heating function can be
performed by:
• programming the Heating Time, Parameter 220, to a non-zero value or
• configuring an input to "Motor Heater" and activating that input prior to
the start command.

88 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Operating Modes Chapter 3

The heater function continues for the specified time or until the input is
deactivated, at which time the motor starts. The heater function is disabled if the:
• Heating Level, Parameter 221, is set to zero, or
• Heating Time, Parameter 220, is set to zero, or
• input is inactive (or not configured) at the time of the start command.

Stopping Modes Overview

Stop Mode, Parameter 65, defines the type of stop maneuver performed by the
SMC-50 controller when a stop command is issued. The STOP command can be
initiated through any input(1), a network command, or the JOG key on the A6
HIM.

TIP The STOP Key on a Cat. no. 20-HIM-A6 or 20-HIM-C6S device initiates a
Coast-to-Stop.

The available stopping modes are:

• Coast-to-Stop
• Soft Stop
• Linear Speed Deceleration
• SMB Smart Motor Braking
• Pump Stop
• External Brake

Coast-to-Stop

Set Starting Mode (Parameter 49) = Coast. This is the factory default value.

When Stop Mode, Parameter 65, is set to Coast-to-Stop and the STOP
command is initiated, the starter will not perform any other function and the
motor coasts to a stop. No other Stop parameters need to be configured if
Coast-to-Stop is enabled.

The Coast-to-Stop command overrides all other commands that could result in
motor operation. When this command is initiated, it is latched into the
controller’s logic so that no other motor command can occur until it is cleared. It
is cleared when all terminal block Start inputs are opened and any other Soft Stop
(Inhibits a Start) input is removed. Note that in a 2-wire control scheme, this
involves placing the Start/Stop input in the Stop position; in a 3-wire control
scheme, this involves opening the Start input.

(1) To use terminal block inputs to initiate a Stop Mode, configure the respective input for Start/Stop or Stop Option.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 89

Chapter 3 Operating Modes

Soft Stop

Set Stop Mode (Parameter 65) = Soft Stop.

The Soft Stop feature can be used in applications that require an extended stop
time. The voltage ramp down time is user-adjustable from 0…999 seconds using
Stop Time, Parameter 66. The load will stop when the SMC-50 controller
output voltage drops to a point where the load torque is greater than the
developed motor torque.

ATTENTION: Soft Stop is not intended to be used as an emergency stop. See the
applicable standards for emergency stop requirements.

Figure 64 - Soft Stop

Figure 65 - Soft Stop Timing Diagram

100%
% Voltage

Stop Time

Run Soft Stop

Time (seconds)

Table 17 - Soft Stop Mode Parameter List

Parameter Parameter Name Minimum/Maximum Values Default Value Access Units

Number
66 Stop Time 0…999 0 R/W SECS

TIP For additional details, see Figure 72 on page 99

Linear Speed (Linear Deceleration)

Set Stop Mode (Parameter 65) = Linear Speed.

When Stop Mode, Parameter 65, is configured for Linear Speed, the SMC-50
controller will stop the motor following a timed linear speed ramp configured in
Stop Time, Parameter 66. A current limit setting is also available to limit the
current while stopping. If the current limit level is reached, the motor will
decelerate faster than the defined ramp. If motor current falls below the current
limit, the ramp is resumed.

90 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Operating Modes Chapter 3

ATTENTION: Linear Stop is not intended to be used as an emergency stop. See

the applicable standards for emergency stop requirements.

Figure 66 - Linear Speed Deceleration Timing Diagram

Current Limit

100%

Linear Acceleration Linear Deceleration

% Speed

Ramp Time Stop Time

Start Run Stop

Time (seconds)

Table 18 - Linear Deceleration Mode Parameter List

Parameter Minimum/Maximum
Parameter Name Default Value Access Units
Number Values
66 Stop Time 0.0…999 0.0 SEC
R/W
53 Cur Limit Level 50…600 350 %FLC

For additional details, see Figure 72 on page 99.

Smart Motor Braking (SMB)

Set Stop Mode (Parameter 65) = SMB.

When Stop Mode, Parameter 65, is configured for SMB and the Stop Maneuver
is commanded, the SMC-50 controller will apply the configured braking current
and brake the motor to a stop. This function can be used in applications that
require reduced stopping times. The SMC-50 incorporates a
microprocessor-based system that applies braking current to the motor without
any additional equipment. This option offers a user-adjustable braking current
setting from 0% to 400% of the motor’s full load current rating using Braking
Current, Parameter 69. Further, it provides automatic brake current shut-off at
zero speed detection.

ATTENTION: Smart Motor Braking is not intended to be used as an emergency

stop. See applicable standards for emergency stop requirements.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 91

Chapter 3 Operating Modes

Figure 67 - SMB Timing Diagram

100% Smart Motor Braking

Coast-to-Rest

Motor Speed
Stop Time

Start Run Brake Automatic

Time (seconds) Zero-speed

Table 19 - SMB Mode Parameter List

Parameter Parameter Name Minimum/Maximum Values Default Value Access Units

Number
66 Stop Time(1) (2) 0…999 0 SECS
R/W
69 Braking Current 0…400 0 %FLC
(1) You do not need to program a Stop Time when you are using SMB. SMB automatically controls the duration (Stop Time) of the
braking current to the motor from the Running at Speed condition until a zero speed condition (Zero Speed Braking Shut Off
feature/function). Programming a Stop Time overrides the SMB Zero Speed Braking Shutoff feature/function. This could result in
current being applied to a stopped motor, which causes the motor to overheat.
(2) With Stop Time, Parameter 66, set to a non-zero time value, the user-selected "Braking Current", Parameter 69, is applied for the
user-configured "Stop Time" regardless of the motor speed (for example, Automatic Zero Speed Detection disabled). You can use this
braking method in applications where detecting zero speed is ineffective or when braking the motor to a complete stop results in
random overload trips. Note that an ideal Stop Time setting can be accomplished by trial and error, but should always allow for some
coast time. Setting the Stop Time for too long of a time period can result in braking current to be applied to a stopped motor and will
likely result in overload trips.

Preset Slow Speed and Slow Speed with Braking

The Slow Speed Mode can be used in applications that require a jog for
general-purpose positioning. Preset Slow Speed 1, Parameter 72, and Preset Slow
Speed 2, Parameter 350, provide operation from +1…+15% forward or -1…-15%
reverse of the motor base speed.

You must configure an SMC-50 controller control input for Slow Speed to
initiate a slow speed operation. You must configure a second input for Coast or
Stop Option. User parameters 56 and 57.

The Slow Speed operating mode requires motor tuning to function properly.
Tuning can be forced manually or it will otherwise be performed automatically
the first time the motor is started. See Motor Tuning on page 75.

To provide more precise stopping from a slow speed operation, braking from slow
speed can also be configured using Slow Brake Current, Parameter 73. The
maximum allowable brake current is 350% FLC. A value of 0 (default) applies no
braking and a motor coast-to-stop results and slow speed is terminated.

92 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Operating Modes Chapter 3

ATTENTION: Slow speed running is not intended for continuous operation due
to reduced motor cooling.

Figure 68 - Preset Slow Speed Timing Diagram

100%

Motor Speed
Forward
15% - High

1% - Low
Start Run
-1% - Low

-15% - High
Reverse Time (seconds)

Table 20 - Preset Slow Speed and Slow Speed with Braking Parameter List

Parameter Parameter Name Minimum/Maximum Default Value Access Units

Number Values
56 Input 1 0…14 4 (Stop option) —
57 Input 2 0…14 0 (Disable) —
72 Slow Speed 1 -15…+15(1) +10(1) R/W %
73 Slow Brake Cur 0…350(2) 0(2) %FLC
350 Slow Speed 2 -15…+15(1) +10(1) %
(1) Direction of the motor rotation is dependent on the sign (±) of Slow Speed %.
(2) With Slow Brake Cur, Parameter 73, set to 0 (default), the motor coasts-to-stop from Slow Speed. When the value is between 1...350,
braking current is applied from Slow Speed.

Accu-Stop™

This function combines the benefits of the SMB and Preset Slow Speed features.
For general-purpose positioning, the Accu-Stop function provides a brake from
full speed to the preset slow speed setting, then a brake or coast-to-stop.

The Accu-Stop function is enabled whenever the Stop Mode, Parameter 65, is
configured for SMB and:
• a control input is configured for Stop
• a control input is configured for Start
• a control input is configured for Slow Speed.

With the above SMC-50 controller control configuration and with the motor
running, enabling the Slow Speed input initiates an SMB to the configured Slow

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 93

Chapter 3 Operating Modes

Speed percent value, Parameter 72. The SMC-50 controller continues to run the
motor in slow speed until the Slow Speed input is disabled, At that point, the
motor either brakes to stop or coasts to stop, depending on the value of the Slow
Brake Cur, Parameter 73. If the value of Slow Brake Cur is zero (0), the motor
coasts to stop from Slow Speed. If the value of Slow Brake Cur is a value other
than zero, the SMC-50 controller uses braking to stop the motor using that value
as a percent of the Motor FLC. See Figure 69, Figure 76 and Table 21.

The Accu-Stop operating mode requires motor tuning to function properly.

Tuning can be forced manually or it will otherwise be performed automatically
the first time the motor is started. See Motor Tuning on page 75.

ATTENTION: Accu-Stop is not intended to be used as an Emergency Stop. See

applicable standards for emergency stop requirements.

Figure 69 - Accu-Stop Timing Diagram

100%

Braking
Motor Speed

Slow Speed

Coast-to-Rest

1…15% 1…15%

Slow Start Run Brake Slow Speed

Speed Braking
Time (seconds)

Table 21 - Accu-Stop Mode Parameter List

Parameter Parameter Name Minimum/Maximum Values Default Value Access Units

Number
65 Stop Mode SMB Coast
66 Stop Time(1)(2) 0…999 0 SECS
69 Braking Current 0…400 0 R/W %FLC
72 Slow Speed (3) -15…+15 +10 %
73 Slow Brake Cur(4) 0…350 0 %FLC
(1) You do not need to program a Stop Time when you are using SMB. SMB automatically controls the duration (Stop Time) of the
braking current to the motor from the Running at Speed condition until a zero speed condition (Zero Speed Braking Shut Off
feature/function). Programming a Stop Time overrides the SMB Zero Speed Braking Shutoff feature/function. This could result in
current being applied to a stopped motor, which causes the motor to overheat.
(2) With Stop Time, Parameter 66, set to a non-zero time value, the user-selected "Braking Current", Parameter 69, is applied for the
user-configured "Stop Time" regardless of the motor speed (for example, Automatic Zero Speed Detection disabled). You can use this
braking method in applications where detecting zero speed is ineffective or when braking the motor to a complete stop results in
random overload trips. Note that an ideal Stop Time setting can be accomplished by trial and error, but should always allow for some
coast time. Setting the Stop Time for too long of a time period can result in braking current to be applied to a stopped motor and will
likely result in overload trips.
(3) Direction of the motor rotation is dependent on the sign (±) of Slow Speed.

94 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Operating Modes Chapter 3

(4) With Slow Brake Cur, Parameter 73, set to 0 (default), the motor coasts-to-stop from Slow Speed. When the value is between 1...350,
braking current is applied from Slow Speed.

External Braking Control

Set Stop Mode (Parameter 65) = External Brake.

The external braking control feature enables an external mechanical motor brake
to function in concert with the SMC-50 controller stop parameter. When the
Stop Mode, Parameter 65, is set to Ext Brake and the stop maneuver is
commanded, the starter will remove power to the motor and close any auxiliary
output configured for External Brake. The auxiliary output relay configured for
External Brake(1) will remain active for the user-configured Stop Time,
Parameter 66. Once the Stop Time is complete, the unit will open the auxiliary
output and switch to the stopped state. While in the External Brake stopped
mode, all relays and status functions will operate as they would in any other
mode.

Table 22 - External Braking Control Mode Parameter List

Parameter Parameter Name Minimum/Maximum Values Default Value Access Units

Number
66 Stop Time 0…999 0 R/W SECS

Running Modes Internal Bypass Modes

The unit will run under SCR control mode when it starts and stops a motor.
When the motor is up to speed, the internal bypass contactor(s) close. Motor
current then flows through the contactor(s) and not through the SCRs.

Solid-state (SCR) Control Mode

The unit will run at full voltage under SCR control mode when the unit is at full
speed and when no external bypass contactor is provided. All SMC-50 controller
diagnostic and power monitoring features are available in this running mode.

External Bypass Control Mode

An external bypass contactor may be configured to operate the motor while

running at full voltage and speed. The SMC-50 controller controls the external
bypass contactor by using one of the auxiliary relay outputs configured to Ext.
Bypass using that output's configuration parameter.

(1) The appropriate auxiliary relay must be configured for the Ext. Brake stopping function using the Aux X relay configuration
parameter (for example, Aux 1:Parameter 172, Aux 2: Parameter 176)

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 95

Chapter 3 Operating Modes

Devices rated 90…180 A

In external bypass control mode on devices rated 90…180 A, the controller's

integral current sensors are out of the control circuit. If all the current sensing
features (including motor overload) are desired while running in external bypass
control mode, then the optional PTC/Ground Fault/External Current
Transformer Expansion Module (150-SM2) and an 825-MCM180 current
sensor are required. See Figure 111 on page 286 and Figure 42 on page 64.

Devices rated 210…520 A

In external bypass control mode on devices rated 210…520 A, the controller's

integral current sensors remain in the control circuit by using Cat. No.
150-SCBK (devices rated 210…320 A) or Cat. No. 150-SDBK (devices rated
361…520 A) Bypass Kits. See Figure 70 on page 96. The optional PTC/Ground
Fault/External Current Transformer Expansion Module (150-SM2) and an
825-MCM20 with user supplied CTs with 5 A secondary can be used in place of
the bypass kits. See Figure 109 on page 284 and Figure 42 on page 64.

TIP When using the Cat. No. 150-SCBK or 150-SDBK bypass kit, the controller
firmware must be FRN 3.001 or higher.

The Cat. No. 150-SM2 Expansion Module can only be inserted into control
module expansion port 7 or 8. In addition, only one 150-SM2 Expansion
Module can be used per control module. Once the 150-SM2 Expansion Module
is installed in the control module and power is applied, it must be configured
using the 20-HIM-A6, the 20-HIM-C6S, or PC software (for example,
Connected Components Workbench software). For additional configuration
details refer to Chapter 2, and Chapter 6.

Figure 70 - Wiring Diagram for Frame C (Cat. No. 150-SC…) or Frame D (Cat. No. 150-SD…)
Devices with Bypass Contactor and Bypass Bus Kit
(2)

T1/2 L1/1 Circuit

SMC-50 Controller Protective
Device 3-phase AC line power
Motor (1) (3)
T2/4 L2/3 (1)

T3/6 L3/5

Bypass Contactor (1) (4) (5)

(1) Customer supplied.
(2) SMC-50 controller Bypass bus kit Cat. No. 150-SCBK (Frame C; Cat. No. 150-SC…) or 150-SDBK (Frame D; Cat. No. 150-SD…).
NOTE: Controller FRN 3.001 or higher is required.
(3) Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state (controller stopped), some form of upstream line power isolation is recommended if maintenance is required on the motor. See
the Isolation Contactor Applications for details.
(4) Bypass must be controlled by an auxiliary contact of the SMC-50 controller that is configured for external bypass.

96 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Operating Modes Chapter 3

(5) In North America, size the bypass contactor per the motor Hp and FLA. In IEC applications, size the bypass contactor per the motor AC-1 rating. The short-circuit rating of the bypass
contactor must be similar to that of the SMC-50 controller.
NOTE: In addition to a small amount of leakage current flowing through an SCR in the off-state, failure of one or more solid-state power switching components allows uncontrolled
current to flow to the winding(s) of the motor. This could potentially result in overheating or damage to the motor. To prevent potential personal injury or equipment damage, the
installation of an isolation contactor or shunt trip-type circuit breaker capable of interrupting the motor’s locked rotor current on the line side of the SMC-50 controller is
recommended. Operation of the isolation device should be coordinated using one of the SMC-50 controller auxiliary contacts configured to NORMAL.

External Overload (all devices)

The SMC-50 controller can also be used with an external overload in

conjunction with the external bypass. In this configuration the external bypass
contactor must be fully rated to the motor Hp/kW and FLA. See Figure 71 on
page 97.

Figure 71 - Wiring Diagram with Bypass Contactor and External Overload

T1/2 L1/1 Circuit

SMC-50 Controller Protective
Device 3-phase AC line power
Motor (1) (2) T2/4 L2/3 (1)

T3/6 L3/5

Bypass Contactor (1) (3) (4)

Overload (1)

(1) Customer supplied.

(2) Due to current leakage through an SCR in the OFF state (controller stopped), some form of upstream line power isolation is recommended if maintenance is required on the motor. See
the Isolation Contactor Applications for details.
(3) Bypass must be controlled by an auxiliary contact of the SMC-50 controller that is configured for external bypass.
(4) Bypass contactor must be fully rated to motor Hp/kW and FLA.
NOTE: In addition to a small amount of leakage current flowing through an SCR in the off-state, failure of one or more solid-state power switching components allows uncontrolled
current to flow to the winding(s) of the motor. This could potentially result in overheating or damage to the motor. To prevent potential personal injury or equipment damage, the
installation of an isolation contactor or shunt trip-type circuit breaker capable of interrupting the motor’s locked rotor current on the line side of the SMC-50 controller is
recommended. Operation of the isolation device should be coordinated using one of the SMC-50 controller auxiliary contacts configured to NORMAL.

Energy Saver Mode

The energy saver function only applies during light motor load situations at
which time the SMC-50 controller reduces current to the motor and thereby
saves energy.

When in energy saver operation, the Energy Savings status bit is set. In addition,
Energy Savings, Parameter 15, indicates the percentage energy savings.

Parameter 17 - [Power Factor] should be monitored and recorded when the

motor is running at no/light load and at full/heavy load. The power factor value

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 97

Chapter 3 Operating Modes

where the controller enters Energy Saver mode is determined by setting

Parameter 193 - [Energy Saver] to a value between the no/light load and
full/heavy load recorded values.

Table 23 - Energy Saver Mode Parameter List

Parameter Parameter Name Minimum/Maximum Values Default Value Access Units

Number
15 Energy Savings 0…100 0 R %
17 Power Factor -1.00…1.00 0 R —
193 Energy Saver 0.00…1.00 0.00 R/W —

NOTE: Set Parameter 193=0 to disable Energy Saver mode.

Emergency RUN

With the SMC-50 controller, a control terminal or network (via Comm Control
Word) input can be configured as the Emergency Run command input. All faults
are disabled when this input is active.

The Emergency Run command input does not actually start the unit, but causes the unit to
run in the Emergency Run mode. The Emergency Run command can be initiated at any time.
NOTE:
This command is not latched allowing the Emergency Run mode to be cancelled while the
unit is still running.

Sequence of Operation Figure 72 through Figure 77 show the different operation sequences for the Soft
Stop, Preset Slow Speed, Pump Control, SMB Smart Motor Braking, Accu-Stop,
and Slow Speed with Braking options.

When control power is present but 3-phase line power is not applied, a valid
START command causes AUX contacts configured for "Normal" to close. While
waiting for 3-phase line power, the SMC-50 controller will indicate "Starting".
The start sequence is initiated when 3-phase line power is applied.

ATTENTION: You are responsible for determining which stopping mode is best
suited to the application and will meet applicable standards for operator safety
on a particular machine.

ATTENTION: Stopping modes are NOT intended to be used as an emergency

stop. See applicable standards for emergency stop requirements.

ATTENTION: The Energy Savings setting is motor and load dependent. Setting
this to high may cause the unit to enter energy savings to soon and increase
current.

98 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Operating Modes Chapter 3

Figure 72 - Soft Stop

Motor Speed 100%

Stop Time

Coast to rest

Start Run Soft Stop

Time (seconds)
Push Buttons

Start
Closed
Open

Stop
Closed
Open

Soft Stop
(Stop Option) (1) Closed
Open
Auxiliary Contacts If Soft Stop is selected
Normal
Closed
Open

Up-to-speed If Coast-to-Rest is Selected

Closed
Open

(1) When the Stop Mode, Parameter 65, configured for Soft Stop and with the Input push button configured for the Stop Option

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 99

Chapter 3 Operating Modes

Figure 73 - Preset Slow Speed

Motor Speed

100%
Coast to rest

Soft Stop

1…15%

(1)
Coast
(2) Brake

Slow Speed Start Run Soft Stop

Push Buttons Time (seconds)
Soft Stop (3)
(Stop Option) Closed
Open

Start
Closed
Open
Stop
Closed
Open

Slow Speed Closed Coast

Open

Auxiliary Contacts
If Soft Stop is selected
Normal Closed
Open

Up-to-speed If Coast-to-Rest is Selected

Closed
Open

(1) Coast if Slow Brake Cur Parameter = 0.

(2) Brake if Slow Brake Cur Parameter >0 and <350.
(3) When the Stop Mode, Parameter 65, configured for Soft Stop and with the Input push button configured for the Stop
Option.

100 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Operating Modes Chapter 3

Figure 74 - Pump Control

Motor Speed

100%

Coast to rest

Pump Start Run Pump Stop

Time (seconds)

Push Buttons

Start
Closed
Open
Stop
Closed

Pump Stop Open

(1)
(Stop Option)
Closed
Open

Auxiliary Contacts If Pump Stop is selected

Normal Closed
Open

Up-to-speed If Coast-to-Rest is Selected

Closed
Open

(1) When Stop Mode, Parameter 65, is configured for Pump Stop and the Input push button is configured for Stop Option.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 101

Chapter 3 Operating Modes

Figure 75 - Smart Motor Braking (SMB)

Motor Speed

100%

Smart Motor Braking

Coast-to-Rest

Automatic
Zero-speed Shutoff

Start Run Brake Stop Time

Time (seconds)

Push Buttons

Start
Closed
Open

Stop Closed
Open
Smart Motor Braking
(Stop Option) (1) Closed
Open

Auxiliary Contacts
If Brake is selected
Normal
Closed
Open

Up-to-speed
Closed If Coast-to-Rest is Selected

Open

1) When the Stop Mode, Parameter 65, configured for SMB and with the Input push button configured for the Stop Option

102 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Operating Modes Chapter 3

Figure 76 - Accu-Stop
Motor Speed
100%
Coast-to-Rest

Braking Coast From

Slow Speed
Slow Speed
Braking
Slow Speed

Slow Start Run Brake

Speed
Time (seconds)
Push Buttons
Stop
Closed
Open

Start
Closed
Open

Slow Speed
Closed
Open
Auxiliary Contacts

Normal
Closed
Open

Coast Input Open Slow Brake

Current = 0 = Coast
Up-to-speed
Closed
Open

NOTE: Parameter Selections:

1. Parameter 65: Stop Mode = SMB
2. Parameter 69: Braking Current = User Defined Value
3. Parameter 72: Slow Speed = User Defined Value/Selection
4. Parameter 73: Slow Brake Cur = User Defined Value (0 selected enables Coast-to-Rest)

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 103

Chapter 3 Operating Modes

Figure 77 - Slow Speed with Braking

Motor Speed
100%
Coast-to-Rest

(1) Coast Braking

(2) Brake
Slow Start Run Stop
Speed
Time (seconds)

Push Buttons

Start
Closed
Open
Stop
Closed
Open Coast

Slow Speed
Closed
Open
Smart Motor Braking
(Stop Option) (3)
Closed
Open
Auxiliary Contacts Brake
Normal
Closed
Open
Up-to-speed
Closed If Coast-to-Rest is Selected
Open

(1) Coast if Slow Brake Cur Parameter = 0.

(2) Brake if Slow Brake Cur Parameter >0 and <350.
(3) When the Stop Mode, Parameter 65, configured for SMB and with the Input push button configured for the Stop
Option.

104 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Operating Modes Chapter 3

Figure 78 - External Braking

Motor Speed
100%
Coast
External
Brake
Time (seconds)

Push Buttons

Start
Closed

Open

Stop
Closed

Open

External Braking (1)

(Stop Option) Closed

Open

External
Auxiliary Normal Brake
Closed

Open Coast

Auxiliary External
Brake
Closed
User-defined Time
Open

(1) When the Stop Mode, Parameter 65, is configured for Ext. Brake, (Eternal Brake) and the input push button is configured for STOP
option.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 105

Chapter 3 Operating Modes

Notes:

106 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Chapter 4

Special Application Considerations

Introduction This chapter describes some extra application considerations for the SMC-50
controller.

Design Philosophy SMC-50 controllers are designed to operate in today’s industrial environments.
Our controllers are manufactured to provide consistent and reliable operation.

Line Voltage Conditions

Voltage transients, disturbances, harmonics and noise exist in any industrial

supply. A solid-state controller must be able to withstand these noises and should
not be an unnecessary source of generating noise back into the line.

Ease of selection for the required line voltage is achieved with a design that
provides operation over a wide voltage range, at 50/60 Hz, within a given
controller rating.

Current and Thermal Ratings

Solid-state controller ratings must ensure reliability under the wide range of
current levels and starting times needed in various applications.

Mechanical Shock and Vibration

Solid-state controllers must withstand the shock and vibration generated by the
machinery that they control. SMC-50 controllers meet the same shock and
vibration specifications as electromechanical starters.

Noise and Radio Frequency (RF) Immunity

This product meets Class A requirements for EMC emission levels.

Altitude

Altitudes up to 2000 meters (6560 ft) are permitted without de-rating. The
allowable ambient temperature for the controller must be de-rated for altitudes

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 107

Chapter 4 Special Application Considerations

above 2000 meters (6560 ft). Utilizing the SMC Thermal Wizard helps you to
determine the proper size SMC-50 controller.

Pollution

This product is intended for a Pollution Degree 2 environment.

Atmospheric Protection

ANSI/ISA-71.04-2013; Class G3 Environment.

Setup

Simple, easily understood settings provide identifiable, consistent results.

For ease of installation, the controllers include compact design and feed-through
wiring. SMC-50 controllers are global products rated at 50/60 Hz. You can use
multiple starting methods to program the controller, including an optional
keypad with LCD display. Expandable inputs/outputs, analog, and
communication cards are available to provide moire control flexibility.

Motor Overload Protection When it is coordinated with the proper short-circuit protection, overload
protection is intended to protect the motor, motor controller, and power wiring
against overheating caused by excessive overcurrent. The SMC-50 controller
meets applicable requirements as a motor overload protective device.

The SMC-50 controller incorporates, as standard, electronic motor overload

protection. This overload protection is accomplished electronically with circuits
and an I2t algorithm.

The built-in overload protection is programmable, providing you with flexibility.

The overload trip class can be selected for class OFF, or 5…30 protection. You can
program the trip current to the motor full load current rating.

Thermal memory is included in the device functionality to model motor

operating and cooling temperatures. Ambient insensitivity is inherent in the
electronic design of the overload protection.

The SMC-50 controller has overload protection available for single-speed

motors. When the SMC-50 controller is applied to a two-speed motor, you must
disable the Overload function via Parameter #230—Motor Fault En and you
must provide separate overload relays for each speed. Figure 41 on page 63 shows
an example of a motor protection wiring schematic.

108 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Special Application Considerations Chapter 4

Multiple Motors

The SMC-50 controller operates with more than one motor connected to it.
Motors should be mechanically coupled. To size the controller, add the total
nameplate amperes of all of the connected loads. You should turn off the stall and
jam features. Separate overloads are still required to meet the National Electric
Code (NEC) requirements.

Figure 79 - Multi-Motor Application

L1/1 T1/2
3-phase AC line
power
L2/3 T2/4

L3/5 T3/6
Overload Relay Motor 1
(Customer supplied) (Customer supplied)
Branch Protection SMC-50 Controller
(Customer supplied) Disable the overload function
using Parameter 230—
Motor Fault En

Overload Relay Motor 2

(Customer supplied) (Customer supplied)

You cannot use the built-in overload protection in multi-motor applications.

Disable the SMC-50 Overload function using Parameter #230—Motor Fault En

Special Motors
You can apply or retrofit the SMC-50 controller to special motors (wye-delta,
part winding, synchronous, and wound rotor) as described in the following
paragraphs.

Wye-Delta Motors

Wye-Delta is a traditional electromechanical method of reduced voltage starting.

It requires a delta-wound motor with all of the leads brought out to facilitate a
wye connection. At the start command, approximately 58% of full line voltage is
applied, generating about 33% of the motor’s full voltage starting torque
capability. After an adjustable time interval, the motor is automatically connected
in delta.

To apply an SMC-50 controller to a wye-delta motor, the power wiring from the
SMC-50 controller is wired in an inside-the-delta configuration to the motor.
This connects all six motor connections back to the SMC-50 controller. Because
the controller applies a reduced-voltage start electronically, the transition

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 109

Chapter 4 Special Application Considerations

connection is no longer necessary. You can adjust the starting torque with
parameter programming.

Figure 80 - Inside-the-Delta Wiring

1/L1 3/L2 5/L3

12/T6 2/T1 8/T4 4/T2 10/T5 6/T3

M
3~

Part Winding

Part winding motors incorporate two separate, parallel windings in their design.
In a traditional part winding starter, one set of windings is given full line voltage,
and the motor draws about 400% of the motor’s full load current rating. About
45% of locked rotor torque is generated. After a preset interval, the second
winding is brought online in parallel with the first and the motor develops
normal torque.

You may wire the part winding motor to an SMC-50 controller by connecting
both windings in parallel. You can adjust the starting torque to match the load
with parameter programming.

Wound Rotor

Wound rotor motors require careful consideration when implementing SMC-50

controllers. A wound rotor motor depends on external resistors to develop high
starting torque. It may be possible to develop enough starting torque using the
SMC-50 controller and a single step of resistors. The resistors are placed in the
rotor circuit until the motor reaches approximately 70% of synchronous speed.
At this point, the resistors are removed from the secondary by a shorting
contactor. Resistor sizing depends on the characteristics of the motor used.

110 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Special Application Considerations Chapter 4

It is not recommended to short the rotor slip rings during startup, because
starting torque is greatly reduced, even with full voltage applied to the motor. The
starting torque is even further reduced with the SMC-50 controller because the
output voltage to the motor is reduced on startup.

Synchronous

Synchronous, brush-type motors differ from standard squirrel-cage motors in the

construction of the rotor. The rotor of a synchronous motor is composed of two
separate windings: a starting winding and a DC magnetic field winding.

The starting winding is used to accelerate the motor to about 95% of

synchronous speed. Once it is at that level, the DC magnetic field winding is
energized to pull the motor up to synchronous speed.

You can retrofit the SMC-50 controller to a synchronous controller by replacing

the stator contactor with the SMC-50 controller and maintaining the DC field
application package.

SMC-50 Motor Winding Internal

Heater
The SMC-50 motor winding heater function provides low levels of current to
each of the motor windings to preheat a cold motor before starting. To avoid
stressing a single motor winding, the SMC-50 controller cycles the current to the
three motor phases. This feature provides a programmable heating level, heating
time, and terminal block input.

You can activate the motor winding heater after it receives a valid start command.
After a valid start, activate the heating function by programming the Heating
Time parameter to a non-zero value or by configuring a terminal block input to
"Motor Heater" and activating that input prior to the start command. The heater
function continues for the specified time or until the input is deactivated, at
which time the motor starts.

The heater function is disabled if the parameter Heater Level is set to zero or the
parameter Heater Time is set to zero and the input is inactive (or not configured)
at the time of the start command.

External

You can use an external Bulletin 1410 motor winding heater to realize the motor
winding heater function.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 111

Chapter 4 Special Application Considerations

Figure 81 - SMC-50 Controller with Bulletin 1410 Motor Winding Heater

Isolation Contactor (1) Overload Relay (1)
L1/1 T1/2
3-phase AC line
power Motor
L2/3 T2/4
(1)
L3/5 T3/6

SMC-50 Controller
Holding Coil
(1)

Bulletin 1410 Motor

Winding Heater (1)

(1) Customer supplied.

Stall Protection and Jam Motors can experience locked rotor currents and develop high torque levels in the
event of a stall or a jam. These conditions can result in winding insulation
Detection breakdown or mechanical damage to the connected load.

The SMC-50 controller provides both stall and jam detection for enhanced
motor and system protection. Stall protection lets you program a maximum stall
protection delay time from 0…30 seconds. The stall protection delay time is in
addition to the programmed start time and begins only after the start time has
elapsed.

Jam detection lets you determine the motor jam detection level as a percentage of
the motor’s full load current rating. To prevent nuisance tripping, You can
program a jam detection delay time from 0…99 seconds. This lets you select the
time delay required before the SMC-50 controller will trip on a motor jam
condition. The motor current must remain above the jam detection level during
the delay time. Jam detection is active only after the motor has reached full speed.

Communication A serial interface port is furnished as standard on the SMC-50 controller. The
connections lets you install a Bulletin 20-COMM communication module.
Using the built-in communication capabilities, You can remotely access
parameter settings, fault diagnostics, and metering. You can also perform remote
start-stop control.

When used with the Bulletin 20-COMM communication modules, the SMC-50
controller offers true networking capabilities with several network protocols,
including Allen-Bradley EtherNet, Remote I/O, DeviceNet network, RS 485,
ControlNet™, ProfiBUS, and Interbus.

112 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Special Application Considerations Chapter 4

Power Monitoring There are many ways in which You can use power data provided by the SMC-50
controller. These include helping to indicate when system maintenance is
required, faulty equipment, pump application function, or monitoring power
parameters for energy savings. Real, Reactive, and Apparent power calculations
(along with demand and maximum demand) are made on each line power phase
along with a total for all three phases.

The demand numbers are calculated as follows:

• Energy is calculated over a period of time defined by "Demand Period",
Parameter 290.
• The previous "n" period values are averaged and the result is written to the
Demand, Parameter 272, 281 and 288, which is used in calculating the
Max Demand values. This averaging uses a rolling window algorithm in
which the previous "n" periods are averaged.

Parameter Name/Description Min/Max Default Access Units

Number
269 Real Power A
270 Real Power B
± 1000.000 0.000 R MW
271 Real Power C
10 Real Power
11 Real Energy ± 1000.000 0.000 R MWH
272 Real Demand
± 1000.000 0.000 R MW
273 Max Real Demand
274 Reactive Power A
275 Reactive Power B
± 1000.000 0.000 R MVAR
276 Reactive Power C
277 Reactive Power
278 Reactive Energy C
± 1000.000 0.000 R MVRH
279 Reactive Energy P
280 Reactive Energy ± 1000.000 0.000 R MVRH
281 Reactive Demand
± 1000.000 0.000 R MVAR
282 Max. Reactive Dmd
283 Apparent Power A
284 Apparent Power B
MVA
285 Apparent Power C
286 Apparent Power ± 1000.000 0.000 R
287 Apparent Energy MVAH
288 Apparent Demand MVA
289 Max. Apparent Demand MVA
290 Demand Period 1...255 1 R/W min
291 Number of Periods 1...15 1 R/W —

Power Factor is calculated for each phase along with a total power factor value.
The power factor calculation does not apply during Slow Speed and Braking
operations.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 113

Chapter 4 Special Application Considerations

Parameter Name/Description Min/Max Default Access Units

Number
292 Power Factor A
293 Power Factor B
-1.00...1.00 0.00 R NA
294 Power Factor C
17 Power Factor

Power Factor Correction Capacitors

You can install the SMC-50 controller on a system with power factor correction
capacitors (PFCCs). The PFCCs must be located on the line side of the
controller to prevent damage to the SCRs in the controller power section. When
it is discharged, a capacitor essentially has zero impedance. For switching,
sufficient impedance should be connected in series with the capacitor bank to
limit the inrush current. One method for limiting the surge current is to add
inductance in the PFCC conductors. You can do this by creating turns or coils in
the power connections to the capacitors.
• 250V—150 mm (6 in.) diameter coil, 6 loops
• 480…690V—150 mm (6 in.) diameter coil, 8 loops

Figure 82 - PFCC Wiring

L1/1 T1/2
3-phase AC line
power
L2/3 T2/4 M

L3/5 T3/6
Motor
(Customer supplied)
Branch Protection SMC-50 Controller
(Customer supplied)

Power Factor Correction

Capacitors (Customer supplied)

The SMC-50 controller can protect against excessive reactive power (MVAR).
You can protect (Fault) or issue a warning (Alarm) if the motor reactive power
(MVAR) consumption (+) or generation (-) is too high. You can use this
protection with synchronous motors or motors that have active PFCCs.

ATTENTION: SMC-50 controllers can be installed in a system with power

factor correction capacitors (PFCCs). The PFCCs must only be on the line side
of the controller. Placing the PFCCs on the load side of the SMC results in
damage to the SCRs in the SMC-50 controller.

114 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Special Application Considerations Chapter 4

Figure 83 - PFCC with Contactor

3-phase AC line
L1/1 T1/2
power
L2/3 T2/4

(1) (2)
L3/5 T3/6
Motor
(Customer supplied)
Branch Protection SMC-50 Controller
(Customer supplied)

Power Factor Correction

Capacitors (Customer supplied)

(1) Energize for 0.5 s before start command is given to SMC-50 controller.
(2) Open contactor after the stopping method is complete.

Alternate method: use Aux Output configured for up-to-speed starting

(1) Energize the contactor after the motor is up to speed.
(2) Open contactor before initiating a stop command.

Altitude De-rating Because of the decreased efficiency of fans and heat sinks, it is necessary to de-rate
the SMC-50 controller above 6,500 feet (approximately 2,000 meters). For
operation at 2000…7000 meters (6560…22965 feet), use the Thermal Wizard.

You can find the Thermal Wizard at http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/ or

under the Tools menu in ProposalWorks.

Note: Depending on the tool you use, your screen may differ from what is shown.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 115

Chapter 4 Special Application Considerations

Note: You must keep the motor FLA Rating in the range of the current range of
the SMC-50 controller.

Isolation Contactor When it is installed with branch circuit protection and an overcurrent device, the
SMC-50 controller is compatible with the National Electrical Code (NEC).
When an isolation contactor is not used, hazardous voltages are present at the
load terminals of the power module even when the controller is turned off. you
must attach warning labels that indicate this hazard to the motor terminal box,
the controller enclosure, and the control station.

Use the isolation contactor to provide automatic electrical isolation of the

controller and motor circuit when the controller is shut down. Shut down can
occur in either of two ways: either manually, by pressing the stop button; or
automatically, by the presence of abnormal conditions (such as a motor overload
relay trip).

The isolation contactor carries only the load current under normal conditions.
During start, the isolation contactor is energized before the SCRs are gated “on.”
While stopping, the SCRs are gated “off ” before the isolation contactor is
de-energized. The isolation contactor does not make or break the load current.

116 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Special Application Considerations Chapter 4

Figure 84 - Typical Connection Diagram with Isolation Contactor

L1/1 T1/2
3-phase AC line
power
Motor
L2/3 T2/4 (Customer supplied)

L3/5 T3/6

Branch Protection Isolation Contactor

(Customer supplied) (Customer supplied) SMC-50 Controller

Application Uses for SMC-50 SMC-50 Solid-state Controller

Controller Power Structures Figure 85 - SMC-50 Controller Solid-state Power Structure

L1 L2 L3
1 3 5

2 4 6
T1 T2 T3

M
3

Fully solid-state devices are advantageous in harsh applications where there is a lot
of vibration, dust, and dirt.

Conformal-coated circuit boards on the SMC-50 controller help to protect

component damage from conductive or corrosive dust in those types of
environments. Vibration is not a concern unlike with an electromechanical
bypass contactor, where vibration could potentially cause contact bounce.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 117

Chapter 4 Special Application Considerations

Other applications for fully solid-state device include those in which there is a
high duty cycle. Applications that use a solid-state contactor are potentially
appropriate for a solid-state soft starter. The solid-state starter provides starting
and stopping methods and feedback that a solid-state contactor is not able to
provide.

Solid-state soft starters like the SMC-50 controller have predefined ratings for
normal duty and heavy duty applications.

Utilization Categories Defined:

• Normal Duty Rating
– AC-53a:3.5-10:99-2: 350% current limit, 10 second start, 99% ON
load factor and 2 starts per hour; 40 °C surrounding ambient
temperature rating
– Ideal for Pumps and Compressors
• Heavy Duty Rating
– AC-53a:3.5-30:99-1: 350%, 30 second start, 99% ON load factor and
1 start per hour; 50 °C surrounding ambient temperature rating
– Ideal for harsh environments or more demanding applications (for
example, chippers, rock crushers)

SMC-50 Controller with Integrated Bypass

Figure 86 - SMC-50 Controller Integrated Bypass Power Structure

L1 L2 L3
1 3 5

2 4 6
T1 T2 T3

M
3

118 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Special Application Considerations Chapter 4

The internal bypass contactor is used after the soft starter has brought the motor
up to speed. The algorithm of the soft starter determines when the motor is up to
speed and, at that time, transitions from SCR control to the bypass contactor.
Rockwell Automation offers a hybrid soft starter that has the power structure of a
solid-state starter and an internal bypass contactor.

Attributes of an internal bypass contactor allow the soft starter to operate at a

lower temperature with the motor at speed compared to a fully solid-state starter.
A hybrid soft starter is typically smaller than fully rated SCRs with no bypass.
The reason for this is smaller components are used to start and carry the load
current. The SCRs are rated for intermittent duty (AC-53b). The internal bypass
contactors are typically not fully rated (AC-3), because they are typically
designed to not make or break load current.

When you use an internal bypass soft starter, you only need power and control
wiring. You do not need to purchase any additional devices. Internal bypass on a
soft starter is suitable for conveyors, fans, pumps and other applications where the
current and speed does not change while at speed.

The utilization code for the hybrid version:

• AC-53b: 3.0-50:1750
– 300% current limit, 50 second start, off-time must not be less than 1750
seconds between starts.

SMC-50 Controller with External Bypass

Figure 87 - Soft Starter with External Bypass Contactor

L1 T1
3-phase AC line
power
L2 T2 Motor

L3 T3

Branch Protection

External Bypass Contactor

Soft starters can use internal or external bypass contactors. Depending on the
application, an external bypass may be a better choice than an internal bypass. In
some cases, because of application considerations, a soft starter may have an

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 119

Chapter 4 Special Application Considerations

internal bypass, but be configured to use auxiliary contacts/outputs to control an

external bypass.

Applications that are good for external bypass contactors are those where you
need a soft start, but while in run mode, current may spike due to product jams or
plugging. For example, in a rock crushing application, there is a high chance of
jamming material in a hopper, which causes current spikes. A soft starter with an
internal bypass contactor monitors current and may typically drop out of bypass
to protect the contactor and return to SCR control. Once the current returns to
normal, the bypass contactor is pulled back in. This cycling on and off could
shorten the life of an internal electromechanical contactor.

Not having all protective features of the soft starter during the run mode may be a
benefit to keep an application like rock crushing working. In that application,
using an external bypass contactor that is fully rated to handle the current surges
keeps the contactor pulled in until a stop command is given or an overload is
tripped. External overloads may be needed to protect the motor because some
soft starters may not be able to read motor data while in external bypass mode.

An external bypass contactor may also be used on a AC-53a-rated fully solid-state

soft starter. Depending on both the soft starter and the mounting and wiring of
the bypass contactor, there may or may not be a need for external overloads. The
mounting features from the soft start to the bypass contactor dictate whether the
soft starter can read data (current and voltage readings) while in bypass mode.

In UL/CSA regulated regions, size the bypass contactor according to the motor
Hp and FLA. In IEC regulated regions, size the bypass conductor per the AC-1
rated bypass contactor rating.

The Hp ratings of the AC-3 rated bypass contactor must match the Hp ratings of
the SMC-50 soft starter. The short-circuit ratings of the bypass contactor must
be similar to the SMC-50 soft starter. This is particularly important for the AC-1
rated bypass contactor selection.

120 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Chapter 5

Protection and Diagnostic Functions

Overview The SMC-50 controller provides both diagnostic and protection functions.
Control these functions via user-configured parameters that provide motor
and starter alarm and faults. You can individually enable or disable each
configurable alarm and fault. Many alarms and faults also have a user-defined
time delay to help limit nuisance tripping. A fault condition shuts down the
controller. You can use an alarm to alert an operator to a pending fault. You can
individually configure motor and starter faults for automatic reset/restart after
configuring the number of restart attempts and restart time delay. Restart
attempts and restart delay are universal to all faults. See page 153 for additional
details.

A multi-colored (red, green, amber) STATUS LED is located on the front of

the SMC-50 controller directly below the bezel/pocket for the 20-HIM-A6.

Figure 88 - Controller Status LED

L1/1 L2/3 L3/5

HOLD
STATUS PUSH TO
TO TEST
RESET

STATUS

Controller status LED

LED Display Fault Condition

T1/2 T2/4 T3/6
Solid RED Non-resettable fault has occurred
Flashing RED Resettable fault has occurred

Additional diagnostic LEDs are located on the optional Bulletin 150-SM6

Parameter Configuration Module (PCM). This module provides simple and
limited parameter configurations. For additional diagnostic LED information,
see Chapter 10.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 121

Chapter 5 Protection and Diagnostic Functions

20-HIM-A6, 20-HIM-C6S, and Configuration Software

The 20-HIM-A6, 20-HIM-C6S, and PC configuration/monitoring software

(for example, Connected Components Workbench software) provide detailed
Fault and Alarm information. When the SMC-50 controller has a fault, the
HIM display indicates FAULTED along with the Fault Code, a simple fault
description, and the elapsed time since the fault occurred. Other HIM screens
provide more detailed data and the ability to reset the Fault/Alarm from the
keypad. For more details about the diagnostic use of these tools, see
Chapter 10, Diagnostics.

To simplify identifying the source of a DPI port related Fault or Alarm, the
SMC-50 controller displays the DPI port number when posting the Fault or
Alarm number.

EXAMPLE If a 150-SM4 Digital I/O Option Module is located in the SMC-50 controller DPI
Port 7 and is the source of a Fault, port number 7 is displayed with the Fault
Code (for example, Port 7, Fault 26 is displayed as 7026).

Table 24 - SMC-50 Controller DPI-Assigned Port Numbers and Source

DPI Port Number Source DPI Port Number Source

0 SMC-50 Controller 6 Reserved
1 Front-Mounted HIM 7 Control Module Port 7
Remote DPI (top of SMC-50
2 8 Control Module Port 8
controller)
(1)
3 Remote DPI 9 (2) Control Module Port 9
4(2) 20-COMM-X Module 10-15 Reserved
5 Reserved
(1) To access Port 3, the use of a 1203-S03 splitter inserted into Port 2 is required.
(2) When using a 20-COMM-X network communication module, it must physically be located in Control Module Port 9. However, its
DPI Port Number assignment is 4 because of the cable connection to the DPI Port 4 located below the front-mounted HIM.

Enabling Starter and Motor Faults and Alarms

You can individually configure, enable, and disable motor and starter Faults
and Alarms. The parameters Motor Fault En, Starter Fault En, Motor Alarm
En, and Starter Alarm En are numbered bit fields for configuration to enable
(bit=1) or disable (bit =0) specific motor and/or starter Faults and Alarms.
You can do this by using configuration tools (for example, HIM or PC
software) or network communications.

Because there are more than 32 Faults and Alarms, the configuration bits are
located in the lower and upper 16-bit fields (numbered 0-31) of the associated
SMC-50 controller parameters. The bits are divided into starter Faults and
motor Faults.

These parameters do not enable or disable Faults that can generated by

expansion modules (for example, 150-SM2, -SM4, etc.). When an expansion

122 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Protection and Diagnostic Functions Chapter 5

module is plugged into a control module port (7, 8, or 9), a set of configuration
parameters appears to enable configuration of that specific module.

Table 25 and Table 26 provide an overview of the motor and starter Fault and
Alarm Enable parameters. All bits are read (R) and write (W) enabled.

Table 25 - Enable/Disable Starter Fault/Alarm Matrix

Parameter Function/ Fault/Alarm Bit Bit Access Units [Default]

Number Description(1) Name(1) Assignment
Starter Fault
Volt Unbal 0
Overvoltage 1
Undervoltage 2
Phase Rev 3 Bit = 0 Disabled
136 Starter Fault En [Line Loss] 4 R/W Bit = 1 Enabled
[Open Gate] 5 [Enabled]
Config Change 6
Freq 7
THD V 8
Starter Alarm
Volt Unbal 0
Overvoltage 1
Undervoltage 2
Phase Rev Bit = 0 Disabled
3
137 Starter Alarm En Line Loss Bit = 1 Enabled
4 R/W
Open Gate [All Disabled as
5 Default]
Config Change 6
Freq 7
THD V 8
(1) As displayed on the HIM or Connected Components Workbench configuration tools

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 123

Chapter 5 Protection and Diagnostic Functions

Table 26 - Enable/Disable Motor Fault/Alarm Matrix

Parameter Function/ Fault/Alarm Bit Bit Access Units [Default]

Number Description(1) Name(1) Assignment
Motor Fault
[Overload] 0
Underload 1
MWatts Over 2
MWatts Under 3
+MVAR Over 4
+MVAR Under 5
-MVAR Over 6
-MVAR Under 7
MVA Under 8
MVA Over 9
Curr Imbal 10
Bit = 0 Disabled
Jam 11
230 Motor Fault En R/W Bit = 1 Enabled
Stall 12
[Enabled]
Starts/Hr 13
PM Hours 14
PM Starts 15
[Power Qual] 16
[Open Load] 27
THD1 18
Lead PF Un 19
Lead PF Ov 20
Lag PF Un 21
Lag PF Ov 22
Locked Rotor 23
Motor Alarm
Overload 0
Underload 1
MWatts Over 2
MWatts Under 3
+MVAR Over 4
+MVAR Under 5
-MVAR Over 6
-MVAR Under 7
MVA Under 8
MVA Over 9
Curr Imbal 10
Bit = 0 Disabled
Jam 11
231 Motor Alarm En R/W Bit = 1 Enabled
Stall 12
[All Disabled as Default]
Starts/Hr 13
PM Hours 14
PM Starts 15
Power Qual 16
Open Load 27
THD1 18
Lead PF Un 19
Lead PF Ov 20
Lag PF Un 21
Lag PF Ov 22
Locked Rotor 23
(1) As displayed on the HIM or Connected Components Workbench configuration tools

124 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Protection and Diagnostic Functions Chapter 5

Enabling Option Module Functional Faults and Alarm

Not all option modules have faults and alarms associated with their specific
function(s). For example, the 150-SM4 Option I/O and 150-SM6 Parameter
Configuration Modules do not have functional faults or alarms. When an
option module does have functional faults and alarms, it also can individually
configure, enable, and disable them like faults and alarms for the controller and
motor.

150-SM2 Option Module

The 150-SM2 Option Module has individually enabled faults and alarms
associated with the Ground Fault and Motor PTC functions, shown in
Table 27.

Table 27 - 150-SM2 Faults and Alarms

Parameter Function/ Fault/Alarm Bit Bit Access Units [Default]

Number Description(2) Name(2) Assignment
PTC 0 NOTE:
X02(1) Fault En R/W
Gnd Flt 1 Bit=0 Disabled
PTC 0 Bit=1 Enabled
X03(1) Alarm En R/W
Gnd Flt 1 [All Disabled]
(1) X = the control module port number (7 or 8) in which the 150-SM2 resides.
(2) As displayed on the HIM or Connected Components Workbench configuration tools

150-SM3 Option Module

The 150-SM3 Option Module has individually enabled faults and alarms
associated with the analog inputs and outputs, shown in Table 28.

Table 28 - 150-SM3 Faults and Alarms

Parameter Function/ Fault/Alarm Bit Bit Access Units [Default]

Number Description(2) Name(2) Assignment
IN1 Over 0
IN1 Under 1
IN2 Over 2
IN2 Under 3
X37 (1) Fault En R/W
OUT1 Shorted 4
OUT1 Open 5
OUT2 Shorted 6 NOTE:
OUT2 Open 7 Bit=0 Disabled
IN1 Over 0 Bit=1 Enabled
IN1 Under 1 [All Disabled]
IN2 Over 2
IN2 Under 3
X38 (1) Alarm En R/W
OUT1 Shorted 4
OUT1 Open 5
OUT2 Shorted 6
OUT2 Open 7
(1) X = the control module port number (7 or 8) in which the 150-SM3 resides.
(2) As displayed on the HIM or Connected Components Workbench configuration tools

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 125

Chapter 5 Protection and Diagnostic Functions

Protection and Diagnostics The following describes the SMC-50 controller protection and diagnostic
functions.

Overload—Fault and Alarm

Overload Fault (Code 21)

The SMC-50 controller meets applicable requirements as a motor overload

protective device. Thermal memory provides added protection and maintains
motor thermal data when control power is removed.

The SMC-50 controller provides overload protection through true RMS

current measurement of the individual phase currents of the connected motor.
A thermal model that simulates the actual heating of the motor is calculated
based on the following:
• measured maximum motor current value,
• Motor FLC Setting, Parameter 78,
• Overload (Trip) Class(1) Setting, Parameter 75, and
• Motor Service Factor, Parameter 77, (obtained from the motor
nameplate)

The Motor Thermal Usage (MTU), Parameter 18, displays the percentage of
the motor overload currently utilized. The SMC-50 controller overload fault
will trip the motor when (1) the motor overload fault is enabled and (2) the
MTU reaches 100%.

The overload function calculates and provides motor overload data through:
• MTU, Parameter 18,
• Time to OL Trip, Parameter 19, and
• Time to OL Reset, Parameter 20.

TIP Trip rating is 118% of the programmed motor FLC.

The SMC-50 controller continues to calculate the reduction in MTU (decay

rate) when the motor is powered down (cooling). Enable this by using the
SMC-50 controller’s real time clock (RTC) function. When control power is
lost, the SMC-50 controller saves the power down thermal level and time.
When power is reapplied, the SMC-50 controller reads the current time,
power down time, and power down thermal level. From this data, the SMC-50
controller calculates the new thermal information for the overload.

(1) Trip Class is defined as the maximum time in seconds for an overload trip to occur when the motor’s operating current is six
times its rated current. The SMC-50 controller overload function offers an adjustable Trip Class range of 5...30, which can be
programmed in increments of one via Overload Class, Parameter 75, and Overload Class 2, Parameter 76 (configuration for a
second overload Class).

126 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Protection and Diagnostic Functions Chapter 5

Overload Alarm

In addition to the Overload Fault, an Overload Alarm is also available. The

desired value or level of the alarm is set up with Overload Alarm Level,
(Overload A Lvl), Parameter 83, which can be set from 0% to 100%. When the
MTU value reaches the set percentage of the thermal trip level, then the alarm
becomes active. When the MTU value falls below the set percentage of the
thermal trip level, the alarm becomes inactive.

Motor Thermal Usage (Mtr Therm Usage), Parameter 18, provides the current
motor thermal usage value. This parameter reads from 0% to 200%, where
100% corresponds to a fault condition.

Figure 89 - Overload Trip Curves

Class 5 Class 10 Class 15
10000 10000 10000

Approximate Trip Time [s]

Approximate Trip Time [s]

Approximate Trip Time [s]

100 100 1000

10 10 100

1 1 10

0.1 0.1 1
1 2 3 4 5 10 1 2 3 4 5 10 1 2 3 4 5 10
Multiples of FLC Multiples of FLC Multiples of FLC
Class 20 Class 25 Class 30
10000 10000 10000
Approximate Trip Time [s]

Approximate Trip Time [s]

Approximate Trip Time [s]

1000 1000 1000

100 100 100

10 10 10

1 1 1
1 2 3 45 10 1 2 3 4 5 10 1 2 3 45 10
Multiples of FLC Multiples of FLC Multiples of FLC
Approximate trip time for 3-
phase balanced condition from:
Cold Start
Hot Start

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 127

Chapter 5 Protection and Diagnostic Functions

Figure 90 - Restart Trip Curves after Auto Reset

100000

Trip
Class Auto Reset time [s]
1000
10 90

Approximate Trip Time [s]

15 135
100 20 180
30 270
10

0
100 1000
% FLC

Overload Shunt Time, Parameter 81, allows disabling (shunt) the overload at
the beginning of the start cycle. The length of time that the overload is disabled
(shunted) is defined by this parameter. The motor overload does not
accumulate data (MTU) during this period.

You can configure the SMC-50 controller to automatically reset the overload
fault when it has cooled to the set Overload Reset Level, Parameter 80. You
must enable the Motor Restart Enabled (Motor Restart En), Parameter 264,
(Overload = Set) to allow the Overload Reset Level parameter to function.

The Time to Overload Trip (Time to OL Trip), Parameter 19, provides

indication of how much time is left before an overload trip occurs given the
current operating conditions. If the overload fault is disabled, this parameter
reads its maximum value.

The Time to OL Reset, Parameter 20, provides indication of how much time is
left before an overload fault clears based on the cooling (decay) algorithm. If
the overload parameter is disabled or has not tripped, then this parameter is
zero.

128 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Protection and Diagnostic Functions Chapter 5

Table 29 - Overload Parameter List

Minimum/Maximum
Parameter Number Parameter Name(1) Default Value Access Units
Value
75 Overload Class 5…30 10 —
76 Overload Class 2(2) 5…30 10 R/W —
77 Service Factor 0.01…1.99 1.15 —
78 Motor FLC 1.0…2200.0 1.0 Amps
80 OL Reset Level 1…99 75 %MTU
18 Motor Therm Usage 0…200 0…200 R %MTU
81 OL Shunt Time 0…999 0 SECS
82 OL Inhibit Time 0…999 0 R/W SECS
83 Overload A Lvl 0…100 0 %MTU
19 Time to OL Trip 0…10000 0…10000 SECS
R
20 Time to OL Reset 0…10000 0…10000 SECS
84 Locked Rtr Level 400…1000 600 R/W %FLC
85 Locked Rtr Time 1…1000 1 R/W SECS
(1) As displayed on the HIM or Connected Components Workbench software configuration tools.
(2) Configuration for a second overload Class.

Underload—Fault and Alarm

The SMC-50 controller lets you trip on underload when the motor current
falls below a user-defined level for a user-defined time.

Underload Fault (Code 22)

Motor current less than a specific level may indicate a mechanical malfunction
in the installation (for example, a torn conveyor belt, damaged fan blade,
broken shaft, or worn tool). Such conditions may not harm the motor, but can
lead to loss of production. Rapid Underload Fault detection helps to minimize
damage and loss of production.

Underload Fault current protection, Fault Code 22, is enabled or disabled via
the motor Underload Enable/Disable bit in the Motor Fault Enable, Parameter
230. Configure the value or level of the Fault current by using Underload Fault
Level (Underload F Lvl), Parameter 86. A configurable Fault Delay Time using
Underload Fault Delay (Underload F Dly), Parameter 87, is also available to
help eliminate nuisance faults.

Underload Alarm

A motor Underload Alarm is also available. Configure this exactly as the

Underload Fault using Underload Alarm Level (Underload A Lvl), Parameter
88, and Underload Alarm Delay (Underload A Dly), Parameter 89. You can
enable or disable the Alarm by using the Underload bit in the Motor Alarm
Enabled, Parameter 231.

The SMC-50 controller checks for a motor Underload condition

approximately every 0.025 seconds.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 129

Chapter 5 Protection and Diagnostic Functions

TIP Underload protection is active when the motor is at speed.

Table 30 - Underload Parameter List

Parameter Parameter Name (1) Minimum/Maximum Default Value Access Units

Number Value
86 Underload F Lvl 0…99 0 %FLC
87 Underload F Dly 0.1…99 0.1 SECS
R/W
88 Underload A Lvl 0…99 0 %FLC
89 Underload A Dly 0.1…99 0.1 SECS
(1) As displayed on the HIM or Connected Components Workbench configuration tools.

Line Power Undervoltage Protection

Undervoltage Fault (Code 20)

The SMC-50 controller can protect against low line power voltage. The
Undervoltage Fault, Code 20, provides protection from a line power
undervoltage condition. An undervoltage fault condition exists if the average
of the three-phase Line Voltage (Line Voltage), Parameter 46, falls below the
user-defined voltage level (Undervolt F Lvl), Parameter 98, for a user-defined
time Undervolt Fault Delay. See Table 31

Enable or disable Undervoltage Fault protection via the Undervoltage Enable/

Disable bit in the Starter Fault Enable, Parameter 136.

Undervoltage Alarm

In addition to the Fault, an Undervoltage Alarm is also available. Set this

exactly like the Fault using the "Undervolt A Lvl", Parameter 100, and the
"Undervolt A Dly", Parameter 101. The Undervoltage Alarm is enabled or
disabled via the Undervoltage Enable/Disable bit in the Starter Alarm Enable,
Parameter 137.

Table 31 - Undervoltage Protection Parameter List

Parameter Minimum/
Parameter Name(1) Default Value Access Units
Number Maximum Value
46 Line Voltage 0…700 400 Volts
98 Undervolt F Lvl 0…100 90 %V
99 Undervolt F Dly 0.1…99.0 3.0 R/W SECS
100 Undervolt A Lvl 0…100 90 %V
101 Undervolt A Dly 0.1…99.0 3.0 SECS
(1) As displayed on the HIM or Connected Components Workbench configuration tools.

130 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Protection and Diagnostic Functions Chapter 5

Line Power Overvoltage Protection—Fault and Alarm

Overvoltage Fault (Code 19)

The SMC-50 controller can protect against high line power voltage. The
Overvoltage Fault, Code 19, provides protection from a line power
Overvoltage condition. An overvoltage condition exists if the average of the
three-phase line voltage exceeds a user-defined percent above that level
(Overvolt F Lvl) for a user-defined time, "Overvolt F Dly". See Table 32 on
page 131.

Overvoltage protection is enabled or disabled via the Overvoltage Enable/

Disable bit in the Starter Fault Enable, Parameter 136.

Overvoltage Alarm

In addition to the Fault, an Overvoltage Alarm is also available. This is set up

exactly as like the Overvoltage Fault using the Overvoltage Alarm Level and
Overvoltage Alarm Delay parameters.

The Overvoltage Alarm is enabled or disabled via the Overvoltage Enable/

Disable bit in the Starer Alarm Enable, Parameter 137.

Table 32 - Overvoltage Protection Parameter List

Parameter Minimum/Maximum Default Value

Parameter Name(1) Access Units
Number Value
46 Line Voltage 0…700 400 Volts
102 Overvolt F Lvl 100…199 440 %
103 Overvolt F Dly 0.1….99.0 3.0 R/W SECS
104 Overvolt A Lvl 100…199 110 %
105 Overvolt A Dly 0.1….99.0 3.0 SECS
(1) As displayed on the HIM or Connected Components Workbench configuration tools.

Current Imbalance Protection—Fault and Alarm

A current imbalance condition can be caused by an unbalance in the voltage

supply, unequal motor winding impedance, or long and varying wire lengths.
When a current imbalance condition exists, the motor can experience an
additional temperature rise, which results in degradation of the motor
insulation and reduction in life expectancy. Rapid current imbalance fault
detection helps to extend the motor’s life expectancy and minimize potential
damage and loss of production.

The current imbalance calculation is equal to the largest deviation of the three
current signals (RMS phase current) from the average phase current, divided by
the average phase current. Note that the power pole current is used for the
current imbalance calculation.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 131

Chapter 5 Protection and Diagnostic Functions

Current Imbalance Fault (Code 42)

A Current Imbalance Fault condition, Fault Code 42, occurs when the
calculated imbalance level rises above a user-defined level, Current Imbalance
Fault Level, for a user-defined time, Current Imbalance Fault Delay. See
Table 33 on page 132.

Current imbalance protection is enabled or disabled using the Current

Imbalance bit in the Motor Fault Enable, Parameter 230.

Current Imbalance Alarm

In addition to the Current Imbalance Fault, a Current Imbalance Alarm is also

available. Set this exactly like the Current Imbalance Fault using the Current
Imbalance Alarm Level and Current Imbalance Alarm Delay parameters. You
can enable or disable the Current Imbalance Alarm by using the Current
Imbalance bit in the Motor Alarm Enable, Parameter 231.

Table 33 - Current Imbalance Parameter List

Parameter Number Parameter Name(1) Minimum/Maximum Default Value Access Units

Value
110 Cur Imbal F Lvl 1…25 15 %
111 Cur Imbal F Dly 0.1….99.0 3.0 SECS
R/W
112 Cur Imbal A Lvl 1…25 10 %
113 Cur Imbal A Dly 0.1….99.0 3.0 SECS
(1) As displayed on the HIM or Connected Components Workbench configuration tools.

Voltage Unbalance Protection—Fault and Alarm

An unbalance in the voltage supply results in a current imbalance. This causes

the motor to experience an additional temperature rise, resulting in
degradation of the motor insulation and reducing its life expectancy. Voltage
unbalance detection helps extend the motor life expectancy and minimize
potential damage and loss of production.

The voltage unbalance (Vu) calculation is equal to the largest deviation (Vd) of
the three-phase voltage signals (RMS phase voltage) from the average of the
RMS phase voltage (Vave), divided by the average voltage.

Vu% = 100 ( VV )
d
ave

Note that the phase-to-phase voltage is used in the calculation for voltage
unbalance.

Voltage Unbalance Fault (Code 18)

A Voltage Unbalance Fault condition, Fault Code 18, occurs when the
calculated unbalance level rises above a user-defined level, Voltage Unbalance

132 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Protection and Diagnostic Functions Chapter 5

Fault Level, for a user-defined time, Voltage Unbalance Fault Delay. See
Table 34 on page 133.

Voltage unbalance protection is enabled or disabled using the Voltage

Unbalance bit in the Starter Fault Enable, Parameter 136.

Voltage Unbalance Alarm

In addition to the Voltage Unbalance Fault, a Voltage Unbalance Alarm is also

available. Set this up exactly like Voltage Unbalance Fault by using the Voltage
Unbalance Alarm Level and Voltage Unbalance Alarm Delay parameters.
Enable or disable this Voltage Unbalance Alarm by using the Voltage
Unbalance bit in the Starter Alarm Enable, Parameter 137.

Table 34 - Voltage Unbalance Protection Parameter List

Parameter Minimum/Maximum
Parameter Name(1) Default Value Access Units
Number Value
106 Volt Unbal F Lvl 1…25 15 %
107 Volt Unbal F Dly 0.1….99.0 3.0 SECS
R/W
108 Volt Unbal A Lvl 1…25 10 %
109 Volt Unbal A Dly 0.1….99.0 3.0 SECS
(1) As displayed on the HIM or Connected Components Workbench configuration tools.

Phase Reversal Protection

Phase Reversal Fault (Code 25)

The SMC-50 controller provides Fault Protection, Fault Code 25, against
reverse connection (CBA) of line power phases.

You can enable or disable Phase Reversal protection via the "Phase Rev" bit in
the Starter Fault Enable, Parameter 136. There are no phase reversal fault
parameters to configure.

A phase reversal Alarm is also available and enabled via the "Phase Rev" bit in
the Starter Alarm Enable, Parameter 137. There are no Alarm parameters to
configure.

High and Low Line Power Frequency Protection—Fault and Alarm

The SMC-50 controller can protect against poor line power quality by offering
programmable frequency-based protection. You can fault the starter if the line
power frequency is either too high or too low.

High and low frequency limits for both Faults and Alarms are configured
through the parameters listed in Table 35. Note that each also has a
programmable delay to limit nuisance trips.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 133

Chapter 5 Protection and Diagnostic Functions

Frequency Fault (Code 49)

The high/low Frequency Fault, Code 49, is enabled or disabled using the
Frequency bit "Freq" in the Starter Fault Enable, Parameter 136.

Frequency Alarm

In addition to the Fault, a Frequency Alarm is also available. The Frequency

Alarm is enabled or disabled using the Frequency bit in the Starter Alarm
Enable, Parameter 137.

TIP Regardless of the user-defined high or low frequency Fault or Alarm levels,
if the line power frequency falls below 45 Hz or rises above 66 Hz, the
SMC-50 controller enters a wait state (controller stops and does not start, or
does not start if it is already stopped) until the frequency returns to the
45 …66 Hz range.

Table 35 - High and Low Line Power Frequency Parameter List

Parameter Minimum/Maximum
Parameter Name(1) Default Value Access Units
Number Value
129 Freq High F Lvl 45…66 63 Hz
225 Freq High F Dly 0.1….99.0 0.1 SECS
130 Freq Low F Lvl 45…66 47 Hz
227 Freq Low F Dly 0.1….99.0 0.1 SECS
R/W
131 Freq High A Lvl 45…66 63 Hz
226 Freq High A Dly 0.1….99.0 0.1 SECS
132 Freq Low A Lvl 45…66 47 Hz
228 Freq Low A Dly 0.1….99.0 0.1 SECS
(1) As displayed on the HIM or Connected Components Workbench configuration tools.

Stall Protection—Fault and Alarm

When a motor stalls (stops) during its starting sequence, the motor heats up
very rapidly; after some permissible stall time, the motor reaches the
temperature limit of its insulation. Rapid stall detection during the starting
sequence can extend the motor’s life and minimize the potential damage and
loss of production.

Stall Fault (Code 24)

When the SMC-50 controller is instructed to start a motor and the

programmed start Ramp Time has completed before the motor is Up-to-Speed
(UTS), the start sequence continues until one of the following occurs:
• motor reaches full speed,
• Stall Fault, Code 24, occurs,
• indefinitely if the stall fault is disabled, or
• until a motor overload or SCR overtemperature condition

134 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Protection and Diagnostic Functions Chapter 5

When the stall feature is enabled, the SMC-50 controller starts an internal
timer when the programmed Ramp Time expires. When this timer reaches the
time value programmed in the Stall Delay, Parameter 188, a Stall Fault is
generated. If the Stall Delay parameter is set to zero, then the Fault occurs
immediately if the motor is not UTS at the completion of the programmed
Ramp Time. If the SMC-50 controller detects that the motor is UTS before
the Stall Delay, it considers the start sequence complete, switches to full
voltage, and does generate a Stall Fault/Alarm.

TIP Because the beginning of the Linear Speed Starting mode is an open loop
voltage control, the actual starting time may vary depending on the motor
load. For this reason (and to avoid nuisance faults), the SMC-50 controller
automatically adds a time to the configured starting ramp time before the
stall timer begins to count. The time factor is 50% of the configured start
ramp time.

Enable or disable Stall Fault protection via the "Stall" bit in the Motor Fault
Enable, Parameter 230.

Stall Alarm

In addition to the Stall Fault, you can also enable a Stall Alarm, which activates
under the same condition as the Stall Fault. In this case, the Alarm is cleared
once the motor leaves the starting state (for example, is UTS, is stopped, or
faulted).

Enable or disable the Stall Alarm via the "Stall" bit in the Motor Alarm Enable,
Parameter 231.

Table 36 - Stall Protection Parameter List

Parameter Minimum/Maximum
Parameter Name(1) Default Value Access Units
Number Value
188 Stall Delay 0.0…30.0 10.0 R/W SECS
(1) As displayed on the HIM or Connected Components Workbench configuration tools.

Figure 91 - Stall Protection

600%
% FLC

Programmed Start Time Stall

Time [s]

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 135

Chapter 5 Protection and Diagnostic Functions

Jam Detection—Fault and Alarm

Motor operational (run) current greater than the motor nameplate rating may
indicate a jam condition due to a conveyor jam or jammed drive gear. These
conditions can result in overheating of the motor and equipment damage.
Rapid Jam detection helps to minimize damage and loss of production.

TIP The SMC-50 starter SCR Overtemperature Fault (see SCR Overtemperature)
may occur before the jam trip in the case of high current situations.

Jam Fault (Code 23)

The SMC-50 controller Jam Fault, Fault Code 23, provides detection of a
motor jam. A jam condition exists if the motor current rises above a user-
defined level for a user-defined time while in the run mode.

TIP This fault is not active during starting or stopping.

The Jam Level, Parameter 114, is a percentage of the motor’s Full Load Current
Parameter 78. If the actual motor current rises above the Jam Fault Level
( Jam F Lvl) for a time equal to the Jam Fault Delay ( Jam F Dly) then a Fault is
generated. See Table 37 and Figure 92. Jam protection is enabled or disabled
using the Jam bit in the Motor Fault Enable, Parameter 230.

Jam Alarm

In addition to the Fault, a Jam Alarm is also available. Set this up like the Fault
Jam, using Jam Alarm Level and Jam Alarm Delay. You can enable or disable
this alarm using the Jam bit in the Motor Alarm Enable, Parameter 231.

Table 37 - Jam Detection Parameter List

Minimum/
Parameter Number Parameter Name(1) Default Value Access Units
Maximum Value
78 Motor FLC 1.0…2200.0 1.0 Amps
114 Jam F Lvl 0…1000 1000 %FLC
115 Jam F Dly 0.1….99.0 0.1 R/W SECS
116 Jam A Lvl 0…1000 1000 %FLC
117 Jam A Dly 0.1….99.0 0.1 SECS
(1) As displayed on the HIM or Connected Components Workbench configuration tools.

136 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Protection and Diagnostic Functions Chapter 5

Figure 92 - Jam Detection

User-defined Trip Level

% FLC
100%

Running Jam
Time [s]

Real Power Protection Motor Over Power Real—Fault and Alarm

(MWatts)
Motor Over Power Real Fault (Code 44)

A Motor Over Power Real Fault, Code 44, condition occurs when the real
power being consumed by the motor has risen above a user-defined level
MWatts Ov F Lvl, Parameter 90, for the user-defined time MWatts Ov F Dly,
Parameter 91.

You can enable or disable the over power real Fault by using the MWatts Over
bit in the Motor Fault Enable, Parameter 230.

Motor Over Power Real Alarm

A motor overpower real Alarm is also available. Set this up like the motor Fault
using Parameter MWatts Ov A Lvl and MWatts Ov A Dly. You can enable or
disable this Alarm by using the MWatts Over bit in the Motor Alarm Enable,
Parameter 231.

Table 38 - Motor Overpower Real Parameter List

Parameter Parameter Name(1) Minimum/Maximum Value Default Value Access Units

Number
90 MWatts Ov F Lvl 0.000…1000.00 0.000 MW
91 MWatts Ov F Dly 0.1…99.0 0.1 SECS
R/W
92 MWatts Ov A Lvl 0.000…1000.00 0.000 MW
93 MWatts Ov A Dly 0.1…99.0 0.1 SECS
(1) As displayed on the HIM or Connected Components Workbench configuration tools.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 137

Chapter 5 Protection and Diagnostic Functions

Motor Under Power Real—Fault and Alarm

Motor Under Power Real Fault (Code 43)

A Motor Under Power Real Fault, Fault Code 43, condition occurs when the
real power that is being consumed by the motor falls below a user-defined level
MWatts Un F Lvl, Parameter 94, for the user-defined time MWatts Un F Dly,
Parameter 95.

You can enable or disable this Fault by using the MWatts Under bit in the
Motor Fault En, Parameter 230.

Motor Under Power Real Alarm

In addition to the Fault, an Alarm is also available. Set this up like the motor
Fault using Parameter MWatts Un A Lvl and MWatts Un A Dly. You can
enable or disable this alarm by using the MWatts Under bit in the Motor Alarm
En, Parameter 231.

Table 39 - Motor Over Power Real Parameter List

Parameter Minimum/Maximum Default Value

Parameter Name(1) Access Units
Number Value
94 MWatts Un F Lvl 0.000…1000.00 0.000 MW
95 MWatts Un F Dly 0.1…99.0 0.1 SECS
R/W
96 MWatts Un A Lvl 0.000…1000.00 0.000 MW
97 MWatts Un A Dly 0.1…99.0 0.1 SECS
(1) As displayed on the HIM or Connected Components Workbench configuration tools.

Reactive Power Protection The SMC-50 controller can protect against excessive reactive power (MVAR).
You can protect (Fault) or issue a warning (Alarm) if the motor reactive power
(MVAR) (MVAR) consumption (+) or generation (-) is too high. You can use this
protection with synchronous motors or motors that have active Power Factor
correction capacitors.

Motor Over Power Reactive Positive (Motor Consumed)—Fault and

Alarm

Motor Over Power Reactive Positive Fault (Code 46)

A Motor Over Power Reactive Positive Fault condition, Fault Code 46, occurs
when the reactive power being consumed by the motor rises above a user-
defined level +MVAR Ov F Lvl, Parameter 232, for the user-defined delay time
+MVAR Ov F Dly, Parameter 233.

You can enable or disable this Fault by using the +MVAR Over bit in the
Motor Fault Enable, Parameter 230.

138 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Protection and Diagnostic Functions Chapter 5

Motor Over Power Reactive Positive Alarm

In addition to the Fault, a Motor Over Power Reactive Alarm is also available.
Set this up like the Fault using parameters +MVAR Ov A Lvl and +MVAR Ov
A Dly, as shown in Table 40. You can enable or disable the Alarm is by using the
+MVAR Over bit in the Motor Alarm Enable, Parameter 231.

Table 40 - Motor Over Power Reactive Positive Parameter List

Parameter Minimum/Maximum
Parameter Name(1) Default Value Access Units
Number Value
232 +MVAR Ov F Lvl 0.000…1000.00 0.000 MVAR
233 +MVAR Ov F Dly 0.1…99.0 0.1 SECS
R/W
234 +MVAR Ov A Lvl 0.000…1000.00 0.000 MVAR
235 +MVAR Ov A Dly 0.1…99.0 0.1 SECS
(1) As displayed on the HIM or Connected Components Workbench configuration tools.

Motor Under Power Reactive Positive (Motor Consumed)—Fault

and Alarm

Motor Under Power Reactive Positive Fault (Code 45)

A Motor Under Power Reactive Positive Fault condition, Fault Code 45,
occurs when the reactive power being consumed by the motor falls below the
user-defined level +MVAR Un F Lvl, Parameter 236, for the user-defined delay
time +MVAR Un F Dly, Parameter 237.

You can enable or disable this Fault by using the +MVAR Under bit in the
Motor Fault Enable, Parameter 230.

Motor Under Power Reactive Positive Alarm

In addition to the Fault, an Under Power Reactive Alarm is also available. Set
this up like the Fault using parameters +MVAR Un A Lvl and +MVAR Un A
Dly, as shown in Table 41. You can enable or disable the Alarm by using the
+MVAR Under bit in the Motor Alarm Enable, Parameter 231.

Table 41 - Motor Underpower Reactive Positive Parameter List

Parameter Minimum/Maximum
Parameter Name(1) Default Value Access Units
Number Value
236 +MVAR Un F Lvl 0.000…1000.00 0.000 MVAR
237 +MVAR Un F Dly 0.1…99.0 0.1 SECS
R/W
238 +MVAR Un A Lvl 0.000…1000.00 0.000 MVAR
239 +MVAR Un A Dly 0.1…99.0 0.1 SECS
(1) As displayed on the HIM or Connected Components Workbench configuration tools.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 139

Chapter 5 Protection and Diagnostic Functions

Motor Over Power Reactive Negative (Motor Generated)—Fault

and Alarm

Motor Over Power Reactive Negative Fault (Code 67)

A Motor Over Power Reactive Negative Fault, Fault Code 67, condition occurs
when the Reactive Power being generated by the motor rises above a user-
defined level -MVAR Ov F Lvl, Parameter 297, for a user-defined time -MVAR
Ov F Dly, Parameter 298. This only occurs when the Reactive Power is
negative.

You can enable or disable the Over Power Reactive Negative Fault by using the
-MVAR Over bit in the Motor Fault Enable, Parameter 230.

Motor Over Power Reactive Negative Alarm

In addition to the Over Power Reactive Negative Fault, an Over Power

Reactive Negative Alarm is also available. Set this up like the Fault, using -
MVAR Ov A Lvl, Parameter 299, and -MVAR Ov A Dly, Parameter 300. You
can enable or disable this Alarm by using the -MVAR Over bit in the Motor
Alarm Enable, Parameter 231.

Table 42 - Motor Over Power Reactive Negative Parameter List

Parameter Minimum/Maximum
Parameter Name(1) Default Value Access Units
Number Value
297 -MVAR Ov F Lvl 0.000…1000.00 0.000 MVAR
298 -MVAR Ov F Dly 0.1…99.0 0.1 SECS
R/W
299 -MVAR Ov A Lvl 0.000…1000.00 0.000 MVAR
300 -MVAR Ov A Dly 0.1…99.0 0.1 SECS
(1) As displayed on the HIM or Connected Components Workbench configuration tools.

Motor Under Power Reactive Negative (Motor Generated)—Fault

and Alarm

Motor Under Power Reactive Negative Fault (Code 68)

A Motor Under Power Reactive Negative Fault, Fault Code 68, condition
occurs when the Reactive Power being generated by the motor falls below a
user-defined level -MVAR Un F Lvl, Parameter 301, for the user-defined time -
MVAR Un F Dly, Parameter 302. This only occurs when the Reactive Power is
negative.

You can enable or disable the Motor Under Power Reactive Negative Fault by
using the -MVAR Under bit in the Motor Fault Enable, Parameter 230.

140 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Protection and Diagnostic Functions Chapter 5

Motor Under Power Reactive Negative Alarm

In addition to the Motor Under Power Reactive Negative Fault, a Motor

Underpower Reactive Negative Alarm is also available. Set this up like the
Fault, using -MVAR Un A Lvl, Parameter 303, and -MVAR Un A Dly,
Parameter 304. You can enable or disable this Alarm by using the -MVAR
Under bit in the Motor Alarm Enable, Parameter 231.

Table 43 - Motor Underpower Reactive Negative Parameter List

Parameter Minimum/Maximum Default Value

Parameter Name(1) Access Units
Number Value
301 -MVAR Un F Lvl 0.000…1000.00 0.000 MVAR
302 -MVAR Un F Dly 0.1…99.0 0.1 SECS
R/W
303 -MVAR Un ALvl 0.000…1000.00 0.000 MVAR
304 -MVAR Un A Dly 0.1…99.0 0.1 SECS
(1) As displayed on the HIM or Connected Components Workbench configuration tools.

Apparent Power Protection The SMC-50 controller can protect against excessive apparent power. You can
protect (Fault) or issue a warning (Alarm) if the apparent power (MVA)
(MVA) consumption of the motor being controlled is too high or too low.

Motor Over Power Apparent—Fault and Alarm

Motor Over Power Apparent Fault (Code 48)

A Motor Over Power Apparent Fault, Fault Code 48, condition occurs when
the Apparent Power being consumed by the motor rises above a user-defined
level (MVA Ov F Lvl), Parameter 240, for a user-defined time, MVA Ov F Dly,
Parameter 241. You can enable or disable this Fault by using the MVA Over
Power bit in the Motor Fault Enable, Parameter 230.

Motor Over Power Apparent Alarm

In addition to the Motor Over Power Apparent Fault, a Motor Over Power
Apparent Alarm is also available. Set this up like the Fault using MVA Over
Alarm Level, Parameter 242, and MVA Over Alarm Delay, Parameter 243. You
can enable or disable this Alarm by using the MVA Over Power bit in the
Motor Alarm Enable, Parameter 231.

Table 44 - Motor Over Power Apparent Parameter List

Parameter Minimum/Maximum
Parameter Name(1) Default Value Access Units
Number Value
240 MVA Ov F Lvl 0.000…1000.00 0.000 MVA
241 MVA Ov F Dly 0.1…99.0 0.1 SECS
R/W
242 MVA Ov A Lvl 0.000…1000.00 0.000 MVA
243 MVA Ov A Dly 0.1…99.0 0.1 SECS
(1) As displayed on the HIM or Connected Components Workbench configuration tools.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 141

Chapter 5 Protection and Diagnostic Functions

Motor Under Power Apparent—Fault and Alarm

Motor Under Power Apparent Fault (Code 47)

A Motor Under Power Apparent Fault, Fault Code 47, condition occurs when
the Apparent Power being consumed by the motor falls below a user-defined
time, MVA Un F Lvl, Parameter 244, for a user-defined time, MVA Un F Dly,
Parameter 245. You can enable or disable this Fault by using the MVA Under
Power bit in the Motor Fault Enable, Parameter 230.

Motor Under Power Apparent Alarm

In addition to the Motor Under Power Apparent Fault, a Motor Under Power
Apparent Alarm is also available. Set this up like the Fault using MVA Under
Alarm Level, Parameter 246, and MVA Over Alarm Delay, Parameter 242. You
can enable or disable this Alarm by using the MVA Under Power bit in the
Motor Alarm Enable, Parameter 231.

Table 45 - Motor Under Power Apparent Parameter List

Parameter Minimum/Maximum Default

Parameter Name(1) Access Units
Number Value Value
244 MVA Un F Lvl 0.000…1000.00 0.000 MVA
245 MVA Un F Dly 0.1…99.0 0.1 SECS
R/W
246 MVA Un A Lvl 0.000…1000.00 0.000 MVA
247 MVA Un A Dly 0.1…99.0 0.1 SECS
(1) As displayed on the HIM or Connected Components Workbench configuration tools.

Power FactorProtection Motor Power Factor (PF)—Fault and Alarm

Lagging Power Factor Under Fault (Code 63)

Leading Power Factor Under Fault (Code 64)
Lagging Power Factor Over Fault (Code 65)
Leading Power Factor Over Fault (Code 66)
Lagging Power Factor Under Alarm
Leading Power Factor Under Alarm
Lagging Power Factor Over Alarm
Leading Power Factor Over Alarm

The SMC-50 controller can protect against an excessive PF for specific

applications that require monitoring the phase angle difference between
voltage and current. You can protect the motor by using the Fault function or
issue a warning using the Alarm function if the PF for an electric motor is
either too high or too low for both Leading, Fault Code 64 and 66, and
Lagging, Fault Code 63 and 65, conditions.

In addition to the configurable Fault and Alarm levels, both Motor Leading
and Motor Lagging Fault and Alarm functions provide a configurable delay
time to limit nuisance trips. PF Faults and PF Alarms are individually enabled

142 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Protection and Diagnostic Functions Chapter 5

and disabled through the Motor Fault Enable, Parameter 230, and Motor
Alarm Enable, Parameter 231.

Table 46 - PF Parameter List

Parameter Minimum/
Parameter Name(1) Default Value Access Units
Number Maximum Value
248 Lead PF Ov F Lvl 0…1.00 0 —
249 Lead PF Ov F Dly 0.1…99.0 0.1 SECS
250 Lead PF Ov A Lvl 0…1.00 0 —
251 Lead PF Ov A Dly 0.1…99.0 0.1 SECS
252 Lead PF Un F Lvl 0…1.00 0 —
253 Lead PF Un F Dly 0.1…99.0 0.1 SECS
254 Lead PF Un A Lvl 0…1.00 0 —
255 Lead PF Un A Dly 0.1…99.0 0.1 SECS
R/W
256 Lag PF Ov F Lvl 0…1.00 0 —
257 Lag PF Ov F Dly 0.1…99.0 0.1 SECS
258 Lag PF Ov A Lvl 0…1.00 0 —
259 Lag PF Ov A Dly 0.1…99.0 0.1 SECS
260 Lag PF Un F Lvl 0…1.00 0 —
261 Lag PF Un F Dly 0.1…99.0 0.1 SECS
262 Lag PF Un A Lvl 0…1.00 0 —
263 Lag PF Un A Dly 0.1…99.0 0.1 SECS
(1) As displayed on the HIM or Connected Components Workbench configuration tools.

Excessive Starts/Hour Motor Starts/Hour—Fault and Alarm

Protection
Starts per Hour Fault (Code 29)

You can program the SMC-50 controller to limit the maximum number of
starter/motor starts within a sliding one-hour time window. Once the number
of starts per hour is reached as youhave configured it in Starts Per Hour,
Parameter 128, any additional starts will cause an Excessive Starts Fault, Fault
Code 29. You can enable or disable this Fault by using the Starts/Hr bit in the
Motor Fault Enable, Parameter 230.

Starts per Hour Alarm

A Starts Per Hour Alarm is also available. You can enable or disable this Alarm
by using the Starts/Hr bit in the Motor Alarm Enable, Parameter 231. The
Starts per Hour Faults and Alarm is activated when the starts within the last
hour exceed the value configured in Starts Per Hour, Parameter 128. The starts
count value is cleared when the starts in the previous hour are less than or equal
to the Starts Per Hour parameter.
Table 47 - Starts per Hour Parameter List

Parameter Minimum/Maximum Default

Parameter Name(1) Access Units
Number Value Value
128 Starts Per Hour 1…99 99 R/W —
(1) As displayed on the HIM or Connected Components Workbench configuration tools.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 143

Chapter 5 Protection and Diagnostic Functions

Preventive Maintenance Preventive Maintenance (PM) Hours Protection—Fault and Alarm

Protection
PM Hours Fault (Code 50) and Alarm

You can configure the SMC-50 controller to provide a Fault and/or Alarm to
indicate that PM should be performed after a programmed number of hours
have elapsed, Fault Code 50. Do this by setting a value in the Time to PM,
Parameter 21, to indicate the amount of running time before PM needs to be
done.

The programmed Time to PM value counts down while the motor is starting,
stopping, operating in slow speed, and running. When the Time to PM
parameter value reaches zero, the configured Fault and/or Alarm condition is
activated and the parameter counter stops decrementing.

After the preventive maintenance is complete, you can reset the Fault and/or
Alarm. You must reload the Time to PM to the value configured and stored in
the PM Hours, Parameter 126, through the Meter Reset, Parameter 16, via the
HIM or network connection.

Enable the PM Hours Fault by using the PM Hours bit in the Motor Fault
Enable, Parameter 230. The PM Hours Alarm is enabled using the PM Hours
bit in the Motor Alarm Enable, Parameter 231.

Table 48 - PM Hours Protection Parameter List

Parameter Parameter Minimum/Maximum Value Default Value Access Units

Number Name(1)
126 PM Hours 1…10000 10000 R/W HRS
21 Time to PM 0.0…10000.00 0.0 R HRS
Ready, Elapsed Time, Energy, Time to
16 Meter Reset Ready R/W —
PM, Starts to PM
(1) As displayed on the HIM or Connected Components Workbench configuration tools.

PM Starts Protection—Fault and Alarm

PM Starts Fault (Code 51) and Alarm

You can configure the SMC-50 controller to provide a Fault and/or Alarm to
indicate that PM should be performed after a pre-defined number of starts
have occurred, Fault Code 51. Do this by using the PM Starts, Parameter 127,
Starts to PM, Parameter 22, and Meter Reset, Parameter 16.

The Starts to PM parameter indicates the number of starts before preventive

maintenance needs to be performed. This value counts down by one for each
start initiated, even if the start is not completed. When the Starts to PM value
reaches zero, the configured Fault and/or Alarm condition activates and the
counter stops counting.

144 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Protection and Diagnostic Functions Chapter 5

After the preventive maintenance is complete, you can reset the Fault and/or
Alarm. You must reload the Starts to PM to the value configured and stored in
the PM Starts parameter through the Meter Reset, Parameter 16 via a HIM or
network communications.

The PM Starts Alarm function is enabled using the PM Starts bit in the Motor
Fault Enable, Parameter 230. The Alarm is enabled using the PM Starts bit in
the Motor Alarm Enable, Parameter 231.

Table 49 - Starts Protection Parameter List

Parameter Minimum/Maximum Default

Parameter Name(1) Access Units
Number Value Value
127 PM Starts 1…50000 100 R/W
22 Starts to PM 0…50000 0 R
Ready, Elapsed Time, Energy,
16 Meter Reset Ready R/W
Time to PM, Starts to PM
(1) As displayed on the HIM or Connected Components Workbench configuration tools.

Line Loss Protection Line Loss Fault Phase A (Code1)

Line Loss Fault Phase B (Code 2)
Line Loss Fault Phase C (Code 3)

The SMC-50 controller can individually identify and provide a Fault and or
Alarm if a power line loss occurs on any phase.

TIP Phase A, B, or C loss = Fault Code 1, 2, or 3 respectively. There are no line loss
Fault Parameters to configure.

The Line Loss Fault is enabled or disabled using the Line Loss bit in the Starter
Fault Enable, Parameter 136. In addition, a Line Loss Alarm can be enabled or
disabled using the Line Loss bit in the Starter Alarm Enable, Parameter 137.

TIP If Line Loss is disabled, consider enabling the Undervoltage Fault to limit
potential motor damage caused by phase loss.

Silicon-Controlled Rectifier Shorted SCR Fault—Phase A, B, or C

(SCR) Protection
Shorted SCR Fault Phase A (Code 4)
Shorted SCR Fault Phase B (Code 5)
Shorted SCR Fault Phase C (Code 6)

The SMC-50 controller can detect whether any one of its SCRs are shorted in
any phase. The shorted SCR Fault is always enabled (user cannot disable). No
user intervention or parameter configuration is required and no shorted SCR
Alarm exists.

TIP Shorted SCR detection is performed as part of a prestart check.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 145

Chapter 5 Protection and Diagnostic Functions

SCR Overtemperature—Fault

SCR Overtemperature Fault (Code 10)

The SMC-50 controller can detect whether any one of its SCRs has reached an
over temperature condition, which could indicate excessive current draw or
excessive number of starts. This function is accomplished using an I2t
calculation. There are no SCR overtemperature parameters for you to
configure. The SCR Overtemperature Fault is always enabled. There is no
SCR Overtemperature Alarm.

The SCR temperature calculation/algorithm also controls the cyclic operation

of the SMC-50 controller’s fan(s) in the power section. The internal fan of the
solid-state SMC-50 controller turns on whenever the motor that it is
controlling is running or the estimated SCR temperature is above 50 °C. The
fan turns off when the motor is not energized and the estimated SCR
temperature is below 49 °C.

For SMC-50 controllers with internal bypass, you can wire the fans directly to
the power source. In this case, the fans run all of the time. You could also wire
an auxiliary to control the fans. Fan control is selected and then the fans are
controlled in the same manner as with the solid-state units.

Open SCR Gate Fault and Alarm—Phase A, B, or C

Open SCR Phase A (Code 7)

Open SCR Phase B (Code 8)
Open SCR Phase C (Code 9)

The SMC-50 controller can detect whether an SCR control gate in any power
phase has malfunctioned and initiate a Fault or Alarm. There are no user-
configurable Open Gate parameters.

The Open SCR Gate Fault is enabled and disabled using the Open Gate bit in
the Starter Fault Enable, Parameter 136. The Open SCR Gate Alarm is enabled
and disabled in the Starter Alarm Enable, Parameter 137.

Open Bypass—Phase A, B, or C

Open Bypass Phase A (Code 13)

Open Bypass Phase B (Code 14)
Open Bypass Phase C (Code 15)

The SMC-50 controller monitors the power pole bypass contacts for proper
operation. If a contact closure is not sensed, the SMC-50 controller will
indicate an open bypass fault in the appropriate phase.

146 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Protection and Diagnostic Functions Chapter 5

Power Quality Power Quality Fault and Alarm—Phase A, B, or C

Power Quality Phase A (Code 52)

Power Quality Phase B (Code 53)
Power Quality Phase C (Code 54)

A power quality Fault or Alarm occurs when the starter is not properly firing its
phase A, B, or C SCRs. This condition is generally attributed to power line
problems that are not detected by other line monitoring functions. There are
no user-configurable Power Quality Fault or Alarm parameters to configure.

Phase A, B, and C Power Quality equates to Fault Code 52, 53, or 54

respectively. You can enable or disable this by using the Power Quality bit in
the Motor Fault Enable, Parameter 230.

You can also enable or disable a Power Quality Alarm by using the Power
Quality bit in the Motor Alarm Enable, Parameter 231.

Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) Fault and Alarm

Power Quality THDV (Fault Code 55) and Power Quality THDI (Fault Code 56)—Fault and
Alarm

The SMC-50 controller lets you read power line THD which is the average of
32 line frequency harmonics. The calculation for THDI and THDV (THDx)
is:
THDx =  (THD22 + THD23…THD231)
THD1

Excessive THD indicates a problem in the power source and/or the

application. This can have an adverse effect on the performance of the overall
system. THD Fault and Alarm parameters are available for both voltage
THDV and current THD I. A Fault and Alarm delay time and a level are also
available to configure each of these parameters.

Table 50 - THD Parameter List

Parameter Parameter Name(1) Minimum/Maximum Value Default Value Access Units

Number
118 THD V F Lvl 0.0…1000.0 1000.0 %
119 THD V F Dly 0.1…99.0 0.1 SECS
120 THD V A Lvl 0.0…1000.0 1000.0 %
121 THD V A Dly 0.1…99.0 0.1 SECS
R/W
122 THD I F Lvl 0.0…1000.0 1000.0 %
123 THD I F Dly 0.1…99.0 0.1 SECS
124 THD I A Lvl 0.0…1000.0 1000.0 %
125 THD I A Dly 0.1…99.0 0.1 SECS
(1) As displayed on the HIM or Connected Components Workbench configuration tools.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 147

Chapter 5 Protection and Diagnostic Functions

Power Pole Overtemperature—Fault

PTC Power Pole Overtemperature Fault (Code 60)

A built-in PTC is used to measure the SMC-50 controller’s power pole

temperature. The SMC-50 controller generates a Power Pole PTC Fault, Fault
Code 60, when the temperature in the power pole rises above the PTC trip
temperature.

TIP There are no user-configurable Power Pole Overtemperature Fault

parameter you cannot disable it. You cannot reset the Fault until the unit
cools.

Open Load—Fault and Alarm

No Load Motor Fault (Code 14)

Open Motor Phase A Loss Fault (Code 15)
Open Motor Phase B Loss Fault (Code 16)
Open Motor Phase C Loss Fault (Code 17)

The SMC-50 controller can detect and report a No Load Motor Fault (no
motor detected), Fault Code 14, condition and Open Motor Phase Loss Fault
condition for each individual motor phase A, B, or C, Fault Code 15, 16, and
17. A check for No Load and Open Motor Phase is done as an SMC-50
controller pre-start activity and is checked immediately after the motor start
command and before the first SCR gating pulse. There are no user-
configurable parameters associated with this Fault.

You can enable or disable the No Load and Open Motor Phase Loss Fault by
using the Open Load bit in the Motor Fault Enable, Parameter 230.

You can also enable or disable an Open Load Alarm by using the Open Load
bit in the Motor Alarm Enable, Parameter 231.

Current Transformers (CT) Loss—Fault

CT Loss Phase A Fault (Code 30)

CT Loss Phase B Fault (Code 31)
CT Loss Phase C Fault (Code 32)

The CT Loss Fault is provided on a per phase basis (phase A, B, and C; Fault
Code 30, 31, and 32) and occurs when the current feedback signal from one of
the SMC-50 controller’s internal CTs is invalid. Indication of an invalid CT
feedback signal is when the SMC-50 controller remains at the minimum
negative current or maximum positive current for its current range. This Fault
cannot be disabled and no parameters need to be configured.

148 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Protection and Diagnostic Functions Chapter 5

Locked Rotor—Fault and Alarm

Locked Rotor Fault (Code 70)

The Locked Rotor Fault, Fault Code 70, provides indication that the rotor of
the motor under SMC-50 controller control and operating in any running
mode (for example, Slow Speed) has become frozen or locked.

TIP The Locked Rotor Fault is similar to the Jam Fault except it is active during all
running modes, not just at full speed.

The value or level of the Locked Rotor Fault is configured as a percentage of

the motor FLC using Locked Rotor F Lvl, Parameter 84. A configurable delay
time using Locked Rtr F Dly, Parameter 85, is also available to help eliminate
nuisance Faults.

Locked Rotor protection is enabled or disabled via the Locked Rotor bit in the
Motor Fault Enable, Parameter 230.

You can also enable a Locked Rotor Alarm that will activate under the same
condition as the Locked Rotor Fault. The Locked Rotor Alarm is enabled or
disabled via the Locked Rotor bit in the Motor Alarm Enable, Parameter 231,

Table 51 - Locked Rotor Parameter List

Parameter Minimum/Maximum
Parameter Name(1) Default Value Access Units
Number Value
84 Locked Rtr F Lvl 400…1000 600 % FLC
85 Locked Rtr F Dly 0.1…100.0 0.1 SECS
R/W
310 Locked Rtr A Lvl 400…1000 600 % FLC
311 Locked Rtr A Dly 0.1…100.0 0.1 SECS
(1) As displayed on the HIM or Connected Components Workbench configuration tools.

Expansion Module Functions Expansion Device Removed Fault

Expansion Module Removed Fault (Code x026)

When an expansion module (for example, 150-SM…) is removed from a

powered down control module and power is reapplied, Expansion Removed,
Fault Code 26, is generated. For SMC-50 controller expansion modules, the
Fault code includes the control module port number (7, 8, or 9) to distinguish
which expansion module caused the Fault (for example, an expansion module
located in port 8 would display the Fault Code 8026).

For physical DPI devices that support this function, the Fault is generated only
when the associated bit is set in the Logic Mask Act, Parameter 149.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 149

Chapter 5 Protection and Diagnostic Functions

IMPORTANT Ensure all line and control power is removed from the SMC-50 controller
before you remove or install any expansion or communication module.

Expansion Device Fault

Expansion Module Fault (Code x028)

This fault code is generated directly by any option module or DPI device and is
separate from the Expansion Device Removed fault (control module
generated). This fault is always enabled (user cannot disable) in the control
module. Individual option modules or DPI devices may enable or disable these
faults as needed.

TIP Not all devices use this fault.

Expansion Module Incompatible Fault

Incompatible Expansion Module Fault (Code x027)

If an expansion module (for example, 150-SM…) is plugged into an

incompatible expansion port or the expansion module is not supported by the
control module firmware revision (FRN), an Expansion Incompatible, Fault
Code 27, is generated. The SMC-50 controller port number (7, 8, or 9) of the
expansion module generating the Fault is also displayed (for example, an
expansion module located in port 7 would display the Fault Code 7027). This
fault cannot be disabled.

Real Time Clock (RTC) Battery Low

RTC Battery Low Alarm (Code 69)

An RTC Battery Low, Alarm Code 69, provides indication of a control module
battery low condition. This condition is checked upon power up of the control
module. The battery maintains the operation of the control module’s RTC
when the control power is removed. Once the Alarm is posted, the battery
should be replaced as soon as possible. This alarm cannot be disabled.

To clear this alarm, you must replace the battery and set the time/date by using
a HIM or applicable PC software (for example, Connected Components
Workbench software). For battery replacement instructions, please see
Appendix D.

150 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Protection and Diagnostic Functions Chapter 5

Configuration Functions Configuration Change—Fault and Alarm

Configuration Change Fault (Code 57)

By setting the Configuration Change bit in the Starter Fault Enable, Parameter
136, any change to the controller configuration will result in a Configuration
Change Fault, Fault Code 57. An Alarm can also be initiated by setting the
"Config Change" bit in the Starter Alarm Enable, Parameter 137. The Fault can
be cleared immediately and the Alarm clears upon the next motor start
command.

I/O Configuration—Fault

I/O Configuration Fault (Code 61)

The SMC-50 controller generates an I/O Configuration Fault, Fault Code 61,
if any control input is programmed as a Start or Slow Speed command and no
input is configured for Coast or Stop. The Fault occurs when the Start or
operational maneuver is attempted (the motor will not start). This Fault is also
generated when an input configuration changes from:

1. one that cannot start the motor to one that can start the motor OR
2. an input that can stop the motor to one that cannot.

This Fault is always enabled; no parameter adjustments are required and no

alarm is available.

Buffers and Storage Non-volatile Storage (NVS) Fault

Functions
NVS Fault (Code 34)

The NVS Error Fault, Fault Code 34, is posted if a read/write checksum error
occurs within the user data portion of the SMC-50 controller’s non-volatile
memory. This Fault can only be cleared if you modify/store a parameter value
(this requires changing any parameter). It is recommended that you perform a
Load Defaults command to make sure that all controller parameters are within
range. you cannot clear this error by cycling the SMC-50 controller power.

Fault Buffer and Fault Storage Parameters

The Fault Buffer is used to store the last five system Faults. The Fault Buffer is
accessed via the Diagnostic screen of a 20-HIM-A6, 20-HIM-C6S, or from the
Device Properties screen, which you access via the Connected Components
Workbench software. The most recent Fault is located at the top of the buffer

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 151

Chapter 5 Protection and Diagnostic Functions

(number 1 for the HIM or number 1.1 for the software configuration tool.
The Fault Buffer also stores the date and time that the Fault occurred.

TIP The date and time information is obtained from the SMC-50 controller’s RTC.
Ensure the RTC is set correctly.

The five most recent Faults are stored in Parameter 138 through Parameter
142. any networked device can access this stored Fault history in the parameter
list. The Fault date and time are not available from the parameters list.

Table 52 - Fault Buffer and Fault Storage Parameter List

Parameter Number Parameter Name(1) Fault Code Access Units

138 Fault 1
139 Fault 2
140 Fault 3 0-10000 R —
141 Fault 4
142 Fault 5
(1) As displayed on the HIM or Connected Components Workbench configuration tools.

Alarm/Event Buffer and Alarm/Event Storage Parameters

In addition to storing (buffering) Alarm Data, the Alarm Buffer is used to store
several key controller events. The type of events stored includes:

Event Alarm Code

Start 71
Slow Speed 72
Stop Option 73
Coast 74
Clear Fault 75—a Fault has been cleared
Fault 76
Parameter Change 77—change to any Parameter occurred

You can access the Alarm Buffer via the Diagnostic screen of a 20-HIM-A6,
20-HIM-C6S, or from the Device Fault/Alarm button of Connected
Components Workbench software. The last 100 events are stored in the Alarm
Buffer with the most recent event numbered as 1 (HIM) or 1.1 (software) in
the list. Along with the Alarm Code, the date and time that the event occurred
are also listed.

TIP The date and time information is obtained from the SMC-50 controller’s RTC.
Ensure that the RTC is set correctly.

In addition to the Alarm Buffer, the last five Alarm Events are available via
Parameter 143 through Parameter 147. Storing this Alarm history in the
parameter list provides access by any networked device. The Alarm/Event date
and time are not available from the parameter list.

152 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Protection and Diagnostic Functions Chapter 5

Table 53 - Alarm/Event Parameter List

Parameter Number Parameter Name(1) Alarm Code Access Units

143 Alarm 1
144 Alarm 2
145 Alarm 3 0-10000 R —
146 Alarm 4
147 Alarm 5
(1) As displayed on the HIM or Connected Components Workbench configuration tools.

Auto Restart from Fault This function allows the SMC-50 controller to automatically restart from
various Starter or Motor Fault conditions. Auto Restart from Fault is
Function individually bit enabled or disabled using Starter Restart Enable, Parameter
135, or Motor Restart Enable, Parameter 264. See Table 54 on page 154.

Parameter 133, Restart Attempts, lets you define the allowable number of
restart attempts from the fault before ending the retry process. The Retry
Counter clears whenever the controller receives a valid Stop command.

In addition, Restart Delay Time, Parameter 134, lets you define a time delay
from when the Fault event occurred until a Restart Attempt can be effective.

TIP This delay is not used with an Overload Fault. Instead, the restart attempt
occurs when the Mtr Therm Usage, Parameter 18, falls below the OL Reset
Level, Parameter 80.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 153

Chapter 5 Protection and Diagnostic Functions

Table 54 - Auto Restart from Fault Parameter List

Parameter Parameter Bit

Fault Name Bit Access Units
Number Name(1) Assignment
Volt Umbal 0
Overvoltage 1
Undervoltage 2 Bit = 0, Disabled
Phase Rev 3 Bit = 1, Enabled
135 Strtr Restart En Line Loss 7 R/W
Open Gate 5 [All Disabled as
Config Change 6 Default]
Freq 7
THD V 8
Overload 0
Underload 1
MWatts Over 2
MWatts Under 3
+MVAR Over 7
+MVAR Under 5
-MVAR Over 6
-MVAR Under 7
MVA Under 8
MVA Over 9
Curr Imbal 10 Bit = 0, Disabled
Jam 11 Bit = 1, Enabled
264 Motor Restart En R/W
Stall 12
Starts/Hr 13 [All Disabled as
Default]
PM Hours 14
PM Starts 15
Power Qual 16
Open Load 17
THD I 18
Lead PF Un 19
Lead PF Ov 20
Lag PF Un 21
Lag PF Ov 22.
Locked Rotor 23
(1) As displayed on the HIM or Connected Components Workbench configuration tools.

Table 55 - Auto Restart Parameter List

Parameter Minimum/Maximum
Parameter Name(1) Default Value Access Units
Number Value
133 Restart Attempts 0…5 0
R/W
134 Restart Dly 0…60 0 SECS
(1) As displayed on the HIM or Connected Components Workbench configuration tools.

154 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Chapter 6

Programming

Overview This chapter provides a basic understanding of the programming/

configuration tools available to modify the SMC-50 controller’s parameters.
Unlike previous SMC products (for example, SMC-3 and SMC Flex), the
SMC -50 controller does not contain a built-in programming tool. This lets
you select from several programming tools to best suit your application.

Human Interface Module The 20-HIM-A6 lets you:

(HIM) (Cat. No. 20-HIM-A6 or • configure/monitor all controller parameters,
20-HIM-C6S) • configure/monitor all option modules (for example, 150-SM4, digital I/
O, 150-SM6 PCM, etc.), and
• use the SMC-50 controller’s general startup configuration wizard.

TIP The 20-HIM-A3 cannot configure the option modules or use the general
startup configuration wizard. Therefore, the 20-HIM-A3 is not
recommended for use with the SMC-50 controller and is not mentioned in
this document.

The 20-HIM-A6 is typically inserted into the HIM bezel port located on the
upper right of the control module. Inserting the HIM into the bezel provides
operation in a NEMA Type 1 environment. The 20-HIM-C6S, a remote
(door-mount) version of the 20-HIM-A6, provides operation in a NEMA 4X/
12 environment and includes a 1202-C30 interface cable to the SMC-50
controller DPI Port 2 on the top of the controller. For additional information
on mounting the 20-HIM-A6 or the 20-HIM-C6S, see the HIM user manual,
publication 20HIM-UM001.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 155

Chapter 6 Programming

Figure 93 - HIM Mounting Locations

Front View
HIM Bezel Port

Top View

DPI Port 2
(Port 2 and 3 if you use a splitter)

The following information describes some of the basic screens and keypad
functions of the 20-HIM-A6 or 20-HIM-C6S. Additional details about all
HIM functions can be found in the user manual, publication 20HIM-UM001.

HIM Single-Function Keys

The four single-function keys only perform their dedicated functions no

matter which screen or data entry mode you are using.

Table 56 - HIM Single-Function Keys

Start Folders Controls Stop

Key Function
Start Starts the controller if the SMC-50 controller Logic Mask is enabled for the port the HIM is connected to. (1)
Folders Accesses folders for parameters, diagnostics, memory functions, preferences, and other tests.
Controls Accesses jog, direction, auto/manual, and other control functions.
Stop Stops the SMC-50 controller or clears a fault. The Stop key is always active. Coast Stop only.
(1) If the device (port) is enabled and removed under power or an expansion device is removed, a fault is generated. The bit location
(for example, 0, 1, 2, etc.) corresponds to the DPI port numbers.

156 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Programming Chapter 6

HIM Soft Keys

Up to five dynamic soft keys can be shown at the bottom of the HIM screen.
Based on the specific screen or the data entry mode being used, a soft key name
and its function may change. When a soft key is active, its presentation
function and corresponding soft key label are shown at the bottom of the HIM
screen.

Table 57 - HIM Soft Key Functions

Soft Key Description Function

• Scrolls through menus and screens as

directed by each arrow
Multi-Function—Blue • Performs corresponding functions
displayed in the data area

8
7 9

4 6
Numeric Keys—Grey • Enters their respective numeric values
1 3
2

• Enters the numeric value, 5

5 • Displays the next level of a selected
5/Enter menu item
• Enters new values
• Performs intended actions

Password Modification Using the HIM

The SMC-50 controller provides password protection by numeric code

(0…65,535) to prevent unwanted modification of parameters. You can view or
monitor data and parameter values without entering the password, but
modification requires password entry.

The password can be modified from the PROPERTIES folder screen of the
20-HIM-A6 or 20-HIM-C6S, as shown in Figure 94.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 157

Chapter 6 Programming

Figure 94 - PROPERTIES Folder Screen

Allen-Bradley
Stopped AUTO
0 Amps F

PROPERTIES
PROPERTIES
Change Password
Select Language
00
Set Proc Display
ESC Set Date and Time

TIP If the default password (0=default) is modified, ensure the modified

password is written down in a secure place. There is no way to reset the
password if it is forgotten. For additional information on password
modification, see the 20-HIM-A6 user manual, publication 20HIM-UM001.

To modify the default password, perform the following steps using the
20-HIM-A6 or 20-HIM-C6S:

1. From the initial power-up screen, press the FOLDERS single function
key.
2. Use the forward or back arrow key until the PROPERTIES folder
screen is displayed, as shown in Figure 94.
3. Select the CHANGE PASSWORD option, then press the Enter (#5)
key.
4. Enter a numeric password, then press the Enter (#5) key. This will load
the password into the SMC-50 controller’s memory.

Parameter Access Level Modification Using the HIM

The SMC-50 controller provides three different parameter access levels:

Monitor, Basic, and Advanced. These access levels let you limit user access and/
or speed viewing or changing of certain parameters.

TIP • The access level is not maintained if power to the controller is cycled.
• The default access level is Basic.
• The advanced level provides access to all parameters.
• Individual parameter access levels are shown in Table 69 through
Table 73 beginning on page 181 and is also contained in the Parameter
Linear List, Table 74 through Table 78 beginning on page 184.

To view/modify the current access level, perform the following steps using the
20-HIM-A6:

158 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Programming Chapter 6

1. From the initial power-up screen, press the FOLDERS single function
key.
2. Press the forward or back arrow key until the DEV PARAM folder
screen appears.
3. Select the PARAM ACCESS LEVEL option, then press the Enter (#5)
key. The Dev Parameter screen appears.

Allen-Bradley
Stopped AUTO
0 Amps F

DEV PARAM
Linear List
00 File-Group
Changed Parameters
ESC Param Access Level

4. Use the up or down arrow to scroll up or down until you reach the
desired access level
5. Press Enter (#5) to view that access level.

Parameter Management Before you begin programming, it is important to understand how the
memory is structured within the SMC-50 and used on power-up and during
normal operation.

Figure 95 - Memory Block Diagram

SMC-50 Controller Memory

EEPROM RAM ROM

20-HIM-A6

PC Software
Network
Connection

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 159

Chapter 6 Programming

RAM (Random Access Memory)

RAM is the work area of the controller after it is powered up. The SMC-50
controller uses an Auto Store feature when programming parameters. When
parameters are modified in the program mode, the new values are stored
immediately in RAM and then in EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable
Read-only Memory), once the enter key has been pressed. If control power is lost
before the enter key is pressed, these values are lost. When the device powers
up, it copies the values from the EEPROM area of memory into RAM.

ROM (Read-only Memory)—Set Defaults

Allen-Bradley
Stopped AUTO
0 Amps F

MEMORY
HIM CopyCat
Set Defaults
00
ESC

The SMC-50 controller comes with factory default parameter values. These
settings are stored in non-volatile ROM and are displayed the first time you
enter the Program mode via the Linear List or File-Group mode using the
HIM. To restore factory parameter defaults:

1. Navigate to the Memory folders screen with Port <00> displayed.

TIP Option modules can also be restored to defaults using this method. Ensure
its respective port number is displayed.

2. Select/highlight the Set Defaults line, then press ENTER (#5). The
following text is displayed: WARNING: Sets all Parameters to factory
defaults. Continue?
3. Press the ENTER soft key to change defaults or the ESC soft key to
return to the previous screen.

TIP You can also restore factory defaults by using the Parameter Management,
Parameter 229, available in the Utility File-Group.

160 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Programming Chapter 6

EEPROM

The SMC-50 controller provides a non-volatile area for storing user-modified

parameter values in the EEPROM.

Parameter Configuration Using the START UP Configuration Tool (20-HIM-A6 or 20-HIM-C6S)

The general START UP configuration tool lets you rapidly configure an

SMC-50 controller. Enabled by the SMC-50 controller and the 20-HIM-A6
or 20-HIM-C6S, a series of questions required to configure starting (for
example, Soft, Linear, Pump, etc.) and stopping (for example, Coast, Pump,
etc.) modes are displayed on the HIM via this tool.

Not all parameters are configured with this tool. You can configure any non-
configured startup parameters by using the parameter number or File—Group
search method. See Basic Configuration using the HIM on page 189.

Accessing the General START UP Tool

1. Select the FOLDERS single-function key located on the lower left

portion of the keypad.
2. Use the left or right arrow key until the START UP folders screen is
displayed
.

Allen-Bradley
Stopped AUTO
0 Amps F

START UP
Begin Start Up
00
ESC

3. Press the ENTER (#5) key to begin the configuration process. The
HIM displays "Run General Start-up?".
4. Press the Yes soft key to begin the process or Abort soft key to return to
the START UP folders screen.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 161

Chapter 6 Programming

Allen-Bradley
SMC-50

Run General Start-Up?

Abort - - - Yes

The HIM displays a series of questions about the Motor, Start, and Stop
processes.

TIP Depending on the answers to the Start and Stop processes, some screens
may not be displayed.
EXAMPLE
If: Soft Start, Linear Speed, or Pump Start is selected:
Then: Starting Torque, Max Torque, Rated Torque, and Rated Speed will not
be displayed.
Reason: These parameters are specific to the Torque Start parameter group.

Entering Data into General Startup

1. Display the parameter.

If the HIM provides the allowable range (for example, 1.0 << 2200.0) at
the bottom of the screen, enter the data value. If an up or down arrow
soft key is displayed, use the soft key to display the desired selection.
Enter the data value if you see this screen Use the up and down arrows or soft keys to display
your selection if you see this screen

Allen-Bradley Allen-Bradley
SMC-50 SMC-50
General Start-Up General Start-Up
Edit Ramp Time Edit Stop Mode
Secs Soft Stop 1
0.0 < < 1000.0 0<<5
ESC Enter ESC Enter

2. Enter the desired value, then press the ENTER soft key.

162 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Programming Chapter 6

TIP If you enter an incorrect value: Press the ESC soft key to return to the
previous screen, then enter the desired value. Use the left arrow soft key to
delete a single digit at a time from the data field to enter the correct digit. If
a group of selections is displayed, the left arrow soft key moves to the
lowest numbered selection.

Once all parameters are entered, the START-UP folders screen appears.

Review/Modify Parameter Data

1. Display the START UP folder screen.

2. Press the ENTER (#5) key.
3. Select the "Yes" soft key when "Run General Start-Up?" is displayed.
4. Individually review each parameter (required), pressing the ENTER soft
key to move onto the next parameter. If necessary, press the ESC soft key
to review the previous parameter.

TIP To modify parameter data, use the procedure outlined in Entering Data into
General Startup on page 162.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 163

Chapter 6 Programming

Figure 96 - Flow Chart—General Startup Parameters

Line Voltage

Starting Mode Input 1 or Input 2 No

Motor Heater
Yes
Current Limit Soft Start Linear Speed Torque Pump Full Voltage
Ramp Time Ramp Time Ramp Time Ramp Time Ramp Time Heating Time

Current Limit Current Limit Current Limit Current Limit Initial Torque
Level Level Level Level Heating Level

Initial Torque Initial Torque Starting

Torque Input 1 or Input 2 No
Dual Ramp
Max. Torque
Yes
Rated Torque Starting Mode
2 (repeat of
Rated Speed Starting Mode
selections)

Stop Mode Aux 1 Config

Soft Stop Linear Speed Pump Stop Ext. Brake SMB Coast Aux 2 Config
Stop Time Stop Time Stop Time Stop Time Braking
Current
Done

Motor FLC

Overload Class

Input 1

Input 2

Input 1 or Input 2 No
Slow Speed
Yes

Slow Speed

Input 1 or Input 2 No
Overload Select
Yes

OL Class 2

Parameter Search and Configuration

The 20-HIM-A6 or 20-HIM-C6S modules can access all of the SMC-50

controller parameters. These modules provide two basic ways to search for and
modify a specific parameter or group of parameters: by parameter number or

164 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Programming Chapter 6

File-Group. The following example explains how to search by parameter

number using the 20-HIM-A6 module.

Parameter Search and Configuration by Parameter Number

To perform a parameter number search and modification, perform the

following steps.

Parameter Search and Configuration by Parameter Number

1. Ensure that the initial SMC-50 controller Power Up screen appears on

the HIM.

Allen-Bradley
Stopped AUTO
0 Amps F
SMC-50
Standard
00 Rev 1. 001 Ser. A
ESC REF PAR# TEXT

2. Using the PAR# soft key, type the desired parameter number to display,
press the ENTER soft key, then press the EDIT soft key. The following
screen appears.

Allen-Bradley
Stopped AUTO
0 Amps
SMC-50
PROPERTIES
Jump to Param #

00 1
ESC ENTER

TIP To access the next/previous PAR# from the one currently displayed, use the
UP/DOWN arrow soft keys to display the desired parameter for modification.

3. Press ENTER to load the changed value into memory.

TIP For a complete SMC-50 controller linear list, see Table 74 through Table 79
beginning on page 184

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 165

Chapter 6 Programming

For additional details on these procedures, see the 20-HIM-A6 or

20-HIM-C6S user manual, publication 20HIM-UM001.

Parameter Search and Configuration by File-Group Structure

Parameter Structure

The parameters of the SMC-50 controller are structured into five parameter
File-Groups:

1. Monitoring
2. Setup
3. Motor Protection
4. Communications
5. Utility

The parameters associated with each of these five File-Groups are shown in
Table 69 through Table 73 beginning on page 181 of this chapter.

Parameter Search and Configuration by File-Group (SMC-50 Controller Category Search)

1. From the HIM Power-Up screen, press the FOLDERS single-function

key.
2. Press the LEFT or RIGHT arrow key until the screen displays DEV
PARAM. Ensure Port 00 SMC-50 controller is selected from the
PORTS screen.

Allen-Bradley
Stopped AUTO
0 Amps F

DEV PARAM
Linear List
00 File-Group
Changed Parameters
ESC Param Access Level

3. Using the DOWN arrow key, scroll to the File-Group selection, then
press ENTER (#5 keypad). The screen displays Port 00 Param File-
Group at the top of the screen.

166 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Programming Chapter 6

4. Using the DOWN arrow key, scroll to the Set Up selection, then press
ENTER. The screen displays the setup categories (for example, Basic,
Starting).

Allen-Bradley
Stopped AUTO
0 Amps F
Port 00 Param File-Group
FILE MonitoringPROPERTIES
FILE Set Up
FILE Motor Protection
FILE Communications
FILE Utility
ESC

5. With Basic highlighted, press ENTER (number 5 on the keypad).

6. Scroll to the desired parameter (for example, Line Voltage) to modify it,
then press ENTER (number 5 on the keypad).
7. With the parameter displayed, press the EDIT soft key.
8. Enter the desired value, then press the ENTER soft key to save the value.
9. Press the ESC key to return to the Basic category.
10. To modify another parameter in the Basic category, follow steps 5
though 7. To return to a higher level category, press the BACK arrow
key.

TIP Using the DEV PARAM folder screen and the File-Group selection, SMC-50
controller parameters can be selected and configured by functional
category. See the Parameter File-Group Structure on page 181.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 167

Chapter 6 Programming

Parameter Configuration - Overview

Using the Setup File Group
Table 58 shows the parameter sets available within the Basic Setup group.

Table 58 - Setup File Group

Setup File Group Parameters

Starting (BA) Stopping (BA) Slow Speed Dual(BA) Ramp
Basic (BA) Advanced I/O (BA) Advanced Tuning
Motor Config Input 2 Starting Mode Stop Mode Slow Speed Starting Mode 2 Pump Pedestal (A) Input 1 Force Tuning (A) Phase Shift 0% (A)
Line Voltage Aux 1 Config Ramp Time Stop Time (BA) Ramp Time 2 Load Type (A) Input 2 Starter R Phase Shift 10% (A)
Starting Aux 2 Config Cur Limit Level Braking Current Slow Brake Cur Limit Level 2 High Eff Brake (A) Aux 1 Config Total R Phase Shift 20% (A)
Mode Overload Initial Torque Backspin Timer Cur (BA) Initial Torque 2 UTS Level (A) Aux 1 Invert Coupling Factor Phase Shift 30% (A)
Ramp Time Class Starting Torque SS Ref Gain Starting Torque 2 Stall Position (A) Aux 1 On Delay Inductance Phase Shift 40% (A)
Initial Torque Service Max Torque (A) Max Torque 2 Stall Level (A) Aux 1 Off Delay Speed PGain (A) Phase Shift 50% (A)
Max Torque Factor Kickstart Time SS Trans Gain Kickstart Time 2 V Shut Off Level (A) Aux 2 Config Transient Gain Phase Shift 60% (A)
Cur Limit Motor FLC Kickstart Level (A) Kickstart Level 2 I Shut Off Level (A) Aux 2 Invert (A) Phase Shift 70% (A)
Level Starting Heating Time Notch Maximum (A) Aux 2 On Delay Transient Zero Phase Shift 80% (A)
Stop Mode Torque Heating Level Timed Start (A) Aux 2 Off Delay (A) Phase Shift 90% (A)
Stop Time Max Torque Start Delay Bypass Delay (A) Aux Control Transient Mag Phase Shift 100% (A)
Input 1 Rated Torque Energy Saver (BA) (A)
Rated Speed Demand Period (BA) Ping Degree (A)
Num of Periods (BA) Pings (A)

TIP For a complete parameter set listing within each parameter File—Group,
see Parameter File-Group Structure on page 181.

The Basic parameter set in the setup group is limited, yet powerful. It lets you
quickly start the system with minimal adjustments and provides quick access to
parameters that are required for standard motor connection and overload
protection. If you are using advanced controller features (for example, Dual
Ramp, Braking), however, you must also use the parameter set that is associated
with those features. The Setup group is used throughout this section as a
baseline for system configuration.

IMPORTANT Parameter values that are modified while the motor is operating are not
valid until the next time the operation for that parameter occurs.

ATTENTION: For Overload Protection, it is critical that you enter the data into
the SMC-50 controller as it appears on the motor nameplate.

Figure 97 shows the initial FILE Setup screens using the HIM.

168 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Programming Chapter 6

Figure 97 - Initial FILE Setup Screens

Allen-Bradley
Stopped AUTO
0 Amps F
Port 00 Param File-Group
FILE PROPERTIES
Monitoring
FILE Set Up
FILE Motor Protection
FILE Communications
FILE Utility
ESC Allen-Bradley
Stopped AUTO
0 Amps F
Port 00 Param File-Group
FILE Set Up
GROUP
Motor Config
Line Voltage
Starting Mode
PROPERTIES
ESC Basic ENTER

Soft Start and Stop

To program a soft start with simple stop mode operation, you can use the
parameters listed in Table 59. You can access the Basic parameter set with the
HIM from the Port <00> DEV PARAM folder under the File-Group, File:
Setup, Group: Basic Selection sequence.

Table 59 - Soft Start Parameter Group

Parameter Description Options Default Value

Name
Motor Setting for the motor configuration Line Connected Wye or Inside-the-Delta.(1) Line, Delta, Auto Detect Auto Detect
Configuration
Select the value of line voltage being used in the system. You must enter the correct line voltage
Line Voltage 0…700V 480V
value for the voltage protection functions to work properly.
(5)(6)
Starting Mode This mode must be programmed for Soft Start. Soft Start Soft Start(5)(6)
Programs the time period that the SMC-50 controller will ramp the output voltage up to full voltage
Ramp Time 0…1000 s 10 s
and to full speed from the Initial Torque level.
The initial reduced output voltage (torque) level for the voltage ramp to the motor is established
Initial Torque 0…90% LRT 70% LRT
and adjusted with this parameter—the torque level at which the ramp begins.
Current Limit Limits the current supplied to the motor throughout the Soft Start cycle.(2) 50...600% FLC 350% FLC
Level
Coast, Soft Stop, Linear Speed, Pump
Stop Mode Programs the desired Stop Mode.(3) Stop, SMB(7), Ext Brake(8) Coast
Programs the amount of time desired to ramp from full to zero voltage for Soft, Linear, and Pump
Stop Time 0…999 s 0s
Stop mode. The actual ramp stop time will depend on the stopping mode selected and load inertia.
Programs the desired operation of the Control Module to a change in status of Input #1 wired to Disable, Start, Coast, Stop Option, Start/
Input 1 Start/Coast
control terminal #11 (24V DC). Coast, Start/Stop, Slow Speed, Dual
Programs the desired operation of the Control Module to a change in status of Input #2 wired to Ramp, OL Select, Fault, Fault NC, Clear
Input 2 Fault, Emerg Run, Motor Heater Disable
control terminal #10 (24V DC).

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 169

Chapter 6 Programming

Parameter Description Options Default Value

Name
Aux 1 Config Programs the control function of the Auxiliary Output Contact #1, wired across control Normal, UTS, Fault, Alarm, Ext Bypass,
Aux 1 Config terminal #4 and #5.(4) Ext Brake, Aux Control(9), Network 1, Normal
Programs the control function of the Auxiliary Output Contact #2, wired across control terminal #6 Network 2, Network 3, Network 4,
Aux 2 Config and #7. (4) Fan Control
Required for motor protection. Lets you select the time-to-trip for the built-in Motor Overload. This
Overload Class 5…30 10
selection is based on the type of motor being used and the application it is being applied to.
Required for motor protection. This value is taken directly from the nameplate and used by the
Service Factor 0.01...1.99 1.15
controller to determine the ultimate Overload Trip Current.
Motor FLC Required for motor protection. This programmed value is taken directly from the motor nameplate. 1.0...2200.0 A 1.0 A
Starting Torque NOT used for a Soft Start. 0...300% RMT 100% RMT
Max Torque NOT used for a Soft Start. 0...300% RMT 250% RMT
Rated Torque NOT used for a Soft Start. 0...10000 N•m 10 N•m
Rated Speed NOT used for a Soft Start. 750, 900, 1500, 1800, 3500, 3600 rpm 1800 rpm
(1) In the AUTO Detect [default] selection, the controller automatically checks the motor configuration.
(2) Enter a value to limit the current but not low enough to inhibit the start cycle.
(3) The stopping mode does not need to match the starting mode (for example, a Soft Start can have a stop mode programmed for [Coast], Linear Stop, or SMB—there is no Current Limit Stop or Torque
Stop mode).
(4) Relay Operational Options (for example, ON and OFF delay, etc.) are provided in the File: Setup, Group: I/O selection sequence. See Table 58.
(5) Kickstart is available when using Soft Start. A Kickstart Level and Time must be configured if this mode is used. Access these parameters via the Starting Setup Group. The Starting Setup Group can be
accessed with the HIM from the Port <00> DEV PARAM folder under the File-Group, File: Setup, Group: Starting selection sequence (see Table 58). Setting either parameter to zero disables Kickstart.
(6) You can also program a start delay time to delay starting for a period of time after the initiation of the START command. The Start Delay parameter can be accessed from the Group Starting selection
as noted.
(7) In addition to Stop Mode for SMB, you must configure a Braking Current value from the Group Stopping selection (see Table 58).
(8) To use Ext. Braking, one of the Auxiliary Outputs must be programmed to Ext Brake. When programmed for Ext Brake, the function of this Auxiliary is to energize the external brake device to stop the
motor. The relay stays ON from the beginning of the STOP command until the STOP time parameter has timed out.
(9) Any auxiliary output configured for Aux Control using the AuxX Config parameter is under control of its associated bit from the Aux Control, Parameter 180. See Parameter 180 information for bit
assignments.
NOTE: This function enables forcing an output, ON or OFF.

ATTENTION: For Overload Protection, it is critical that you enter the data into
the SMC-50 controller as it appears on the motor nameplate.

Current Limit Start with Simple Stop Mode

Use the parameters in Table 60 to program a Current Limit Start with simple
Stop Mode operation. You can access the Basic parameter set with the HIM
(see page 33).

Table 60 - Current Limit Start with Simple Stop Mode Parameters

Parameter Name Description Options Default Value

Motor Config Setting for the motor configuration Line Connected Wye or Inside-the-Delta. (1) Line, Delta, Auto Detect Auto Detect
Select the value of line voltage being used in the system. The correct line voltage value must be
Line Voltage 0…700V 480V
entered for the voltage protection functions to work properly.
Starting Mode This mode must be programmed for Current Limit. Current Limit(5)(6) Current Limit(5)(6)
Programs the time period that the SMC-50 controller will HOLD the fixed reduced voltage/current
Ramp Time 0…1000 [10] seconds 10 s
before switching to full voltage.
Initial Torque NOT used for a Current Limit Start. 0…90% LRT 70% LRT
Current Limit Level Current Limit Level Limits the current supplied to the motor throughout the Start cycle. (2) 50...600% FLC 350% FLC
Coast, Soft Stop, Linear Speed, Pump
Stop Mode Programs the desired Stop Mode. (3) Stop, SMB(7), Ext Brake(8) Coast

170 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Programming Chapter 6

Parameter Name Description Options Default Value

Programs the amount of time desired to ramp from full to zero voltage for Soft, Linear, and Pump
Stop Time 0…999 seconds 0s
Stop mode. The actual ramp stop time will depend on the stopping mode selected and load inertia.
Programs the desired operation of the Control Module to a change in status of Input #1 wired to Disable, Start, Coast, Stop Option,
Input 1 Start/Coast
control terminal #11 (24V DC). Start/Coast, Start/Stop, Slow Speed,
Dual Ramp, OL Select, Fault, Fault NC,
Programs the desired operation of the Control Module to a change in status of Input #2 wired to Clear Fault, Emerg Run,
Input 2 Disable
control terminal #10 (24V DC). Motor Heater(5)
Programs the control function of the Auxiliary Output Contact #1, wired across control terminal #4 Normal, UTS, Fault, Alarm, Ext Bypass,
Aux 1 Config and #5.(4) Ext Brake, Aux Control (9), Network 1, Normal
Programs the control function of the Auxiliary Output Contact #2, wired across control terminal #6 Network 2, Network 3, Network 4,
Aux 2 Config Fan Control
and #7.
Required for motor protection. Lets you select the time-to-trip for the built-in Motor Overload. This
Overload Class 5…30 10
selection is based on the type of motor being used and the application it is being applied to.
Required for motor protection. This programmed value is taken directly from the nameplate and
Service Factor 0.01...1.99 1.15
used by the controller to determine the ultimate Overload Trip Current.
Motor FLC Required for motor protection. This programmed value is taken directly from the motor nameplate. 1.0...2200.0 A 1.0 A
Starting Torque NOT used for a Current Limit Start. 0...300% RMT 100% RMT
Max Torque NOT used for a Current Limit Start. 0...300% RMT 250% RMT
Rated Torque NOT used for a Current Limit Start. 0...10000 N·m 10 N·m
Rated Speed NOT used for a Current Limit Start. 750, 900, 1500, 1800, 3500, 3600 rpm 1800 rpm
(1) In the AUTO Detect [default] selection, the controller automatically checks the motor configuration.
(2) Enter a value to limit the current but not low enough to inhibit the start cycle.
(3) The stopping mode does not need to match the starting mode (for example, a Soft Start can have a stop mode programmed for [Coast], Linear Stop, or SMB—there is no Current Limit Stop or Torque
Stop mode).
(4) Relay Operational Options (for example, ON and OFF delay, etc.) are provided in the File: Setup, Group: I/O selection sequence. See Table 58.
(5) Kickstart is available when using Soft Start. A Kickstart Level and Time must be configured if this mode is used. Access these parameters via the Starting Setup Group. The Starting Setup Group can be
accessed with the HIM from the Port <00> DEV PARAM folder under the File-Group, File: Setup, Group: Starting selection sequence (see Table 58). Setting either parameter to zero disables Kickstart.
(6) You can also program a start delay time to delay starting for a period of time after the initiation of the START command. The Start Delay parameter can be accessed from the Group Starting selection
as noted.
(7) In addition to Stop Mode for SMB, you must configure a Braking Current value from the Group Stopping selection (see Table 58).
(8) To use Ext. Braking, one of the Auxiliary Outputs must be programmed to Ext Brake. When programmed for Ext Brake, the function of this Auxiliary is to energize the external brake device to stop the
motor. The relay stays ON from the beginning of the STOP command until the STOP time parameter has timed out.
(9) Any auxiliary output configured for Aux Control using the AuxX Config parameter is under control of its associated bit from the Aux Control, Parameter 180. See Parameter 180 information for bit
assignments.
NOTE: This function enables forcing an output, ON or OFF.

ATTENTION: For Overload Protection, it is critical that you enter the data into
the SMC-50 controller as it appears on the motor nameplate.

Linear Acceleration (Linear Speed) Start with Stop

Use the parameters in Table 61 to program a Linear Acceleration Start and

Simple Stop Mode operation. You can access the Basic parameter set with the
HIM (see Table 58).

Table 61 - Linear Acceleration (Speed Sense) Start with Stop Parameters

Parameter Description Options Default Value

Name
Motor Config Setting for the motor configuration Line Connected Wye or Inside-the-Delta.(1) Line, Delta, Auto Detect Auto Detect
Select the value of line voltage being used in the system. The correct line voltage value
Line Voltage 0…700V 480V
must be entered for the voltage protection functions to work properly.
Starting Mode This mode must be programmed for Linear Speed. Linear Speed(5)(6) Linear Speed(5)(6)

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 171

Chapter 6 Programming

Parameter Description Options Default Value

Name
Programs the time period that the SMC-50 controller will ramp the output voltage up
Ramp Time to full voltage and to full speed from Stop. With the Linear Speed Starting mode, the 0…1000 s 10 seconds
time to ramp to full speed closes to this value depending on load characteristics.
The initial reduced output (torque) level for the voltage ramp to the motor is
Initial Torque 0…90% LRT 70% LRT
established and adjusted to this parameter. Torque level at which the ramp begins.
Current Limit Level Limits the current supplied to the motor throughout the Linear Start and Stop cycle.(2) 50...600% FLC 350% FLC
(3) Coast, Soft Stop, Linear Speed, Pump Stop, SMB(7),
Stop Mode Programs the desired Stop Mode. Ext Brake(8) Coast
Programs the amount of time desired to ramp from full to zero voltage for Soft, Linear,
Stop Time and Pump Stop mode. Actual ramp stop time depends on the stopping mode selected 0…999 s 0s
and load inertia.
Programs the desired operation of the Control Module to a change in status of Input #1 Disable, Start, Coast, Stop Option, Start/Coast,
Input 1 Start/Coast
wired to control terminal #11 (24V DC). Start/Stop, Slow Speed, Dual Ramp, OL Select,
Programs the desired operation of the Control Module to a change in status of Input #2 Fault, Fault NC, Clear Fault, Emerg Run,
Input 2 Motor Heater Disable
wired to control terminal #10 (24V DC).
Programs the control function of the Auxiliary Output Contact #1, wired across control
Aux 1 Config Normal, UTS, Fault, Alarm, Ext Bypass, Ext Brake,
terminal #4 and #5.(4)
Aux Control(9), Network 1, Network 2, Network 3, Normal
Programs the control function of the Auxiliary Output Contact #2, wired across control Network 4, Fan Control
Aux 2 Config terminal #6 and #7. (4)
Required for motor protection. Lets you select the time-to-trip for the built-in Motor
Overload Class 5…30 10
Overload. This selection is based on the type of motor being used and the application.
Required for motor protection. This programmed value is taken directly from the
Service Factor 0.01...1.99 1.15
nameplate and used by the controller to determine the ultimate Overload Trip Current.
Required for motor protection. This programmed value is taken directly from the motor
Motor FLC 1.0...2200.0 A 1.0 Amps
nameplate.
Starting Torque NOT used for a Linear Speed Start. 0...300% RMT 100 RMT
Max Torque NOT used for a Linear Speed Start. 0...300% RMT 250% RMT
Rated Torque NOT used for a Linear Speed Start. 0...10000 N·m 10 N·m
Rated Speed NOT used for a Linear Speed Start. 750, 900, 1500, 1800, 3500, 3600 rpm 1800 rpm
(1) In the AUTO Detect [default] selection, the controller automatically checks the motor configuration.
(2) Enter a value to limit the current but not low enough to inhibit the start cycle.
(3) The stopping mode does not need to match the starting mode (for example, a Soft Start can have a stop mode programmed for [Coast], Linear Stop, or SMB—there is no Current Limit Stop or Torque
Stop mode).
(4) Relay Operational Options (for example, ON and OFF delay, etc.) are provided in the File: Setup, Group: I/O selection sequence. See Table 58.
(5) Kickstart is available when using Soft Start. A Kickstart Level and Time must be configured if this mode is used. Access these parameters via the Starting Setup Group. The Starting Setup Group can be
accessed with the HIM from the Port <00> DEV PARAM folder under the File-Group, File: Setup, Group: Starting selection sequence (see Table 58). Setting either parameter to zero disables Kickstart.
(6) You can also program a start delay time to delay starting for a period of time after the initiation of the START command. The Start Delay parameter can be accessed from the Group Starting selection
as noted.
(7) In addition to Stop Mode for SMB, you must configure a Braking Current value from the Group Stopping selection (see Table 58).
(8) To use Ext. Braking, one of the Auxiliary Outputs must be programmed to Ext Brake. When programmed for Ext Brake, the function of this Auxiliary is to energize the external brake device to stop the
motor. The relay stays ON from the beginning of the STOP command until the STOP time parameter has timed out.
(9) Any auxiliary output configured for Aux Control using the AuxX Config parameter is under control of its associated bit from the Aux Control, Parameter 180. See Parameter 180 information for bit
assignments.
NOTE: This function enables forcing an output, ON or OFF.

ATTENTION: For Overload Protection, it is critical that you enter the data into
the SMC-50 controller as it appears on the motor nameplate.

172 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Programming Chapter 6

Torque Start with Stop

Use the parameters in Table 62 to program a Torque Start with simple Stop
operation. You can access the basic parameter set with the HIM (see Table 58
on page 168).

Table 62 - torque Start with Stop Parameters

Parameter Name Description Options Default Value

Motor Config Setting for the motor configuration Line Connected Wye or Inside-the-Delta.(1) Line, Delta, Auto Detect Auto Detect
Select the value of line voltage being used in the system. The correct line voltage value must be
Line Voltage 0…700V 480V
entered for the voltage protection functions to work properly.
(5)(6)(7)
Starting Mode This mode must be programmed for Torque Ramp. Torque Ramp Torque Ramp(5)(6)(7)
Programs the time period that the SMC-50 controller will ramp the output voltage from the Starting
Ramp Time 0…1000 s 10 s
Torque Value to the Programmed Max Torque Value.
Initial Torque NOT used for a Torque Ramp Start. 0…90% LRT 70% LRT
Current Limit Level Limits the current supplied to the motor throughout the Torque Ramp Start cycle.(2) 50...600% FLC 350% FLC
Stop Mode Programs the desired Stop Mode. (3) Coast, Soft Stop, Linear Speed, Coast
Pump Stop, SMB(8), Ext Brake(9)
Stop Time Programs the amount of time desired to ramp from full to zero voltage for Soft, Linear,
Stop Time and Pump Stop mode. The actual ramp stop time will depend on the stopping mode selected and 0…999 seconds 0…999 s
load inertia.
Input 1 Programs the desired operation of the Control Module to a change in status of Input #1 wired Disable, Start, Coast, Stop
Input 1 Start/Coast
to control terminal #11 (24V DC). [Default: Start/Coast] Option, Start/Coast, Start/Stop,
Slow Speed, Dual Ramp, OL
Input 2 Programs the desired operation of the Control Module to a change in status of Input #2 wired Select, Fault, Fault NC, Clear
Input 2 Disable
to control terminal #10 (24V DC). [Default: Disable] Fault, Emerg Run, Motor Heater
Programs control function of the Auxiliary Output Contact #1, wired across control terminal #4 and Normal, UTS, Fault, Alarm, Ext
Aux 1 Config #5. (4) Bypass, Ext Brake, Aux
Control(10), Network 1, Network Normal
Programs control function of the Auxiliary Output Contact #2, wired across control terminal #6 and 2, Network 3, Network 4,
Aux 2 Config #7. (4) Fan Control
Required for motor protection. Lets you select the time-to-trip for the built-in Motor Overload. This
Overload Class 5…30 10 10
selection is based on the type of motor being used and the application.
Required for motor protection. This programmed value is taken directly from the nameplate and
Service Factor 0.01...1.99 1.15
used by the controller to determine the ultimate Overload Trip Current.
Motor FLC Required for motor protection. This programmed value is taken directly from the motor nameplate. 1...2200 Amps 1.0 A
Starting Torque Programmed initial or starting point for a Torque Ramp Start. 0...300% RMT 100% RMT
Max Torque Programmed end point for a Torque Ramp Start. 0...300% RMT 250% RMT
Rated Torque The actual rated torque of the motor being used in a Torque Ramp Start. 0...10000 N·m 10 N·m
750, 900, 1500, 1800, 3500,
Rated Speed The actual rated speed of the motor used in the Torque Ramp Start. 1800 rpm
3600 rpm
(1) In the AUTO Detect [default] selection, the controller automatically checks the motor configuration.
(2) Enter a value to limit the current but not low enough to inhibit the start cycle.
(3) The stopping mode does not need to match the starting mode (for example, a Soft Start can have a stop mode programmed for Coast, Linear Stop, or SMB—there is no Current Limit Stop or Torque
Stop mode).
(4) Relay Operational Options (for example, ON and OFF delay, etc.) are provided in the File: Setup, Group: I/O selection sequence. See Table 58.
(5) Torque Ramp Starting mode requires you to perform a Motor Tuning Cycle. The SMC-50 controller does this automatically the first time the motor is run. You can also force this manually by setting the
Force Tuning, Parameter 194, to TRUE (=1), which is accessed from the File Setup, Group Adv. Tuning or by pressing and holding the SMC-50 controller’s Reset button for 10 seconds with the motor
stopped.
(6) You can also program a start delay time to delay starting for a period of time after the initiation of the START command. You can access the Start Delay parameter from the Group Starting selection.
See Table 58.
(7) Kickstart is available when using Torque Start. You must configure a Kickstart Level and Time if you use this mode is. Access these parameters via the Starting Setup Group. You can access the Starting
Setup Group with the HIM from the Port <00> DEV PARAM folder under the File-Group, File: Setup, Group: Starting selection sequence. See Table 58. Setting either parameter to zero disables
Kickstart
(8) In addition to Stop Mode for SMB, you must configure a Braking Current value from the Group Stopping selection (Table 58).
(9) To use Ext. Braking, you must program one of the Auxiliary Outputs to Ext Brake. When programmed for Ext Brake, this Auxiliary is to energizes the external brake device to stop the motor. The relay
stays ON from the beginning of the STOP command until the STOP time parameter has timed out.
(10) Any auxiliary output configured for Aux Control using the AuxX Config parameter is under control of its associated bit from the Aux Control, Parameter 180. See Parameter 180 information for bit
assignments. NOTE: This function enables forcing an output, ON or OFF.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 173

Chapter 6 Programming

ATTENTION: For Overload Protection, it is critical that you enter the data into
the SMC-50 controller as it appears on the motor nameplate.

Pump Start with Stop

Use the parameters in Table 63 to program a Pump Start with simple Stop
operation. You can access the basic parameter set with the HIM (see Table 58
on page 168)

Table 63 - Pump Start with Stop Parameters

.

Parameter Name Description Options Default Value

Motor Config Setting for the motor configuration Line Connected Wye or Inside-the-Delta.(1) Line, Delta, Auto Detect Auto Detect
Select the value of line voltage being used in the system. The correct line voltage value must
Line Voltage 0…700V 480V
be entered for the voltage protection functions to work properly.
(5)(6) Pump Start(5)(6)
Starting Mode This mode must be programmed for Pump Start. Pump Start
Programs the time period that the SMC-50 controller will ramp the output voltage to full
Ramp Time 0…1000 s 10 s
voltage and motor speed from the programmed Initial Torque value.
The initial reduced output voltage (torque) level for the voltage ramp to the motor is
Initial Torque 0…90% LRT 70% LRT
established and adjusted with this parameter. The torque level at which the ramp begins.
Current Limit Level Limits the current supplied to the motor throughout the Torque Ramp Start cycle. (2) 50...600% FLC 350% FLC
Coast, Soft Stop, Linear Speed, Pump Stop,
Stop Mode Programs the desired Stop Mode.(3) SMB(7), Ext Brake(8) Coast
Programs the amount of time desired to ramp from full to zero voltage for Soft, Linear, and
Stop Time 0…999 s 0s
Pump Stop mode. Actual ramp stop time depends on the stop mode selected and load inertia.
Programs the desired operation of the Control Module to a change in status of Input #1 wired Disable, Start, Coast, Stop Option, Start/Coast,
Input 1 Start/Coast
to control terminal #11 (24V DC). Start/Stop, Slow Speed, Dual Ramp, OL
Programs the desired operation of the Control Module to a change in status of Input #2 wired Select, Fault, Fault NC, Clear Fault, Emerg Run,
Input 2 Motor Heater Disable
to control terminal #10 (24V DC).
Programs the control function of the Auxiliary Output Contact #1, wired across control
Aux 1 Config Normal, UTS, Fault, Alarm, Ext Bypass, Ext
terminal #4 and #5.(4)
Brake, Aux Control(9), Network 1, Network 2 Normal
Programs the control function of the Auxiliary Output Contact #2, wired across control Network 3, Network 4, Fan Control
Aux 2 Config terminal #6 and #7.(4)
Required for motor protection. Lets you select the time-to-trip for the built-in Motor
Overload Class 5…30 10
Overload. This selection is based on the type of motor being used and the application.
Required for motor protection. This programmed value is taken directly from the nameplate
Service Factor 0.01...1.99 1.15
and used by the controller to determine the ultimate Overload Trip Current.
Required for motor protection. This programmed value is taken directly from the motor
Motor FLC 1...2200 A 1A
nameplate.
Starting Torque NOT used for Pump Start. 0...300% RMT 100% RMT
Max Torque NOT used for Pump Start. 0...300% RMT 250% RMT
Rated Torque NOT used for Pump Start. 0...10000 N·m 10 N·m
Rated Speed NOT used for Pump Start. 750, 900, 1500, 1800, 3500, 3600 rpm 1800 rpm
(1) In the AUTO Detect [default] selection, the controller automatically checks the motor configuration.
(2) Enter a value to limit the current but not low enough to inhibit the start cycle.
(3) The stop mode does not need to match the start mode (example: a Soft Start can have a stop mode programmed for Coast, Linear Stop, or SMB—there is no Current Limit Stop or Torque Stop mode).
(4) Relay Operational Options (for example, ON and OFF delay, etc.) are provided in the File: Setup, Group: I/O selection sequence. See Table 58.
(5) For best results with a Pump Start, it is recommended that the tuning cycle be run. The SMC-50 controller automatically performs the tuning cycle the first time the motor is run. You can also force this
manually by setting the Force Tuning parameter to TRUE (=1), which is accessed from the File Setup, Group Adv. Tuning or by pressing and holding the SMC-50 controller’s Reset button for 10 seconds
with the motor stopped.
(6) You can program a start delay time to delay starting for a period after the initiation of the START command. You can access the Start Delay parameter from the Group Starting selection. See Table 58.
(7) In addition to Stop Mode for SMB, you must configure a Braking Current value from the Group Stopping selection (Table 58).
(8) To use Ext. Braking, you must program one of the Auxiliary Outputs to Ext Brake. When programmed for Ext Brake, this Auxiliary is to energizes the external brake device to stop the motor. The relay
stays ON from the beginning of the STOP command until the STOP time parameter has timed out.
(9) Any auxiliary output configured for Aux Control using the AuxX Config parameter is under control of its associated bit from the Aux Control, Parameter 180. See Parameter 180 information for bit
assignments. NOTE: This function enables forcing an output, ON or OFF.

174 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Programming Chapter 6

ATTENTION: For Overload Protection, it is critical that you enter the data into
the SMC-50 controller as it appears on the motor nameplate.

Full Voltage Start with Stop

The SMC-50 controller may be programmed to provide a full voltage start

(output voltage to the motor reaches full voltage within five line power cycles).

To provide a Full Voltage Start to the motor, the only start parameter that
requires adjustment is the Starting Mode. The Basic parameter set should be
used to program Full Voltage Start to ensure configuration of other motor
configuration and basic protection parameters. Use the parameters in Table 64
to program a Full Voltage Start and Simple or Stop Mode operation. You can
access the basic parameter set with the HIM (see Table 58 on page 168).

Table 64 - Full Voltage Start with Stop Parameters

Parameter Name Description Options Default Value

Motor Config Setting for the motor configuration Line Connected Wye or Inside-the-Delta.(1) Line, Delta, Auto Detect Auto Detect
Select the value of line voltage being used in the system. The correct line voltage value
Line Voltage 0…700V 480V
must be entered for the voltage protection functions to work properly.
Starting Mode This mode must be programmed for Full Voltage Start. Full Voltage(4) Full Voltage(4)
Programs the time period that the SMC-50 controller will ramp the output voltage to full
Ramp Time 0…1000 s 10 s
voltage and motor speed from the programmed Initial Torque value.
Initial Torque NOT used for Full Voltage Start. 0…90% LRT 70% LRT
Current Limit NOT used for Full Voltage Start. 50...600% FLC 350% FLC
Coast, Soft Stop, Linear
Stop Mode Programs the desired Stop Mode.(2) Speed, Pump Stop, SMB(5), Coast
Ext Brake(6)
Programs the amount of time desired to ramp from full to zero voltage for Soft, Linear, and
Stop Time Pump Stop mode. Actual ramp stop time depends on the stop mode selected and load 0…999 s 0s
inertia.
Programs the desired operation of the Control Module to a change in status of Input #1 Disable, Start, Coast, Stop
Input 1 Start/Coast
wired to control terminal #11 (24V DC). Option, Start/Coast, Start/
Stop, Slow Speed, Dual
Programs the desired operation of the Control Module to a change in status of Input #2 Ramp, OL Select, Fault, Fault
Input 2 NC, Clear Fault, Emerg Run, Disable
wired to control terminal #10 (24V DC).
Motor Heater
Programs the control function of the Auxiliary Output Contact #1, wired across control Normal, UTS, Fault, Alarm,
Aux 1 Config terminal #4 and #5.(3) Ext Bypass, Ext Brake, Aux
Control(7), Network 1, Normal
Programs the control function of the Auxiliary Output Contact #2, wired across control Network 2 Network 3,
Aux 2 Config terminal #6 and #7.(4) Network 4, Fan Control
Required for motor protection. Lets you select the time-to-trip for the built-in Motor
Overload Class 5…30 10
Overload. This selection is based on the type of motor being used and the application.
Required for motor protection. This programmed value is taken directly from the
Service Factor 0.01...1.99 1.15
nameplate and used by the controller to determine the ultimate Overload Trip Current.
Required for motor protection. This programmed value is taken directly from the motor
Motor FLC 1...2200 A 1A
nameplate.
Starting Torque Starting Torque NOT used for Full Voltage Start. 0...300% RMT 100% RMT

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 175

Chapter 6 Programming

Parameter Name Description Options Default Value

Max Torque NOT used for Full Voltage Start. 0...300% RMT 250% RMT
Rated Torque NOT used for Full Voltage Start. 0...10000 N·m 10 N·m
750, 900, 1500, 1800, 3500,
Rated Speed NOT used for Full Voltage Start. 1800 rpm
3600 rpm
(1) In the AUTO Detect [default] selection, the controller automatically checks the motor configuration.
(2) The stopping mode does not need to match the starting mode (for example, a Soft Start can have a stop mode programmed for Coast, Linear Stop, or SMB—there is no Current Limit Stop or Torque
Stop mode).
(3) Relay Operational Options (for example, ON and OFF delay, etc.) are provided in the File: Setup, Group: I/O selection sequence. See Table 58.
(4) You can also program a start delay time to delay starting for a period of time after the initiation of the START command. You can access the Start Delay parameter from the Group Starting selection.
See Table 58.
(5) In addition to Stop Mode for SMB, you must configure a Braking Current value from the Group Stopping selection (Table 58).
(6) To use Ext. Braking, you must program one of the Auxiliary Outputs to Ext Brake. When programmed for Ext Brake, this Auxiliary is to energizes the external brake device to stop the motor. The relay
stays ON from the beginning of the STOP command until the STOP time parameter has timed out.
(7) Any auxiliary output configured for Aux Control using the AuxX Config parameter is under control of its associated bit from the Aux Control, Parameter 180. See Parameter 180 information for bit
assignments. NOTE: This function enables forcing an output, ON or OFF.

ATTENTION: For Overload Protection, it is critical that you enter the data into
the SMC-50 controller as it appears on the motor nameplate.

Dual Ramp Start with Stop

The SMC-50 controller lets you select between two start profiles. Configure
Start Profile 1 using the Basic parameter set as explained in the previous
sections. You can access the basic parameter set with the HIM (see Table 58 on
page 168).

TIP The Stop mode selected in the Basic parameter set will apply to both start
profiles.
The Basic parameter set provides the method to select between the
operation of Start Profile 1 and Start Profile 2 by configuration of Input 1 or
Input 2 to the Dual Ramp. If the input configured for Dual Ramp is open
(low), Start Profile 1 is selected. If the input is closed (high), Profile 2 is
selected.

Set up Start Profile 2 by using the Dual Ramp parameter set. You can use the
HIM to access Dual Ramp from the <Port 00> DEV PARAM folder (see
Table 58 on page 168). Use the parameters in Table 65 to program a Dual
Ramp adjustment.

Table 65 - Dual Ramp Start with Stop Parameters

Parameter Name Description Options Default Value

Soft Start, Full Voltage, Linear
Starting Mode 2 Select the desired starting mode for Profile 2 Speed, Torque Start, Current —
Limit, Pump Start.(3) (4)
Programs the Profile 2 time period that the SMC-50 controller will ramp the output
Ramp Time 2 0…1000 s 10 s
voltage to full voltage and motor speed from the programmed Initial Torque value.
The Profile 2 setting limits the current supplied in the motor throughout the Soft Start,
Current Limit Level 2 50...600% FLC 350% FLC
Linear Speed, or Torque Ramp cycle.(1)

176 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Programming Chapter 6

Parameter Name Description Options Default Value

Initial Torque 2 The initial reduced output voltage (torque) level for the Profile 2 Voltage
Initial Torque 2 Ramp to the motor is established and adjusted with this parameter. The torque level at 0…90% LRT 70% LRT
which the ramp begins for Profile 2. NOTE: Not used for Torque Ramp.
Starting Torque 2 For a Torque Ramp Start, the programmed initial or start torque point
Starting Torque 2 0...300% RMT 100% RMT
for Profile 2. This parameter is not used for other starting modes.
For Start Profile 2, the programmed torque end point for a Torque Ramp start. This
Max Torque 2 0...300% RMT 250% RMT
parameter is not used for other starting modes.
For Start Profile 2, if required, a boost of current (torque) is provided to motor for this
Kickstart Time 2 0...2 s 0s
programmed time period.(2)
For Start Profile 2, if required, this parameter programs the amount of current (torque) 750, 900, 1500, 1800, 3500,
Kickstart Level 2 1800 rpm
applied to the motor during Kickstart time.(2) 3600 rpm
(1) Enter a value to limit the current but not low enough to inhibit the start cycle.
(2) Available for Soft Start, Current Limit, and Torque Start modes. Set to zero to disable Kickstart.
(3) Torque Ramp and Linear Speed Starting modes require you to perform a Motor Tuning Cycle. The SMC-50 controller does this automatically the first time the motor is run. You can also force this
manually by setting the Force Tuning, Parameter 194, to TRUE (=1), which is accessed from the File Setup, Group Adv. Tuning or by pressing and holding the SMC-50 controller’s Reset button for 10
seconds with the motor stopped.
(4) You can also program a start delay time and will apply to both Start Profile 1 and Start Profile 2. The Start Delay parameter can be accessed from the Group Starting selection (see Table 58).

Start Options

Motor Winding Heater Function

The motor winding heater can be activated after it receives a valid Start
command by either programming the Heating Time parameter to a non-zero
value or by configuring a terminal block input to Motor Heater and activating
that input prior to the Start command. The Motor Winding Heater function
continues for the specified time or until the Motor Heater Input is deactivated,
at which time the motor starts based on the prior Start command signal. The
Motor Winding Heater function is disabled if the Heater Level parameter is set
to zero, the Heater Time is set to zero, or the Input is inactive (or not
configured) at the time of the Start command.

To program the Motor Winding Heater function, use the File Setup, Group
Basic parameter list to configure the motor and the majority of the Start/Stop
functions. See any of the previous programming sections for details based on
the selected Start mode. The two key parameters (Heating Time and Heating
Level), however, are in the File Setup Group Starting parameter list. See
Table 58 on page 168 for a basic understanding of accessing the Starting group.
See Table 66 for heating parameter information.

Table 66 - Heating Time and Heating Level Parameters

Parameter Name Description Options Default Value

Heating Time The amount of time the Motor Winding Heater function will remain engaged after receiving a valid Start command. 0...1000 s(1) 0s
Heating Level The percent Heating Level is sequentially applied to each winding. 0...100% 0%
(1) If the Terminal Block Input, configured to Motor Heater, is used to initiate the Motor Winding Heater function, Heating Time can be zero (0), The heater function is active after the terminal input is
active and a start command.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 177

Chapter 6 Programming

Stop Options

SMB—Smart Motor Braking

To use the SMB function, the Stopping file group parameter set must be
selected from FILE Setup group using the HIM (see Table 58 on page 168).

Table 67 - SMB Parameters

Parameter Name Description Options Default Value

Stop Mode Lets you select the Stop Mode. The mode must be programmed for SMB. SMB SMB
NOT used for SMB. SMB automatically controls the duration (stop time) of the braking current to
Stop Time the motor from the "running at speed" condition until a zero speed condition is reached (zero 0...999 s 0s
speed braking shutoff feature/function). (1)
Braking Current The amount of braking current to be applied to the motor. 0...400% FLC 0 % FLC
The amount of time that must expire before another Start cycle can occur. The timer begins after
the Stop maneuver is completed. All Start commands are ignored until the timer has expired. If the
Backspin Timer 0...999 seconds 0s
Start command is momentary and ends before the timer has expired, the motor does not start. This
is used to prevent starting a motor that is still cycling.
(1) Programming a non-zero value for Stop Time overrides the SMB zero-speed detection feature/function and uses the exact time programmed for Stop Time to apply the programmed Braking Current
to the motor. Doing this is useful in applications where detecting zero-speed is difficult (for example, a specific motor type or when the purpose is to reduce the number of overload trips associated
with driving the motor to a complete stop). Setting the Stop Time to a specific value turns off braking current at a set time and each time a stopping maneuver is performed. To achieve an ideal Stop
Time setting, use trial and error and always allow for some small coast time.
NOTE: Setting the Stop Time to a longer duration will cause braking current to be applied to a stopped motor and likely result in overload trips.

Slow Speed with Braking

The SMC-50 controller Slow Speed feature provides a slow speed jog
capability for general-purpose positioning. This capability is typically used for
system setup. Slow Speed can drive the motor within a range of 1…15% of
normal speed in the forward or reverse direction without a reversing contactor.
Braking from Slow Speed is also provided.

To use the Slow Speed with Braking feature, use the HIM. Navigate from the
Port 00 DEV PARAM folder: File-Group, File: Setup, Group: Slow Speed. See
Table 58 on page 168 for detailed information.

Table 68 - Slow Speed with Braking Parameters

Parameter Name Description Options Default Value

Slow Speed 1 Allow you to select Slow Speed 1 value for the application.(1) -15...+15 +10
Slow Speed 2 Allow you to a second Slow Speed value for the application.(1) -15...+15 +10
Slow Brake Current The desired brake current to be applied from the programmed Slow Speed.(2) 0...350% FLC 0 % FLC
Slow Speed Reference Gain Lets you adjust the flux reference while the motor is running. 0.1...2.00 1.00
Slow Speed Transient Gain Lets you adjust the control reference when transitioning between slow speed and any starting 0.1...2.0 1.00
mode.
(1) The plus (+) or minus (-) sign determines the motor direction.
(2) A value of zero results in Coast-to-Stop.

178 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Programming Chapter 6

Accu-Stop

This function combines the benefits of SMB and Preset Slow Speed features.
For general-purpose positioning, the Accu-Stop function provides a brake
from full speed to the preset slow speed setting, then a brake from Slow Speed
or a Coast-to-Stop.

The Accu-Stop function is enabled whenever a control input is configured for

Stop and another control input is configured for Slow Speed; the Stop Mode is
configured for SMB and Slow Speed is configured. When the Slow Speed
Input is enabled in this configuration, a SMB-to-Slow Speed occurs and Slow
Speed continues until the Slow Speed Input is enabled.

To program Accu-Stop with the HIM, Setup Group Slow Speed and Setup
Group Stopping must be used. See the two previous programming sections,
SMB—Smart Motor Braking and Slow Speed with Braking.

Motor Protection The Motor Protection Group (see Table 71 on page 182) is used to program
motor and starter protection functions. The Motor Protection Group is
accessed from the HIM using the Port 00 DEV PARAM folder under the File-
Group, File: Motor Protection selection sequence. By using this file group, the
SMC-50 controller lets you individually enable, disable, or restart the motor
and starter Faults and Alarms. Each of the 21 different Motor/Starter
Protection Setup groups (for example, Overload, Underload, Jam, Stall,
Voltage Unbal, etc.) has at least one selection for Fault Enable, Alarm Enable,
and Restart Enable. For bit assignment definitions for the related Faults and
Alarms, see Table 25 and Table 26.
.

IMPORTANT The majority of parameters have a Fault and an Alarm setting.

To modify any Fault or Alarm bit for enable/disable functionality, perform the
following steps.

1. From the Motor Protection Group, select the desired group.

Allen-Bradley
Stopped AUTO
0 Amps F
Port 00 Param File-Group
FILE PROPERTIES
Motor Protection
GROUP Overload
GROUP Underload
GROUP Undervoltage
GROUP Overvoltage
ESC

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 179

Chapter 6 Programming

2. Press ENTER (number 5 from keypad) to display the associated bit

parameters.

Allen-Bradley
Stopped AUTO
0 Amps F
Port 00 Param File-Group
FILE PROPERTIES
Motor Protection
GROUP Overload
Motor Fault En
Motor Alarm En
Motor Restart En
ESC ENTER

3. Select the desired 16 bit field, then press EDIT.

Allen-Bradley
Stopped AUTO
0 Amps F
Po rt 00 Dev Pa ra m 230
PROPERTIES
Motor Fault Enable
0000 0000 0000 0000
Bit 01 - Underload
ESC UPPER PAR # EDIT

TIP The UPPER and LOWER soft key allows for switching between the upper (16
to 31) and lower (0 to 16) bits.

4. Use the right or left arrow to move the cursor to the desired bit. The bit
function is displayed at the bottom of the screen.

180 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Programming Chapter 6

5. Enter a 1 to enable or 0 to disable, then press ENTER to load the change

into the controller.

Allen-Bradley
Stopped AUTO
0 Amps F
Po rt 07 Motor
Edit Host PFault
a ra m En 2
PROPERTIES
xxxx xxxx 0000 0000
Bit 16 - Power Qual

ESC ENTER

For details concerning mot or and controller (Fault and Alarm) protection
parameters, see Chapter 5.

Parameter File-Group The five parameter File-Groups are structured as shown below. The access
levels for each parameter are abbreviated as follows:
Structure
• M—Monitoring,
• B—Basic,
• A—Advanced, and
• MBA—Monitoring, Basic, and Advanced.

Table 69 - Monitoring Group

Monitoring File Group Parameters

Metering Basic Metering Metering Power Quality
Metering Power (MBA) Start Stats (MBA) Monitoring (MBA)
(MBA) Volts (MBA) Current (MBA) (MBA)
Volts P-P Ave Volts P-P Ave Current Ave Real Power Apparent Power Start Time 1 Elapsed Time THD Va
Volts P-N Ave Volts Phase A-B Current Phase A Real Power A Apparent Power A Start Time 2 Elapsed Time 2 THD Vb
Current Average Volts Phase B-C Current Phase B Real Power B Apparent Power B Start Time 3 Running Time THD Vc
Torque Volts Phase C-A Current Phase C Real Power C Apparent Power C Start Time 4 Energy Savings THD Vave
Motor Speed Volts P-N Ave Current Imbal Real Demand Apparent Demand Start Time 5 Motor Therm Usage THD Ia
Power Factor Volts Phase A-N Max Real Demand Max Apparent Demand Peak Current 1 Time to OL Trip THD Ib
Real Power Volts Phase B-N Reactive Power Power Factor Peak Current 2 Time to OL Reset THD Ic
Reactive Power Volts Phase C-N Reactive Power A Power Factor A Peak Current 3 Time to PM THD Iave
Apparent Power Volts Unbal Reactive Power B Power Factor B Peak Current 4 Starts to PM
Real Energy Reactive Power C Power Factor C Peak Current 5 Total Starts
Reactive Energy + Reactive Demand Product Status
Reactive Energy - Max Reactive Demand
Apparent Energy
Meter Reset

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 181

Chapter 6 Programming

Table 70 - Setup File Group

Setup File Group Parameters

Starting (BA) Stopping (BA) Slow Speed Dual(BA) Ramp
Basic (BA) Advanced I/O (BA) Advanced Tuning
Motor Config Input 2 Starting Mode Stop Mode Slow Speed 1 Starting Mode 2 Pump Pedestal (A) Input 1 Force Tuning (A) Phase Shift 0% (A)
Line Voltage Aux 1 Config Ramp Time Stop Time (BA) Ramp Time 2 Brake Load Type (A) Input 2 Starter R Phase Shift 10% (A)
Starting Aux 2 Config Cur Limit Level Braking Current Slow Speed 2 Cur Limit Level 2 High Eff Brake (A) Aux 1 Config Total R Phase Shift 20% (A)
Mode Overload Initial Torque Backspin Timer (BA) Initial Torque 2 UTS Level (A) Aux 1 Invert Coupling Factor Phase Shift 30% (A)
Ramp Time Class Starting Torque Slow Brake Starting Torque 2 Stall Position (A) Aux 1 On Delay Inductance Phase Shift 40% (A)
Initial Torque Service Max Torque Cur (BA) Max Torque 2 Stall Level (A) Aux 1 Off Delay Speed PGain (A) Phase Shift 50% (A)
Max Torque Factor Kickstart Time SS Ref Gain Kickstart Time 2 V Shut Off Level (A) Aux 2 Config Transient Gain Phase Shift 60% (A)
Cur Limit Motor FLC Kickstart Level (A) Kickstart Level 2 I Shut Off Level (A) Aux 2 Invert (A) Phase Shift 70% (A)
Level Starting Heating Time SS Trans Gain Notch Maximum (A) Aux 2 On Delay Transient Zero Phase Shift 80% (A)
Stop Mode Torque Heating Level (A) Timed Start (A) Aux 2 Off Delay (A) Phase Shift 90% (A)
Stop Time Max Torque Start Delay Bypass Delay (A) Aux Control Transient Mag Phase Shift 100% (A)
Input 1 Rated Torque Energy Saver (BA) (A)
Rated Speed Demand Period (BA) Ping Degree (A)
Num of Periods (BA) Pings (A)

Table 71 - Motor Protection Group

Motor Protection File Group Parameters

Reactive + Power
Overload (BA) Underload (BA) Undervoltage (BA) Overvoltage (BA) Jam (BA) Stall (BA) Real Power (BA) (BA)
Motor Fault Enable Motor Fault Enable Starter Fault Enable Starter Fault Enable Motor Fault Enable Motor Fault Enable Motor Fault Enable Motor Fault Enable
Motor Alarm Enable Motor Alarm Enable Starter Alarm Enable Starter Alarm Enable Motor Alarm Enable Motor Alarm Enable Motor Alarm Enable Motor Alarm Enable
Motor Restart Enable Motor Restart Enable Starter Restart Starter Restart Motor Restart Enable Motor Restart Enable Motor Restart Enable Motor Restart Enable
Overload Class Underload F Level Enable Enable Jam F Level Stall Delay MWatts Ov F Level +MVAR Ov F Level
Overload Class 2 Underload F Delay Undervolt F Level Overvolt F Level Jam F Delay MWatts Ov F Delay +MVAR Ov F Delay
Service Factor Underload A Level Undervolt F Delay Overvolt F Delay Jam A Level MWatts Ov A Level +MVAR Ov A Level
Motor FLC Underload A Delay Undervolt A Level Overvolt A Level Jam A Delay MWatts Ov A Delay +MVAR Ov A Delay
OL Reset Level Undervolt A Delay Overvolt A Delay MWatts Un F Level +MVAR Un F Level
OL Shunt Time MWatts Un F Delay +MVAR Un F Delay
OL Inhibit Time MWatts Un A Level +MVAR Un A Level
Overload A Lvel MWatts Un A Delay +MVAR Un A Delay
Reactive - Power Apparent Power Voltage Unbal Current Imbal (BA) Voltage THD (BA) Current THD (BA)
Leading PF (BA) Lagging PF (BA)
(BA) (BA) (BA)
Motor Fault Enable Motor Fault Enable Motor Fault Enable Motor Fault Enable Starter Fault Enable Motor Fault Enable Starter Fault Enable Motor Fault Enable
Motor Alarm Enable Motor Alarm Enable Motor Alarm Enable Motor Alarm Enable Starter Alarm Enable Motor Alarm Enable Starter Alarm Enable Motor Alarm Enable
Motor Restart Enable Motor Restart Enable Motor Restart Enable Motor Restart Enable Starter Restart Motor Restart Enable Starter Restart Motor Restart Enable
-MVAR Ov F Level MVA Ov F Level Lead PF F Level Lag PF F Level Enable Current Imbal F Level Enable THD I F Level
-MVAR Ov F Delay MVA Ov F Delay Lead PF F Delay Lag PF F Delay Voltage Unbal F Current Imbal F THD V F Level THD I F Delay
-MVAR Ov A Level MVA Ov A Level Lead PF A Level Lag PF A Level Level Delay THD V F Delay THD I A Level
-MVAR Ov A Delay MVA Ov A Delay Lead PF A Delay Lag PF A Delay Voltage Unbal F Current Imbal A THD V A Level THD I A Delay
+MVAR Un F Level MVA Un F Level Lead PF F Level Lag PF F Level Delay Level THD V A Delay
-MVAR Un F Delay MVA Un F Delay Lead PF F Delay Lag PF F Delay Voltage Unbal A Current Imbal A
-MVAR Un A Level MVA Un A Level Lead PF A Level Lag PF A Level Level Delay
Voltage Unbal A
-MVAR Un A Delay MVA Un A Delay Lead PF A Delay Lag PF A Delay Delay

182 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Programming Chapter 6

Motor Protection File Group Parameters

Line Frequency (BA) Maintenance History (MBA) Restart (BA) Locked Rotor (BA)
Starter Fault Enable Motor Fault Enable (BA) Fault 1 Motor Restart Enable Motor Fault Enable
Starter Alarm Enable Motor Alarm Enable (BA) Fault 2 Starter Restart Enable Motor Alarm Enable
Starter Restart Enable Motor Restart Enable (BA) Fault 3 Restart Attempts Motor Restart Enable
Frequency High F Level PM Hours (BA) Fault 4 Restart Delay Locked Rotor F Level
Frequency High F Delay PM Starts (BA) Fault 5 Locked Rotor F Delay
Frequency High A Level Time to PM (MBA) Alarm 1 Locked Rotor A Level
Frequency High A Delay Starts to PM (MBA) Alarm 2 Locked Rotor A Delay
Frequency Low F Level Starts per Hour (MBA) Alarm 3
Frequency Low F Delay Alarm 4
Frequency Low A Level Alarm 5
Frequency Low A Delay

Table 72 - Communications Group Parameters

Communications File Group Parameters

Communications Masks (BA) Data Links (BA)
Logic Mask Data In A1 Data Out A1
Logic Mask Act Data In A2 Data Out A2
Write Mask Cfg Data In B1 Data Out B1
Write Mask Act Data In B2 Data Out B2
Port Mask Act Data In C1 Data Out C1
Data In C2 Data Out C2
Data In D1 Data Out D1
Data In D2 Data Out D2

Table 73 - Utility Group Parameters

Utility File Group Parameters

Preferences Motor Data Expansion (MBA)
Language (BA) Motor Connection (MBA) Expansion A Configuration
Fan Configuration (BA) Line Voltage (BA) Expansion A Configuration
Motor Configuration (BA) Motor FLC (BA) Expansion A Configuration
Parameter Management (A) Rated Torque (BA)
Rated Speed (Ba)
User CT Ratio (A)
Factory CT Ratio (A)
Voltage Ratio (A)
Parameter Management (A)

DeviceLogix parameters are Parameters 335…346, located in the parameter

linear list. See Appendix C for additional information and programming
examples.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 183

Chapter 6 Programming

Table 74 - SMC-50 Controller Parameter Linear List—Parameter 1…67

Number(1) Name Number(1) Name

1 (M, B, A) Voltage P-P Ave 35 (M, B, A) Va
2 (M, B, A) A-B 36 (M, B, A) Vb
3 (M, B, A) Volts Phase B-C 37 (M, B, A) Vc
4 (M, B, A) C-A 38 (M, B, A) Vave
THD
5 (M, B, A) Current Average 39 (M, B, A) Ia
6 (M, B, A) A 40 (M, B, A) Ib
7 (M, B, A) Current Phase B 41 (M, B, A) Ic
8 (M, B, A) C 42 (M, B, A) Iave
9 (M, B, A) Torque 43 (M, B, A) Product Status
10 (M, B, A) Real Power 44 (B, A) Motor Config
11 (M, B, A) Real Energy 45 (M, B, A) Motor Connection
12 (M, B, A) Elapsed Time 46 (B, A) Line Voltage
13 (M, B, A) Elapsed Time 2 47 (B, A) Torque
Rated
14 (M, B, A) Running Time 48 (B, A) Speed
15 (M, B, A) Energy Savings 49 (B, A) Starting Mode
16 (M, B, A) Meter Reset 50 (B, A) Ramp Time
17 (M, B, A) Power Factor 51 (B, A) Initial Torque
18 (M, B, A) Motor Therm Usage 52 (B, A) Maximum Torque
19 (M, B, A) Trip 53 (B, A) Current Limit Level
Time to OL
20 (M, B, A) Reset 54 (B, A) Time
Kickstart
21 (M, B, A) Time to PM 55 (B, A) Level
22 (M, B, A) Starts to PM 56 (B, A) 1
Input
23 (M, B, A) Total Starts 57 (B, A) 2
24 (M, B, A) 1 58 (B, A) Starting Mode 2
25 (M, B, A) 2 59 (B, A) Ramp Time 2
26 (M, B, A) Start Time 3 60 (B, A) Initial Torque 2
27 (M, B, A) 4 61 (B, A) Maximum Torque 2
28 (M, B, A) 5 62 (B, A) Current Limit Level 2
29 (M, B, A) 1 63 (B, A) Time 2
Kickstart
30 (M, B, A) 2 64 (B, A) Level 2
31 (M, B, A) Peak Current 3 65 (B, A) Mode
Stop
32 (M, B, A) 4 66 (B, A) Time
33 (M, B, A) 5 67 (B, A) Backspin Timer
34 (M, B, A) Motor Speed
(1) M, B, A = Access Level; see Parameter Access Level Modification Using the HIM.

184 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Programming Chapter 6

Table 75 - SMC-50 Controller Parameter Linear List—Parameter 68…135

Number (1) Name Number (1) Name

68 (A) Pump Pedestal 102 (B, A) F Lvl
69 (B, A) Braking Current 103 (B, A) F Dly
Overvolt
70 (B, A) Brake Load Type 104 (B, A) A Lvl
71 (B, A) High Eff Brake 105 (B, A) A Dly
72 (B, A) Slow Speed 1 106 (B, A) F Lvl
73 (B, A) Slow Brake Current 107 (B, A) F Dly
Volt Unbal
74 (—) Reserved 108 (B, A) A Lvl
75 (B, A) Overload Class 109 (B, A) A Dly
76 (B, A) Overload Class 2 110 (B, A) F Lvl
77 (B, A) Service Factor 111 (B, A) F Dly
Cur Imbal
78 (B, A) Motor FLC 112 (B, A) A Lvl
79 (B, A) Motor FLC 2 113 (B, A) A Dly
80 (B, A) OL Reset Level 114 (B, A) F Lvl
81 (B, A) OL Shunt Time 115 (B, A) F Dly
Jam
82 (B, A) OL Inhibit Time 116 (B, A) A Lvl
83 (B, A) Overload A Lvl 117 (B, A) A Dly
84 (B, A) F Lvl 118 (B, A) F Lvl
Locked Rotor
85 (B, A) F Dly 119 (B, A) F Dly
THD V
86 (B, A) F Lvl 120 (B, A) A Lvl
87 (B, A) F Dly 121 (B, A) A Dly
Underload
88 (B, A) A Lvl 122 (B, A) F Lvl
89 (B, A) A Dly 123 (B, A) F Dly
THD I
90 (B, A) F Lvl 124 (B, A) A Lvl
91 (B, A) F Dly 125 (B, A) A Dly
MWatts Ov
92 (B, A) A Lvl 126 (B, A) PM Hours
93 (B, A) A Dly 127 (B, A) PM Starts
94 (B, A) F Lvl 128 (B, A) Starts Per Hour
95 (B, A) F Dly 129 (B, A) Frequency High F Lvl
MWatts Un
96 (B, A) A Lvl 130 (B, A) Frequency Low F Lvl
97 (B, A) A Dly 131 (B, A) Frequency High A Lvl
98 (B, A) F Lvl 132 (B, A) Frequency Low A Lvl
99 (B, A) F Dly 133 (B, A) Restart Attempts
Undervolt
100 (B, A) A Lvl 134 (B, A) Restart Delay
101 (B, A) A Dly 135 (B, A) Starter Restart Enable
(1) M, B, A = Access Level; see Parameter Access Level Modification Using the HIM.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 185

Chapter 6 Programming

Table 76 - SMC-50 Controller Parameter Linear List—Parameter 136…205

Number(1) Name Number(1) Name

136 (B, A) Starter Fault Enable 171 (A) Factory CT Ratio
137 (B, A) Starter Alarm Enable 172 (B, A) Config
138 (M, B, A) 1 173 (B, A) Invert
Aux 1
139 (M, B, A) 2 174 (B, A) On Delay
140 (M, B, A) Fault 3 175 (B, A) Off Delay
141 (M, B, A) 4 176 (B, A) Config
142 (M, B, A) 5 177 (B, A) Invert
Aux 2
143 (M, B, A) 1 178 (B, A) On Delay
144 (M, B, A) 2 179 (B, A) Off Delay
145 (M, B, A) Alarm 3 180 (B, A) Aux Control
146 (M, B, A) 4 181 (B, A) Language
147 (M, B, A) 5 182 (B, A) Start Delay
148 (B, A) Logic Mask 183 (A) Timed Start
149 (B, A) Logic Mask Act 184 (A) V Shut Off Level
150 (B, A) Write Mask Cfg 185 (A) I Shut Off Level
151 (B, A) Write Mask Act 186 (A) UTS Level
152 (B, A) Port Mask Act 187 (A) Level
153 (B, A) A1 188 (B, A) Stall Delay
154 (B, A) A2 189 (A) Position
155 (B, A) B1 190 (A) Notch Maximum
156 (B, A) B2 191 (A) Notch Position
Data In
157 (B, A) C1 192 (A) Bypass Delay
158 (B, A) C2 193 (B, A) Energy Saver
159 (B, A) D1 194 (A) Force Tuning
160 (B, A) D2 195 (M, B, A) Stator R
161 (B, A) A1 196 (M, B, A) Total R
162 (B, A) A2 197 (M, B, A) Coupling Factor
163 (B, A) B1 198 (M, B, A) Inductance
164 (B, A) B2 199 (A) Speed PGain
Data Out
165 (B, A) C1 200 (A) Gain
166 (B, A) C2 201 (A) Transient Zero
167 (B, A) D1 202 (A) Mag
168 (B, A) D2 203 (A) Ping Degree
169 (A) Voltage Ratio 204 (A) Pings
170 (A) User CT Ratio 205 (A) Phase Shift 0
(1) M, B, A = Access Level; see Parameter Access Level Modification Using the HIM.

186 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Programming Chapter 6

Table 77 - SMC-50 Controller Parameter Linear List—Parameter 206…277

Number(1) Name Number(1) Name

206 (A) 10 242 (B, A) Ov A Lvl
207 (A) 20 243 (B, A) Ov A Dly
208 (A) Phase Shift 30 244 (B, A) Un F Lvl
MVA
209 (A) 40 245 (B, A) Un F Dly
210 (A) 50 246 (B, A) Un A Lvl
211 (A) 60 247 (B, A) Un A Dly
212 (A) 70 248 (B, A) Ov F Lvl
213 (A) Phase Shift 80 249 (B, A) Ov F Dly
214 (A) 90 250 (B, A) Ov A Lvl
215 (A) 100 251 (B, A) Ov A Dly
Lead PF
216 (M, B, A) Board Temp 252 (B, A) Un F Lvl
217 (B, A) Exp 7 Config 253 (B, A) Un F Dly
218 (B, A) Exp 8 Config 254 (B, A) Un A Lvl
219 (B, A) Exp 9 Config 255 (B, A) Un A Dly
220 (B, A) Time 256 (B, A) Ov F Lvl
Heating
221 (B, A) Level 257 (B, A) Ov F Dly
222 (B, A) Config 258 (B, A) Ov A Lvl
Fan
223 (M, B, A) Connection 259 (B, A) Ov A Dly
Lag PF
224 (M, B, A) Line Frequency 260 (B, A) Un F Lvl
225 (B, A) F Dly 261 (B, A) Un F Dly
Freq High
226 (B, A) A Dly 262 (B, A) Un A Lvl
227 (B, A) F Dly 263 (B, A) Un A Dly
Freq Low
228 (B, A) A Dly 264 (B, A) Motor Restart En
229 (A) Parameter Management 265 (M, B, A) Voltage P-N Ave
230 (B, A) Fault En 266 (M, B, A) A-N
Motor
231 (B, A) Alarm En 267 (M, B, A) Volts Phase B-N
232 (B, A) Ov F Lvl 268 (M, B, A) C-N
233 (B, A) Ov F Dly 269 (M, B, A) A
234 (B, A) Ov A Lvl 270 (M, B, A) Real Power B
235 (B, A) Ov A Dly 271 (M, B, A) C
+MVAR(2)
236 (B, A) Un F Lvl 272 (M, B, A) Real Demand
237 (B, A) Un F Dly 273 (M, B, A) Max Real Demand
238 (B, A) Un A Lvl 274 (M, B, A) A
239 (B, A) Un A Dly 275 (M, B, A) Reactive Power B
240 (B, A) Ov F Lvl 276 (M, B, A) C
MVA
241 (B, A) Ov F Dly 277 (M, B, A) Reactive Power
(1) M, B, A = Access Level; see Parameter Access Level Modification Using the HIM.
(2) The "+" for MVAR indicates power consumed.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 187

Chapter 6 Programming

Table 78 - SMC-50 Controller Parameter Linear List—Parameter 278…333

Number(1) Name Number(1) Name

278 (M, B, A) C(3) 307 (A) SS Ref Gain
Reactive Energy
279 (M, B, A) P(4) 308 (A) SS Trans Gain
280 (B, A) Reactive Energy 309 (M, B, A) Input Status
281 (M, B, A) Reactive Demand 310 (B, A) A Lvl
Locked Rotor
282 (M, B, A) Max Reactive Demand 311 (B, A) A Dly
283 (M, B, A) A
312 (A) Product Command
284 (M, B, A) Apparent Power B
285 (M, B, A) C 313 (B, A) Rebalance Level
286 (M, B, A) Apparent Power 314 (M, B, A) A
287 (M, B, A) Apparent Energy 315 (M, B, A) Peak Voltage B
288 (M, B, A) Apparent Demand 316 (M, B, A) C
289 (M, B, A) Max Apparent Demand 317 (M, B, A) A
290 (B, A) Demand Period 318 (M, B, A) Peak Current B
291 (B, A) Number of Periods 319 (M, B, A) C
292 (M, B, A) A 320 (M, B, A) Phase A-B Voltage
293 (M, B, A) Power Factor B 321 (M, B, A) Phase B-C Voltage
294 (M, B, A) C 322 (M, B, A) Phase C-A Voltage
295 (M, B, A) Current Imbal 323 (M, B, A) Phase A Current
296 (M, B, A) Voltage Unbal 324 (M, B, A) Phase B Current
297 (B, A) Ov F Lvl 325 (M, B, A) Phase C Current
298 (B, A) Ov F Dly 326 (M, B, A) Power Factor
Snap Shot
299 (B, A) Ov A Lvl 327 (M, B, A) Motor Thermal Usage
300 (B, A) Ov A Dly 328 (M, B, A) Motor Speed
-MVAR (2)
301 (B, A) Un F Lvl 329 (M, B, A) THD Voltage Average
302 (B, A) Un F Dly 330 (M, B, A) THD Current Average
303 (B, A) Un A Lvl 331 (M, B, A) Product Status
304 (B, A) Un A Dly 332 (M, B, A) Board Temp
305 (B, A) Starting Torque 333 (M, B, A) Line Frequency
306 (B, A) Starting Torque 2 334 (M, B, A) Restart Auto
307 (A) SS Ref Gain
(1) M, B, A = Access Level; see Parameter Access Level Modification Using the HIM.
(2) The "-" for MVAR indicates power generated.
(3) C=Consumed
(4) P=Produced

Table 79 - SMC-50 Controller Parameter Linear List—Parameter 334…350

Number(1) Name Number(1) Name

335 (M, B, A) DLX Input 1 345 (M, B, A) DLX Command
DeviceLogix
336 (M, B, A) DLX Input 2 346 (M, B, A) DLX Status
337 (M, B, A) DLX DL Input 1 347 (M, B, A) Load Type
DeviceLogix
338(M, B, A) DLX DL Input 2 348 (M, B, A) Ref Source
339 (M, B, A) DLX DL Input 3 349 (M, B, A) Output V Ref
340 (M, B, A) DLX DL Input 4 350 (M, B, A) Slow Speed 2
341 (M, B, A) DLX DL Input 5
342 (M, B, A) DLX DL Input 6
DeviceLogix
343 (M, B, A) DLX Output 1
344 (M, B, A) DLX Output 2
(1) M, B, A = Access Level; see Parameter Access Level Modification Using the HIM.

188 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Programming Chapter 6

SMC-50 Controller Option Basic Configuration using the HIM

Module Configuration
When you plug an SMC-50 controller Option Module into one of the three
available ports (07, 08, or 09), you may need to configure the option module
parameters. These parameters reside in the option module through one of the
controller ports (07, 08, or 09) and are not included in the SMC-50 controller
Controller (Port <00>) parameter list.

Perform the following steps to access the option module parameters using the
HIM.

TIP Before proceeding with these steps: Take note of the SMC-50 controller port
number (07, 08, or 09) that the option module is connected to.

1. Press the FOLDERS single function key.

2. Use the forward or back arrow until the PORTS folder screen is
displayed.

Allen-Bradley
Stopped AUTO
0 Amps F

PORTS
00 SMC-50
09 02 20-HIM-x6
03 1203-USB
ESC 09 SMC-50 Option

3. Use the up or down arrow until the noted port number of the option
module is displayed. The HIM displays the HOST PARM file screen
and indicates the option module port controller number below the AB
logo.

Allen-Bradley
Stopped AUTO
Ensure that the correct port 0 Amps F
number is displayed before you
modify the option module HOST PARAM
parameter
Linear List
09 File-Group
Changed Parameters
ESC

4. Ensure the correct port number is displayed, then configure the

parameters using either the Linear List or File-Group selection.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 189

Chapter 6 Programming

TIP Parameters can be restored to factory defaults using its respective

Parameter Management parameter or the Set Defaults function from the
HIM’s memory screen. Ensure the correct port number of the device to be
restored is displayed before restoring.

For additional information using the FOLDERS function of the HIM, see the
20-HIM-A6 user manual, publication 20HIM-UM001.

150-SM4 Digital I/O Option Module

In addition to the two on-board 24V DC input and two auxiliary relay outputs
of the SMC-50 controller, the 150-SM4 Digital I/O Option Module has four
120...240V AC inputs and three auxiliary relay outputs. You can use these
inputs and outputs for control functions.

Configure 120...240V AC Inputs

TIP Before proceeding with the following steps, perform steps 1 through 4 in
Basic Configuration using the HIM.

1. From the File-Group screen, press ENTER (number 5 on the keypad).

The four inputs are displayed.

Allen-Bradley
Stopped AUTO
0 Amps F
Port 09 Param File-Group
FILE Inputs PROPERTIES
GROUP Inputs
Input1
Input2
Input3

ESC ENTER

2. Use the up or down arrow to select the input, then press ENTER
(number 5 on the keypad). The display will show the current setting of
the input.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to change the selected input function.
4. Use the up or down arrow to select the desired function (for example,
Start, Stop, Coast, Slow Speed, etc.), then press the ENTER soft key to
load the selection. If necessary, use the back arrow to return to the
previous selection.
TIP For a complete list of 150-SM4 parameters, see the Digital I/O Option
Module Parameter List on page 192.

190 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Programming Chapter 6

For additional information using the FILE GROUP function of the HIM, see
the 20-HIM-A6 user manual, publication 20HIM-UM001.

Configure Auxiliary Relay Outputs

TIP Before proceeding with the following steps, perform steps 1 through 4 in
Basic Configuration using the HIM.

1. Use the up or down arrow to select the one of the Aux Outputs, then
press ENTER (number 5 on the keypad).

Allen-Bradley
Stopped AUTO
0 Amps
Port 09 Param File-Group
FILE Outputs PROPERTIES
GROUP Aux 1
GROUP Aux 2
GROUP Aux 3

ESC

2. Select one of the four configuration options (Aux X Config, Aux X

Invert, Aux X On Delay, or Aux X Off Delay), then press ENTER
(keypad or soft key).
3. Modify the auxiliary relay output as desired. If necessary, use the back
arrow to return to the previous selection.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 191

Chapter 6 Programming

Digital I/O Option Module Parameter List

The allowable selections for the 150-SM4 are listed in Table 80.

Table 80 - 150-SM4 Parameters

Parameter
Min/Max Values Default Value Access Units
Number(1) Name
Bit 0 = Module Ready/Disabled Bit 4 = Input 4 Status
Bit 1 = Input 1 Status Bit 5 = Aux 1 Status 0 = Disabled OFF
X.1 Module Status — R
Bit 2 = Input 2 Status Bit 6 = Aux 2 Status 1 = Enabled ON
Bit 3 = Input 3 Status Bit 7 = Aux 3 Status
X.2 Input 1 Disable Dual Ramp
X.3 Input 2 Start OL Select
X.4 Input 3 Coast Fault
Stop Option Fault NC Disable R/W NA
Start/Coast Clear Fault
X.5 Input 4 Start/Stop Emerg Run
Slow Speed Motor Heater
[Normal] DeviceLogix
UTS (Up-to-Speed) Aux Control(2)
Fault Network 1
X.6 Aux 1 Config Alarm Network 2 Normal R/W NA
Ext Bypass Network 3
Ext Brake Network 4
Fan Control
Disable
X.7 Aux 1 Invert Disable R/W
Enable
X.8 Aux 1 On Delay 0.0…10.0 0.0 R/W seconds
X.9 Aux 1 Off Delay 0.0…10.0 0.0 R/W seconds
Normal DeviceLogix
UTS (Up-to-Speed) Aux Control(2)
Fault Network 1
X.10 Aux 2 Config Alarm Network 2 Normal R/W NA
Ext Bypass Network 3
Ext Brake Network 4
Fan Control
Disable
X.11 Aux 2 Invert Disable R/W NA
Enable
X.12 Aux 2 On Delay 0.0…10.0 0.0 R/W seconds
X.13 Aux 2 Off Delay 0.0…10.0 0.0 R/W seconds
[Normal] DeviceLogix
UTS (Up-to-Speed) Aux Control(2)
Fault Network 1
X.14 Aux 3 Config Alarm Network 2 Normal R/W NA
Ext Bypass Network 3
Ext Brake Network 4
Fan Control
Disable
X.15 Aux 3 Invert Disable R/W NA
Enable
X.16 Aux 3 On Delay 0.0…10.0 0.0 R/W seconds
X.17 Aux 3 Off Delay 0.0…10.0 0.0 R/W seconds
Ready
X.18 Parameter Mgmt Ready R/W NA
Factory Default
(1) "X" indicates the port number (07, 08, or 09) the 150-SM4 is connected to the SMC-50 controller. This port number is displayed on the HIM screen below the Allen-Bradley brand logo.
(2) An auxiliary output configured for Aux Control using the AuxX Config parameter is under control of its associated bit form the AuxControl, Parameter 180. See 150-SM6 PCM Information
on page 277 for bit assignments. This function enables forcing an output, ON or OFF.

192 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Programming Chapter 6

150-SM6 Parameter Configuration Option Module

The 150-SM6 Parameter Configuration Option Module is used to configure a

select group of parameters. The option module itself requires no user
configuration. The option module status and switch positions that configure
its select parameters can be read using the HIM or PC software.

TIP Only one 150-SM6 is allowed per SMC-50 controller.

To read the 150-SM6 switch positions, follow the steps in Basic Configuration
using the HIM on page 189. When Linear List is selected, use the up or down
arrow to view the module switch positions.

Allen-Bradley
Stopped AUTO
0 Amps
Po rt 08 Host P a ra m 5
Rotary SwitchPROPERTIES
1
ESC PAR #

Table 81 provides the parameter detail of the 150-SM6.

Table 81 - 150-SM6 Parameters

Parameter
Min./Max. Access Units
Number(1) Name
1=Ready
X.1 Module Status Ready R
0=Disabled
X.2 Rotary Switch 1(2) (Initial Torque)
X.3 Rotary Switch 2(2) (Current Limit)
X.4 Rotary Switch 3(2) (Ramp Time) 0.0...15.0 R 0...1.5=0...F
X.5 Rotary Switch 4(2) (Stop Time)
X.6 Rotary Switch 5(2) (Motor FLC)
X.7 Device Config
X.8 Protect Config 0.0...255.0 R/W Bit Numbered(3)
X.9 I/O Config
(1) "X" indicates the port number (07, 08, or 09) the 150-SM6 is connected to the SMC-50 controller. This port number is displayed
on the HIM screen below the AB brand logo.
(2) For 150-SM6: Rotary Switch 1 = S1, Rotary Switch 2 = S2, etc. Rotary switch positions equal 1 to F. As displayed on the HIM,
A=10, B=11, C=12, and so on.
(3) Bit 0 and 1 values represent the ON/OFF switch positions within the associated switch bank (for example, Device Config) where
0=OFF and 1=ON.
NOTE: Switch #1=Bit 0, Switch #2=Bit 1, etc. as displayed on the HIM.

For switch setting details, see Table 83 through Table 87.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 193

Chapter 6 Programming

150-SM2 PTC, Ground Fault, and External Current Transformer

Module
The 150-SM2 Option Module provides simultaneous interface capability to
three different types of external sensing devices which can be used by the SMC-
50 controller for certain application conditions. When installing the 150-SM2
into the SMC-50 controller, the following installation requirements must be
followed:
• Only one 150-SM2 can be installed in one SMC-50 controller.
• The 150-SM2 must reside in port 7 or 8 only. DO NOT use port 9 with
the 150-SM2.
• When the external CT function is enabled through the 150-SM2 CT
Enable Bit, the external CT is calibrated by the SMC-50 controller for
scaling, phase shift, and inversion. The calibration cycle will
automatically occur:
– before the first START occurs after the 150-SM2 installation and
when the CT Enable, Parameter X.12, = Enable,
– after a Load Defaults occurs, and
– when you force tuning of the SMC-50 controller through the Force
Tuning, Parameter 194, or the HOLD TO TEST button on the
SMC-50 controller is held for > 10 seconds when stopped.

To configure the 150-SM2, follow the steps in Basic Configuration using the
HIM on page 189 then proceed with the following steps.

Allen-Bradley
Stopped AUTO
0 Amps
Po r t 07 Param File-Group
FILE PROPERTIES
Linear List
GROUP L i n e a r L i s t
Module Status
Fault Enable
Alarm Enable
ESC ENTER

1. Using the File-Group selection, press ENTER (number 5 on the

keypad) until the Group Linear List is displayed.
2. Use the up or down arrow to scroll to the desired parameter, then press
ENTER.
If the parameter is bit configured (for example, Fault Enable):
a. Use the left or right arrow to move to the bit location that needs to be
modified. The bit function is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
b. Press EDIT to move to the edit screen.
c. Change the bit assignment, then press EDIT.

194 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Programming Chapter 6

If the parameter is not bit configured (for example, Turns Ratio):

a. Press the EDIT.
b. Change the value within the displayed limits, then press ENTER to
load the parameter contents into memory.

Allen-Bradley
Stopped AUTO
0 Amps
Po rt 07 Host P a ra m 2
Fault Enable PROPERTIES
xxxx xxxx xxxx xx00
Bit 01 Ground Fault
ESC PAR # EDIT

Table 82 provides the parameter detail of the 150-SM2.

Table 82 - 150-SM2 Parameters

Parameter
Min/Max Values Default Value Access Units
Number(1) Name
Bit 0 = Module Ready
Bit = 0 Disable
X.1 Module Status Bit 1 = PTC — R
Bit = 1 Enable
Bit 2 = CT Loss
X.2 Fault Enable
Bit 0 = PTC Bit = 0 Disable
X.3 Alarm Enable — R/W
Bit 1 = Ground Fault Bit = 1 Enable
X.4 Restart Enable
X.5 Turns Ratio(2) 100…2000 1000 R/W NA
X.6 Ground Fault Level(3) 0.00…5.00 2.5 R/W Amps
X.7 Ground Fault Delay 0.1…250.0 0.5 R/W Seconds
X.8 Ground Fault A Level 0.00…5.00 2.5 R/W Amps
X.9 Ground Fault A Delay 0.1…250.0 0.5 R/W Seconds
X.10 Ground Fault Inh Time(4) 0.0…250.0 10.0 R/W Seconds
X.11 Ground Current 0.00…5.00 0.00 R Amps
Disable
X.12 CT Enable Disable R/W NA
Enable
X.13 CT Scaling A
X.14 CT Scaling B 0.10…5.00 1.00 R NA
X.15 CT Scaling C
X.16 Phase Shift A
X.17 Phase Shift B -12.50…12.50 0.00 R Degree
X.18 Phase Shift C
Ready
X.19 Parameter Mgmt Ready R/W NA
Factory Default
(1) "X" indicates the port number (07, 08, or 09) the 150-SM6 is connected to the SMC-50 controller. This port number is displayed on the HIM screen below the AB
brand logo.
(2) Configure Turns Ratio to the value of the Ground Fault sensor CT Turns Ratio (for example, 825-CBCT=100:1 Set X.5 to 100.
(3) The sensing range of the module.
(4) Inhibit Time lets you inhibit (disable) ground fault protection for the time selected during starting.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 195

Chapter 6 Programming

Parameter Configuration Using the Parameter Configuration Module (150-SM6)

Module
The Cat. No. 150-SM6 parameter configuration module (PCM) provides
simple and limited configuration of the SMC-50 controller. you can insert this
PCM into any control module option port (7, 8, or 9). Only one PCM is
allowed per control module.

Parameters that are configured by the PCM and whose values represent the
switch settings appear as read-write parameters to other configuration devices.
The parameter values set by the PCM are stored in the control module
memory. By using the appropriate removal procedure (remove all power to
Control Module and Power Module), you can remove the PCM from the
control module and retain its parameter settings.

You can configure parameters that are not defined and therefore are not
configurable by the Cat. No. 150-SM6 PCM through other means (for
example, Human Interface Module (HIM), Connected Components
Workbench software, or DriveExecutive software), if necessary.

Application considerations for the 150-SM6 PCM are listed below.

• If another configuration tool attempts to configure a parameter setup by
an installed 150-SM6, that parameter will revert back to the 150-SM6
configuration. The PCM overrides other configuration tools.
• The 150-SM6 can only configure the onboard control I/O of the
Control Module. If additional I/O are added by using a 150-SM4
Digital I/O Option Module, you must configure those I/O with
another programming tool.

When using a Cat. No. 150-SM6 PCM to configure the SMC-50 controller,
note that the following features, functions, and modes are not configurable:
• Full voltage start
• Torque ramp start
• External brake stop
• Option card I/O configuration (Cat. No. 150-SM… option modules)
• External bypass
• Specialized output relay configuration (for example, network control,
DeviceLogix, auxiliary control)
• Specialized operation modes/features
– Dual ramp, motor winding heater, emergency run
– Overload select (Class)
– Adjustment of slow speed set point

TIP If the PCM is removed, another configuration tool (for example, a HIM) can
change a parameter that was previously altered by an installed PCM.

196 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Programming Chapter 6

Figure 98 - DIP Switch and Rotary Switch Locations

S1

BCDE Diagnostic

1
67 A
LEDs

2
F01
89
23

3
45

OPEN

4
I/O
I/O
CAT. SER. S2

5
150-SM6 A S5

1
BCDE

2
67 A
SMC-50 PARAMETER CONFIGURATION

PROTECTION
F01
89

PROTECTION
8
BCDE

3
23
S1 Initial Torque

OPEN
45

67 A
4

F01
89
S2 Current Limit 23

5
S3 Ramp Time S3 45

6
1
S4 Stop Time BCDE

7
67 A

2
S5 Motor FLC

8
F01
89

3
23

DEVICE
DEVICE
OPEN
45

4
MFC LOC MFG DATE

5
FACxx yy/mm/dd S4

6
BCDE

7
67 A
F01
89

8
23
45

DIP Switch Rotary Switch

The 150-SM6 PCM contains five rotary switches, S1 through S5, each with
designations 0-F and three banks of ON/OFF 8-switch DIP switches.

Table 83 through Table 87 show the resulting values of the position setting
functions for each of the five rotary switches and the associated controller
parameter numbers. For details on the functions of these parameters, see
Chapter 3, 5, 7, and Appendix A.

Table 83 - S1 = Initial Torque Configuration—Controller Parameter 51

Resulting Initial Torque Value Resulting Initial Torque Value

Position Setting Position Setting
(% motor torque) (% motor torque)
0 10 8 58
1 16 9 64
2 22 A 70 (default)
3 28 B 76
4 34 C 82
5 40 D 88
6 46 E 94
7 52 F 100

Table 84 - S2 = Current Limit Level Configuration—Controller Parameter 53

Position Setting Resulting Current Limit Value Resulting Current Limit Value
Position Setting
(% (FLC) (% FLC)
0 200 8 360 (default)
1 220 9 380
2 240 A 400
3 260 B 420
4 280 C 440
5 300 D 460
6 320 E 480
7 340 F 500

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 197

Chapter 6 Programming

Table 85 - S3 = Ramp Time Configuration—Starting—Controller Parameter 50

Position Setting Starting Ramp Time (seconds) Position Setting Starting Ramp Time (seconds)
0 0.1 8 16
1 2 9 18
2 4 A 20
3 6 B 22
4 8 C 24
5 10 (default) D 26
6 12 E 28
7 14 F 30

Table 86 - S4 = Stop Time Configuration—Controller Parameter 66

Position Setting Stop Time (seconds)(1) Position Setting Stop Time (seconds)(1)
0 Coast -to-Stop (default) 8 16
1 2 9 18
2 4 A 20
3 6 B 22
4 8 C 24
5 10 D 26
6 12 E 28
7 14 F 30
(1) When the braking STOP MODE is selected (device configuration bank switch #3 and #4), the controller multiplies the selected
stop time by ten.

Table 87 - S5 = Motor FLC Configuration—Controller Parameter 78

Position Setting FLC(1) (2) (% of controller’s max) Position Setting FLC(1)(2)(% of controller’s max)
0 40 (default)) 8 72
1 44 9 76
2 48 A 80
3 52 B 84
4 56 C 88
5 60 D 92
6 64 E 96
7 68 F 100
(1) Because a set of switches do not provide the resolution to enter all possible FLC combinations like a keypad, switch S5 lets you
configure the motor’s FLC in the SMC-50 controller by using a percent (%) of the controller’s rated FLC (for example, 90 A, 110 A,
180 A, etc.)
Example: For a 60 A motor and 90 A controller, % of controllers max. FLC for a 90 A motor = 64% of 90 A (57.6 A), or Switch
Position 6.
(2) To determine the S5 switch setting for an inside-the-delta motor configuration, use the following equations:

Step 1: Step 2:
Motor Nameplate FLC X
= X x 100 = S5 Switch Setting
1.73 SMC-50 Controller Rating

Step 1: Step 2:
100 A 57.8 A Therefore, from the result of 64%, the S5 switch
= 57.8 A x 100 = 64%
1.73 90 A setting is position 6

198 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Programming Chapter 6

TIP • If the calculated value does not match a switch position, use the
previous (lower percent) switch setting.
• You can select the inside-the-delta motor configuration using Motor
Connection, Parameter 44, or automatically during a controller tuning
process. The tuning process is done during the initial system start after
changing any of the tuning parameters and initializing a start or by
pressing and holding the SMC-50 controller reset push button for at
least 10 seconds with the motor stopped and then initializing a start. If
another configuration device is available (for example, a 20-HIM-A6 or
PC software such as Connected Components Workbench), changing
Force Tuning, Parameter 194, to TRUE or resetting the controller to
"Default" also results in tuning to occur.

Table 88 through Table 90 define the functions for the three banks of ON/
OFF 8-switch DIP switches. Each of the three banks is defined by a high level,
functional name with each switch having a unique function.

Table 88 - ON/OFF 8-Switch DIP Switch Definitions—Device

DEVICE Configuration Bank Switch Number

(O = Switch OPEN) #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8
Linear Speed Acceleration (default) 0 0 — — — — — —
Starting Mode— Current Limit 0 1 — — — — — —
Controller Parameter 49 Soft Start 1 0 — — — — — —
Pump Start 1 1 — — — — — —
Linear Speed Deceleration (default) — — 0 0 — — — —
Stop Mode (1) (2)— Soft Stop — — 0 1 — — — —
Controller Parameter 65 Braking — — 1 0 — — — —
Pump Stop — — 1 1 — — — —
Energy Saver(3) — Enable — — — — 1 — — —
Controller Parameter 193 Disable (default) — — — — 0 — — —
50% — — — — — 0 0 0
100% — — — — — 0 0 1
150% — — — — — 0 1 0
Braking Current— 200% (default) — — — — — 0 1 1
Controller Parameter 69 250% — — — — — 1 0 0
300% — — — — — 1 0 1
350% — — — — — 1 1 0
400% — — — — — 1 1 1
(1) When the "Stop Mode" is configured as (a) "Linear Speed Decel", (b) " Soft Stop", (c) "Pump Stop", and the "Stop Time" (rotary
switch S4) is set to zero, a "Coast" stop will result. A non-zero "Stop Time" value for the three previously listed "Stop Modes"
defines the time to stop period which is based on that specific configuration.
(2) If the "Stop Mode" is configured as "Braking", then the "Stop Time" setting (Rotary Switch S4) is used to select either the
"Automatic Zero Speed Detection" method ("Stop Time" is set to zero) or the "Timed Brake" method ("Stop Time" is not set to
zero).
(3) With the Energy Saver switch (#5) set to Enable, the Energy Saver Level, Parameter 193, is automatically configured by the PCM
to 0.25.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 199

Chapter 6 Programming

TIP • With the “Automatic Zero Speed Detection” method, the controller
applies the user-selected “Braking Current” defined by the Device
Configuration Switch Bank. Switch #6, #7, and #8 senses a motor “Zero
Speed” condition and automatically stops the braking process (brake
current OFF).
• With the “Timed Brake” method, the user-selected “Braking Current” is
applied for the user-configured “Stop Time” regardless of the motor
speed (for example, “Automatic Zero Speed Detection” disabled). The
“Timed Brake” method can be used in applications where detecting zero
speed is ineffective or when braking the motor to a complete stop
results in random overload trips. With this method, braking is applied
for a fixed time equal to the "Stop Time" setting (Rotary Switch S4) and
multiplied by ten. An ideal "Stop Time" setting can be accomplished by
trial and error, but should always allow for some coast time. Setting the
"Stop Time" for too long of a time period can result in braking current to
be applied to a stopped motor and will likely result in overload trips.

Table 89 - ON/OFF 8-Switch DIP Switch Definitions—Protection

PROTECTION Configuration Bank Switch Number

(O = Switch OPEN) #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8
Enabled (default) 1 — — — — — — —
Preset Protection Level Parameter(1)
Disabled 0 — — — — — — —
Enabled (default) — 1 — — — — — —
Stall Fault Parameter 230
Disable — 0 — — — — — —
Enable — — 1 — — — — —
Phase Reversal Fault Parameter 136
Disable (default) — — 0 — — — — —
Enable — — — 1 — — — —
OL Restart Parameter 264
Disable (default) — — — 0 — — — —
Enabled (default) — — — — 1 — — —
OL Enable Parameter 230
Disable — — — — 0 — — —
10 (default) — — — — — 0 0 —
15 — — — — — 0 1 —
OL Class Parameter 75
20 — — — — — 1 0 —
30 — — — — — 1 1 —
(1) The Preset Production Level DIP switch allows the following Faults to be enabled (1) or disabled (0) as a group.
Current Imbalance Fault—Parameter Number: 110 [default value: 15)
Voltage Unbalance Fault—Parameter Number: 106 [default value: 15]
Line Loss Fault—Parameter Number: NA [default value: no value required - see Chapter 4, Line Loss Protection on page 129]
Open Gate Fault—Parameter Number: NA [default value: no value required - see Chapter 4, Open SCR Gate Fault & Alarm —
Phase A, B, or C on page 130]
No/Open Load Fault—Parameter Number: NA [default value: no value required - see Chapter 4, Open Load — Fault & Alarm on
page 132]
The PCM configuration setting for each of these Faults follows the currently entered/loaded parameter value for each Fault. This
will typically be the default setting unless a 20-HIM-A6 or other configuration tool (for example, PC software or network device)
is used to change a parameter setting. The switch setting also overrides the Motor Fault Enable, Parameter 230, and Starter Fault
Enable, Parameter 136, function to enable or disable these Faults.
Note that with the Preset Protection Level switch set to Disable, all Starter and Motor Faults are disabled (as defaults except the
Power Quality Fault).

200 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Programming Chapter 6

Table 90 - ON/OFF 8-Switch DIP Switch Definitions—Configuration

I/O Configuration(1) Bank Switch Number

(O = Switch OPEN) #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8
Normal (default) 0 0 — — — — — —
Up-to-Speed (UTS) 0 1 — — — — — —
Aux #1 Configuration Parameter 172
Fault 1 0 — — — — — —
Alarm 1 1 — — — — — —
Normal — — 0 0 — — — —
UTS [default] — — 0 1 — — — —
Aux #2 Configuration Parameter 176
Fault — — 1 0 — — — —
Alarm — — 1 1 — — — —
Start/Coast (default) — — — — 0 — — —
Input #1 Parameter 56
Start/Stop Option — — — — 1 — — —
Stop Option (default) — — — — — 0 0 —
Clear Fault — — — — — 0 1 —
Input #2 Parameter 57
Slow Speed — — — — — 1 0 —
Fault — — — — — 1 1 —
(1) The I/O Configuration ability of the 150-SM6 is limited to the Control Module’s standard I/O.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 201

Chapter 6 Programming

Notes:

202 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 iChapter 7

Metering

Overview While the SMC-50 operates a motor, it is also monitoring several different
parameters to provide a full-function metering package.

Viewing Metering Data To access the metering information using the 20-HIM-A6, use the keypad to
follow the procedure below.

1. From the SMC-50 controller standard power-up screen, select

FOLDERS.
2. Use the right or left arrow until the Port 00 DEV PARAM screen is
displayed.

TIP Ensure the Advanced Access Level is selected, located at the bottom of the
DEV PARAM screen. For additional configuration details, see Parameter
Access Level Modification Using the HIM on page 158.

3. From the Port 00 DEV PARAM screen, select File-Group, then press
the ENTER key (number 5 on the keypad). The Port 00 Param File-
Group screen appears.
4. Use the up or down Arrow key to select File Monitoring. The Port 00
Param File-Group File Monitoring screen appears with seven GROUP
metering selections (Metering Basics, Metering Volts, Metering Current,
Metering Power, Start Stats. Monitoring, Power Quality).

Allen-Bradley Allen-Bradley
Stopped AUTO Stopped AUTO
0 Amps F 0 Amps F
Port 00 Param File-Group Port 00 Param File-Group
FILE MonitoringPROPERTIES FILE MonitoringPROPERTIES
FILE Set Up GROUP Metering Power
FILE Motor Protection GROUP Start Stats
FILE Communications GROUP Monitoring
FILE Utility GROUP Power Quality

ESC ESC

5. Use the up or down arrow key to select the desired GROUP, then press
the ENTER key (number 5 on the keypad).
6. Select the desired parameter from the previous group selected, then
press the ENTER key to monitor the metering parameter.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 203

Chapter 7 Metering

TIP With the exception of the Meter Reset, Parameter 16, the metering
parameters contained in the Monitoring File-Group are Read (R) only. See
Metering System on page 29 and Metering Parameters on page 204 for a
detailed list of metering parameters.

Resetting Metering Parameters

Meter Reset, Parameter 16, is used to clear (reset to 0) the contents of metering
parameters Elapsed Time, Energy, Time to PM (Preventive Maintenance), and
Starts to PM. To clear the contents of any one of these parameters, configure
Meter Reset to the specific parameter you wish to clear.

EXAMPLE To clear (reset to 0) the Elapsed Time, configure Meter Reset to Elapsed Time.
The controller will then clear the Elapsed Time and the value of Meter Reset
will return to Ready 0.

To access Meter Reset using the 20-HIM-A6, perform steps 1 through 4,

Viewing Metering Data.

1. From Step 4, select the Metering Basic Group, then press ENTER
(number 5 on the keypad).
2. Use the down arrow on the keypad to select/highlight Meter Reset.
3. With Meter Reset highlighted, press the ENTER key (number 5 on the
keypad) or the ENTER soft key.
4. Press the EDIT soft key.
5. Use the up or down arrow to select the desired parameter (Elapsed
Time, Energy, Time to PM, or Starts to PM) to be reset, then press the
soft ENTER soft key. The selected parameter is reset to zero with the
exception of the Starts to PM.

TIP When the ENTER key is pressed and Starts to PM is selected, its contents is
set to the value contained in PM Starts, Parameter 127.

Metering Parameters Current

The SMC-50 controller calculates true RMS current based on Current
Transformer (CT) feedback for all three phases. It also calculates an average
value of the three phase currents. During Braking and Slow Speed operation,
the calculated current is estimated based on time and current settings. This
parameter reports the three-phase motor current measurements. These
measurements are always line current, regardless of the type of connection. The
accuracy of the current calculation is ±5% of the true RMS current.

204 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Metering Chapter 7

Table 91 - Metering Parameters Associated with Current

Parameter Number Name/Description Min/Max Value Default Value Access Units

5 Current Average
6 Current Phase A
0...15,000 0 R Amps
7 Current Phase B
8 Current Phase C

Voltage

Line-to-Line and Line-to-Neutral RMS voltage is calculated for all three

phases with the average of the three voltages also provided. The data is
provided whenever 3-phase power is applied.

The accuracy of the voltage calculations is ±2% of the true RMS voltage.

Table 92 - Metering Parameters Associated with Voltage

Parameter Number Name/Description Min/Max Value Default Value Access Units

1 Voltage P-P Average
2 Volts Phase A-B
[0]...700 [0]...700 R Volts
3 Volts Phase B-C
4 Volts Phase C-A
265 Voltage P-N Average
266 Volts Phase A-N
[0]....450 [0]....450 R Volts
267 Volts Phase B-N
268 Volts Phase C-N

Torque

The SMC-50 controller calculates true electromechanical torque based on the

existing motor voltage and current feedback data.

TIP • During Braking and Slow Speed operations, Torque reads 0.

• For the Torque parameter to display correctly, the motor value for Rated
Torque, Parameter 47, and Rated Speed, Parameter 48, must be correctly
configured.

The accuracy of the torque calculations is ±10% of the true electromechanical

torque.

Table 93 - Metering Parameters Associated with Torque

Parameter Number Name/Description Min/Max Value Default Value Access Units

9 Torque -50...3000 0 R %

Power

Real, Reactive, and Apparent power calculations (along with demand and
maximum demand) are made on each line power phase along with a total for all
three phases.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 205

Chapter 7 Metering

The Energy parameters can be cleared using the Meter Reset parameter. See
Resetting Metering Parameters on page 204 for further details.

TIP For Reactive Energy, Parameter 278 and 279, the system will keep a:
• positive energy, which only integrates power when it is positive,
• negative energy, which only integrates power when it is negative, and
• net energy, which always integrates.

The demand numbers are calculated as follows:

• Energy is calculated over a period of time defined by "Demand Period",
Parameter 290.
• The previous "n" period values are averaged and the result is written to
the Demand, Parameter 272, 281 and 288, which is used in calculating
the Max Demand values. This averaging uses a rolling window algorithm
where the previous "n" periods are averaged.

Table 94 - Metering Parameters Associated with Power

Parameter Number Name/Description Min/Max Value Default Value Access Units

269 Real Power A
270 Real Power B
±1000.000 0.000 R MW
271 Real Power C
10 Real Power
11 Real Energy ±1000.000 0.000 R MWH
272 Real Demand
±1000.000 0.000 R MW
273 Max Real Demand
274 Reactive Power A
275 Reactive Power B
±1000.000 0.000 R MVAR
276 Reactive Power C
277 Reactive Power
278 Reactive Energy C
1000.000 0.000 R MVRH
279 Reactive Energy P
280 Reactive Energy ±1000.000 0.000 R MVRH
281 Reactive Demand
±1000.000 0.000 R MVAR
282 Max. Reactive Dmd
283 Apparent Power A
284 Apparent Power B
MVA
285 Apparent Power C
286 Apparent Power ±1000.000 0.000 R
287 Apparent Energy MVAH
288 Apparent Demand MVA
289 Max. Apparent Demand MVA
290 Demand Period 1...255 1 R/W min
291 Number of Periods 1...15 1 R/W —

Power Factor
Power Factor is calculated for each phase along with a total power factor value.
The power factor calculation does not apply during Slow Speed and Braking
operations.

206 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Metering Chapter 7

Table 95 - Metering Parameters Associated with Power Factor

Parameter Number Name/Description Min/Max Value Default Value Access Units

292 Power Factor A
293 Power Factor B
-1.00...1.00 0.00 R NA
294 Power Factor C
17 Power Factor

Energy Savings
The energy saver function only applies during light motor load situations, at
which time the SMC-50 controller reduces current to the motor and thereby
saves energy.
When in energy saver operation, the Energy Savings status bit is set. In
addition, Energy Savings, Parameter 15, indicates the percentage energy
savings.

Parameter 17 - [Power Factor] should be monitored and recorded when the

motor is running at no/light load and at full/heavy load. The power factor
value where the controller enters Energy Saver mode is determined by setting
Parameter 193 - [Energy Saver] to a value between the no/light load and full/
heavy load recorded values.

Table 96 - Energy Saver Mode Parameter List

Parameter Number Parameter Name Min/Max Value Default Value Access Units
15 Energy Savings 0…100 0…100 R %
17 Power Factor -1.00…1.00 -1.00…1.00 R —
193 Energy Saver 0.00-1.00 0.00 R/W —

TIP Set Parameter 193 = 0 to disable Energy Saver mode.

Elapsed Time
The SMC-50 controller keeps a log of the total accumulated hours the
controlled motor has been running via the Elapsed Time metering parameter.
The Elapsed Time meter value is updated every 10 minutes and stored at
power down (accurate to 1/6 of an hour). The Elapsed Time meter
accumulates to 50,000 hours of operation and can be reset to zero via the Meter
Reset parameter (see Resetting Metering Parameters on page 204).
Elapsed Time 2 is similar to Elapsed Time. Elapsed Time 2 differs in that you
cannot reset it and will count up to 50,000 hours and then hold that value (it
will not roll over).

Table 97 - Metering Parameters Associated with Elapsed Time

Parameter Number Name/Description Min/Max Value Default Value Access Units

12 Elapsed Time R/W
0.0...50000.0 0.0 Hours
13 Elapsed Time 2 R

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 207

Chapter 7 Metering

Running Time
The Running Time meter parameter logs the amount of time the motor has
been operating. The timer resets to zero and begins counting as each start
command is received.

TIP When the SMC-50 controller is stopped, the parameter displays the length
of time the motor was previously operating.

Table 98 - Metering Parameters Associated with Running Time

Parameter Number Name/Description Min/Max Value Default Value Access Units

14 Running Time 0.0...5000.0 0.0 R Hours

Motor Speed
The Motor Speed meter parameter is only valid when using the Linear Speed
Starting or Linear Speed Stopping modes. It provides the estimated motor
speed during either the starting or stopping maneuver. When the SMC-50
controller is not in these modes, the Motor Speed meter parameter reads zero
except when the unit is at speed. In this case, the parameter displays 100%.

Table 99 - Metering Parameters Associated with Motor Speed

Parameter Number Name/Description Min/Max Value Default Value Access Units

34 Motor Speed 0...100 0.0 R %

Actual Start Time

The SMC-50 controller logs the start time of the last five motor starts and
stores that information in Parameters 24 through 28. The start time data is
stored in a first-in, first-out method so the record of the last five starts is always
maintained.

Table 100 - Metering Parameters Associated with Actual Start Time

Parameter Number Name/Description Min/Max Value Default Value Access Units

24 Start Time 1
25 Start Time 2
26 Start Time 3 0...1000 0 R Seconds
27 Start Time 4
28 Start Time 5

Peak Start Current

The SMC-50 controller logs the peak average RMS current during each start
and stores that information in Parameters 29 through 33. The Peak Start
Current data is stored in a first-in, first-out method so the record of the last five
starts is always maintained.

208 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Metering Chapter 7

Table 101 - Metering Parameters Associated with Peak Start Current

Parameter Number Name/Description Min/Max Value Default Value Access Units

29 Peak Current 1
30 Peak Current 2
31 Peak Current 3 0...15,000 0 R Amps
32 Peak Current 4
33 Peak Current 5

Total Starts
The SMC-50 controller maintains a Total Start counter which is incremented
each time the controller is started. As shipped, the counter value is zero. You
cannot reset it.

TIP The Total Starts counter is not incremented if the controller faults on a pre-
start fault. It is incremented once SCR gating begins.

Table 102 - Metering Parameters Associated with Total Starts

Parameter Number Name/Description Min/Max Value Default Value Access Units

23 Total Starts 0...30,000 0.0 R NA

Total Harmonic Distortion (THD)

The SMC-50 controller provides the IEEE calculated THD value for the three
Line Voltages (Line-to-Neutral) and the three Motor Phase Currents (current
through SMC-50 controller Power Pole(1)). In addition, the average THD is
calculated for both Line Voltage and Phase Current.
The controller algorithm uses a round-robin approach to gather the six signals
by sampling one signal and then calculating the THD value for that signal. In
other words, each power cycle current and voltage THD are calculated for a
phase, then for the next phase and so on.

TIP When the motor is not running, the Current-Based THD values read 0.

Table 103 - Metering Parameters Associated with THD

Parameter Number Name/Description Min/Max Value Default Value Access Units

35 THD Va
36 THD V b
0.0...1000.0 0.0 R %
37 THD Vc
38 THD V ave
39 THD Ia
40 THD Ib
0.0...1000.0 0.0 R %
41 THD Ic
42 THD I ave

(1) When in external bypass running mode/configuration, you can use an external CT (825-MCM) and a 150-SM2 Option Module to
read current-based (THD Ix) values.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 209

Chapter 7 Metering

Line Frequency
The SMC-50 controller measures and displays the system 3-phase AC Line
Frequency. Upon power up, the Line Frequency parameter displays zero until a
valid AC Line Frequency is measured. When three-phase power is removed
from the SMC-50 controller, the parameter maintains the value of the previous
frequency reading.

Table 104 - Metering Parameters Associated with Line Frequency

Parameter Number Name/Description Min/Max Value Default Value Access Units

224 Line Frequency 0...100 0 R Hz

Current Imbalance
The SMC-50 controller provides a calculated Current Imbalance value. The
Current Imbalance calculation is equal to the largest deviation of the three
RMS phase current signals from the average RMS phase current, divided by the
average. Note that the SMC-50 controller Power Pole Current is used for the
Current Imbalance calculation.

Table 105 - Metering Parameters Associated with Current Imbalance

Parameter Number Name/Description Min/Max Value Default Value Access Units

295 Current Imbalance 0...100 0 R %

Voltage Unbalance
The SMC-50 controller provides a calculated Voltage Unbalance value. The
Voltage Unbalance calculation is equal to the largest deviation of the three
RMS phase voltage signals from the average RMS phase voltage divided by the
average. Note that the phase-to-neutral voltage is used in the calculation for
voltage unbalance.

Table 106 - Metering Parameters Associated with Voltage Unbalance

Parameter Number Name/Description Min/Max Value Default Value Access Units

296 Voltage Unbalance 0...100 0 R %

210 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Chapter 8

Optional HIM Operation

Overview The SMC-50 controller offers a variety of unique control options that provide
enhanced motor starting and stopping capabilities.

HIM Control Buttons The control buttons available with the Bulletin 20-HIM-A6 LCD modules are
compatible with the control options on the controller. Table 107, Table 108
and Table 109 detail the functionality of each control button. For additional
details on using the 20-HIM-A6, see the user manual, publication
20HIM-UM001.

IMPORTANT You must enable the logic mask port before you initiate control commands
except for Stop, which always initiate a Coast-to-Stop command. See Control
Enable for instructions.
The control terminals must be wired according to Figure 33or Figure 44.

ATTENTION: The Bulletin 20-HIM-A6 LCD module’s stop push button is not
intended to be used as an emergency stop. See applicable standards for
emergency stop requirements.

Table 107 - 20-HIM-A6 Control Button Functionality, Standard Control

Option Action Operation When Pressed

The green start button begins motor acceleration to full speed.

Soft Stop
Current Limit
Full Voltage The red stop button provides a coast stop, and/or reset a fault.
Linear Speed
This button brings up the Control Screen to enable the stop
option maneuver. See the HIM Control Screen section.
The green start button, when pressed, begins motor acceleration
to full speed.

Preset Slow Speed The red stop button, when pressed, provides a coast stop and/or
reset a fault.
This button displays the Control screen.
* Slow Speed cannot be operated via the HIM.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 211

Chapter 8 Optional HIM Operation

Table 108 - 20-HIM-A6 Control Button Functionality, Pump Control

Option Action Operation When Pressed

The green start button begins motor acceleration to full speed.

Pump Control The red stop button provides a coast stop, and/or reset a fault.

Displays the Control Screen with the Jog button. The jog button
initiates a pump stop maneuver.

Table 109 - 20-HIM-A6 Control Button Functionality, Braking Control

Option Action Operation When Pressed

Braking Control

The green start button begins motor acceleration to full speed.

Smart Motor Braking The red stop button provides a coast stop, and/or reset a fault.

Displays the Control Screen with the Jog button. The jog button
initiates a brake stop.

The green start button begins motor acceleration to full speed.

Accu-Stop(1) The red stop button provides a coast stop, and/or reset a fault.

Displays the Control Screen with the Jog button. The jog button
initiates braking to slow speed operation. The controller will
maintain slow speed operation as long as the jog button is pressed.

The green start button begins motor acceleration to full speed.

Slow Speed with The red stop button provides a coast stop, and/or resets a fault.
Braking
Displays the Control Screen with the Jog button. The jog button
initiates a brake stop from slow speed.
* Slow Speed cannot be operated via the HIM.
(1) Accu-Stop is not included as a parameter/function as the SMC-Flex was. However, Accu-Stop is accomplished with the Stop
option and the Slow Speed with Braking.

HIM Control Screen

The HIM Control Screen is typically used to directly control a drive. Press the

(controls) key to display the Control Screen.

IMPORTANT To navigate from the Control Screen to another HIM menu screen, you must
press the ESC soft key. This deactivates the Control Screen and displays the
previous screen.

212 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Optional HIM Operation Chapter 8

Figure 99 - HIM Control Screen

Control Screen Key Function Control Screen Navigation Number Keys

8
Allen-Bradley 7 9
Stopped AUTO
0 Amps F
REF
4 5 6
REMOVE
HIM PROPERTIES
MANUAL

EDIT 1 3
REV FWD
REF FBK REF 2
ESC JOG HELP
REF

The Control Screen Key Function map

corresponds with the Control Screen
Navigation/Number Keys on the HIM.

Table 110 - Control Screen Soft Key Functionality

Label Name Function

ESC Escape Reverts back to the previous screen.

Table 111 - Control Screen Navigation/Number Keys

Label Name Function

JOG 1 Stop Option for SMC-50 controller

REF ▼ 82 NA

Displays Rockwell Automation Drive’s Technical Support direct phone number,

HELP 3 website address, and email address.(1)

REV  4 NA

EDIT REF 5 NA

FWD  6 NA

Allows HIM removal without causing a fault if the HIM is not the last controlling
REMOVE HIM 7 device. The REMOVE HIM label is not available when the HIM has a manual control
of the host SMC-50 controller. In this case, a fault occurs if the HIM is removed.

REF ▲ 88 NA

MANUAL 9 NA

(1) Technical Support for drives does not apply to the SMC-50 controller. You can contact Technical Support for the SMC-50
controller at: 440-646-5800 (option 2 and option 4) or [email protected].

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 213

Chapter 8 Optional HIM Operation

CopyCat Function of the 20-HIM-A6

The SMC-50 controller supports the CopyCat function of the 20-HIM-A6.

For details on using the CopyCat function, see the 20-HIM-A6 user manual,
20HIM-UM001.

214 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Chapter 9

Communications

Overview The SMC-50 controller provides advanced communications capabilities that

allow you to start and stop it from multiple sources and provide diagnostic
information through the use of communication interfaces. The SMC-50
controller uses DPI as an internal method of communication bus; therefore, all
standard DPI communication interfaces that are used by other devices (for
example, PowerFlex® Drives) can be used in the SMC-50 controller. ScanPort™
devices are not supported by the SMC-50 controller.

Standard DPI communications cards are available for various protocols,

including DeviceNet, ControlNet, ModBus, and Profibus DP. Other
modules may be available in the future. For specific programming examples,
configuration, or programming information, see the user manual for the
communication module being used. Table 112 shows a list of available
modules.

Table 112 - Communication Card Selection by Protocol Type

Protocol Type Cat. No. User Manual

DeviceNet 20-COMM-D 20COMM-UM002
ControlNet 20-COMM-C 20COMM-UM003
Profibus 20-COMM-P 20COMM-UM006
RS-485 20-COMM-S 20COMM-UM005
InterBus 20-COMM-I 20COMM-UM007
EtherNet/IP 20-COMM-E 20COMM-UM010
Dual Port EtherNet/IP 20-COMM-ER 20COMM-UM015
RS485 HVAC 20-COMM-H 20COMM-UM009
ControlNet (Fiber) 20-COMM-Q 20COMM-UM003
CANopen 20-COMM-K 20COMM-UM012

Communication Ports The SMC-50 controller supports four DPI ports for communication. Port 1 is
for the front-mounted (bezel) Human Interface Module (HIM). Ports 2 and 3
are supported through the serial connection on the top of the device and are
typically used to interface with a door mounted HIM or a PC. Port 2 is the
default connection with port 3 available by installing a splitter on port 2. DPI
Port 4 is supported by connecting one of the communication cards listed in
Table 112 to the internal DPI communication card connection (SMC-50
controller hardware controller port 9).

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 215

Chapter 9 Communications

HIM Keypad and Displays The SMC-50 controller can be programmed with the optional Bulletin
20-HIM-A6 LCD display. Parameters are organized in a multi-level menu
structure and are divided into programming groups.

Connecting the HIM to the Controller

Figure 100 shows how to connect a HIM and DPI device to the SMC-50
controller. Table 113 provides a description of each port.

TIP The SMC-50 controller only supports the use of DPI communication modules
and DPI 20-HIM-A6 Modules.

See the control wiring diagram that enables start-stop control from a HIM.

Figure 100 - SMC-50 controller with a HIM

Front View
HIM Bezel Port

Top View

DPI Port 2
(Port 2 and 3 if you use a splitter)

Table 113 - Description of Ports

DPI Port Number Source

1 Front-Mounted HIM (HIM Bezel)
2 Remote DPI (top of SMC-50 controller)
3 Remote DPI (top of SMC-50 controller with splitter)
4(1) 20-COMM-x Module
(1) When using a 20-COMM-x network communication module, it must physically be located in control module hardware port 9.
However, its DPI Port Number assignment is 4. The cable connection for the DPI Port 4 is located below the HIM bezel (see
Figure 100).

216 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Communications Chapter 9

Control Enable Logic Mask, Parameter 148, lets you configure whether a communication
device (HIM or network connection) can perform motor control commands
such as starting. Each communication port (1 through 4) can be enabled (bit=
1) or disabled (bit = 0) as required. When a given device is enabled through the
logic mask that device is allowed to execute control commands. In addition,
disconnecting any device with the logic mask enabled will result in an Exp
Removed (X026)(1) communication fault. You can disconnect adevice that is
disabled through the logic mask without causing a fault(2)

IMPORTANT Stop commands override all start commands and can be initiated from the
hardwired inputs or any DPI port regardless of the logic mask.

Logic Mask Enable/Disable using a HIM

To enable motor control using a connected HIM, follow the procedure below
with the connected HIM’s programming keys.

The Bulletin 20-HIM-A6 provides start and stop control of the SMC-50
controller. However, the Logic Mask factory default settings disable control
commands other than Stop through the controller’s DPI ports 1, 2, 3, or 4.

To enable motor control from either of the four ports using a connected 20-
HIM-A6, the following steps must be performed from the SMC-50 controller
standard power-up screen.

1. Press the key. Use the right or left arrow key on the keypad to
display the <00> DEV PARAM folder screen.
2. Select/highlight the File-Group.

5
3. Press the (enter) key. The Port 00 Param File-Group screen
appears.

TIP Ensure the Advanced Access Level is selected, located at the bottom of the
DEV PARAM screen. For additional configuration details, see Parameter
Access Level Modification Using the HIM on page 158.

(1) When a given device is disabled through the logic mask that device cannot execute control commands, but can still be used for
configuration and monitoring. X = DPI port number of the device causing the Fault.
(2) If a 20-HIM-A6 is enabled for control via the Logic Mask, it can still be removed using the HIM control screen. See Chapter 8.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 217

Chapter 9 Communications

5
4. Press the to select FILE Communications, then press .
The GROUP Comm Masks and Data Links screen appears.

Allen-Bradley
Stopped AUTO
0 Amps F
Port 00 Param File-Group Allen-Bradley
FILE MonitoringPROPERTIES
FILE Set Up Stopped AUTO
FILE Motor Protection 0 Amps F
FILE Communications
FILE Utility Port 00 Param File-Group
FILE PROPERTIES
Communications
ESC GROUP Comm Masks
GROUP Data Links

ESC

5. With Comm Mask selected/highlighted, press the 5 key. The

GROUP Comm Masks screen appears with the associated Logic Mask
Action selected.

5
6. Select/highlight Logic Mask, then press the key. The Edit Logic
Mask screen with bit field appears.

Allen-Bradley
Stopped AUTO
0 Amps F
Edit Logic Mask
PROPERTIES
x000 0000 0000 0000
Bit 02
ESC ENTER

7. Press the EDIT key to modify the settings, then use the left or right
5
arrow to select the desired bit, 1 through 4, then press the key.

To enable motor control, press 1 or press 0 to disable motor

control from the selected DPI port, then press EDIT.

218 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Communications Chapter 9

Table 114 - Logic Mask and Logic Mask Active Parameter Specifications

Parameter
Bit Number DPI Assignment Access Units [default]
Number Name
0 - NA Port 0 - NA Bit = 0 [disabled]
148 Logic Mask R/W
1 Port 1 Bit = 1 enabled
2 Port 2
3 Bit = 0 [disabled]
Port 3
149 Logic Mask Act 4 R Bit = 1 enabled
Port 4
5 - 15 NA [Follows Logic Mask]
Port 5 - 15 NA

IMPORTANT • The Logic Mask must be set to 0 or the "REMOVE HIM" key is depressed
via the HIM controller screen (see Chapter 8) before you disconnect the
HIM from the SMC-50 controller. If not, the unit will fault on a “Exp.
Removed”.
• The Logic Mask Active, Parameter 149, is a read-only parameter that
shows the logic mask actually in use at any given time. It typically
follows the Logic Mask, Parameter 148, except in some application
environments where network communication is in use.

Loss of Communication with An "Exp. Removed" fault indicates that a device was improperly removed.
There is a Fault code determined by port number.
DPI Device
DPI provides a separate Exp. fault for each port. This fault can be generated
directly by the peripheral and is separate from the Exp. Removed fault (device
specific).

Default Input/Output The default configuration for I/O communication is 4 bytes in and 4 bytes out
(TX = 4 bytes, RX = 4 bytes). The total size may very when used with a
Communication communication card. The default configuration is arranged according to the
Configuration following table.

Table 115 - Default Configuration

Word Produced Data (Status) Consumed Data (Control)

0 Logic Status Logic Command
1 Feedback (1) Reference(2)
(1) The feedback word is always Ave Current.
(2) The reference word is not used with the SMC-50 controller, however the space must be reserved.

TIP The total data size produced or consumed may vary, depending on the
communication card being used. For more information, see the user manual
of the specific communication card being used with the SMC-50 controller.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 219

Chapter 9 Communications

Variable Input/Output Configuration

The SMC-50 controller supports 32-bit Data Links. Therefore, you can
configure the device to return additional information. The I/O message size
depends on how many DataLinks are enabled. The following table summarizes
the I/O data sizes.

Table 116 - I/O Data Sizes

Logic Status/Command Reference/FeedBack DataLinks

Rx Size Tx Size (16-bit) (16-bit) A B C D
4 4 x x
12 12 x x x
20 20 x x x x
28 28 x x x x x
36 36 x x x x x x

To configure DataLinks, see Configuring DataLink™ on page 222.

SMC-50 Controller—Bit Product Functional (Logic) Status, Parameter 43, is used to provide SMC-50
controller functional (logic) status to communication devices. Table 117
Identification details Parameter 43, which is a read-only parameter.

Table 117 - Logic Status

Bit Description
Status/Function
Number 1 0
0 Enabled/Ready Control Power Applied Control Power NOT applied
Power applied to motor (gating SCRs or
1 Running Power NOT applied to motor
bypass closed)
2 Phasing ABC phasing CBA phasing
3 Phasing Active Three-phase is valid No valid three-phase detected
Performing a start maneuver (slow
4 Starting (Accel) Not performing a start maneuver
speed not included)
Performing a stop maneuver (coast to
5 Stopping (Decel) Not performing a stop maneuver
stop not included)
6 Alarm Alarm present No alarm present
Fault condition exists and has not been
7 Fault No fault condition
cleared
Full voltage applied (bypass or full SCR
8 At Speed No full voltage applied
conduction)
9 Start/Isolation Start/Isolation contactor enabled Start/Isolation contactor disabled
10 Bypass Bypass contactor enabled Bypass contactor disabled
11 Ready Ready to Run Control Inhibit Active (do not run)
12-13 Reserved Always 0
14 Input #1 Control Module Input #1 Status
15 Input #2 Control Module Input #2 Status

220 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Communications Chapter 9

Table 118 - Logic Command Word (Control)

Bit Description
Control
Number 1 0
0 Stop Coast/Inhibit No action
1 Start Start No action
2 Stop Option Stop/Maneuver No action
3 Clear Fault Clear fault No action
4 Slow Speed 1 Run at slow speed 1 No action
5 Emergency Run Enable emergency run mode Disable emergency run mode
6 Motor Winding Heater Enable motor winding heater Disable motor winding heater
7 Slow Speed 2 Run at slow speed 2 No action
8-10 Reserved These bits must always be set to 0
11 Aux Enable Use the Network #1 - #4 bits Ignore the Network #1 - #4 bits
Closes any output configured for Opens any output configured for
12 Network #1 Network #1 Network #1
13 Network #2 Closes any output configured for Opens any output configured for
Network #2 Network #2
Closes any output configured for Opens any output configured for
14 Network #3 Network #3 Network #3
Closes any output configured for Opens any output configured for
15 Network #4 Network #4 Network #4

Reference/Feedback The SMC-50 controller does not offer the analog Reference feature. The
analog Feedback feature is supported and provides Current Average,
Parameter 5, automatically as the feedback word.

Parameter Information A complete listing of the SMC-50 parameters is located in Appendix B.

Scale Factors for PLC The parameter values stored and produced by the SMC-50 through
communication are unscaled numbers. When reading or writing values from a
Communication PLC image table, it is important to apply the proper scaling factor, which is
based on the number of decimal places.

Read Example

Power Factor, Parameter 17—The stored value is 85. Because this value has
two decimal places, the value should be divided by 100. The correctly read
value is 0.85.

Write Example

Motor FLC, Parameter 78—The example value, which is to be written to the

SMC-50 controller, is 75 A. Because this value has one decimal place, the value
should be multiplied by 10. The correctly written value is 750.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 221

Chapter 9 Communications

Display Text Unit Equivalents Some parameters have text descriptions when viewed from a HIM or through a
communication software program such as RSNetworx. When receiving or
sending information from a PLC each text description has a numerical
equivalent. The table below shows an example of Meter Reset, Parameter 16,
and the appropriate relationship between the text descriptor and the
equivalent value. This relationship is identical for other similar parameters
located in Appendix B.

Table 119 - Meter Reset Parameter Example

Text Description Numerical Equivalent

Ready 0
Elapsed Time 1
Energy 2
Time to PM 3
Starts to PM 4

Configuring DataLink™ DataLink is supported in the SMC-50 controller. DataLink is a mechanism

that most drives use to transfer data to and from the controller without using
an explicit message. The SMC-50 controller supports a 32-bit DataLink,
allowing you to configure the device to return up to eight additional pieces of
information without the need for an explicit message.

Criteria for Using DataLink

• Each set of DataLink parameters in an SMC-50 can be used by only one
adapter. If more than one adapter is connected, multiple adapters must
not try to use the same DataLink.
• Parameter settings (contents) in the SMC-50 controller determine the
data passed through the DataLink mechanism.
• When DataLink is used to change a value in the SMC-50 controller, the
value is not written to the Non-Volatile Storage (NVS). However, if the
SMC-50 controller is powered down, the current value is written to
NVS.

To configure DataLink, you must use Parameters 153…168 of the SMC-50

controller. See Table 120 for a detailed listing of these parameters. For
additional information about DataLink, see the communication interface’s
user manual.

222 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Communications Chapter 9

Table 120 - Parameter 153 - 168 DataLinks Detail

Parameter Number Description Min/Max [Default] Access Units

153 A1 —
154 A2 —
155 B1 —
156 B2 —
Data In
157 C1 —
158 C2 —
159 D1 —
160 D2 —
[0]-Max Parameter Number(1) R/W
161 A1 —
162 A2 —
163 B1 —
164 B2 —
Data Out
165 C1 —
166 C2 —
167 D1 —
168 D2 —
(1) The data transferred via the DataLink function is the setting (content(s)) of the parameter number as entered by you here.

Updating Firmware You can obtain the latest version of firmware and instructions for the SMC-50
controller can be obtained from http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Motor-
Control/LV-Soft-Starters/SMC-50#resources.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 223

Chapter 9 Communications

Notes:

224 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Chapter 10

Diagnostics

Overview This chapter describes the fault diagnostics of the SMC-50 controller and the
conditions that cause various faults to occur.

Protection Programming Many of the protective features available with the SMC-50 controller can be
enabled and adjusted through the programming parameters provided. For
further details on programming, see Motor Protection on page 179.

Diagnostic LEDs The SMC-50 controller multi-color Diagnostic LED Status Indicator and
HOLD TO TEST, PUSH TO RESET button are located below the HIM
bezel port. The Status LED indicates the status and fault conditions of the
SMC-50 controller.

Table 121 - Corresponding LED Color and Fault Conditions

Status LED Color Device Mode SMC-50 Controller Status

Green Running Running without an alarm
Green/Amber Running Running with an alarm
Green Flashing Ready Ready (no inhibit and no fault) without an alarm
Amber/Flashing Ready Ready (no inhibit and no fault) with tuning enabled on the next start
Amber Ready Ready with alarm (no tuning enabled)
Red/Amber Inhibit Inhibited; cannot start due to a Stop command
Red Faulted A non-resettable fault has occurred
Red/Flashing Faulted A resettable fault has occurred
Red/Green Download Firmware is being downloaded

The HOLD TO TEST, PUSH TO RESET button lets you reset an alarm/
fault, test for a fault condition, and initiate the tuning mode.

Table 122 - Function Initiation of the HOLD TO TEST, PUSH TO RESET Button

Function Time Required to Press Button

Fault Reset Momentary (less than 2 seconds)
Test Fault Greater than 3 seconds, but less than 10 seconds
Initiate Tuning Mode Greater than 10 seconds (motor must be stopped)

Using the Controller Status LED and Parameter Configuration Module (150-SM6) LEDs

When you install a 150-SM6 module in one of the three control module ports
(7, 8, or 9) of the SMC-50 controller, it provides additional LED diagnostic
information beyond that of the Status LED.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 225

Chapter 10 Diagnostics

The 150-SM6 has four diagnostic/status LEDs to display an LED code for
each fault/alarm. When the SMC-50 controller’s Status LED indicates the
control module has faulted, the 150-SM6 displays a specific fault code. If the
unit is not faulted but in an alarm condition, the 150-SM6 displays the alarm
code. If the unit is neither faulted or in an alarm condition, all 150-SM6 LEDs
do not illuminate.

The 150-SM6 > (<) LED indicates whether the fault/alarm is an SMC-50
controller device fault/alarm or a motor fault/alarm. The on/off status of the
other three LEDs indicate the actual fault/alarm codes.

Depending on which SMC-50 controller port the 150-SM6 is installed into,

the position of the LEDs (for example, >, III, II, and I versus I, II, III, and <)
change. Table 123 displays the LED order when the 150-SM6 is installed in
port 7. When the 150-SM6 is installed in port 8 or 9, the order is reversed, but
the LED diagnostic code is the same.

Table 123 - LED Order When 150-SM6 is Installed in Port 7 of the SMC-50 controller

LED On/Off State

LED Error Code > III II I
0 Off Off Off
1 Off Off On
2 Off On Off
Red = SMC
3 Off On On
Yellow = Motor
4 Off = No Fault or Alarm On Off Off
5 On Off On
6 On On Off
7 On On On

The displayed LED error code is either a fault or an alarm code depending on
the cause. For example, if the LED code is 1, Line Loss A is either a fault or an
alarm. If you want a more detailed display of the error code source, a human
interface module (HIM) or configuration software is recommended.

Table 124 provides a list of faults with LED fault/alarm codes for the 150-SM6
Parameter Configuration Module.

226 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Diagnostics Chapter 10

Table 124 - LED Error Code with Respective Fault/Alarm Source

Referenced HIM/ Referenced HIM/

LED Error Fault/Alarm LED Error Fault/Alarm
Configuration Configuration
Code Source Code Source
Software Code(1) Software Code(1)
Red = SMC
A 1 HAL ID 33
Line Loss B 2 NVS Error 34
C 3 V24 Recovery 35
1
A 4 5 V24 Loss 36
Shorted SCR B 5 V Control Loss 37
C 6 RTC Battery Low 69
A 7 System Faults 100-199
2 Open Gate B 8 1 38
C 9 Terminal Block 2 39
SCR Overtemp 10 6 Input 3 40
3
Pwr Pole PTC 60 4 41
A 30 Test Fault 62
B 31 A 11
4 CT Loss
7 Open Bypass B 12
C 32
C 13
Yellow = Motor
No Load 14 4 Overload 21
A 15 5 Stall 24
2
Open Load B 16 6 Phase Reversal 25
C 17
7 Current Imbalance 42
3 Volt Imbalance 18
(1) The Fault/Alarm code, available from a HIM or configuration software, provides more detailed information concerning the source of the fault/
alarm. Fault and Alarm codes for the same event (for example, Line Loss) are the same.

Fault Display (20-HIM-A6) When you use the SMC-50 controller with a 20-HIM-A6, the HIM displays
the fault information.

Figure 101 - Fault Display

Allen-Bradley
Faulted AUTO
0 Amps
F A U L T E D
Fault Code PROPERTIES
9026
Exp Removed
Elapsed Time 0 : 00 : 16

ESC CLR

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 227

Chapter 10 Diagnostics

IMPORTANT Resetting a fault does not correct the cause of the fault condition. You must
take corrective action before you reset the fault.
The fault display remains active as long as control power is applied. If you
cycle control power, the fault is cleared, the controller re-initializes, and the
display shows a status of Stopped unless the Fault condition still exists.
You can press Esc to get to another programming/diagnostic list, but the
SMC-50 controller is still in a faulted state.

Clear Fault You can clear a fault using any of the following methods:
• Program the SMC-50 to automatically clear a fault using Restart Enable,
Parameter 135 or 264.
• Press the SMC-50 controller HOLD TO TEST, PUSH TO RESET
button.
• Connect a N.O. push button to Option Input #1 (terminal 11) or # 2
(terminal 10). Option Input #1 or #2 must be programmed for Clear
Fault using Parameter 56 or 57.

TIP This can also be done with an Input from a 150-SM4 Option I/O Module.

• Cycle the control power to the SMC-50.

IMPORTANT You cannot reset an overload fault until the value of the Motor Thermal
Usage, Parameter 18, is below the value programmed in OL Reset,
Parameter 80. See Enabling Option Module Functional Faults and Alarm on
page 125 for further details.

Fault and Alarm Buffer - The SMC-50 stores the five most recent Fault and Alarm codes (Fault
Parameter List 138 to 142, Alarm Parameter List 143 to 147) in parameter
Parameter List memory from newest to oldest.

Accessing the Fault and Alarm Parameters

Using the 20-HIM-A6, the fault and alarm parameter lists can be displayed in
the Motor Protection File Group or Linear List parameter number search
(Fault Parameter List 138 to 142, Alarm Parameter List 143 to 147). To use the
File-Group method, perform the following steps:

1. From the SMC-50 controller standard power up screen, press the

Folders keypad key at the lower left of the display.

228 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Diagnostics Chapter 10

TIP Make sure that the Advanced access level (located at the bottom of the
<00> DEV PARAM screen) is selected before pressing ENTER. See Parameter
Access Level Modification Using the HIM on page 158 for additional details.

2. From the <00> DEV PARAM folder screen select File-Group, then
press ENTER (number 5 from the keypad). The Port 00 Param File
Group screen appears.
3. Use the down arrow key to select (highlight) FILE Motor Protection,
then press ENTER (number 5 from the keypad).

Allen-Bradley
Stopped AUTO
0 Amps F
Port 00 Param File-Group
FILE PROPERTIES
Motor Protection
FILE Set Up
FILE Motor Protection
FILE Communications
FILE Utility
ESC

4. Use the down arrow key to select GROUP History, then press ENTER
(number from the keypad).

Allen-Bradley
Stopped AUTO
0 Amps F
Port 00 Param File-Group
FILE PROPERTIES
Motor Protection
GROUP Maintenance
GROUP History
GROUP Restart
GROUP Locked Rotor

ESC

5. Use the arrow keys on the keypad to navigate to the Fault or Alarm
number to review, then press ENTER (number 5 from the keypad).

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 229

Chapter 10 Diagnostics

Allen-Bradley
Stopped AUTO
0 Amps F
Port 00 Param File-Group
FILE PROPERTIES
Motor Protection
GROUP History
Fault 4
Fault 5
Alarm 1
ESC ENTER

Allen-Bradley
Stopped AUTO
0 Amps
Port 00 Dev Param 138
Fault 1 PROPERTIES
61

ESC PAR #

TIP In step 5, Fault 61 is displayed. For Fault/Alarm code data, see Table 126 on
page 233.

Accessing the Fault and Alarm Buffers

In addition to the SMC-50 controller storing the most recent Alarm and Fault
codes as parameters, the date and time the Fault or Alarm occurred is stored in
the Fault Buffer (last five faults) and Alarm Buffer (last 100 alarms). To access
Fault buffers and Alarm Buffers using the 20-HIM-A6, you must access the
Diagnostic folder. To do so, perform the following steps.

1. From the SMC-50 controller standard power up screen, press the

Folders key at the lower left of the display.
2. Using the right or left arrow key, display the DIAGNOSTIC folder.
3. Using the up or down arrow key, select either Faults or Alarms, then
press ENTER. In this example, Faults is used.

Allen-Bradley
Stopped AUTO
0 Amps F

DIAGNOSTIC
PROPERTIES
Faults
Alarms
00
Reset Device
ESC Device Version

230 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Diagnostics Chapter 10

The HIM displays the five most recent Fault codes if Faults was selected.
The HIM displays the 100 most recent Alarm codes with an abbreviated
description if Alarm codes were selected. The most recent code is listed
as 01 with the second most recent code as 02, and so on.

Allen-Bradley
Stopped AUTO
0 Amps F
P o rt 00 Faults
01 PROPERTIES
61 IO Config
02 7028 Exp
03 9026 Exp Removed
04 0 None
ESC TOP END CLR ENTER

4. Select the Fault or Alarm in question, then press ENTER. The date and
time that the Fault or Alarm occurred is displayed.

Allen-Bradley
Stopped AUTO
0 Amps F
PFault
o rt 0001 Time StampFaults
01 61 IO Config PROPERTIES
02 7028 Exp
032011/05/25 11 : 43 19
9026 Exp Removed
04 0 None
ESC

TIP The Fault/Alarm buffers are available using Connected Components

Workbench software via the Explore and Device properties drop-down
menu. Ensure 0-SMC-50 controller is selected from the list of Devices.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 231

Chapter 10 Diagnostics

Fault Codes

The following table provides a complete cross-reference of the available fault

codes and corresponding fault descriptions.

Table 125 - Fault/Alarm Code Cross-Reference

DPI/HIM/COMM

DPI/HIM/COMM
Category(2)

Category(2)
Exp 7, 8, 9

Exp 7, 8, 9
LED Code

LED Code
Code

Code
Host

Host
Fault/Alarm Name Fault/Alarm Name

A 1 — — Under Power Real 43 — M X — —

Line Loss B 2 1 D X — — Over Power Real 44 — M X — —
C 3 — — Un Power Reac + 45 — M — — —
A 4 — — Ov Power Reac + 46 — M — — —
Shorted SCR B 5 1 D X — — Und Power App 47 — M — — —
C 6 — — Ov Power App 48 — M — — —
A 7 — — Frequency 49 — M X — —
Open Gate B 8 2 D X — — PM Hours 50 — M X — —
C 9 — — PM Starts 51 — M X — —
SCR Overtemp 10 3 D X — — A 52 — M X — —
A 11 — — Power Quality B 53 — M X — —
Open Bypass B 12 2 D X — — C 54 — M X — —
C 13 — — Power Quality THD V 55 — M X — —
No Load 14 2 M X — — Power Quality THD I 56 — M X — —
A 15 — — Config Change 57 — D X — —
Open Load B 16 2 M X — — Ground Fault 58 — M — — X
C 17 — — Motor PTC 59 — M — — X
Voltage Unbal 18 3 M X — — Power Pole PTC 60 3 D X — —
Overvoltage 19 — M X — — I/O Config 61 — D X — —
Undervoltage 20 — M X — —
Test Fault 62 6 D X —
Overload 21 4 M X — —
Underload 22 — M X — — Und PF Lag 63 — M — — —
Jam 23 — M X — — Und PF Lead 64 — M X — —
Stall 24 5 M X — — Ovr PF Lag 65 — M X — —
Phase Reversal 25 6 M X — — Ovr PF Lead 66 — M X — —
Exp Removed 26 — D — X X –MVAR Over 67 — M X — —
Exp Incompat 27 — D — — X –MVAR Under 68 — M X — —
Expansion 28 — D — X X RTC Battery Low 69 5 D X — —
Excess Starts 29 — M X — — Locked Rotor 70 — M X — —
A 30 — — Start(3) 71 — — — — —
CT Loss B 31 4 D X — — Slow Speed(3) 72 — — — — —
C 32 — — Stop Option(3) 73 — — — — —
(3)
HAL ID 33 5 D X — — Coast 74 — — — — —
NVS Error 34 5 D — — — Clear Fault(3) 75 — — — — —
V24 Recovery 35 5 D X — — Fault (3) 76 — — — — —
(3)
V24 Loss 36 5 D X — — Param Change 77 — — — — —
VControl Loss 37 5 D X — — Reserved 78-99 — — — — —

232 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Diagnostics Chapter 10

DPI/HIM/COMM

DPI/HIM/COMM
Category(2)

Category(2)
Exp 7, 8, 9

Exp 7, 8, 9
LED Code

LED Code
Code

Code
Host

Host
Fault/Alarm Name Fault/Alarm Name

1 38 X — X
System Faults 100-199 5 D X — —
(1) 2 39 X — X
TB Input 6 D
3 40 — — X
4 41 — — X
Current Imbal 42 7 M X — —
(1) TB = Terminal Block Input
(2) For Category, M= Motor; D=Device
(3) Codes 71...77 are Event codes.

Table 126 provides an overview of the Fault and Alarm codes with Time Delay
and Restart options plus a basic description of what causes each Fault or Alarm
to occur.

TIP Most Faults and Alarms are individually bit enabled and disabled (F/A Bit
Enab) and can have a user configurable delay time to help avoid nuisance
trips (Time Delay Aval). In addition, many have the ability to automatically
restart once the condition is cleared (Restart En). See Chapter 5 for
additional information on Faults and Alarms.

Table 126 - Linear Listing—Fault and Alarm Code Overview

Time Delay Avail.

Restart Enable
F/A Bit Enable
F/A Code

Fault/Alarm Description
Code Name F/A= Fault and Alarm, A= Alarm, F= Fault

A 1
Line Loss B 2 N Y Y F/A Loss of line power for Phase A, B, or C
C 3
A 4 A During prestart checks (motor
not running), the SMC-50 NOTE: In Wye configurations, a single Phase A, B, or
Shorted SCR B 5 N N NA stopped
controller monitors for current flow Cstarted.
shorted SCR is not detected until the unit is
C 6 This fault is always enabled.
in each individual phase.
A 7
F/A Indicates that an abnormal condition that causes faulty firing (for example, open SCR
Open Gate B 8 N Y Y Gate) has been sensed during the starting sequence.
C 9
NA Foperation
The SMC-50 controller protects the SCRs from damage caused by overtemperature
SCR Overtemp 10 N N using an internally configured I2t. NOTE: This fault is always enabled.
A 11 N N NA F Open Bypass Phase A
Device senses that the bypass contactor did not
Open Bypass B 12 N N NA F Open Bypass Phase B close on the respective phase.
C 13 N N NA F Open Bypass Phase C
Y F/A The SMC-50 controller can determine if a load connection exists (total load lost or all
No Load 14 N Y load leads lost) and a No Load Fault and/or Alarm can be indicated.
A 15 F/A An Open Load A
Fault/Alarm indicates that the Phase X load lead
Open Load B 16 N Y Y F/A An Open Load B connection is OFF/Open.
C 17 F/A An Open Load C
Y F/A Indicates that when the calculated unbalance level is greater than the user-defined
Voltage Unbalance 18 Y Y Fault and/or Alarm level. See Chapter 4 for calculated value details.
Y F/A Indicates that if the average line voltage is greater than the user-defined Fault and/or
Overvoltage 19 Y Y Alarm level.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 233

Chapter 10 Diagnostics

Time Delay Avail.

Restart Enable
F/A Bit Enable
F/A Code
Fault/Alarm Description
Code Name F/A= Fault and Alarm, A= Alarm, F= Fault

F/A Indicates that if the average line voltage is less than the user-defined Fault and/or
Undervoltage 20 Y Y Y Alarm level.
F/A Enabled in the Motor Protection Group by programming the: Overload Class, Overload
Overload 21 Y(1) Y Y Reset, Motor FLC, and Service Factor.
F/A Motor operation will halt (Fault only) if the value of the motor’s average RMS current
Underload 22 Y Y Y is less than the user-defined value.
F/A Indicates that the motor current increases above the user-defined Fault and or Alarm
Jam 23 Y Y Y level while the motor is running at speed. This F/A condition is not active during starting
or stopping.
F/A Condition exists and a Fault/Alarm is generated if the SMC-50 controller senses that
Stall 24 Y Y Y the motor is NOT Up-to-Speed (UTS) at the end of the programmed starting ramp time
plus the time programmed in the Stall Delay time.
F/A Fault/Alarm is indicated when the incoming power to the SMC-50 controller is in any
Phase Reversal 25 N Y Y sequence other than ABC.
F Removing an expansion module (device) (for example, a 150-SM4) from a SMC-50
controller will result in a x026 fault, where "x" is the SMC-50 controller port number (7, 8,
or 9) the expansion module was installed. DPI devices (for example, 20-HIM-A6 or 20-
Exp Removed 26 N N NA COMM-X) will only generate this fault if its associated bit in Logix Mask parameter is set.
NOTE: If an expansion module (device) (for example, a 150-SM4 is removed from a SMC-
50 controller), the message "Device Conflicts Port xy Not Found" is displayed on the HIM or
PC software) when power returns.
F Inserting an expansion module or DPI device into an incompatible controller port
number or inserting an expansion module into a controller with incompatible version of
Exp Incompat 27 N N NA firmware results in this Fault. The port number of the offending device is included as the
first digit of this Fault code.
F General Fault that can be generated by an expansion or peripheral device. The port
Expansion 28 N N NA number of the offending device is included as the first digit of this Fault code.
F/A Starts per Hour is the maximum number of starts (user configured) within a sliding
Starts per Hour 29 N Y Y one hour window. Once the number of starts per hour is reached, any additional starts will
cause a Fault/Alarm Code 29.
A 30 F CT Loss A (Phase A)
fault occurs when current feedback is invalid. This
CT Loss B 31 N N NA F CT Loss B (Phase B) Fault is always enabled.
C 32 F CT Loss B (Phase B)
F HAL ID Fault is generated if the controller determines that an incorrect (incompatible)
HAL ID 33 N N NA power pole is installed. This Fault is always enabled.
F Indicates an error in the SMC-50 controller’s nonvolatile memory storage. Clearing the
NVS Error 34 N N NA Fault requires a change to the parameter or loading defaults (preferred). It is not cleared
by cycling power. This Fault is always enabled.
Future Use 35 Future use.
F Indicates that the voltage level of the SMC-50 controller’s internal 24V DC supply which
V24 Loss 36 N N NA provides power to the controller logic and on-board 24V DC I/O has fallen outside of the
allowable range. This Fault is always enabled.
F Indicates that the control voltage level of the user-applied control voltage has fallen
VControl Loss 37 N N NA outside the allowable upper or lower limit. This Fault is always enabled.
1 38
2 39
NA F(N.O.
Occurs when the Control Input is configured to generate a Fault and the input condition
TB Input N N
3 40 or N.C.) is satisfied.
4 41
F/A Exists when the calculated imbalance level is equal to or greater than the user-
Current Imbal 42 Y Y Y defined Fault/Alarm level. See Chapter 5 for calculated value details.
Under Power Real 43 Y Y Y falls below the user-defined fault/alarm level.
F/A Occurs when the Real Power:
Over Power Real 44 Y Y Y rises above the user-defined fault/alarm level.
Un Power Reac + 45 Y Y Y F/A Occurs when the Reactive Power falls below the user-defined fault/alarm level.
Ov Power Reac + 46 Y Y Y +: rises above the user-defined fault/alarm level.

234 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Diagnostics Chapter 10

Time Delay Avail.

Restart Enable
F/A Bit Enable
F/A Code
Fault/Alarm Description
Code Name F/A= Fault and Alarm, A= Alarm, F= Fault

Under Power App 47 Y Y Y F/A Occurs when the Apparent falls below the user-defined fault/alarm level.
Over Power App 48 Y Y Y Power+: rises above the user-defined fault/alarm level.
F/A Occurs if the line frequency goes above or below the user-defined frequency high or
Frequency 49 Y Y Y frequency low Fault/Alarm level.
F/A User-defined value which sets the number of elapsed hours (actual operating hours of
PM Hours 50 N Y Y the motor) before a fault/alarm is signaled indicating that preventive maintenance should
be performed.
F/A User-defined value which sets the number of starts before a fault/alarm is signaled
PM Starts 51 N Y Y indicating that preventive maintenance should be performed.
A 52 F/A Fault condition which indicates A Phase SCR.
Power Quality B 53 N Y Y that the starter is not properly firing B Phase SCR.
C 54 its: C Phase SCR.
Power Quality THD V 55 Y Y Y F/A Indicates a high, voltage based total harmonic distortion level.
Power Quality THD I 56 Y Y Y F/A Indicates a high, current based total harmonic distortion level.
Config Change 57 N Y Y F/A Indicates any change to the SMC-50 controller parameter configuration.
F/A Indicates the value of Ground Fault Current goes above the user-defined fault/alarm
level.
Ground Fault 58 Y Y Y
NOTE: A 150-SM2 Ground Fault PTC Feedback Module and 825-CBCT Core Balanced
Ground Fault Sensor are required to configure this Fault/Alarm.
F/A Indicates the embedded motor PTC sensing device is tripped/closed due to a motor
Motor PTC 59 N Y Y overtemperature condition. NOTE: A 150-SM2 Ground Fault PTC Feedback Module is
required to configure this Fault/Alarm.
F Built-in Power Pole PTC Temperature Sensor is used to measure power pole
Power Pole PTC 60 N N NA temperature. A fault occurs when the temperature rises above a predetermined level. This
fault is always enabled.
F Occurs when any input is programmed as a start or slow speed and no input is
configured as a coast or stop. The fault occurs when the start or maneuver is attempted
(the motor will not start). This fault is also generated when the input configuration
I/O Config 61 N N NA changes from one that cannot start the motor to one that can. It will also be generated
when a parameter is changed from an input that can stop the motor to one that cannot.
This fault is always enabled.
F Occurs when the Push-to-Reset, Hold-to-Test push button on the SMC-50 controller
Test Fault 62 N N NA
is pushed for ≥ 3 seconds but < 10 seconds.
Under PF Lag 63 Y Y Y F/A Occurs when the lagging Power Factor goes below the user-defined fault/alarm level.
Under PF Lead 64 Y Y Y F/A Occurs when the leading Power Factor goes below the user-defined fault/alarm level.
Over PF Lag 65 Y Y Y F/A Occurs when the lagging Power Factor goes above the user-defined fault/alarm level.
Over PF Lead 66 Y Y Y F/A Occurs when the leading Power Factor goes above the user-defined fault/alarm level.
-MVAR Over 67 Y Y Y F/A Occurs when the magnitude of the Reactive Power rises above the user-defined level.
-MVAR Under 68 Y Y Y F/A Occurs when the magnitude of the Reactive Power falls below the user-defined level.
A Occurs when the SMC-50 controller battery that maintains the value of the Real Time
RTC Battery Low 69 N N NA Clock (RTC) is low and needs to be replaced immediately. Alarm is always enabled.
F/A Occurs when the motor current increases above the user-defined fault/alarm level
Locked Rotor 70 Y Y Y while the motor is in any running mode. This F/A condition is not active during starting or
stopping.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 235

Chapter 10 Diagnostics

Time Delay Avail.

Restart Enable
F/A Bit Enable
F/A Code
Fault/Alarm Description
Code Name F/A= Fault and Alarm, A= Alarm, F= Fault

Start 71 NA NA NA Start Event tracking.

Slow Speed 72 NA NA NA Slow Speed Event tracking.
Stop Option 73 NA NA NA Stop Option Event tracking.
This is an Event Code and is stored in
Coast 74 NA NA NA the Alarm Buffer for: Coast Event tracking.
Clear Fault 75 NA NA NA Clear Fault Event tracking.
Fault 76 NA NA NA Fault Event tracking.
Parm Change 77 NA NA NA Parameter Change Event tracking.
Reserved 78…99 N N N Future Use.
A general Fault/Alarm typically associated with the SMC-50 controller hardware (for
System Faults 100…199 N N NA example, system Watchdog Time failure).
(1) Overload is inherently a time-based fault.

Auxiliary Relay Output Fault You can program Auxiliary Relay Output contacts for Fault or Alarm, N.O., or
N.C. indication. You can also configure an ON or OFF Delay Time. Basic
or Alarm Indication parameter setup (without N.C. or timed functions) is in the Setup / I/O
Parameter Group. Full configuration is available from the Setup / I/O
Parameter Group.

236 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Chapter 11

Troubleshooting

Introduction For safety of maintenance personnel and others who might be exposed to
electrical hazards associated with maintenance activities, follow the local safety
related work practices (for example, NFPA 70E, Part II in the United States).
Maintenance personnel must be trained in the safety practices, procedures, and
requirements that pertain to their respective job assignments.

SHOCK HAZARD: Hazardous voltage is present in the motor circuit even when
the SMC-50 controller is off. To avoid shock hazard, disconnect main power
before working on the controller, motor, and control devices (for example, Start-
Stop push buttons). Procedures that require parts of the equipment to be
energized during troubleshooting, testing, etc., must be performed by properly
qualified personnel using appropriate local safety work practices and
precautionary measures.

ATTENTION: Disconnect the controller from the motor before measuring

insulation resistance (IR) of the motor windings. Voltages used for insulation
resistance testing can cause SCR failure. Do not make any measurements on
the controller with an IR tester (megger).

The flowchart in Figure 102 aids in quick troubleshooting.

TIP The time it takes for the motor to come up to speed may differ from the time
programmed. This depends upon the motor and load characteristics.

TIP Depending upon the application, the braking options (SMB and Slow
Speed) may cause some vibration or noise during the stopping cycle. To
minimize vibration or noise, lower the braking current adjustment. If this is
a concern in your application, please consult your local Rockwell
Automation sales office or Allen-Bradley distributor before you implement
the braking options.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 237

Chapter 11 Troubleshooting

Figure 102 - Troubleshooting Flowchart

Yes
Fault Displayed?

No

Define
Nature of
Trouble

Motor will not start. Motor starts but Motor stops while Miscellaneous
There is no output does not accelerate running. situations
voltage to the motor. to full speed.

See Table 127 See Table 128 See Table 129 See Table 130 See Table 131

Table 127 - Fault Display Explanation

Display Fault Code Fault Enabled Possible Causes Possible Solutions

• Check for line and load loose connections.
• High impedance line connection • Check for open line (for example, blown fuse).
Line Loss (with phase Prestart and • Missing supply phase
1, 2, 3 • Check for open line lead(s).
indication) Running • Motor not connected properly • Verify power quality.
• Incoming 3-phase voltage instability • Disable this fault/alarm feature.
Shorted SCR (with • Check for shorted SCR, perform a resistance check (see Power
4, 5, 6 In All Modes • Shorted power module.
phase Indication) Module Check section), or replace power module if necessary.
• Perform a resistance check (see Power Module Check section),
replace power module if necessary.
Open Gate (with • Open gate circuitry • Remove control module from the power section and check gate
7, 8, 9 Start or Stop
phase indication) • Loose gate lead lead connections (TB5, TB6, and TB 7) are firmly seated to the
control module.
• Disable this fault/alarm feature.
• Check for proper controller ventilation.
• Controller ventilation blocked • Check application-appropriate duty cycle.
• Controller duty cycle exceeded
SCR Overtemp or PTC • Wait for controller to cool or provide external cooling if ambient
10 or 60 In All Modes • Fan failure
Power Pole temperature is high.
• Ambient temperature limit exceeded • Check for fan operation. Replace fan, if necessary.
• Failed thermistor • Replace power module or control module as needed.
• Check control voltage power supply.
• Replace power module.
• Control voltage is low
Open Bypass 11, 12, 13 In All Modes • Check control module TB2…TB4 and TB5…TB7 for proper order
• Inoperable power module bypass and secureness.
• Make sure that no auxiliary contact is set to “external bypass”.
• Loss of load side power wiring with phase
No Load or Open indication (15=A, 17=C) • Check all load side power connections.
Load (with Phase 14, 15, 16, 17 Prestart Only • Start command cycled unexpectedly with • Check motor windings (megger).
Indication) motor rotating
• Power line unbalance is greater than the • Check the power system and correct if necessary or change the
Voltage Unbalance or 18 or 42 Running programmed value programmed value.
Current Imbalance • The delay time programmed is too short for • Extend the delay time to match the application requirements.
the application • Disable this fault/alarm feature.

238 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Troubleshooting Chapter 11

Display Fault Code Fault Enabled Possible Causes Possible Solutions

• Power line grid voltage is greater than the • Check the power system and correct if necessary. NOTE: If the
programmed value power source is a backup generator, check the stability of the
• Abnormal voltage regulation generator voltage regulator. Replace if necessary.
Overvoltage 19 Running • The parameter settings and/or delay time • Modify the parameter and/or extend the delay time to match the
programmed are not suited for the application requirements.
application • Disable this fault/alarm feature.
• Power line grid voltage is less than the • Check the power system and correct if necessary. NOTE: If the
programmed value power source is a backup generator, check the stability of the
• Abnormal voltage regulation generator voltage regulator. Replace if necessary.
Undervoltage 20 Running • The parameter settings and or delay time • Modify the parameter and/or extend the delay time to match the
programmed are not suited for the application requirements.
application • Disable this fault/alarm feature.
• Check motor overload condition.
• Motor overloaded • Check programmed values for overload class and motor FLC;
Overload 21 Running • Overload parameters are not matched to the verify current draw of the motor.
motor • Disable this fault/alarm feature.(3)
• Check machine drive components and loading.
• Broken motor shaft, belt, grating, etc. • Check pump system.
Underload 22 Running • Pump cavitation • Repair or replace motor.
• Programmed setting incorrect for application • Check programmed settings.
• Disable this fault/alarm feature.
• Motor current has exceeded the user • Correct source of jam or excessive loading.
Jam 23 Running programmed jam level for the programmed • Check programmed time value.
time • Disable this fault/alarm feature.
• Check pump system, machine drive components, and loading;
• The motor did not reach full speed by the end repair or replace motor, if necessary.
Stall 24 Running of the programmed ramp time • Check programmed settings.
• Incorrect programmed setting • Disable this fault/alarm feature.
• The controller is not detecting incoming • Check power wiring and correct, if necessary.
Phase Reversal 25 Prestart Only supply voltage in the expected ABC sequence • Disable this fault/alarm feature.
• Reseat or replace the expansion module connector to the control
• Expansion module is loose or removed
Exp Removed x026(2) In All Modes • Expansion module is defective module and tighten module screws.
• Replace defective module.
• Expansion module is inserted into an • Insert the expansion module into a compatible control module
incompatible control module port number
(2) port.
Exp Incompat x027 In All Modes • Controller firmware is not compatible with • Update the control module firmware
the expansion module • Replace defective module.
• Expansion module is defective
• Expansion module is loose or removed
• Expansion module is defective • Reseat and/or replace loose/removed module and tighten
• Expansion module is inserted into an module screws.
Expansion x028 (2) In All Modes incompatible control module port number • Replace defective expansion module.
• Controller firmware is not compatible with • Update control module firmware.
the expansion module
• The number of starts within the last hour has •• Wait for the hour to expire, then restart the motor.
Reduce the actual number of starts per hour or increase the
exceeded the programmed value
Starts per Hour 29 Starting programmed start time (if allowed by the application) and
• Programmed setting is incorrect for the controller thermal limits.
application • Turn off this fault/alarm feature.
• Loose CT cable connection between the power • Remove the control module from the power section; verify
connectors TB2 (A), TB3 (B), and TB4 (C) are firmly seated to the
section and the control module control module.
• Phase A (F30), B (F31), or C (F32) current
CT Loss: A, B, or C 30, 31, or 32 In All Modes • Replace the control module and/or the power section.
transformer feedback circuit has failed • Inspect the CT sensor cables for loose connections; check CTs for
• Option Module 150-SM2 with external CT damage; repair/replace CTs if necessary; replace 150-SM2 option
operation (Fault Code 7030, 8030) module if necessary.
• Loose cables between the controller and • Remove the control module from the power section; verify
power section. connectors TB2 (A), TB3 (B), and TB4 (C) are firmly seated to the
Hall ID 33 In All Modes • Incompatible power section installed with the control module.
controller • Check the power section and replace, if necessary.
• Modify a parameter or load parameter defaults (preferred) and
• Controller memory corrupted
• Option module error (Fault Code 7034, 8034, • reload the customer-specific parameters.
NVS Error 34 In All Modes Check the option module sensor cables.
or 9034) • Replace the option module.
Future Use 35 NA NA NA

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 239

Chapter 11 Troubleshooting

Display Fault Code Fault Enabled Possible Causes Possible Solutions

• Loose connection at Control Terminals 1 (+L1) • Check the control power and verify it is within the specification;
and 2 (-L2) check the line connections and grounding to the SMC-50
V24 Loss 36 In All Modes • Excessive load on internal 24V supply controller control terminals.
• Low line voltage condition • Replace the control module.
• Loose connection at Control Terminals 1 (+L1) • Check the control power and verify it is within the specification;
check the connections and grounding to the SMC-50 controller
V Control Loss 37 In All Modes and 2 (-L2) control terminals.
• Low line voltage condition • Replace the control module.
• The condition to generate the TB Input fault is
38, 39, 40, satisfied • Clear the fault condition.
TB Input:1, 2, 3 and 4 In All Modes
and 41 • Terminal wiring configuration or fault N.O./ • Rewire and/or reconfigure the input.
N.C. configuration of input is incorrect
• Power line unbalance is greater than the • Check the power system and correct if necessary or change the
Voltage Unbalance or programmed value programmed value.
42 or 18 Running
Current Imbalance • The delay time programmed is too short for • Extend the delay time to match the application requirements.
the application • Disable this fault/alarm feature.
• Abnormally reduced real (MW) power draw
by the motor possibly due to broken • Repair/replace the condition causing the reduced real power
mechanical connection (belt, gears, etc.) load.
Und Pwr Real(1) 43 Running between motor and load • Modify the programmed fault/alarm parameters to better suit
• Pump cavitation the application.
• Programmed setting is incorrect for the • Disable the fault/alarm feature.
application
• Abnormally high real (KW) power draw by the • Repair/replace the condition causing the high KW power draw.
motor • Modify the programmed fault/alarm parameters to better suit
Ovr Pwr Real(1) 44 Running • Programmed setting is incorrect for the the application.
application • Disable the fault/alarm feature.
• Abnormally reduced reactive (+MVAR) power • Repair/replace the condition causing the reduced +MVAR power
draw.
produced by the motor
Un Pwr Reac+ (1) 45 Running • Programmed setting is incorrect for the • Modify the programmed fault/alarm parameters to better suit
the application.
application • Disable the fault/alarm feature.
• Repair/replace the condition causing the high +MVAR power
• Abnormally high reactive (+MVAR) power draw.
produced by the motor
Ov Pwr Reac+(1) 46 Running • Modify the programmed fault/alarm parameters to better suit
• Programmed settings are incorrect for the the application.
application • Disable the fault/alarm feature.
• Abnormally reduced apparent (MVA) power • Repair/replace the condition causing the reduced +MVA power
draw.
draw by the motor
Und Pwr App (1) 47 Running • Programmed settings are incorrect for the • Modify the programmed fault/alarm parameters to better suit
the application.
application • Disable the fault/alarm feature.
• Abnormally high apparent (MVA) power draw • Repair/replace the condition causing the high +MVA power
draw.
by the motor
Ovr Pwr App (1) 48 Running • Programmed settings are incorrect for the • Modify the programmed fault/alarm parameters to better suit
the application.
application • Disable the fault/alarm feature.
• Reduce the generator load, increase generator output, replace
• Speed control regulation system of the the speed control system, or generator.
generator prime mover (for example, diesel
engine) is unable to adjust to current load NOTE: For a diesel generator system, Rockwell Automation
Frequency 49 Running conditions or is defective recommends it be oversized by a factor of three for Soft Start
• Abnormal power grid connections; power applications.
generation source is operating outside its • Contact the power company for additional information.
normal frequency limits or range • Modify the programmed fault/alarm parameters to better suit
the application.
• Perform required maintenance and reset the PM Hours
• The number of hours programmed in the PM
PM Hours 50 In All Modes parameter.
Hours Parameter has been reached • Disable this fault/alarm feature.
• Perform required maintenance and reset the PM Hours
• The number of Starts programmed in the PM
PM Starts 51 Pre-Start parameter.
Start Parameter has been reached • Disable this fault/alarm feature.
• Check supply voltage for capability to start/stop the motor; check
• Incoming 3-phase voltage instability or for loose connections on the line side or motor side of the power
Power Quality: A, B, 52, 53, or 54 Start or Stop distortion wires.
or C • High impedance line or load connection • Verify and correct the input power quality issue
• Disable this fault/alarm feature.

240 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Troubleshooting Chapter 11

Display Fault Code Fault Enabled Possible Causes Possible Solutions

• Check the mix of loads (what was added, what was changed);
• The current mix of loads on the power line modify the load mix if necessary.
Power Quality: THD V 55 Running contributing to the THD V has exceeded the • Change the programmed THD V level and/or delay time.
programmed THD V level and/or time • Disable this fault/alarm feature.
• Check the mix of loads (what was added, what was changed);
• The current mix of loads on the power line modify the load mix if necessary.
Power Quality: THD I 56 Running contributing to the THD I has exceeded the • Change the programmed THD I level and/or delay time.
programmed THD I level and/or time • Disable this fault/alarm feature.
Config Change 57 In All Modes • A controller parameter has been modified • Disable this fault/alarm feature.
• The ground fault current level has exceeded • Check the power system and motor; correct if necessary.
the programmed value • Check the programmed ground fault levels to match application
Ground Fault X058(2) Running • The delay time is too short for the application requirements; modify if necessary.
NOTE: An optional 150-SM2 Ground Fault PTC • Extend the delay time to match the application requirements.
Module is required for this fault. • Disable this fault/alarm feature.
• Motor ventilation is blocked. • Check for proper ventilation.
• Motor duty cycle is exceeded • Check application duty cycle.
Motor PTC X059(2) In All Modes • PTC open or shorted • Wait for motor to cool or provide external cooling, then check
NOTE: An optional 150-SM2 Ground Fault PTC resistance of PTC.
Module is required for this fault. • Disable this fault/alarm feature.
• Check for proper controller ventilation.
• Controller ventilation blocked • Check application-appropriate duty cycle.
• Controller duty cycle exceeded
SCR Overtemp or PTC • Wait for controller to cool or provide external cooling if ambient
60 or 10 In All Modes • Fan failure
Power Pole temperature is high.
• Ambient temperature limit exceeded • Check for fan operation. Replace fan, if necessary.
• Failed thermistor • Replace power module or control module as needed.
• The configuration of the control I/O does not • Modify the control I/O configuration to meet the established
I/O Config 61 Pre-Start meet the system rules as defined in rules.
Configuration Functions on page 151,
• To reset the Test fault, press the Push to Reset/Hold to Test push
• The SMC-50 controller’s Push to Reset/Hold to button for less than two seconds.
Test push button was pressed for more than
Test Fault 62 In All Modes three seconds, but less than ten NOTE: Only use the Push to Reset push button when absolutely
• The SMC-50 controller’s Push to Reset/Hold to necessary.
Test push button is stuck or damaged • Attempt to dislodge the push button or replace the control
module if necessary.
• A lagging PF is abnormally under the typical • Determine the cause of the reduced Lagging PF.
value; less inductance or more capacitance • Modify the programmed fault/alarm parameters to better suit
Und PF Lag 63 In All Modes has been introduced to the power line the application.
• A programmed setting or time value is • Disable the fault/alarm feature.
incorrect for the application
• A leading PF is abnormally under the typical • Determine the cause of the reduced Leading PF
value; less inductance or more capacitance • Modify the programmed fault/alarm parameters to better suit
Und PF Lead 64 Running has been introduced to the power line the application.
• A programmed setting or time value is • Disable the fault/alarm feature.
incorrect for the application
• A lagging PF is abnormally over the typical • Determine the cause of the Over PF Lagging
value; more inductance or less capacitance • Modify the programmed fault/alarm parameters to better suit
Ovr PF Lag 65 Running has been introduced to the power line the application.
• A programmed setting or time value is • Disable the fault/alarm feature.
incorrect for the application
• A leading PF is abnormally under the typical • Determine the cause of the Over PF Leading.
value; less inductance or more capacitance • Modify the programmed fault/alarm parameters to better suit
Ovr PF Lead 66 Running has been introduced to the power line the application.
• A programmed setting or time value is • Disable the fault/alarm feature.
incorrect for the application
• Abnormally high reactive (-MVAR) power • Repair/replace the condition causing the high -MVAR.
consumed by the motor • Modify the programmed fault/alarm parameters to better suit
-MVAR Over (1) 67 Running • Programmed settings are incorrect for the the application.
application • Disable the fault/alarm feature.
• Abnormally reduced reactive (-MVAR) power • Repair/replace the condition causing the reduced -MVAR.
consumed by the motor • Modify the programmed fault/alarm parameters to better suit
-MVAR Under(1) 68 Running • Programmed settings are incorrect for the the application.
application • Disable the fault/alarm feature.
• Battery reading is below the acceptable level
RTC Battery Low 69 Pre-Start to potentially maintain the real time clock and • Replace battery (CR2032) as soon as possible.
calendar

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 241

Chapter 11 Troubleshooting

Display Fault Code Fault Enabled Possible Causes Possible Solutions

• Check motor and load for binding or jammed conditions
• Parameters are not adequately configured for the application.
Locked Rotor 70 In All Modes • Motor has stalled; rotor is not turning Review and adjust.
• Disable the fault/alarm feature.
• A start event (command) has occurred. This is
Start 71 Starting • NA
not a fault.
• A slow speed event (command) has occurred.
Slow Speed 72 Slow Speed • NA
This is not a fault.
• A stop option event (command) has occurred.
Stop Option 73 Stop Option • NA
This is not a fault.
• A coast-to-stop event (command) has
Coast 74 Coast • NA
occurred. This is not a fault.
• A clear fault event (command) has occurred.
Clear Fault 75 Faulted • NA
This does not generate a fault.
• A fault event (command) has occurred. This is
Fault 76 Faulted • NA
not a fault.
• A change to one of the controller parameters
Param Change 77 Stopped • NA
has occurred. This is not a fault.
Reserved 78…99 NA • NA • NA
• Review the control module wiring. Ensure the ground terminal is
• There is an issue with the control module secure and connected to the system’s earth ground. Ensure an RC
System Faults 100…199 In All Modes wiring snubber/suppressor is connected to all inductive loads in the
• The control module is defective control circuit. See input wiring.
• Replace the control module.
(1) The Real, Reactive, and Apparent Power faults/alarms are best suited to provide indication of an abnormal running operation of the motor or system which another parameter (for example,
Underload, Overload, Jam, Stall, etc.) does not provide. To understand what is an abnormal running operation, you need to determine a "normal" or "typical" value, usually established during system
startup.
(2) "X" indicates a port number in which the expansion module resides in the SMC-50 controller.
(3) If controller based motor overload is disabled, external motor overload protection should be used.

Table 128 - Motor Will Not Start—No Output Voltage to the Motor

Display Possible Cause Possible Solutions

Fault displayed • See fault description • See Table 127 addressing fault conditions
• Check control wiring and correct if necessary
• Failed HIM • Check HIM connection
HIM display is blank •• Control voltage is absent • Cycle control power
Failed control module • Replace HIM only
• HIM connection is loose • Replace control module only
• Pilot devices
• SMC Enable input is open at terminal 9
• Configured or wired input terminals are not • Check wiring; follow the instructions on
Stopped wired correctly page 217 to enable control capability.
0.0 Amps • Start-Stop control has not been enabled for • Check control voltage
the human interface module • Replace control module
• Control voltage
• Failed control module
• Check power system
• Check that the SMC-50 controller Aux. relay
• One or more power phases are missing output controlling the Isolation Contactor is
Starting • Isolation contactor (if used) is not picking up configured to "Normal".
• Check the Isolation Contactor for proper
operation

Table 129 - Motor Rotates but Does Not Accelerate to Full Speed

Display Possible Cause Possible Solutions

Fault displayed • See fault description • See Table 127 addressing fault conditions
• Check for binding or external loading and correct
• Mechanical problems • Check motor
Starting Inadequate Current Limit setting • Adjust the Current Limit Level to a higher setting
• Failed control module • Replace control module

242 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Troubleshooting Chapter 11

Table 130 - Motor Stops While Running

Display Possible Cause Possible Solutions

Fault displayed • See fault description • See addressing fault conditions
• Failed HIM • Replace HIM
HIM display is blank •• Control voltage is absent • Check control wiring and correct if necessary
Failed control module • Replace control module
• HIM connection is loose • Check HIM connection
Stopped • Pilot devices • Check control wiring and correct if necessary
0.0 Amps • Failed control module • Replace control module
• One or more power phases are missing • Check power system
Starting • Failed control module • Replace control module

Table 131 - Miscellaneous Situations

Situation Possible Cause Possible Solutions

• Verify type of motor as a standard squirrel cage
Motor current and voltage • Motor induction motor
fluctuates • Erratic Load • Check load conditions
• Shut off all power to controller and check for loose
Erratic operation • Loose connections connections
• Starting time • Increase starting time
• Initial torque • Lower initial torque setting
Accelerates too fast • Current limit setting • Decrease current limit setting
• Kickstart • Lower kickstart time or turn off
• Starting time • Decrease starting time
• Initial torque • Increase initial torque setting
Accelerates too slow • Current limit setting • Increase current limit setting
• Kickstart • Increase kickstart time or turn off
• Control wiring • Check control wiring and correct if necessary
Fan does not operate(1) • Failed fan(s) • Replace fan module
Motor stops too quickly • Verify the programmed stopping time and correct if
• Time setting
with Soft Stop option necessary
• Verify the programmed stopping time and correct if
necessary
Motor stops too slowly • Stopping time setting • The Soft Stop option is intended to extend the
with Soft Stop option • Misapplication stopping time for loads that stop suddenly when power
is removed from the motor.
• Soft Stop ramps voltage down over a set period of time.
Fluid surges with pumps In the case of pumps, the voltage may drop too rapidly
still occur with the Soft • Misapplication to prevent surges. A closed loop system such as Pump
Stop option Control would be more appropriately suited.
• Preset Slow Speed and SMB options: Extended
operation at slow speeds reduces motor cooling
efficiency. Consult motor manufacturer for motor
Motor overheats • Duty cycle limitations.
• Smart Motor Braking option: Check duty cycle. Consult
motor manufacturer for motor limitations.
• Identify fault and correct.
Motor short circuit • Winding fault • Check for shorted SCR; replace if necessary.
• Ensure power terminals are secure.
(1) Fan operation is controlled by the SMC-50 Control Module. The fan may not run in low ambient temperature conditions.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 243

Chapter 11 Troubleshooting

Power Module Check If you need to check a power module, use this procedure.

ATTENTION: To avoid shock hazard, disconnect main and control power

before working on the controller, motor, or control devices such as Start/Stop
push buttons.

ATTENTION: Make sure that wires are properly marked and programmed
parameter values are recorded.

Shorted SCR Test

1. Using an ohm meter, measure the resistance between the line and load
terminals of each phase on the controller. (L1-T1, L2-T2, and L3-T3)

The resistance should be greater than 5,000 . Replace the power assembly if
this reading is not reached. See publication 150-TD009 for the list of Spare/
Replacement SMC-50 controller parts.

244 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Appendix A

Parameter Information

SMC-50 Controller This section details the parameter information for the SMC-50 controller.
Information Table 132 - Parameter 1…18

Default Enum Read/Write

No. Name Units Min./Max. Values Description
Value Text Access
Displays the calculated average voltage of the applied three phase to phase line
1 PP Ave voltages being measured by the SMC-50 controller.
Displays the Phase A to Phase B voltage applied to the SMC-50 controller at the
2 A-B
Volts supply terminals.
Volt 0/700 0 NA R
Phase Displays the Phase B to Phase C voltage applied to the SMC-50 controller at the
3 B-C supply terminals.
Displays the Phase C to Phase A voltage applied to the SMC-50 controller at the
4 C-A supply terminals.
Displays the average of the three phase currents flowing through the SMC Power
5 Ave section to the load.
Displays the Current flowing through the Phase A power pole of the SMC Power
6 A
Current section to the load.
Phase Amps 0/15000 0 NA R
Displays the Current flowing through the Phase B power pole of the SMC Power
7 B section to the load.
Displays the Current flowing through the Phase C power pole of the SMC Power
8 C section to the load.
Displays the true electromechanical torque calculated based on current and
9 Torque % -5.0/30.0 0.0 NA voltage feedback. For this reading to display correctly, you must set the value for R
Rated Torque parameter.
10 Real Power MW -1000.000/1000.00 0.000 NA Displays the total Real Power. R
NA Displays the Real Energy, where Real Energy equal to Real Power X Time. This
11 Real Energy MWH -1000.000/1000.00 0.000 R
parameter is updated every 1/10 of an hour (6 minutes).
NA Displays the elapsed motor running time since the last reset of the Elapsed timer
12 Elapsed Time Hours 0.0/50000.0 0.0 by you. R

NA Displays the elapsed motor running time since the control module was
13 Elapsed Time 2 Hours 0.0/50000.0 0.0 R
manufactured.
NA Displays the time the motor has been running since the last start command. This
14 Running Time Hours 0.0/50000.0 0.0 R
value goes to zero when a motor is restarted after a stop command or fault.
15 Energy Savings % 0/100 0 NA Displays the energy saving when the energy saving mode is enabled. R
Lets you reset various timers and counters by selecting the appropriate reset
— option.
Ready Ready state of parameter, waiting for selection.
Elapsed Zero the elapsed timer.
16 Meter Reset — 0/4 0 Timer R/W
Time to Resets the Time to PM timer to the value set in parameter PM Hours (126).
PM
Starts to Reset the Starts to PM counter to the value set in parameter PM Starts (127).
PM
NA Displays the cosine of the phase angle between the voltage and current. A
17 Power Factor — -1.00/1.00 0.00 R
positive values is leading and negative value is lagging.
Displays the thermal capacity utilized in the motor overload algorithm. A value
18 Motor Therm Usage %MTU 0/200 0 NA of 100% results in a motor overload fault. This value can exceed 100%, R
depending on the rate at which the motor is heating before an overload trip.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 245

Appendix A Parameter Information

Table 133 - Parameter 19…42

ENUM Text is not applicable for the parameters in this table.

Units Min./Max. Default Read/Write

No. Name Description
Values Value Access
Displays the estimated time before an overload trip occurs if the present operating conditions persist. If
19 Time to OL Trip Secs 0/1000 0 R
operating below ultimate trip current the value displays the max value.
Displays the estimated time until the motor overload fault can be reset. The MTU reset level is set by the OL
20 Time to OL Reset Secs 0/1000 0 R
reset parameter (80).
Displays the estimated time to a preventive maintenance event if enabled. The scheduled time for a PM
21 Time to PM Hrs 0/1000 0 event is set by you via the PM Hours parameter (126).This value can be reset by you after an event via the R
meter reset parameter (16).
Displays the estimated number of starts to a PM event if enabled. The scheduled number of starts for a PM
22 Starts to PM — 0/50000 0 event is set by you via the PM Starts parameter (127).This value can be reset by you after an event via the R
meter reset parameter (16).
Displays the total number of SMC starts. The SMC keeps a Start Counter which is incremented each time the
23 Total Starts — 0/30000 0 R
SMC is started. This parameter cannot be reset by the customer and leaves the factory with a value of 0.
24 1 Displays the measured start time of the previous start.
25 2 Displays the measured start time of the 2nd previous start.
26 Start Time 3 Secs 0/1000 0 Displays the measured start time of the 3rd previous start. R
27 4 Displays the measured start time of the 4th previous start.
28 5 Displays the measured start time of the 5th previous start.
29 1 Displays the measured peak current of the previous start.
30 2 Displays the measured peak current of the 2nd previous start.
31 Peak Current 3 Amps 0/150000 0 Displays the measured peak current of the 3rd previous start. R
32 4 Displays the measured peak current of the 4th previous start.
33 5 Displays the measured peak current of the 5th previous start.
Displays the estimated motor speed during starting and stopping. This parameter is only valid when using
34 Motor Speed % 0/100 0 R
the linear speed starting or linear speed stopping modes.
(1) Va
35 THD Measures the THD of the applied Phase A line voltage.
36 THD Vb Measures the THD of the applied Phase B line voltage.
% 0/1000.0 0 R
37 THD Vc Measures the THD of the applied Phase C line voltage.
38 THD Vave Displays the calculated average of the three voltage THD measurements.
39 THD(1) Ia Measures the THD of the applied Phase A current.
40 THD Ib Measures the THD of the applied Phase B current.
% 0/1000.0 0 R
41 THD Ic Measures the THD of the applied Phase C current.
42 THD Iave Displays the calculated average of the three current THD measurements.
(1) THD = A Power Quality measurement that lets you measure total harmonic distortion levels.

246 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Parameter Information Appendix A

Table 134 - Parameter 43…49

Units Min./Max. Default Read/Write

No. Name Enum Text [Default] Description
Values Value Access
The product Logic Status is made available to all DPI devices and is also
available as a bit enumerated parameter "Product Status". The bits in this
— parameter correspond with the bits in the Product Logic Status defined for
DPI.
1 – Ready
bit 0 = Enabled/Ready
0 – Not Ready
1 – Power Applied to Motor (Gating SCRs or Bypass closed)
bit 1 = Running
0 – Power NOT Applied to Motor
1 – ABC Phasing
bit 2 = Phasing
0 – CBA Phasing
1 – 3-phase is valid
bit 3 = Phasing Active
0 – No valid 3-phase detected
1 – Performing a Start Maneuver (slow speed not included)
bit 4 = Starting (Accel)
0 – Not Performing a Start Maneuver
1 – Performing a Stop Maneuver (coast to stop not included)
bit 5 = Stopping (Decel)
0 – Not Performing a Stop Maneuver
43 Product Status — 0/65535 0 R
1 – Alarm Present
bit 6 = Alarm
0 – No Alarm Present
1 – Fault Condition Exists and hasn’t been cleared
bit 7 = Fault
0 – No Fault Condition
1 – Full Voltage Applied (Bypass or full SCR conduction)
bit 8 = At Speed
0 – Not Full Voltage Applied
1 – Start/Isolate Contactor Enabled
bit 9 = Start/Isolate
0 – Start/Isolate Contactor Disabled
1 – Bypass Contactor Enabled
bit 10 = Bypass
0 – Bypass Contactor Disabled
1 indicates that the SMC is ready to accept a Start command. The device is
bit 11 = Ready not faulted or in the process of stopping, starting or jogging.
bit 12 - 13 = Reserved Always 0.
bit 14 = Input #1 Control Module Input #1 Status. 1 = Input Closed.
bit 15 = Input #2 Control Module Input #2 Status. 1 = Input Closed.
Line Lets you select the type of motor connection the SMC-50 controller is being
44 Motor Config — 0/2 2 Delta applied to, 'Line' or 'Delta'. If set to 'Auto Config', the SMC-50 controller R/W
[Auto] determines the motor connection.
[Line] Displays the type of motor connection the SMC-50 controller is configured
45 Motor Connection — 0/1 0 R
Delta to operate with.
46 Line Voltage Volt 0/700 480 NA The Line voltage applied to the SMC L1, L2, L3 terminals. R/W
Lets you enter the rated torque of the motor as read from the motor
47 Rated Torque N•m 0/10000 10 NA specifications (typically nameplate). This is required for proper torque mode R/W
starts and stops.
750, 900, 1500, [1800], Lets you enter the rated motor speed as read from the motor specifications
48 Rated Speed rpm 0/5 3 R/W
3500, 3600 (typically nameplate). Required for proper torque mode starts and stops.
Used to program the SMC controller for the type of starting mode that best
fits the application.
Full Voltage Apply full voltage to the motor at start.
Current Limit Apply limited current for a programmed period of time.
49 Starting Mode — 0/5 2 R/W
[Soft Start] Slowly increase current to load over a programmed period of time.
Linear Speed Increase current to cause a linear acceleration of the motor.
Torque Ramp Slowly increase torque generated by motor over fixed period of time.
Pump Start Special starting algorithm for pump applications.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 247

Appendix A Parameter Information

Table 135 - Parameter 50…57

Units Min./Max. Default Enum Text Read/Write

No. Name Description
Values Value [Default] Access
50 Ramp Time Sec 0.0/1000.0 10.0 NA Lets you configure the time period during which the controller ramps the output voltage. R/W
51 Initial Torque %LRT 0/90 70 NA Establishes and adjusts initial reduced voltage output level for the voltage ramp. R/W
52 Max. Torque % 0/300 250 NA Lets you configure the max. torque limit of a torque ramp during a torque start operation. R/W
53 Cur Limit Level %FLC 50/600 350 NA The current limit level that is applied for the ramp time selected. R/W
54 Kickstart Time SEC 0.0/2.0 0.0 NA A boost of current is applied to the motor for this programmed time. R/W
55 Kickstart Level %LRT 0/90 0 NA Lets you adjust the amount of current boost applied to the motor during the kickstart period. R/W
— Lets you select the operation of Terminal 11, Input 1 on the control module.
Disable Disable the input - ignores any assertion to Input 1, Terminal 11.
Start Initiates a start as set up by the start parameters at Input 1, Terminal 11 (High).
Coast Initiates a coast stop.- no current to motor at Input 1, Terminal 11 (Low).
Stop Option Initiates a stop maneuver as set up by the stopping parameters at Input 1 (Low).
if Input 1 = 0 - Stops motor
[Start/Coast]
1- Initiates a start as set up by the start parameters
if Input 1 = 0- Initiates a stop maneuver as set up by stopping parameters
Start/Stop
1- Initiates a start as set up by the start parameters
Slow Speed 1 Runs motor in slow speed mode 1 as set up by slow speed 1 parameters (High).
56 Input 1 — 0/14 4 Slow Speed 2 Runs motor in slow speed mode 2 as set up by slow speed 2 parameters (High). R/W
if Input 1 = 0 - Use starting mode 1
Dual Ramp
1 - Use starting mode 2
if Input 1 = 0 - Use Motor Overload Class 1
OL Select
1 - Use Motor Overload Class 2
Fault A fault condition forced if Input 1= 1.
Fault NC A fault condition forced if Input 1 = 0.
Clear Fault Clear a fault from input 1 Terminal 11 (High).
Allows motor to run in emergency run mode if asserted from Input 1, Terminal 11 - does not
Emerg Run start motor (High).
Motor Heater Run motor heating algorithm if asserted from Input 1, Terminal 11 (High).
— Lets you select the operation of Terminal 10, Option Input 2, on the control module.
[Disable] Disable the input - ignores any assertion to Input 2 Terminal 10.
Start Initiate a start as set up by the start parameters at Input 2 Terminal 10 (High).
Coast Initiates a coast stop.- no current to motor at Input 2 Terminal 10 (Low).
Stop Option Initiates a stop maneuver as set up by the stopping parameters at Input 2 (Low).
If Input 2= 0 - Stops motor
Start/Coast
1- Initiate a start as set up by the start parameters
If Input 2 = 0- Initiate a stop maneuver as set up by stopping parameters
Start/Stop
1- Initiate a start as set up by the start parameters
Slow Speed 1 Runs motor in slow speed mode 1 as set up by slow speed 1 parameters (High).
57 Input 2 — 0/14 0 Slow Speed 2 Runs motor in slow speed mode 2 as set up by slow speed 2 parameters (High). R/W
If Input 2= 0 - Use Starting Mode 1
Dual Ramp
1 - Use Starting Mode 2
If Input 2 = 0 - User Motor Overload Class 1
OL Select
1 - Use Motor Overload Class 2
Fault A fault condition is forced if Input 2= 1.
Fault NC A fault condition is forced if Input 2 = 0.
Clear Fault Clear a fault from Input 2 (High).
Allows motor to run in emergency run mode if asserted on Input 2 - does not start motor
Emerg Run (High).
Motor Heater Run motor heating algorithm if asserted at Input 2 (High).

248 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Parameter Information Appendix A

Table 136 - Parameter 58…71

Units Min./Max. Default Enum Text Read/Write

No. Name Description
Values Value [Default] Access
Lets you program an alternate starting mode for the SMC-50 controller that suits the
— application.
Full Voltage Apply full voltage to the motor at start.
Current Limit Apply limited current for a programmed period of time.
58 Starting Mode 2 — 0/5 2 R/W
[Soft Start] Slowly increase current to load over a programmed period of time.
Linear Speed Increase current to cause a linear acceleration of the motor.
Torque Ramp Slowly increase torque generated by the motor over a fixed period of time.
Pump Start Special starting algorithm for pump applications.
Lets you set an alternate time period during which the controller ramps the output
59 Ramp Time 2 Sec 0.0/1000.0 10.0 NA R/W
voltage.
60 Initial Torque 2 %LRT 0/90 70 NA Lets you set an alternate initial reduced voltage output level for the voltage ramp. R/W
Lets you set a alternate maximum torque limit of a torque ramp during a torque start
61 Max. Torque 2 % 0/300 250 NA R/W
operation.
62 Cur Limit Level 2 %FLC 50/600 350 NA Lets you set an alternate current limit level that is applied for the ramp time selected. R/W
Lets you set an alternate boost current to be applied to the motor for the programmed
63 Kickstart Time 2 Sec 0/2 0 NA R/W
time.
Lets you set an alternate adjustment of the amount of current applied to the motor
64 Kickstart Level 2 %LRT 0/90 0 NA R/W
during the kickstart period.
Lets you program the SMC-50 controller for the type of stopping that best suits the
— application.
[Coast] Coast-to-Rest
Slowly reduces current by reducing voltage applied to the motor over a programmed
Soft Stop period of time.
65 Stop Mode — 0/5 0 Linear Speed Stops the motor following a linear speed ramp over a programmed period of time. R/W
Slowly reduces current by reducing voltage applied to the motor using the pump stop
Pump Stop algorithm over a programmed period of time.
Brakes the motor to a stop using an SCR firing pattern to create current flow to brake the
SMB motor per the configuration of the braking parameters.
External Brake Closes an external contactor to apply braking current to the motor.
Sets the time period for which the controller ramps the voltage during a stopping
66 Stop Time Sec 0/999 0 NA R/W
maneuver.
Avoids starting into a backspin condition. The timer begins counting after a stop is
67 Backspin Timer Sec 0/999 0 NA completed (coast, stop maneuver, fault etc). All start inputs is ignored until the backspin R/W
timer has timed out.
Lets you adjust the pump algorithm slightly for different applications. Typically, this is
68 Pump Pedestal % 0/50 0 NA used to shorten the ramp time before the SMC-50 controller starts to get aggressive in its R/W
pump stopping maneuver.
69 Braking Current %FLC 0/400 0 NA Lets you program the intensity of the braking current applied to the motor. R/W
Identifies the load type to enable appropriate braking algorithms.
Standard —
70 Brake Load Type — 0/3 0 High Inertia — R/W
High Friction —
Ramp 89 Special braking mode that reduces braking torques.
Adds additional time to a braking sequence after the SMC-50 controller detects a zero
71 High Eff Brake % 0/99 0 NA speed condition that indicates the end of the braking sequence. Can adjust if additional R/W
time is needed to stop the load.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 249

Appendix A Parameter Information

Table 137 - Parameter 72…94

ENUM Text is not applicable for the parameters in this table.

Units Min./Max. Default Read/Write

No. Name Description
Values Value Access
72 Slow Speed 1 % -15/15 10 Lets you program slow speed 1 that best suits the application. R/W
Provides braking from slow speed. If set to 0, no braking is provided. Any other setting results in motor
73 Slow Brake Cur %FLC 0/350 0 R/W
braking when the slow speed operation is terminated.
Sets the desired trip class of internal solid state overload. Overload fault and alarms are enabled and
75 Overload Class — 5/30 10 R/W
disabled in the Starter Fault En and Starter Alarm parameters.
Lets you set the internal solid state overload to an alternate trip class. This Trip Class is used when an input
76 Overload Class 2 — 5/30 10 R/W
(configured as overload select) is asserted.
77 Service Factor — 0.01/1.990 1.15 Parameter to enter the value of the motor's service factor from the nameplate. R/W
78 Motor FLC Amps 1.0/2200.0 1.0 Parameter to enter the Full Load Current (FLC) value from the motor's nameplate. R/W
79 Motor FLC 2 Amps 1.0…2200.0 1.0 Second motor FLC setting to be used when Overload #2 is selected using the "Overload 2" input. R/W
When the level of Motor Thermal Usage (MTU) drops below this limit after an OL fault, an overload reset
80 OL Reset Level %MTU 1/99 75 can occur. If restart is enabled, the motor overload automatically resets when the MTU drops below this R/W
level
Disables the overload from incrementing MTU for the selected time period after a start or stop command is
81 OL Shunt Time Secs 0/999 0 R/W
initiated.
Disables the overload from tripping during slow speed and stopping maneuvers. The MTU. Therm Usage
82 OL Inhibit Time Secs 0/999 0 R/W
continues to increment during these maneuvers.
83 Overload A The MTU level that sets off an alarm when exceeded. The Overload bit the Motor Alarm En parameter must
%MTU 0/100 90 R/W
Level be set to signal an alarm.
600 aThe peak phase current to the load that, if exceeded for the time period defined in Locked Rtr Delay, signals
84 Locked Rtr F Lvl %FLC 400/1000 R/W
fault. The Locked Rotor bit in the Motor Fault En parameter must be set to signal a fault.
0.1 The time period that the peak phase current exceeds the Locked Rtr F Level to signal a fault. The Locked
85 Locked Rtr F Dly Secs 0.1/100.0 R/W
Rotor bit in the Motor Fault En parameter must be set to signal a fault.
If phase current drops below this level for the period of time set in Underload F Dly parameter, an
86 Underload F Lvl %FLC 0/99 0 Underload Fault is signaled. The Underload bit in the Motor Fault En parameter must be set to signal a R/W
fault.
The time period that the phase current must be below the level set in the Underload F Level parameter
87 Underload F Dly Secs 0.1/99.0 0.1 before a underload fault is signaled. The Underload bit in the Motor Fault En parameter must be set to R/W
signal a fault.
If phase current drops below this level for the period of time set in Underload A Dly parameter, an
88 Underload A Lvl %FLC 0/99 0 Underload Alarm is signaled. The Underload bit in the Motor Alarm En parameter must be set to signal a R/W
alarm.
The time period that the phase current must be below the level set in the Underload A Level parameter
89 Underload A Dly Secs 0.1/99.0 0.1 before an Underload Alarm is signaled. The Underload bit in the Motor Alarm En parameter must be set to R/W
signal a alarm.
0.000/ If the Real Power exceeds this level for the time period set in MWatts Ov F Dly parameter, an MWatts Ov
90 MWatts Ov F Lvl MW 0.000 fault R/W
1000.00 is signaled. The MWatts Ov bit in the Motor Fault En parameter must be set to signal a fault.
0.1 The time period that Real Power must exceed MWatts Ov F Lvl to signal a fault. The MWatts Ov bit in the
91 MWatts Ov F Dly Secs 0.1/99.0 R/W
Motor Fault En parameter must be set to signal fault.
0.000/ 0.000 IfAlarm
the Real Power exceeds this level for the time period set in MWatts Ov A Dly parameter, a MWatts Ov
92 MWatts Ov A Lvl MW R/W
1000.00 is signaled. The MWatts Ov bit in the Motor Alarm En parameter must be set to signal an alarm.
0.1 The time period that Real Power must exceed MWatts Ov A Lvl to signal an alarm. The MWatts Ov bit in the
93 MWatts Ov A Dly Secs 0.1/99.0 R/W
Motor alarm En parameter must be set to signal an alarm.
0.000/ 0.000 IfUnthe Real Power drops below this level for the time period set in MWatts Un F Dly parameter, an MWatts
94 MWatts Un F Lvl MW R/W
1000.00 Fault is signaled. The MWatts Un bit in the Motor Fault En parameter must be set to signal a fault.

250 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Parameter Information Appendix A

Table 138 - Parameter 95…113

ENUM Text is not applicable for the parameters in this table.

Units Min./Max. Default Read/Write

No. Name Description
Values Value Access
The time period that Real Power must drop below MWatts Un F Lvl to signal a fault. The MWatts Un bit in
95 MWatts Un F Dly Secs 0.1/99.0 0.1 R/W
the Motor Fault En parameter must be set to signal a fault.
If the Real Power drops below this level for the time period set in MWatts Un A Dly parameter, an
0.000/
96 MWatts Un A Lvl MW 0.000 MWatts Un Alarm is signaled. The MWatts Un bit in the Motor Alarm En parameter must be set to signal R/W
1000.00 an alarm.
The time period that Real Power must drop below MWatts Un A Level to signal an alarm. The MWatts Un
97 MWatts Un A Dly Secs 0.1/99.0 0.1 R/W
bit in the Motor Alarm En parameter must be set to signal an alarm.
If the average three phase line voltage drops below this level for the time period set in the Undervolt F
98 Undervolt F Lvl %V 0/100 90 Dly parameter, an Undervolt fault is signaled. The Undervolt bit in the Starter Fault En parameter must R/W
be set to signal a fault.
The time period that the average three phase voltage must remain below Undervolt F Level to signal a
99 Undervolt F Dly Secs 0.1/99.0 3.0 R/W
fault. The Undervolt bit in the Starter Fault En parameter must be set to signal a fault.
If the average three phase line voltage drops below this level for the time period set in the Undervolt A
100 Undervolt A Lvl %V 0/100 90 Dly parameter, an Undervolt Alarm is signaled. The Undervolt bit in the Starter Alarm En parameter R/W
must be set to signal an Alarm.
The time period that the average three phase voltage must remain below Undervolt A Lvl to signal an
101 Undervolt A Dly Secs 0.1/99.0 3.0 R/W
Alarm. The Undervolt bit in the Starter Alarm parameter must be set to signal an Alarm.
If the average three phase line voltage exceed this level for the time period set in the Overvolt F Dly
102 Overvolt F Lvl %V 100/199 110 parameter, an Overvolt fault is signaled. The Overvolt bit in the Starter Fault En parameter must be set to R/W
signal a fault.
The time period that the average three phase voltage must exceed the Overvolt F Level to signal a fault.
103 Overvolt F Dly Secs 0.1/99.0 3.0 R/W
The Overvolt bit in the Starter Fault En parameter must be set to signal a fault.
If the average three phase line voltage exceed this level for the time period set in the Overvolt A Dly
104 Overvolt A Lvl %V 100/199 110 parameter, an Overvolt alarm is signaled. The Overvolt bit in the Starter Alarm parameter must be set to R/W
signal an alarm.
The time period that the average three phase voltage must exceed the Overvolt A Level to signal an
105 Overvolt A Dly Secs 0.1/99.0 3.0 R/W
alarm The Overvolt bit in the Starter alarm En parameter must be set to signal a alarm.
If the line-to-line voltage imbalance condition exceeds the Volt Unbal F Lvl for the period set in Volt
106 Volt Unbal F Lvl % 1/25 15 Unbal F Dly, a fault is signaled. The Volt Unbal bit must be set in the Starter Fault En parameter to signal R/W
a fault. See manual for details on imbalance calculations.
The time period that the voltage imbalance exceeds the Volt Unbal F Lvl to signal a fault. The Volt Unbal
107 Volt Unbal F Dly Secs 0.1/99.0 3.0 R/W
bit in the Starter Fault En parameter must be set to signal a fault.
If the line-to-line voltage imbalance condition exceeds the Volt Unbal A Lvl for the time period set in
108 Volt Unbal A Lvl % 1/25 15 Volt Unbal A Dly, an alarm is signalled. The Volt Unbal bit must be set in the Starter Alarm parameter to R/W
signal a alarm. See manual for details on imbalance calculations.
The time period that the voltage imbalance exceeds the Volt Unbal A Level to signal a alarm. The Volt
109 Volt Unbal A Dly Secs 0.1/99.0 3.0 R/W
Unbal bit in the Starter Alarm parameter must be set to signal a alarm.
If the line-to-line current imbalance condition exceeds the Cur Imbal F Lvl for the time period set in Cur
110 Cur Imbal F Lvl % 1/25 15 Imbal F Dly, a fault is signalled. The Cur Imbal bit must be set in the Motor Fault En parameter to signal a R/W
fault.
The time period that the current imbalance exceeds the Cur Imbal F Lvl to signal a fault. The Cur Imbal
111 Cur Imbal F Dly Secs 0.1/99.0 3.0 R/W
bit in the Motor Fault En parameter must be set to signal a fault.
If the line-to-line current imbalance condition exceeds the Cur Imbal A Lvl for the time period set in Cur
112 Cur Imbal A Lvl % 1/25 15 Imbal A Dly, an alarm is signaled. The Cur Imbal bit must be set in the Motor Alarm En parameter to R/W
signal a Alarm.
The time period that the current imbalance exceeds the Cur Imbal A Lvl to signal an alarm. The Cur Imbal
113 Cur Imbal A Dly Secs 0.1/99.0 3.0 R/W
bit in the Motor Alarm En parameter must be set to signal an alarm.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 251

Appendix A Parameter Information

Table 139 - Parameter 114…134

ENUM Text is not applicable for the parameters in this table.

Units Min./Max. Default Read/Write

No. Name Description
Values Value Access
If the peak phase current exceeds the Jam F Lvl for the time period set in Jam F Dly, a fault is signaled. The
114 Jam F Lvl %FLC 0/1000 1000 R/W
Jam bit must be set in the Motor Fault En parameter to signal a fault.
The time period that the peak phase current exceeds the Jam F Lvl to signal a fault. The Jam bit in the Motor
115 Jam F Dly Secs 0.1/99.0 0.1 R/W
fault En parameter must be set to signal a fault.
If the peak phase current exceeds the Jam A Lvl for the time period set in Jam A Dly, an alarm is signaled. The
116 Jam A Lvl %FLC 0/1000 1000 R/W
Jam bit must be set in the Motor Alarm En parameter to signal a alarm.
The time period that the peak phase current exceeds the Jam A level to signal an alarm. The Jam bit in the
117 Jam A Dly Secs 0.1/99.0 0.1 R/W
Motor Alarm En parameter must be set to signal a alarm.
If the average total harmonic distortion (THD) on the line voltage exceeds the THD V F Lvl for the time period
118 THD V F Lvl % 0/1000 1000 set in THD V F Dly, a fault is signaled. The THD V bit must be set in the Starter Fault En parameter to signal a R/W
fault.
The time period that the average THD on the line voltage exceeds the THD V F Lvl to signal a fault. The THD V
119 THD V F Dly Secs 0.1/99.0 0.1 R/W
bit in the Starter Fault En parameter must be set to signal a fault.
If the average THD on the line voltage exceeds the THD V A Lvl for the time period set in THD V Dly, an alarm is
120 THD V A Lvl % 0/1000 1000 R/W
signaled. The THD V bit must be set in the Starter Alarm parameter to signal a alarm.
The time period that the average THD on the line voltage exceeds the THD V A Lvl to signal a alarm. The THD V
121 THD V A Dly Secs 0.1/99.0 0.1 R/W
bit in the Starter Alarm parameter must be set to signal an alarm.
If the average THD on the phase current exceeds the THD I F Lvl for the period set in THD I F Dly, a fault is
122 THD I F Lvl % 0/1000 1000 R/W
signaled. The THD I bit must be set in the Motor Fault En parameter to signal a fault.
The time period that the average THD on the phase current exceeds the THD I F Lvl to signal a fault. The THD I
123 THD I F Dly Secs 0.1/99.0 0.1 R/W
bit in the Motor Fault En parameter must be set to signal a fault.
If the average THD on the phase current exceeds the THD I A Lvl for the time period set in THD I A Dly, an alarm
124 THD I A Lvl % 0/1000 1000 R/W
is signaled. The THD I bit must be set in the Motor Alarm En parameter to signal an alarm.
The time period that the average THD on the phase current exceeds the THD I A Lvl to signal an alarm. The
125 THD I A Dly Secs 0.1/99.0 0.1 R/W
THD I bit in the Motor Alarm En parameter must be set to signal an alarm.
You can set this counter to generate an alarm or fault to signal a need for preventive maintenance. The Hours
126 PM Hours Hrs 1/100 1000 R/W
to PM parameter is initialized to this value and counts down when the motor is running.
You can set this counter to generate an alarm or fault to signal a need for preventive maintenance. The Starts
127 PM Starts — 1/50000 100 R/W
to PM parameter is initialized to this value and counts down each time the motor is started.
You can program the maximum number of starts within a sliding one-hour window. Once the number of
128 Starts per Hour — 1/99 99 R/W
starts per hour is reached any additional starts causes a fault.
The highest line voltage frequency that can be applied to the SMC-50 controller before causing a Freq High F
129 Freq High F Lvl Hz 45/66 63 R/W
Lvl fault. The Freq High bit in the Starter Fault En parameter must be set to signal a fault.
The lowest line voltage frequency that can be applied to the SMC-50 controller before causing a Freq Low F
130 Freq Low F Lvl Hz 45/66 47 R/W
Lvl fault.The Freq Low bit in the Starter Fault En parameter must be set to signal a fault.
The highest line voltage frequency that can be applied to the SMC-50 controller before causing a Freq High F
131 Freq High A Lvl Hz 45/66 63 Lvl alarm. The Freq High bit in the Starter Alarm parameter must be set to signal an alarm. R/W
The lowest line voltage frequency that can be applied to the SMC-50 controller before causing a Freq Low F
132 Freq Low A Lvl Hz 45/66 47 R/W
Lvl alarm. The Freq Low bit in the Starter Alarm parameter must be set to signal an alarm.
Lets you enable the SMC-50 controller to auto-restart for up-to five attempts after a thyristor has failed to fire
133 Restart Attempts — 0/5 0 R/W
and results in an open gate fault trip.
134 Restart Dly Secs 0/60 0 Provides a delay time prior to the SMC-50 controller’s attempt to restart the motor after a fault. R/W

252 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Parameter Information Appendix A

Table 140 - Parameter 135…148

Units Min./Max. Default Enum Text Read/Write

No. Name Description
Values Value [Default] Access
Volt Unbal
Overvoltage
Undervoltage
Phase Rev Lets you select which type of fault that the SMC-50 controller can try to restart from
0 0 Line Loss once the restart delay period has expired. To enable a restart from a fault, the
135 Strtr Restart En — function must be selected (1). R/W
Open Gate Restart Attempts, Parameter 133, and Restart Delay, Parameter 134, must be
Config Change configured.
Freq
THD V
Future Future Future
0 0 Volt Unbal
0 0 Overvoltage
0 0 Undervoltage
0 0 Phase Rev
Lets you enable faults associated with the control module. The bit for a fault must
136 Starter Fault En — 1 1 Line Loss R/W
be set (1) for the fault to be asserted.
1 1 Open Gate
0 0 Config Change
0 0 Freq
0 0 THD V
Volt Unbal
Overvoltage
Undervoltage
Phase Rev
Lets you enable alarms associated with the control module. The bit for an alarm
137 Starter Alarm En — 0 0 Line Loss R/W
must be set (1) for the alarm to be asserted.
Open Gate
Config Change
Freq
THD V
138 1 First entry in the fault buffer and is the most recent fault to have occurred.
139 2 Second entry in the fault buffer.
140 Fault 3 — 0/1000 0 NA Third entry in the fault buffer. R/W
141 4 Fourth entry in the fault buffer.
142 5 Fifth entry in the fault buffer. The oldest fault displayed in the fault buffer.
143 1 First entry in the alarm buffer and is the most recent alarm to have occurred.
144 2 Second entry in the alarm buffer.
145 3 Third entry in the alarm buffer.
146 Alarm 4 — 0/1000 0 NA Fourth entry in the alarm buffer. R/W
Fifth entry in the alarm buffer. There can be up to 100 events stored in the alarm
147 5 buffer. To see the whole buffer, go the diagnostics tab on the HIM or Connected
Components Workbench software.
The bits in this parameter allow you to enable (bit=1) or disable (bit=0) which DPI
ports the SMC-50 controller accepts Start and Maneuver commands from. Coast
Stop commands are always accepted from any port.
bit 1 = port 1 (On board HIM) [Default=0]
bit 2 = port 2(DPI port on control module) [Default=0]
148 Logic Mask — 0/65535 0 NA bit 3 = port 3(DPI port on control module with splitter) [Default=0] R/W
bit 4 = port 4(Internal Comm module) [Default=0]
bit 5-13 = unused
bit 14 = port 14 [DeviceLogix engine]
bit 15 = unused

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 253

Appendix A Parameter Information

Table 141 - Parameter 149…171

ENUM Text is not applicable for the parameters in this table.

Units Min./Max. Default Read/Write

No. Name Description
Values Value Access
Displays which DPI port the SMC-50 controller accepts a start command from. It may be different from the
Logic Mask set by the local user if someone changes it over the network.
bit 1 = port 1 (on board HIM)
149 Logic Mask Act — 0/65535 0 bit 2 = port 2 (DPI port on control module) R
bit 3 = port 3 (DPI port on control module with splitter)
bit 4 = port 4 (Internal Comm module)
bit 5-15 = reserved
This bits in this parameter allow you to enable (bit=1) or disable (Bit=0) which DPI ports the SMC-50
controller accepts write commands from. Only selected ports can modify parameters.
bit 1 = port 1 (on board HIM) [Default=1]
150 Write Mask Cfg — 0/65535 7FFF bit 2 = port 2 (DPI port on control module) [Default=1] R/W
bit 3 = port 3 (DPI port on control module with splitter) [Default=1]
bit 4 = port 4 (Internal Comm module) [Default=1]
bit 5-15 = reserved [Default=0]
Displays which DPI ports the SMC accepts write commands from that can change parameters. It may be
different from the Write Mask Cfg parameter setup by the local user if someone changes it over the network.
bit 1 = port 1 (on board HIM)
151 Write Mask Act — 0/65535 0 bit 2 = port 2 (DPI port on control module) R
bit 3 = port 3 (DPI port on control module with splitter)
bit 4 = port 4 (Internal Comm module)
bit 5-15 = reserved
Displays which DPI ports are active on the control module and accepts operational commands from.
bit 1 = port 1 (on board HIM)
bit 2 = port 2 (DPI port on control module)
152 Port Mask Act — 0/65535 0 R
bit 3 = port 3 (DPI port on control module with splitter)
bit 4 = port 4 (Internal Comm module)
bit 5-15 = reserved
153 A1 A1
154 A2 A2
155 B1 B1
156 B2 B2 In Datalink index, holding the parameter number of the parameter that
Data In — 0/159999 0 This is the channel is written to during Datalink communications. A value of 0 indicates that R/W
157 C1 C1 it is disabled.
158 C2 C2
159 D1 D1
160 D2 D2
161 A1 A1
162 A2 A2
163 B1 B1
164 B2 B2 Out Datalink index, holding the parameter number of the parameter
Data Out — 0/159999 0 This is the channel that is read from during Datalink communications. A value of 0 indicates R/W
165 C1 C1 that it is disabled.
166 C2 C2
167 D1 D1
168 D2 D2
Allow OEMs to fine-tune their voltage dividers.This is a Medium Voltage specific parameter and has no
169 Voltage Ratio — 1/32767 3079 R/W
function at 690 volts and below.
Lets you achieve proper current ratio for FLC ratings when using external CTs. This is a MV specific parameter
170 User CT Ratio — 10/500 100 R/W
and has no function at 690 volts and below.
Set at the factory to achieve proper current ratio for FLC ratings when using external CTs. This is a MV specific
171 Factory CT Ratio — 1/15000 50 R/W
parameter and has no function at 690 volts and below.

254 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Parameter Information Appendix A

Table 142 - Parameter 172…177

Units Min./Max. Default Enum Text Read/Write

No. Name Description
Values Value [Default] Access
Lets you configure the functionality of the Aux1 relay output on the control module based on
— the following selections.
[Normal] Aux 1 closes when start command asserted and opens when motor stops [Default].
UTS (Up-To- Aux 1 closes when motor reaches up to speed and opens when motor is not at speed.
Speed)
Fault Aux1 closes when the SMC-50 controller enters a fault state and opens when the fault is cleared.
Aux1 closes when the SMC-50 controller detects an alarm condition and opens when alarm is
Alarm cleared.
Ext Bypass Aux1 closes when the SMC-50 controller enters the external bypass mode and opens when it
leaves that mode.
172 Aux1 Config — 0/12 0 Ext Brake Aux1 closes when Ext Braking command is active and opens when it is not active. R/W
DeviceLogix Aux1 is controlled by DeviceLogix program
Aux Control When an auxiliary is configured for Aux Control, a bit within the parameter Aux Control controls
the state of that auxiliary.
Network 1 With an auxiliary configured as Network 1, it is controlled over the Local Area Network (LAN) as
Relay 1.
Network 2 With an auxiliary configured as Network 2 it is controlled over the LAN as Relay 2.
Network 3 With an auxiliary configured as Network 3 it is controlled over the LAN as Relay 3.
Network 4 With an auxiliary configured as Network 4 it is controlled over the LAN as Relay 4.
Fan Control Used to control fans.Fan is turned on when the motor is running or the estimated SCR
temperature is above 50°C
Lets you invert the logic of the Aux 1 output. When disabled, it is a normally open relay output
— contact when de-energized. By enabling the invert function, the relay contact becomes a
173 Aux 1 Invert — 0/1 0 normally closed contact when de-energized. R/W
Disable Aux 1 relay output not inverted [Default] (N.O.).
Enable Aux 1 relay output inverted (N.C.) (N.C. is electrically held).
174 Aux1 On Delay Secs 0.0/10.0 0.0 NA A time delay in activating the Aux1 relay contact can be programmed. R/W
175 Aux1 Off Delay Secs 0.0/10.0 0.0 NA A time delay in de-activating the Aux1 relay contact can be programmed. R/W
Lets you configure the functionality of the Aux1 relay output on the control module based on
— the following selections.
[Normal] Aux 2 closes when start command asserted and opens when motor stops [Default].
UTS Aux 2 closes when motor reaches up to speed and opens when motor is not at speed.
Fault Aux2 closes when the SMC-50 controller enters a fault state and opens when the fault is cleared.
Aux2 closes when the SMC-50 controller detects an alarm condition and opens when alarm is
Alarm
cleared.
Ext Bypass Aux2 closes when the SMC-50 controller enters the external bypass mode and opens when it
leaves that mode.
Ext Brake Aux2 closes when Ext Braking command is active and opens when it is not active.
176 Aux2 Config — 0/12 0 R/W
DeviceLogix Aux2 is controlled by DeviceLogix program
Aux Control When an auxiliary is configured for Aux Control, a bit within the parameter Aux Control controls
the state of that auxiliary.
Network 1 With an auxiliary configured as Network 1, it is controlled over the Local Area Network (LAN) as
Relay 1.
Network 2 With an auxiliary configured as Network 2 it is controlled over the LAN as Relay 2.
Network 3 With an auxiliary configured as Network 3 it is controlled over the LAN as Relay 3.
Network 4 With an auxiliary configured as Network 4 it is controlled over the LAN as Relay 4.
Fan Control Used to control fans.Fan is turned on when the motor is running or the estimated SCR
temperature is above 50°C
Lets you invert the logic of the Aux2 output. When disabled, it is a normally open relay output
— contact when de-energized. By enabling the invert function, the relay contact becomes a
177 Aux 2 Invert — 0/1 0 normally closed contact when de-energized. R/W
Disable Aux2 relay output not inverted [Default] (N.O.).
Enable Aux2 relay output inverted (N.C.) (N.C. is electrically held.)

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 255

Appendix A Parameter Information

Table 143 - Parameter 178…185

Units Min./Max. Default Enum Text Read/Write

No. Name Description
Values Value [Default] Access
178 Aux2 On Delay Secs 0.0/10.0 0.0 NA A time delay in activating the Aux2 relay contact can be programmed. R/W
179 Aux2 Off Delay Secs 0.0/10.0 0.0 NA A time delay in de-activating the Aux2 relay contact can be programmed. R/W
When an Auxiliary Relay output is configured for "Aux Control" a bit within this parameter
— controls the state of the auxiliary.
Aux 1 Bit 0 - Control Module Aux Relay 1
Aux 2 Bit 1 - Control Module Aux Relay 2
Aux 7-1 Bit 2 - Expansion Port 7 Aux Relay 1
Aux 7-2 Bit 3- Expansion Port 7 Aux Relay 2
Aux 7-3 Bit 4- Expansion Port 7 Aux Relay 3
Aux 7-4 Bit 5- Expansion Port 7 Aux Relay 4
Aux 8-1 Bit 6 - Expansion Port 8 Aux Relay 1
180 Aux Control — 0 0 R/W
Aux 8-2 Bit 7- Expansion Port 8 Aux Relay 2
Aux 8-3 Bit 8- Expansion Port 8 Aux Relay 3
Aux 8-4 Bit 9- Expansion Port 8 Aux Relay 4
Aux 9-1 Bit 10 - Expansion Port 9 Aux Relay 1
Aux 9-2 Bit 11 - Expansion Port 9 Aux Relay 2
Aux 9-3 Bit 12 - Expansion Port 9 Aux Relay 3
Aux 9-4 Bit 13 - Expansion Port 9 Aux Relay 4
Bit 14 - Reserved
Bit 15 - Reserved
[English]
French
Spanish
Lets you configure the language that is displayed for any interface device. The selected
181 Language — 0 0 Italian R/W
language is the same for all devices connected to the SMC-50 controller.
German
Portuguese
Mandrin
The time between asserting a start command with valid 3-phase applied and the SMC-50
182 Start Delay Secs 0/30 0 NA controller starting the motor can be delayed by setting the "Start Delay". If a stop is asserted R/W
during the delay period, the start is cancelled.
This parameter is used to force the starting profile to complete its entire time ramp period. This
— ability can help to avoid conditions where an up-to-speed is sensed before the motor is
183 Timed Start — 0/1 0 actually up to speed. R/W
Disable Complete starting mode when up-to-speed detected.
Enable Complete starting mode when ramp time expires.
Lets you manually adjust the threshold for the controller’s voltage (notch) shutoff detection
level. Because this parameter has the potential to modify the SCR operational control scheme,
it is important that any change made be in small (several percent) increments. Do NOT disable
184 V Shutoff Level % 0/100 25 NA (0) this parameter and Parameter 185 (I Shutoff Level) at the same time or SCR firing (motor R/W
control) instability can occur. Contact Rockwell Automation Technical Support for assistance.
When running high-efficiency motors with Energy Saver, this value may need to be adjusted
downward.
Lets you adjust the level at which the SMC-50 controller expects to see current or the level of
current which the SMC-50 controller determines the SCR has turned off. A common reason for
increasing this value is to compensate for the inability of the control to sense a voltage notch
due to significant LINE voltage noise or LINE distortion. Because this parameter has the
185 I Shutoff Level % 0/37 0 NA R/W
potential to modify the SCR operational control scheme, it is important that any change made
is done in small (several percent) increments.Do NOT disable (0) this parameter and Parameter
184 (V Shutoff Level) at the same time or SCR firing (motor control) instability can occur.
Contact Rockwell Automation Technical Support for assistance.

256 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Parameter Information Appendix A

Table 144 - Parameter 186…204

Units Min./Max. Default Enum Text Read/Write

No. Name Description
Values Value [Default] Access
The SMC-50 controller can determine if the motor is up-to-speed (UTS). If the SMC-50
controller encounters a problem detecting motor UTS, this parameter can be modified by
you to compensate. If the SMC-50 controller is detecting the UTS condition to soon (for
186 UTS Level % 0/100 75 NA example, abrupt speed change), this number should be increased (this typically occurs on R/W
high efficiency motors). If the SMC-50 controller is detecting the UTS condition to late or not
at all (display does not indicate At Speed), this number should be lowered. Contact Rockwell
Automation Technical Support for assistance.
Lets you set the motor winding voltage level (as a percentage of line voltage) at which the
187 Stall Level % 0/100 75 NA R/W
SMC-50 controller considers the motor stalled.
Lets you configure the time period after the start maneuver start time that the motor has to
188 Stall Delay Secs 0.0/30.0 10.0 NA R/W
reach UTS, or else a stall fault occurs.
Lets you set the change in the notch position at which the SMC-50 controller considers the
189 Stall Position % 0/100 75 NA R/W
motor stalled.
190 Notch Maximum Lets you change the maximum notch value during pump stop.(1)
(Pump Control) — 50.0/70.0 60.0 NA R/W
Lets you make a manual adjustment to an internal value used for notch control gain, which
191 Notch Position % 40.0/100.0 87.5 NA R/W
impacts the SMC-50 controller starting control algorithm.(1)
For applications where fast current spikes or overload conditions (>120% of the controller
rating), you can use this parameter to reduce the cycling between SCR and bypass control
192 Bypass Delay Secs 1/15 1 NA R/W
modes on units with internal bypass. This parameter causes a time delay in closing the
bypass contactor.
Lets you enable the controller’s energy saving control scheme, which opens the "notch"
(reduces power applied) to lightly loaded motors thereby reducing the motor terminal
193 Energy Saver — 0.00/1.00 0.00 — voltage and winding losses. This value should be set between the no/light load value and R/W
the full/heavy load value of Parameter 17. Set Parameter 193=0 to disable Energy Saver
mode.
Enables the controller's tuning algorithms to analyze the load and supply and adjust
— parameters for easy set up and optimum performance.
194 Forced Tuning — 0/1 1 R/W
FALSE Do not run tuning algorithm (was already run or disabled by user).
TRUE Run tuning algorithm at next start command [Default].
Lets you read/view the motor stator resistance value that was measured during the tuning
195 Stator R Ohms 0.00/50.00 0.00 NA R
process.
Lets you read/view the motor total load resistance that was measured during the tuning
196 Total R Ohms 0.00/50.00 0.00 NA R
process.
197 Coupling Factor — 0.00/10.00 0.00 NA This is a coefficient inserted by the controller during the tuning process and viewable by you. R
0.00/
198 Inductance mH 0.00 NA Lets you read/view the motor inductance that was measured during the tuning process. R
1000.00
199 Speed PGain — 1/10000 1000
200 Transient Mag — 0.00/2.00 0.90
NA Lets you adjust the gain factor used in speed measurement algorithms.(1) R/W
201 Transient Zero — 0.00/10.00 5.00
202 Transient Gain — 0.00/4.00 1.00
203 Ping Degree — 0.0/180.0 50.0 NA R/W
Timing parameter used in speed measurement algorithms.(1)
204 Pings — 0/20 2 NA R/W
(1) This parameter is not typically modified and it is recommended that you contact Rockwell Automation Technical Support for assistance before attempting to do so.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 257

Appendix A Parameter Information

Table 145 - Parameter 205…226

Units Min./Max. Default Enum Text Read/Write

No. Name Description
Values Value [Default] Access
205 0
206 10
207 20
208 30
209 40
210 Phase Shift 50 — -360/360 0 NA Timing parameters used in speed measurement algorithms. (1) R/W
211 60
212 70
213 80
214 90
215 100
216 Board Temp ºC -25/100 20 NA Displays the internal temperature of the SMC control module. R
None
Input/Output
Analog I/O
217 Exp 7 Config — 0/5 0 (future) Displays the type of expansion board plugged into Expansion Port 7. R
GndF/PTC/CT
DIP Switch
Seq Start (future)
None
Input/Output
Analog I/O
218 Exp 8 Config — 0/5 0 (future) Displays the type of expansion board plugged into Expansion Port 8. R
GndF/PTC/CT
DIP Switch
Seq Start (future)
None
Input/Output
Analog I/O
219 Exp 9 Config — 0/5 0 (future) Displays the type of expansion board plugged into Expansion Port 9. R
GndF/PTC/CT
DIP Switch
Seq Start (future)
Lets you configure the time period the motor winding heating algorithm is
220 Heating Time Secs 0/1000 0 NA R/W
active after asserting the motor heating command.
Lets you configure the amount of current applied during the motor winding
221 Heating Level % 0/100 0 NA R/W
heating process.
120V Lets you configure the voltage applied to the internal SMC-50 controller cooling
222 Fan Config — 0/2 0 240V fans. If configured for Auto Detect, the SMC-50 controller uses the control R/W
[Auto Detect] voltage applied to it as the level and configure the fans to work at that level.
[120V] Displays the voltage configuration of the fans. If Auto Detect was selected in the
223 Fan Connection — 0/1 0 R
240V Fan Config parameter, this displays the result of the Auto Detect process.
Displays the line frequency of the three phase voltage applied to the SMC-50
224 Line Frequency Hz 0/100 0 NA R
controller at terminals L1, L2, and L3.
Lets you configure the time period that the supplied line voltage frequency must
exceed Freq High F Lvl parameter value before causing a Freq High fault. The
225 Freq High F Dly Secs 0.1/99.0 0.1 NA R
Freq High bit must be set in the Starter Fault En parameter for the fault to
activate.
Lets you configure the time period that the supplied line voltage frequency must
226 Freq High A Dly Secs 0.1/99.0 0.1 NA exceed Freq High A Lvl parameter value before causing a Freq High alarm. The R
Freq High bit must be set in the Starter Alarm parameter for the fault to activate.
(1) This parameter is not typically modified and it is recommended that you contact Rockwell Automation Technical Support for assistance before attempting to do so.

258 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Parameter Information Appendix A

Table 146 - Parameter 227…230

Units Min./Max. Default Enum Text Read/Write

No. Name Description
Values Value [Default] Access
Lets you configure the time period that the supplied line voltage frequency must drop
227 Freq Low F Dly Secs 0.1/99.0 0.1 NA below Freq Low F Lvl parameter value before causing a Freq Low fault. The Freq Low bit R
must be set in the Starter Fault En parameter for the fault to activate.
Lets you configure the time period that the supplied line voltage frequency must drop
228 Freq Low A Dly Secs 0.1/99.0 0.1 NA below Freq Low A Lvl parameter value before causing a Freq Low alarm. The Freq Low bit R
must be set in the Starter Alarm parameter for the fault to activate.
Lets you force all the Control Module parameters to default values. This has no impact on
— any option module(s) installed. Each Option module has its own associated Parameter
Mgmt parameter
229 Parameter Mgmt — 0/1 0 R/W
[Ready] Waiting for command to set factory defaults
Factory Default Command for SMC-50 controller to set all Control Module Writable Parameters to factory
default values. This command does not impact Option Module parameters.
1 1 [Overload]
0 0 Underload
0 0 MWatts Over
0 0 MWatts Under
0 0 +MVAR Over
0 0 +MVAR Under
0 0 -MVAR Over
0 0 -MVAR Under
0 0 MVA Under
0 0 MVA Over
0 0 Curr Imbal Lets you enable Motor related faults that can be detected by the SMC-50 controller.
0 0 Jam 0 = Fault Disabled
230 Motor Fault En — R/W
0 0 Stall 1 = Fault Enabled
0 0 Starts/Hr [Default]
0 0 PM Hours
0 0 PM Starts
0 0 [Power Qual]
0 0 [Open Load]
0 0 THD I
1 1 Lead PF Un
1 1 Lead PF Ov
0 0 Lag PF Un
0 0 Lag PF Ov
0 0 Locked Rotor

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 259

Appendix A Parameter Information

Table 147 - Parameter 231…240

Min./Max. Default Read/Write

No. Name Units Enum Text Description
Values Value Access
0 0 Overload
0 0 Underload
0 0 MWatts Over
0 0 MWatts Under
0 0 +MVAR Over
0 0 +MVAR Under
0 0 -MVAR Over
0 0 -MVAR Under
0 0 MVA Under
0 0 MVA Over
0 0 Curr Imbal Lets you enable Motor related alarms that can be detected by the SMC-50
controller.
0 0 Jam
231 Motor Alarm En — 0 = Fault Disabled R/W
0 0 Stall
1 = Fault Enabled
0 0 Starts/Hr
[All Disabled as Default]
0 0 PM Hours
0 0 PM Starts
0 0 Power Qual
0 0 Open Load
0 0 THD I
0 0 Lead PF Un
0 0 Lead PF Ov
0 0 Lag PF Un
0 0 Lag PF Ov
0 0 Locked Rotor
Lets you enter a value for the Consumed Reactive Power Over Fault Level (+MVAR
Ov F Lvl). If the current actual +MVAR value is greater than the +MVAR OV F Lvl for
232 +MVAR Ov F Lvl MVAR 0.000/1000.000 0.000 NA R/W
a time period greater than that defined by +MVAR Ov F Dly, a +MVAR Ov Fault is
signaled.(1)
Lets you enter a time value for the +MVAR Over Fault delay. If the current actual
value of Consumed Reactive Power (+MVAR) is greater than the +MVAR OV F Lvl
233 +MVAR Ov F Dly Secs 0.1 0.1 NA R/W
for a time period greater than that defined by +MVAR Ov F Dly, a +MVAR Ov Fault
is signaled.(1)
Lets you enter a value for the Consumed Reactive Power Over Alarm Level (+MVAR
OV A Lvl). If the current actual +MVAR value is greater than the +MVAR OV A Lvl for
234 +MVAR Ov A Lvl MVAR 0.000/1000.000 0.000 NA R/W
a time period greater than that defined by +MVAR Ov A Dly, a +MVAR Ov Alarm is
signaled.(1)
Lets you enter a time value for the +MVAR Over Alarm Delay (+MVAR Ov A Dly). If
the current actual value of Consumed Reactive Power (+MVAR) is greater than the
235 +MVAR Ov A Dly Secs 0.1/99.0 0.1 NA R/W
+MVAR Ov A Level for a time period greater than that defined by +MVAR Ov A Dly,
a +MVAR Ov Alarm is signaled. (1)
Lets you enter a value for the Consumed Reactive Power Under Fault Level (+MVAR
Un F Lvl). If the current actual +MVAR value is less than the +MVAR Un F Level for a
236 +MVAR Un F Lvl MVAR 0.000/1000.000 0.000 NA R/W
time period greater than that defined by +MVAR Un F Dly, a +MVAR Un Fault is
signaled.(1)
Lets you enter a time value for the +MVAR Under Fault delay. If the Consumed
237 +MVAR Un F Dly Secs 0.1/99.0 0.1 NA Reactive Power (+MVAR) is less than the +MVAR Un F Level for a time period R/W
greater than that defined by +MVAR Un F Dly, a +MVAR Un Fault is signaled. (1)
Lets you enter a value for the Consumed Reactive Power Under Alarm Level
(+MVAR Un A Lvl). If the current actual value of Consumed Reactive Power
238 +MVAR Un A Lvl MVAR 0.000/1000.000 0.000 NA R/W
(+MVAR) is less than the +MVAR Un A Level for a time period greater than that
defined by +MVAR Un A Dly a +MVAR Un Alarm is signaled.(1)
Lets you enter a time value for the +MVAR Under Alarm Delay (+MVAR Un A Dly).
If the current actual value of Consumed Reactive Power (+MVAR) is less than the
239 +MVAR Un A Dly Secs 0.1/99.0 0.1 NA R/W
+MVAR Un A Level for a time period greater than that defined by +MVAR Un A Dly,
a +MVAR Un Alarm is signaled. (1)
Lets you enter a value for the MVA Over Fault Level (MVA Ov F Lvl). If the current
240 MVA Ov F Lvl MVA 0.000/1000.000 0.000 NA actual value of Apparent Power (MVA) is greater than the MVA Ov F Lvl for a time R/W
period greater than that defined by MVA Ov F Dly, a MVA Ov Fault is signaled. (1)
(1) To implement an Alarm or Fault, the appropriate bit in the Motor Fault En, Parameter 230, or Motor Alarm En, Parameter 231, must also be set.

260 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Parameter Information Appendix A

Table 148 - Parameter 241…253

ENUM Text is not applicable for the parameters in this table.

Min./Max. Default Read/Write

No. Name Units Description
Values Value Access
Lets you enter a time value for the Apparent Power Over Fault Delay (MVA Ov F Dly). If the current
241 MVA Ov F Dly Secs 0.1/99.0 0.1 actual value of Apparent Power (MVA) is greater than the MVA Ov F Lvl for a time period greater than R/W
that defined by MVA Ov F Dly, a MVA Ov Fault is signaled. (1)
Lets you enter a value for the MVA Over Alarm Level (MVA Ov A Lvl). If the current actual value of the
242 MVA Ov A Lvl MVA 0.000/1000.000 0.00 Apparent Power (MVA) is greater than the MVA Ov A Lvl for a time period greater than that defined by R/W
MVA Ov A Dly, a MVA Ov Alarm is signaled.(1)
Lets you enter a time value for the Apparent Power Over Alarm Delay (MVA Ov A Dly). If the current
243 MVA Ov A Dly Secs 0.1/99.0 0.1 actual value of the Apparent Power (MVA) is greater than the MVA Ov A Lvl for a time period greater R/W
than that defined by MVA Ov A Dly, a MVA Ov Alarm is signaled. (1)
Lets you enter a value for the MVA Under Fault Level (MVA Un F Lvl). If the current actual value of the
244 MVA Un F Lvl MVA 0.000/1000.000 0.00 Apparent Power (MVA) is less than the MVA Un F Lvl for a time period greater than that defined by R/W
MVA Un F Dly, a MVA Un Fault is signaled. (1)
Lets you enter a time value for the Apparent Power Under Fault Delay (MVA Un F Dly). If the current
245 MVA Un F Dly Secs 0.1/99.0 0.1 actual value of the Apparent Power (MVA) is less than the MVA Un F Lvl for a time period greater than R/W
that defined by MVA Un F Dly, a MVA Un Fault is signaled.(1)
Lets you enter a value for the MVA Under Alarm Level (MVA Un A Lvl). If the current actual value of the
246 MVA Un A Lvl MVA 0.000/1000.000 0.00 Apparent Power (MVA) is less than the MVA Un A Lvl for a time period greater than that defined by R/W
MVA Un A Dly, a MVA Un Alarm is signaled. (1)
Lets you enter a time value for the Apparent Power Under Alarm Delay (MVA Un A Dly). If the current
247 MVA Un A Dly Secs 0.1/99.0 0.1 actual value of the Apparent Power (MVA) is less than the MVA Un A Lvl for a time period greater than R/W
that defined by MVA Un A Dly, a MVA Un Alarm is signaled. (1)
Lets you enter a value for the Leading Power Factor Over Fault Level (Lead PF Ov F Lvl). If the current
248 Lead PF Ov F Lvl — 0.00/1.00 0.00 actual Power Factor value is leading more than the Lead PF Ov F Lvl for a time period greater than that R/W
defined by Lead PF Ov F Dly, a Lead PD Ov Fault is signaled. (1)
Lets you enter a time value for the Leading Power Factor Over Fault Delay (Lead PF Ov F Dly). If the
249 Lead PF Ov F Dly Secs 0.1/99.0 0.1 current actual Power Factor value is leading more than the Lead PF Ov F Lvl for a period greater than R/W
that defined by Lead PF Ov F Dly, a Lead PD Ov fault is signaled. (1)
Lets you enter a value for the Leading Power Factor Over Alarm Level (Lead PF Ov A Lvl). If the current
250 Lead PF Ov A Lvl — 0.00/1.00 0.00 actual Power Factor value is leading more than the Lead PF Ov A Lvl for a period greater than that R/W
defined by Lead PF Ov A Dly, a Lead PD Ov alarm is signaled.(1)
Lets you enter a time value for the Leading Power Factor Over Alarm Delay (Lead PF Ov A Dly). If the
251 Lead PF Ov A Dly Secs 0.1/99.0 0.1 current actual Power Factor value is leading more than the Lead PF Ov A Lvl for a period greater than R/W
that defined by Lead PF Ov A Dly, a Lead PD Ov alarm is signaled.(1)
Lets you enter a value for the Leading Power Factor Under Fault Level (Lead PF Un F Lvl). If the current
252 Lead PF Un F Lvl — 0.00/1.00 0.00 actual Power Factor value is leading less than the Lead PF Un A Lvl for a time period greater than that R/W
defined by Lead PF Un A Dly, a Lead PD Un Fault is signaled.(1)
Lets you enter a time value for the Leading Power Factor Under Fault Delay (Lead PF Un F Dly). If the
253 Lead PF Un F Dly Secs 0.1/99.0 0.1 current actual Power Factor value is leading less than the Lead PF Un A Lvl for a time period greater R/W
than that defined by Lead PF Un A Dly, a Lead PD Un Fault is signaled. (1)
(1) To implement an Alarm or Fault, the appropriate bit in the Motor Fault En, Parameter 230, or Motor Alarm En, Parameter 231, must also be set.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 261

Appendix A Parameter Information

Table 149 - Parameter 254…263

ENUM Text is not applicable for the parameters in this table.

Units Min./Max. Default Read/Write

No. Name Description
Values Value Access
Lets you enter a value for the Leading Power Factor Under Alarm Level (Lead PF Un A Lvl). If the current actual
254 Lead PF Un A Lvl — 0.00/1.00 0.00 Power Factor value is leading less than the Lead PF Un A Lvl for a time period greater than that defined by R/W
Lead PF Un A Dly, a Lead PD Un Alarm is signaled.(1)
Lets you enter a time value for the Leading Power Factor Under Alarm Delay (Lead PF Un A Dly). If the current
255 Lead PF Un A Dly Secs 0.1/99.0 0.1 actual Power Factor value is leading less than the Lead PF Un A Lvl for a time period greater than that defined R/W
by Lead PF Un A Dly, a Lead PD Un Alarm is signaled.(1)
Lets you enter a value for the Lagging Power Factor Over Fault Level (Lag PF Ov F Lvl). If the current actual
256 Lag PF Ov F Lvl — -1.00/0.00 0.00 Power Factor value lags more than the Lag PF Ov F Lvl for a time period greater than that defined by Lag PF R/W
Ov F Dly, a Lag PF Ov Fault is signaled.(1)
Lets you enter a time value for the Lagging Power Factor Over Fault Delay (Lag PF Ov F Dly). If the current
257 Lag PF Ov F Dly Secs 0.1/99.0 0.1 actual Power Factor value lags more than the Lag PF Ov F Lvl for a time period greater than that defined by R/W
Lag PF Ov F Dly, a Lag PF Ov Fault is signaled. (1)
Lets you enter a value for the Lagging Power Factor Over Alarm Level (Lag PF Ov A Lvl). If the current actual
258 Lag PF Ov A Lvl — -1.00/0.00 0.00 Power Factor value lags more than the Lag PF Ov A Lvl for a time period greater than that defined by Lag PF R/W
Ov A Dly, a Lag PF Ov Alarm is signaled. (1)
Lets you enter a time value for the Lagging Power Factor Over Alarm Delay (Lag PF Ov A Dly). If the current
259 Lag PF Ov A Dly Secs 0.1/99.0 0.1 actual Power Factor value lags more than the Lag PF Ov A Lvl for a time period greater than that defined by R/W
Lag PF Ov A Dly, a Lag PF Ov Alarm is signaled. (1)
Lets you enter a value for the Lagging Power Factor Under Fault Level (Lag PF Un F Lvl). If the current actual
260 Lag PF Un F Lvl — -1.00/0.00 0.00 Power Factor value lags less than the Lag PF Un F Lvl for a time period greater than that defined by Lag PF Un R/W
F Dly, a Lag PF Un Fault is signaled. (1)
Lets you enter a time value for the Lagging Power Factor Under Fault Delay (Lag PF Un F Dly). If the current
261 Lag PF Un F Dly Secs 0.1/99.0 0.1 actual Power Factor value lags less than the Lag PF Un F Lvl for a time period greater than that defined by Lag R/W
PF Un F Dly, a Lag PF Un Fault is signaled. (1)
Lets you enter a value for the Lagging Power Factor Under Alarm Level (Lag PF Un A Lvl). If the current actual
262 Lag PF Un A Lvl — -1.00/0.00 0.00 Power Factor value lags less than the Lag PF Un A Lvl for a time period greater than that defined by Lag PF Un R/W
A Dly, a Lag PF Un Alarm is signaled.(1)
Lets you enter a time value for the Lagging Power Factor Under Alarm Delay (Lag PF Un A Dly). If the current
263 Lag PF Un A Dly Secs 0.1/99.0 0.1 actual Power Factor value lags less than the Lag PF Un A Lvl for a period greater than that defined by Lag PF R/W
Un A Dly, a Lag PF Un alarm is signaled.(1)
(1) To implement an Alarm or Fault, the appropriate bit in the Motor Fault En, Parameter 230, or Motor Alarm En, Parameter 231, must also be set.

262 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Parameter Information Appendix A

Table 150 - Parameter 264…281

Units Min./Max. Default Enum Text Read/Write

No. Name Description
Values Value [Default] Access
0 0 Overload
0 0 Underload
0 0 MWatts Over
0 0 MWatts Under
0 0 +MVAR Over
0 0 +MVAR Under
0 0 -MVAR Over
0 0 -MVAR Under Lets you adjust the Motor Restart Enable conditions. Setting (=1) a bit causes the
0 0 MVA Over motor to attempt a restart after the selected event is detected. A limit to the
0 0 MVA Under number of starts attempted before a fault is signaled can be set in the Restart
0 0 Curr Imbal Attempts parameter.
0 0 Jam 0 = Do not attempt a restart after fault is cleared
264 Motor Restart En — 1 = Attempt a restart after this fault is cleared R/W
0 0 Stall
0 0 Starts/Hr NOTE: Restart attempts, Parameter 133, and Restart Delay, Parameter 134, must
0 0 PM Hours also be configured.
0 0 PM Starts
0 0 Power Qual [All Disabled as Default]
0 0 Open Load
0 0 THD I
0 0 Lead PF Un
0 0 Lead PF Ov
0 0 Lag PF Un
0 0 Lag PF Ov
0 0 Locked Rotor
265 Voltage Pn Ave Displays the average of the sum of the three phase voltages to neutral.
266 Voltage Phase A-N Displays Phase A (L1) to neutral voltage.
Volts 0/450 0 NA R
267 Voltage Phase B-N Displays Phase B (L2) to neutral voltage.
268 Voltage Phase C-N Displays Phase C (L3) to neutral voltage.
Displays the Real Power of the Phase A branch which is equal to Phase A Voltage x
269 Real Power A Phase A Current x PF.
-1000.000/ Displays the Real Power of the Phase B branch which is equal to Phase B Voltage x
270 Real Power B MW 0.000 NA R
1000.000 Phase B Current x PF.
Displays the real power of the Phase C branch which is equal to Phase C Voltage x
271 Real Power C Phase C Current x PF.
-1000.000/ Displays Real Energy (MWH) averaged over a period of time defined by Demand
272 Real Demand MW 0.000 NA R
1000.000 Period.
-1000.000/
273 Max. Real Demand MW 0.000 NA Displays the Maximum energy demand recorded since the last energy meter reset. R
1000.000
274 Reactive Power A Displays the reactive power of the Phase A branch.
275 Reactive Power B MVAR -1000.000/ 0.000 NA Displays the reactive power of the Phase B branch. R
1000.000
276 Reactive Power C Displays the reactive power of the Phase C branch.
277 Reactive Power MVAR -1000.000/ 0.000 NA Displays the total reactive power. R
1000.000
278 Reactive Energy C Displays the reactive energy being consumed by the load.
279 Reactive Energy P MVRH -1000.000/ 0.000 NA Displays the reactive energy being produced by the load. R
1000.000
280 Reactive Energy Displays the total reactive energy which is equal to Reactive Power X time.
281 Reactive Demand MVAR -1000.000/ Displays the Reactive Energy consumed or generated by the system over the
0.000 NA R
1000.000 Demand Time Period.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 263

Appendix A Parameter Information

Table 151 - Parameter 282…302

ENUM Text is not applicable for the parameters in this table.

Units Min./Max. Default Read/Write

No. Name Description
Values Value Access
-1000.000/
282 Max. Reactive Dmd MVAR 1000.000 0.000 Displays the maximum reactive energy demand recorded since the energy meters were reset R
283 Apparent Power A Displays the Apparent Power (VA) measured in the phase A branch.
-1000.000/
284 Apparent Power B MVA 0.000 Displays the VA measured in the phase B branch. R
1000.000
285 Apparent Power C Displays the VA measured in the phase C branch.
-1000.000/
286 Apparent Power MVA 0.000 Displays the total apparent power consumed (-) or produced (+) by the load. R
1000.000
-1000.000/
287 Apparent Energy MVAH 1000.000 0.000 Displays the Apparent Energy which is equal to Apparent Power x Time. R

MVA -1000.000/ Displays the total amount of Apparent Energy which is equal to MVAH x demand period
288 Apparent Demand 0.000 R
1000.000 produced or consumed by the load.
-1000.000/
289 Max. Apparent Dmd MVA 1000.000 0.000 Displays the maximum apparent demand recorded since energy meters were reset. R
290 Demand Period Mins 1/255 1 Lets you enter the time period that energy samples are taken to calculate demand. R/W
Lets you enter the number of periods that energy measurements are taken in calculating
291 Num of Periods — 1/15 1 R/W
demand.
292 Power Factor A Displays the power factor in the Phase A branch of the load circuit.
293 Power Factor B — -1.00/1.00 0.00 Displays the power factor in the Phase B branch of the load circuit. R
294 Power Factor C Displays the power factor in the Phase C branch of the load circuit.
Displays the percent current imbalance measured in the load circuit (max deviation of current
295 Current Imbal % 0/100 0.00 R
from the average of three currents / average current of three currents).
Displays the percent voltage imbalance measured in the load circuit (max deviation of voltage
296 Voltage Imbal % 0/100 0.00 R
from the average of three voltages / average current of three voltages).
Lets you enter a value for the Generated Reactive Power Over Fault Level (-MVAR Ov F Lvl). If the
-1000.000/
297 -MVAR Ov F Lvl MVAR 0.000 current actual value for Generated Reactive Power is more than the -MVAR Ov F Lvl for a period R/W
0.000 greater than that defined by -MVAR Ov F Dly, a -MVAR Ov fault is signaled.(1)
Lets you enter a time value for the Generated Reactive Power Over Fault Delay (-MVAR Ov F Dly).
298 -MVAR Ov F Dly Secs 0.1/99.0 0.1 If the current actual value for the Generated Reactive Power is more than the -MVAR Ov F Lvl for R/W
a time period greater than that defined by -MVAR Ov F Dly, a -MVAR Ov fault is signaled.(1)
Lets you enter a value for the Generated Reactive Power Over Alarm Level (-MVAR Ov A Lvl). If the
-1000.000/
299 -MVAR Ov A Lvl MVAR 0.000 current actual value for Generated Reactive Power is more than the -MVAR Ov A Lvl for a period R/W
0.000 greater than that defined by -MVAR Ov A Dly, a -MVAR Ov Alarm is signaled. (1)
Lets you enter a time value for the Generated Reactive Power Over Alarm Delay (-MVAR Ov A
300 -MVAR Ov A Dly Secs 0.1/99.0 0.1 Dly). If the current actual value for the Generated Reactive Power is more than the -MVAR Ov A R/W
Lvl for a period greater than that defined by -MVAR Ov A Dly, a -MVAR Ov alarm is signaled.(1)
Lets you enter a value for the Generated Reactive Power Under Fault Level (-MVAR Un F Lvl). If
-1000.000/
301 -MVAR Un F Lvl MVAR 0.000 the current actual value for Generated Reactive Power is less than the -MVAR Un F Lvl for a period R/W
0.000 greater than that defined by -MVAR Un F Dly, a -MVAR Un Fault is signaled. (1)
Lets you enter a time value for the Generated Reactive Power Under Fault Delay (-MVAR Un F
302 -MVAR Un F Dly Secs 0.1/99.0 0.1 Dly). If the current actual value for Generated Reactive Power is less than the -MVAR Un F Lvl for R/W
a period greater than that defined by -MVAR Un F Dly, a -MVAR Un Fault is signaled. (1)
(1) To implement an Alarm or Fault, the appropriate bit in the Motor Fault En, Parameter 230, or Motor Alarm En, Parameter 231, must also be set.

264 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Parameter Information Appendix A

Table 152 - Parameter 303…311

Units Min./Max. Default Enum Text Read/Write

No. Name Description
Values Value [Default] Access
Lets you enter a value for the Generated Reactive Power Under Alarm Level (-MVAR Un A
303 -MVAR Un A Lvl MVAR -1000.000/ 0.000 NA Lvl). If the current actual value for Generated Reactive Power is less than the -MVAR Un A Lvl R/W
0.000 for a period greater than that defined by -MVAR Un A Dly, a MVAR Un Alarm is signaled. (1)
Lets you enter a time value for the Generated Reactive Power Under Alarm Delay (-MVAR Un
A Dly). If the current actual value for Generated Reactive Power is less than the -MVAR Un A
304 -MVAR Un A Dly Secs 0.1/99.0 0.1 NA R/W
Lvl for a period greater than that defined by -MVAR Un A Dly, a -MVAR Un Alarm is
signaled.(1)
305 Starting Torque Lets you enter Starting Torque value required for a torque start operation.
% 0/300 100 NA R/W
306 Starting Torque 2 Lets you enter an alternate Starting Torque required for a torque start operation.
Lets you enter Slow Speed Reference Gain value (SS Ref Gain) used to adjust slow speed
307 SS Ref Gain operation.(2)
— 0.10/2.00 1.00 NA R/W
Lets you enter Slow Speed Transfer Gain value (SS Trans Gain) used to adjust slow speed
308 SS Trans Gain operation.(2)
Displays the status of all the digital inputs for the SMC-50 controller.
Input 1 Bit 0 - Displays status of Control Module Input #1.
Input 2 Bit 1 - Displays status of Control Module Input #2.
Input 7-1 Bit 2 - Displays status of Control Module Port 7, 150-SM4 Option Module Input #1.
Input 7-2 Bit 3 - Displays status of Control Module Port 7, 150-SM4 Option Module Input #2.
Input 7-3 Bit 4- Displays status of Control Module Port 7, 150-SM4 Option Module Input #3.
Input 7-4 Bit 5- Displays status of Control Module Port 7, 150-SM4 Option Module Input #4.
Input 8-1 Bit 6 - Displays status of Control Module Port 8, 150-SM4 Option Module Input #1.
309 Input Status — 0/65535 0 R
Input 8-2 Bit 7- Displays status of Control Module Port 8, 150-SM4 Option Module Input #2.
Input 8-3 Bit 8- Displays status of Control Module Port 8, 150-SM4 Option Module Input #3.
Input 8-4 Bit 9- Displays status of Control Module Port 8, 150-SM4 Option Module Input #4.
Input 9-1 Bit 10 - Displays status of Control Module Port 9, 150-SM4 Option Module Input #1.
Input 9-2 Bit 11 - Displays status of Control Module Port 9, 150-SM4 Option Module Input #2.
Input 9-3 Bit 12 - Displays status of Control Module Port 9, 150-SM4 Option Module Input #3.
Input 9-4 Bit 13 - Displays status of Control Module Port 9, 150-SM4 Option Module Input #4.
Bit 14 and 15 - Reserved.
Lets you enter a value for the Locked Rotor Alarm Level (Locked Rtr A Lvl). The locked rotor
value represents the motor peak phase current to the load that if exceeded for the period
310 Locked Rotor A Lvl %FLC 400/1000 600 NA R/W
defined in Locked Rtr A Delay signals a fault. The Locked Rotor bit in the Motor Alarm En
parameter must be set to signal a alarm. (1)
The time period that the peak phase current exceeds the Locked Rtr F Level to signal a fault.
311 Locked Rotor A Dly Secs 0.1/100.0 0.1 NA R/W
You must set the Locked Rotor bit in the Motor Fault En parameter to enable a fault.(1)
(1) To implement an Alarm or Fault, the appropriate bit in the Motor Fault En, Parameter 230, or Motor Alarm En, Parameter 231, must also be set.
(2) This parameter is rarely adjusted. Contact Rockwell Automation Technical Support for further information.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 265

Appendix A Parameter Information

Table 153 - Parameters 312…322

Units Min./Max. Default Read/Write

No. Name Enum Text Description
Values Value Access
Displays an image of the DPI product command required for DPI communications.
1 – Coast / Inhibit
Stop
0 – No Action
1 – Start
Start
0 – No Action
1 – Stop Maneuver / Inhibit
Jog
0 – No Action
1 – Clear Faults
Clear Fault
0 – No Action
1 – Run at Slow Speed
Slow Speed
0 – No Action
1 – Enable Emergency Run Mode
Emer Run
0 – Disable Emergency Run Mode
1 – Enable Motor Winding Heater
Motor Heater
312 Product — 0/65535 0 0 – Disable Motor Winding Heater R
Command
Reserved 0
Reserved 0
Reserved 0
Reserved 0
1 – Use the Network #1 - #4 bits
Aux Enable
0 – Ignore the Network #1 - #4 bits
1 – Closes any Output Configured for “Network 1”
Network_1
0 – Opens any Output Configured for “Network 1”
1 – Closes any Output Configured for “Network 2”
Network_2
0 – Opens any Output Configured for “Network 2”
1 – Closes any Output Configured for “Network 3”
Network_3
0 – Opens any Output Configured for “Network 3”
1 – Closes any Output Configured for “Network 4”
Network_4
0 – Opens any Output Configured for “Network 4”
The percentage of motor current imbalance above which the SMC-50 controller
313 Rebalance Level % 0/100 0 NA R/W
rebalances the motor current
The peak value of the Phase A line to neutral voltage during the motor start, run, and stop
314 Va Peak Volt 0/15000 0 NA R
cycle. The value resets to 0 when the motor starts.
The peak value of the Phase B line to neutral voltage during the motor start, run, and stop
315 Vb Peak Volt 0/15000 0 NA R
cycle.The value resets to 0 when the motor starts.
The peak value of the Phase C line to neutral voltage during the motor start, run, and stop
316 Vc Peak Volt 0/15000 0 NA R
cycle. The value resets to 0 when the motor starts.
The peak value of the Phase A current during the motor start, run, and stop cycle. The
317 Ia Peak Amps 0/15000 0 NA R
value resets to 0 when the motor starts.
The peak value of the Phase B current during the motor start, run, and stop cycle. The
318 Ib Peak Amps 0/15000 0 NA R
value resets to 0 when the motor starts.
The peak value of the Phase C current during the motor start, run, and stop cycle. The
319 Ic Peak Amps 0/15000 0 NA R
value resets to 0 when the motor starts.
Snapshot of the Phase A-B voltage when a fault occurs. The value is overwritten if a
320 SSVolts Phas A-B Volt 0/700 0 NA R
subsequent fault occurs
Snapshot of the Phase B-C voltage when a fault occurs. The value is overwritten if a
321 SSVolts Phas B-C Volt 0/700 0 NA R
subsequent fault occurs.
Snapshot of the Phase C-A voltage when a fault occurs. The value is overwritten if a
322 SSVolts Phas C-A Volt 0/700 0 NA R
subsequent fault occurs.

266 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Parameter Information Appendix A

Table 154 - Parameter 323…333

ENUM Text is not applicable for the parameters in this table.

Units Min./Max. Default Read/Write

No. Name Description
Values Value Access
323 SSCurrent Amps 0/15000 0 Snapshot of the Phase A current when a fault occurs. The value is overwritten if a subsequent fault occurs. R
Phas A
SSCurrent
324 Phas B Amps 0/15000 0 Snapshot of the Phase B current when a fault occurs. The value is overwritten if a subsequent fault occurs. R

325 SSCurrent Amps 0/15000 0 Snapshot of the Phase C current when a fault occurs. The value is overwritten if a subsequent fault occurs. R
Phas C
326 SSPower Factor — -1.00/1.00 0 Snapshot of the Motor Power Factor when a fault occurs. The value is overwritten if a subsequent fault occurs. R
327 SSMtr Thrm %MT 0/200 0 Snapshot of the Motor Thermal Usage when a fault occurs. The value is overwritten if a subsequent fault occurs. R
Usage U
328 SSMotor Speed % 0/100 0 Snapshot of the Motor Speed when a fault occurs. The value is overwritten if a subsequent fault occurs. R
Snapshot of the average voltage Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) when a fault occurs. The value is overwritten if
329 SSTHD Vave % 0.0/1000.0 0 R
a subsequent fault occurs,
Snapshot of the average current Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) when a fault occurs. The value is overwritten if
330 SSTHD Iave % 0.0/1000.0 0 R
a subsequent fault occurs.
Snapshot of the product status when a fault occurs. The value is overwritten if a subsequent fault occurs. R
1 – Ready
0 – Not Ready
1 – Power Applied to Motor (Gating SCRs or Bypass closed)
0 – Power NOT Applied to Motor
1 – ABC Phasing
0 – CBA Phasing
1 – 3-phase is valid
0 – No valid 3-phase detected
1 – Performing a Start Maneuver (slow speed not included)
0 – Not Performing a Start Maneuver
1 – Performing a Stop Maneuver (coast to stop not included)
0 – Not Performing a Stop Maneuver
331 SSProduct — 0/65535 0 1 – Alarm Present
Status 0 – No Alarm Present
1 – Fault Condition Exists and hasn’t been cleared
0 – No Fault Condition
1 – Full Voltage Applied (Bypass or full SCR conduction)
0 – Not Full Voltage Applied
1 – Start/Isolate Contactor Enabled
0 – Start/Isolate Contactor Disabled
1 – Bypass Contactor Enabled
0 – Bypass Contactor Disabled
1 indicates that the SMC is ready to accept a Start command. The device is not faulted or in the process of
stopping, starting or jogging.
Always 0
Control Module Input #1 Status. 1 = Input Closed
Control Module Input #2 Status. 1 = Input Closed
Snapshot of the internal temperature of the SMC control module when a fault occurs. The value is overwritten if
332 SSBoard Temp degC -25/100 20 R
a subsequent fault occurs
333 SSLine Snapshot of the line frequency of the three phase voltage when a fault occurs. The value is overwritten if a
HZ 0/100 0 R
Frequency subsequent fault occurs

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 267

Appendix A Parameter Information

Table 155 - Parameter 334…346

Unit data is not valid for the parameters in this table.

Min./Max. Default Enum Text Read/Write

No. Name Units Description
Values Value [Default] Access
Volt Unbal
all Overvoltage Modifies the Auto Restarting of the selected faults so that the restart is attempted
334 Restart Auto — — R/W
disabled Undervoltage when the fault condition is removed rather than after a fixed time delay.
Line Loss
-2147483648…
335 DLX Input 1 — 0 NA General-purpose parameter used as an input to the DeviceLogix Engine. R/W
2147483647
-2147483648…
336 DLX Input 2 — 0 NA General-purpose parameter used as an input to the DeviceLogix Engine. R/W
2147483647
General-purpose datalink used to select another parameter within the SMC-50
337 DLX DL Input 1 — 0 / 159999 1 NA R/W
controller as an input to the DeviceLogix Engine.
General-purpose datalink used to select another parameter within the SMC-50
338 DLX DL Input 2 — 0 / 159999 1 NA R/W
controller as an input to the DeviceLogix Engine.
General-purpose datalink used to select another parameter within the SMC-50
339 DLX DL Input 3 — 0 / 159999 1 NA R/W
controller as an input to the DeviceLogix Engine.
General-purpose datalink used to select another parameter within the SMC-50
340 DLX DL Input 4 — 0 / 159999 1 NA R/W
controller as an input to the DeviceLogix Engine.
General-purpose datalink used to select another parameter within the SMC-50
341 DLX DL Input 5 — 0 / 159999 1 NA R/W
controller as an input to the DeviceLogix Engine.
General-purpose datalink used to select another parameter within the SMC-50
342 DLX DL Input 6 — 0 / 159999 1 NA R/W
controller as an input to the DeviceLogix Engine.
-2147483648… General-purpose parameter that can be written by the DeviceLogix engine and
343 DLX Output 1 — 0 NA R
2147483647 monitored from a HIM or network device.
-2147483648… General-purpose parameter that can be written by the DeviceLogix engine and
344 DLX Output 2 — 0 NA R
2147483647 monitored from a HIM or network device.
Ready Lets you enable or disable the DeviceLogix engine. Once the "Enable" or "Disable"
345 DLX Command — — — Enable R/W
command has been executed the parameter automatically reverts back to "Ready".
Disable
Enable
346 DLX Status — — — Indicates the current state of the DeviceLogix engine. R
Disable
— Allows choice of Motor Load or Resistive Heater Load
347 Load Type — 0/1 0 [Motor] Motor Load R/W
Resistive Resistive Heater Load
— Allows selection of Source for Resistive Heater Output Voltage
[Output V Ref] Output Voltage Reference Parameter
P7 In1 Analog Input #1 from 150-SM3 option module in Expansion Port 7
P7 In2 Analog Input #2 from 150-SM3 option module in Expansion Port 7
P8 In1 Analog Input #1 from 150-SM3 option module in Expansion Port 8
348 Ref Source -- 0/8 0 R/W
P8 In2 Analog Input #2 from 150-SM3 option module in Expansion Port 8
P9 In1 Analog Input #1 from 150-SM3 option module in Expansion Port 9
P9 In2 Analog Input #2 from 150-SM3 option module in Expansion Port 9
DLX Output 1 DeviceLogix Output #1
DLX Output 2 DeviceLogix Output #2
349 Output V Ref % 1/100 1 N/A Parameter that can be set from 1% to 100% output voltage for Resistive Heating Mode. R/W
350 Slow Speed 2 % -15 / +15 +10 N/A Allows you to program a second Slow Speed Reference R/W

268 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Parameter Information Appendix A

150-SM6 PCM Information Table 156 - Parameter X.1…X.9

Unit data is not valid for the parameters in this table.

Min./Max. Default Read/Write

No.(1) Name Enum Text Description
Values Value Access
Displays information about the operational status of the 150-SMB Parameter
X.1 Module Status 0/1 1 — R
Configuration Option I/O Module.
Ready Bit 0 - Ready; Bit Set = 1 indicates the module is ready for operation. R
X.2 Rotary Switch 1 0/15 0 NA Displays the numeric position of Rotary Switch 1 = Initial Torque R
X.3 Rotary Switch 2 0/15 0 NA Displays the numeric position of Rotary Switch 2 = Current Limit. R
X.4 Rotary Switch 3 0/15 0 NA Displays the numeric position of Rotary Switch 3 = Ramp Time. R
X.5 Rotary Switch 4 0/15 0 NA Displays the numeric position of Rotary Switch 4 = Stop Time. R
X.6 Rotary Switch 5 0/15 0 NA Displays the numeric position of Rotary Switch 5 = Motor FLC. R
Displays the Device Config DIP switch bit status
X.7 Device Config 0/255 0 NA R
(1=Sw ON and 2=Sw OFF).
Displays the Protect Config DIP switch bit status
X.8 Protect Config 0/255 0 NA R
(1=Sw ON and 2=Sw OFF).
X.9 IO Config 0/255 0 NA Displays the IO Config DIP switch bit status (1=Sw ON and 2=Sw OFF). R
(1) X indicates the Control Module port number in which the 150-SM6 Option Module is installed. Allowable ports = 7, 8, or 9.

150-SM4 Digital I/O Module Table 157 - Parameter X.1…X.18

Information
Min./Max. Default Enum Text Read/Write
No.(1) Name Units Description
Values Value [Default] Access
Displays information about the operational status of the 150-SM4 Digital I/O
— Option Module.
Bit 0 = Ready;
Ready
Bit Set = indicates the module is ready for operation.
Bit 1 = Input 1;
Input 1
Bit Set (1) indicates the input is ON.
Bit 2 = Input 2;
Input 2
Bit Set (1) indicates the input is ON.
X.1 Module Status 0/256 0 NA Bit 3 = Input 3; R
Input 3
Bit Set (1) indicates the input is ON.
Bit 4 = Input 4;
Input 4
Bit Set (1) indicates the input is ON.
Aux 1 Bit 5 = Aux 1; Bit Set (1) indicates the auxiliary relay output is ON.
Aux 2 Bit 6 = Aux 2; Bit Set (1) indicates the auxiliary relay output is ON.
Aux 3 Bit 7 = Aux 3; Bit Set (1) indicates the auxiliary relay output is ON.
Bit 8-15 Spare Bit 8-15 Spare

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 269

Appendix A Parameter Information

Min./Max. Default Enum Text Read/Write

No.(1) Name Values Value Units [Default] Description Access
Lets you select the operation of Input Terminal A1, Option Input 1 on the 150-SM4
— Digital I/O Option Module.
[Disable] Disable the input; ignores any assertion to Input A1Terminal (High).
Start Initiate a start as set up by the start parameters at Input Terminal A1.
Coast Initiates a coast stop; no current to motor at Input Terminal A1 (Low).
Initiates a stop maneuver as set up by the stopping parameters at Input Terminal
Stop Option A1 (Low).
If Input Terminal A1 = 0 stops motor, 1 initiates a start as set up by the start
Start/Coast parameters.
If Input Terminal A1 = 0 initiates a stop maneuver as set up by stopping
Start/Stop parameters, 1 initiates a start as set up b the start parameters.
X.2 Input 1 0/13 0 NA Slow Speed 1 Runs motor in slow speed mode 1 as set up by slow speed 1 parameters (High). R/W
Slow Speed 2 Runs motor in slow speed mode 2 as set up by slow speed 2 parameters (High).
If Input Terminal A1 = 0, use starting mode 1;
Dual Ramp
1, use starting mode 2.
If Input Terminal A1 = 0, use Motor Overload Class 1;
OL Select
1, use Motor Overload Class 2.
Fault A fault condition is forced if Input Terminal A1 = 1.
Fault NC A fault condition is forced if Input Terminal A1 = 0.
Clear Fault Clear a fault from Input Terminal A1 (High).
Allows motor to run in emergency run mode if asserted from Input Terminal A1;
Emerg Run does not start motor (High).
Motor Heater Runs motor heating algorithm if asserted at Input Terminal A1 (High).
Lets you select the operation of Input Terminal A2, Option Input 2 on the 150-SM4
— Digital I/O Option Module.
[Disable] Disable the input; ignores any assertion to Input A2 Terminal.
Start Initiate a start as set up by the start parameters at Input Terminal A2 (High).
Coast Initiates a coast stop; no current to motor at Input Terminal A2 (Low).
Initiates a stop maneuver as set up by the stopping parameters at Input Terminal
Stop Option A2 (High).
If Input Terminal A2 = 0 stops motor, 1 initiates a start as set up by the start
Start/Coast parameters.
If Input Terminal A2 = 0 initiates a stop maneuver as set up by stopping
Start/Stop parameters, 1 initiates a start as set up b the start parameters.
X.3 Input 2 0/13 0 NA Slow Speed 1 Runs motor in slow speed mode 1 as set up by slow speed 1 parameters (High). R/W
Slow Speed 2 Runs motor in slow speed mode 2 as set up by slow speed 2 parameters (High).
If Input Terminal A2 = 0, use starting mode 1;
Dual Ramp
1, use starting mode 2.
If Input Terminal A2 = 0, use Motor Overload Class 1;
OL Select
1, use Motor Overload Class 2.
Fault A fault condition is forced if Input Terminal A2 = 1.
Fault NC A fault condition is forced if Input Terminal A2 = 0.
Clear Fault Clear a fault from Input Terminal A2 (High).
Allows motor to run in emergency run mode if asserted from Input Terminal A2;
Emerg Run does not start motor (High).
Motor Heater Runs motor heating algorithm if asserted at Input Terminal A2 (High).

270 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Parameter Information Appendix A

Min./Max. Default Enum Text Read/Write

No.(1) Name Values Value Units [Default] Description Access
Lets you select the operation of Input Terminal A3, Option Input 3 on the 150-SM4
— Digital I/O Option Module.
[Disable] Disable the input; ignores any assertion to Input A3 Terminal.
Start Initiate a start as set up by the start parameters at Input Terminal A3 (High).
Coast Initiates a coast stop; no current to motor at Input Terminal A3 (Low).
Initiates a stop maneuver as set up by the stopping parameters at Input Terminal
Stop Option A3 (Low).
If Input Terminal A3 = 0 stops motor, 1 initiates a start as set up by the start
Start/Coast parameters.
If Input Terminal A3 = 0 initiates a stop maneuver as set up by stopping
Start/Stop parameters, 1 initiates a start as set up b the start parameters.
X.4 Input 3 0/13 0 NA Slow Speed 1 Runs motor in slow speed mode 1 as set up by slow speed 1 parameters (High). R/W
Slow Speed 2 Runs motor in slow speed mode 2 as set up by slow speed 2 parameters (High).
If Input Terminal A3 = 0, use starting mode 1;
Dual Ramp
1, use starting mode 2.
If Input Terminal A3 = 0, use Motor Overload Class 1;
OL Select
1, use Motor Overload Class 2.
Fault A fault condition is forced if Input Terminal A3 = 1.
Fault NC A fault condition is forced if Input Terminal A3 = 0.
Clear Fault Clear a fault from Input Terminal A3 (High).
Allows motor to run in emergency run mode if asserted from Input Terminal A3;
Emerg Run does not start motor (High).
Motor Heater Runs motor heating algorithm if asserted at Input Terminal A3 (High).
Lets you select the operation of Input Terminal A4, Option Input 4 on the 150-SM4
— Digital I/O Option Module.
[Disable] Disable the input; ignores any assertion to Input A4 Terminal.
Start Initiate a start as set up by the start parameters at Input Terminal A4 (High).
Coast Initiates a coast stop; no current to motor at Input Terminal A4 (Low).
Initiates a stop maneuver as set up by the stopping parameters at Input
Stop Option Terminal A4.
If Input Terminal A4 = 0 stops motor, 1 initiates a start as set up by the start
Start/Coast parameters.
If Input Terminal A4 = 0 initiates a stop maneuver as set up by stopping
Start/Stop parameters, 1 initiates a start as set up b the start parameters.
X.5 Input 4 0/13 0 NA Slow Speed 1 Runs motor in slow speed mode 1 as set up by slow speed 1 parameters (High). R/W
Slow Speed 2 Runs motor in slow speed mode 2 as set up by slow speed 2 parameters (High).
If Input Terminal A4 = 0, use starting mode 1;
Dual Ramp
1, use starting mode 2.
If Input Terminal A4 = 0, use Motor Overload Class 1;
OL Select
1, use Motor Overload Class 2.
Fault A fault condition is forced if Input Terminal A4 = 1.
Fault NC A fault condition is forced if Input Terminal A4 = 0.
Clear Fault Clear a fault from Input Terminal A4 (High).
Allows motor to run in emergency run mode if asserted from Input Terminal A4;
Emerg Run does not start motor (High).
Motor Heater Runs motor heating algorithm if asserted at Input Terminal A4 (Low).

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 271

Appendix A Parameter Information

Min./Max. Default Enum Text Read/Write

No.(1) Name Values Value Units [Default] Description Access
Lets you configure the functionality of the Aux1 Relay Output on the 150-SM4
— Digital I/O Option Module.
[Normal] Aux1 closes when start asserted, opens when motor stops.
Aux1 closes when motor reaches up-to-speed and opens when the motor is not at
Up-to-Speed speed.
Aux1 closes when the SMC-50 controller enters a fault state and opens when the
Fault fault is cleared.
Aux1 closes when the SMC-50 controller detects an alarm condition and opens
Alarm when the alarm is cleared.
Aux1 closes when the SMC-50 controller enters the external bypass mode and
Ext Bypass opens when it leaves that mode (SCR Control).
X.6 Aux1 Config 0/12 0 NA Aux1 closes when the external braking command is active and opens when it is R/W
Ext Brake not active.
Device Logix Aux1 is controlled by the Device Logix program.
When an auxiliary output is configured for Aux Control, a bit within the parameter
Aux Control Aux Control controls the state of the auxiliary.
Network 1 With an auxiliary configured as Network 1, it is controlled over the LAN as Relay 1.
Network 2 With an auxiliary configured as Network 2, it is controlled over the LAN as Relay 2.
Network 3 With an auxiliary configured as Network 3, it is controlled over the LAN as Relay 3.
Network 4 With an auxiliary configured as Network 4, it is controlled over the LAN as Relay 4.
Used to control fans.Fan is turned on when the motor is running or the estimated
Fan Control SCR temperature is above 50°C
Lets you invert the logic of the Aux1 output. When disabled, it is a normally open
— relay output contact when de-energized. By enabling the invert function, the
X.7 Aux1 Invert 0/1 0 NA relay contact becomes a normally closed contact when de-energized. R/W
[Disable] Aux1 Relay Output is not inverted (N.O.).
Enable Aux1 Relay Output is inverted (N.C.)(2).
A user-selected time delay in activating the Aux1 Relay Contact can be
X.8 Aux1 On Delay 0.0/10.0 0.0 sec NA R/W
programmed.
A user-selected time delay in de-activating the Aux1 Relay Contact can be
X.9 Aux1 Off Delay 0.0/10.0 0.0 sec NA R/W
programmed.
Lets you configure the functionality of the Aux2 Relay Output on the 150-SM4
— Digital I/O Option Module.
[Normal] Aux2 closes when start asserted, opens when motor stops.
Aux2 closes when motor reaches up-to-speed and opens when the motor is not at
Up-to-Speed speed.
Aux2 closes when the SMC-50 controller enters a fault state and opens when the
Fault fault is cleared.
Aux2 closes when the SMC-50 controller detects an alarm condition and opens
Alarm when the alarm is cleared.
Aux2 closes when the SMC-50 controller enters the external bypass mode and
Ext Bypass opens when it leaves that mode (SCR Control).
X.10 Aux2 Config 0/12 0 NA Aux2 closes when the external braking command is active and opens when it is R/W
Ext Brake not active.
Device Logix Aux2 is controlled by the Device Logix program
When an auxiliary output is configured for Aux Control, a bit within the parameter
Aux Control Aux Control controls the state of the auxiliary.
Network 1 With an auxiliary configured as Network 1, it is controlled over the LAN as Relay 1.
Network 2 With an auxiliary configured as Network 2, it is controlled over the LAN as Relay 2.
Network 3 With an auxiliary configured as Network 3, it is controlled over the LAN as Relay 3.
Network 4 With an auxiliary configured as Network 4, it is controlled over the LAN as Relay 4.
Used to control fans.Fan is turned on when the motor is running or the estimated
Fan Control SCR temperature is above 50°C

272 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Parameter Information Appendix A

Min./Max. Default Enum Text Read/Write

No.(1) Name Units Description
Values Value [Default] Access
Lets you invert the logic of the Aux2 output. When disabled, it is a normally open
— relay output contact when de-energized. By enabling the invert function, the
X.11 Aux2 Invert 0/1 0 NA relay contact becomes a normally closed contact when de-energized. R/W
[Disable] Aux2 Relay Output is not inverted (N.O.).
Enable Aux2 Relay Output is inverted (N.C.) ?.
A user-selected time delay in activating the Aux2 Relay Contact can be
X.12 Aux2 On Delay 0.0/10.0 0.0 sec NA R/W
programmed.
A user-selected time delay in de-activating the Aux2 Relay Contact can be
X.13 Aux2 Off Delay 0.0/10.0 0.0 sec NA R/W
programmed.
Lets you configure the functionality of the Aux3 Relay Output on the 150-SM4
— Digital I/O Option Module.
[Normal] Aux3 closes when start asserted, opens when motor stops.
Aux3 closes when motor reaches Up-to-Speed and opens when the motor is not
Up-to-Speed at speed.
Aux3 closes when the SMC-50 controller enters a fault state and opens when the
Fault fault is cleared.
Aux3 closes when the SMC-50 controller detects an alarm condition and opens
Alarm when the alarm is cleared.
Aux3 closes when the SMC-50 controller enters the external bypass mode and
Ext Bypass opens when it leaves that mode (SCR Control).
X.14 Aux3 Config 0/12 0 NA Aux3 closes when the external braking command is active and opens when it is R/W
Ext Brake not active.
Device Logix Aux3 is controlled by the Device Logix program
When an auxiliary output is configured for Aux Control, a bit within the parameter
Aux Control Aux Control controls the state of the auxiliary.
Network 1 With an auxiliary configured as Network 1, it is controlled over the LAN as Relay 1.
Network 2 With an auxiliary configured as Network 2, it is controlled over the LAN as Relay 2.
Network 3 With an auxiliary configured as Network 3, it is controlled over the LAN as Relay 3.
Network 4 With an auxiliary configured as Network 4, it is controlled over the LAN as Relay 4.
Used to control fans.Fan is turned on when the motor is running or the estimated
Fan Control SCR temperature is above 50°C
Lets you invert the logic of the Aux3 output. When disabled, it is a normally open
— relay output contact when de-energized. By enabling the invert function, the
X.15 Aux3 Invert 0/1 0 NA relay contact becomes a normally closed contact when de-energized. R/W
[Disable] Aux3 Relay Output is not inverted (N.O.).
Enable Aux3 Relay Output is inverted (N.C.)(2).
A user-selected time delay in activating the Aux3 Relay Contact can be
X.16 Aux3 On Delay 0.0/10.0 0.0 sec NA R/W
programmed.
A user-selected time delay in de-activating the Aux3 Relay Contact can be
X.17 Aux3 Off Delay 0.0/10.0 0.0 sec NA R/W
programmed.
— Lets you set all 150-SM4 Digital I/O Option Module parameters to default values.
Parameter
X.18 0/1 0 NA [Ready] Waiting for command to set defaults. R/W
Management
Factory Default Set all writable parameters to factory default values.
(1) X indicates the Control Module port number in which the 150-SM4 Option Module is installed. Allowable ports = 7, 8, or 9.
(2) N.C. is electrically held closed.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 273

Appendix A Parameter Information

150-SM2 Ground Fault Table 158 - Parameter X.1…X.19

Module Information
Min./Max. Default Units Read/Write
No.(1) Name Enum Text Description
Values Value Access
Displays information about the operational status of the 150-SM2 PTC, Ground Fault, and
— External Current Transformer (CT) Option Module.
X.1 Module Status 0/7 7 NA Ready Bit 0 = Ready; Bit Set =1 indicates the module is ready for operation. R
PTC Bit 1 = PTC; 1 = PTC Indicating Fault 0; = No fault
CT Loss Bit 2 = CT Loss; 1 = CT disconnected; 0 = CT Connected
—
X.2 Fault Enable 0/3 0 NA PTC 0 = PTC Fault Disabled; 1 = PTC Fault Enabled R/W
Ground Fault 0 = Ground Fault Disabled; 1 = Ground Fault Enabled
—
R/W
x.3 Alarm Enable 0/3 0 NA PTC 0 = PTC Alarm Disabled; 1 = PTC Alarm Enabled
Ground Fault 0 = Ground Fault Alarm Disabled; 1 = Ground Fault Alarm Enabled
—
PTC 0 = does not restart after PTC Fault is cleared; 1 = restart after PTC Fault is cleared
X.4 Restart Enable 0/3 0 NA R/W
0 = does not restart after the Ground Fault is cleared; 1 = restart after the Ground Fault is
Ground Fault cleared
X.5 Turns Ratio 100/2000 1000 :1 NA Enables user to configure the turns ratio for the CT being used. R/W
Lets you configure the level (value) of ground current that determines a ground fault
X.6 Gnd Flt Level 0.00/5.00 2.50 Amps NA R/W
condition.
X.7 Gnd Flt Delay 0.1/250.0 0.5 Secs NA Sets the time limit that the ground fault level must be exceeded before signaling a fault. R/W
X.8 Gnd Flt A Level 0.00/5.00 2.50 Amps NA Sets the level of ground current that determines a ground fault alarm condition. R/W
X.9 Gnd Flt A Delay 0.1/250.0 0.5 Secs NA Sets the time limit that the ground fault level must be exceeded before signaling an alarm. R/W
X.10 Gnd Flt Inh Time 0.0/250.0 10.0 Secs NA User configurable time delay to inhibit ground fault after a start. R/W
X.11 Ground Current 0.00/5.00 0.00 Amps NA Measured ground current. R/W
—
X.12 CT Enable 0/1 0 NA Disable Disables the CT function. R/W
Enable Enables the CT function.
X.13 CT Scaling A
Displayed result of the SMC-50 controller tuning feature determination of the scaling
X.14 CT Scaling B 0.00/5.00 0.01 NA NA R
between external CT and the internal current measuring circuitry.
X.15 CT Scaling C
X.16 Phase Shift A
Displayed result of the SMC-50 controller tuning feature determination of the phase shift
X.17 Phase Shift B -12.5/12.5 0.00 Deg NA R
between external CT and the internal current measuring circuitry.
X.18 Phase Shift C
—
X.19 Parameter 0/1 0 NA Ready Waiting for command to set defaults. R/W
Mgmt
Factory Default Set all writable parameters to factory default values.
(1) X indicates the Control Module port number in which the 150-SM2 PTC, Ground Fault, and External CT Option Module is installed. Allowable ports = 7 or 8.

274 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Parameter Information Appendix A

150-SM3 Analog I/O Module Table 159 - Parameter X.1…X.56

Information
Min./Max. Default Units Read/Write
No.(1) Name Enum Text Description
Values Value Access
Displays information about the operational status of the 150-SM3 Analog I/O Option
— Module
Bit 0 = Ready
Ready Bit Set = indicates the module is ready for operation
Bit 1 = Input 1 Over Fault
In1 Over Flt Bit Set = Input 1 Overrange fault
Bit 2 = Input 1 Over Alarm
In1 Over Alm Bit Set = Input 1 Overrange alarm
Bit 3 = Input 1 Under Fault
In1 Undr Flt Bit Set = Input 1 Underrange fault
Bit 4 = Input 1 Under Alarm
In1 Undr Alm Bit Set = Input 1 Underrange Alarm
Bit 5 = Input 2 Over Fault
In2 Over Flt Bit Set = Input 2 Overrange fault
X.1 Module Status 0/4096 0 NA Bit 6 = Input 2 Over Alarm R
In2 Over Alm Bit Set = Input 2 Overrange alarm
Bit 7 = Input 2 Under Fault
In2 Undr Flt Bit Set = Input 2 Underrange fault
Bit 8 = Input 2 Under Alarm
In2 Undr Alm Bit Set = Input 2 Underrange Alarm
Out 1 Bit 9 = Output 1 Shorted
Shorted Bit Set = indicates Output 1 is shorted
Bit 10 = Output 1 Open
Out 1 Open Bit Set = indicates Output 1 is an open circuit
Out 2 Bit 11 = Output 2 Shorted
Shorted Bit Set = indicates Output 2 is shorted
Bit 12 = Output 2 Open
Out 2 Open Bit Set = indicates Output 2 is an open circuit
Bits 13…15 Reserved
60 Hz Selects a 60 Hz filter on Input 1 and Input 2
X.2 Sample Rate 0/1 0 NA R/W
250 Hz Selects a 250 Hz filter on Input 1 and Input 2
X.3 Input 1 Scaled -3000.0/ 3000.0 0.0 NA NA Input 1 scaled to user units R
X.4 Input 1 Analog -21.000/ 21.000 0.000 V or mA NA Input 1 in electrical units (volts or milliamps) R
X.5 Input 1 Percent -105.00/105.00 0.00 NA NA Input 1 as a percentage of configured range R
X.6 Input 1 Raw -32768/32768 0 NA NA Input 1 unscaled R
±10V Input 1 set to voltage mode with range of -10V to +10V
10V Input 1 set to voltage mode with range of 0V to 10V
5V Input 1 set to voltage mode with range of 0V to 5V
X.7 Input 1 Range 0/5 1 NA R/W
1…5V Input 1 set to voltage mode with range of 1V to 5V
0…20 mA Input 1 set to current mode with range of 0mA to 20mA
4…20 mA Input 1 set to current mode with range of 4mA to 20mA
Offset value of Input 1 subtracted from the Input 1 Raw value (positive offset lowers
X.8 Input 1 Offset -10000/10000 0 NA NA R/W
the resulting value)
X.9 Input 1 Data Hi -3000.0/3000.0 1000.0 NA NA User defined maximum value of Input 1 custom value range R/W
X.10 Input 1 Data Lo -3000.0/3000.0 0.0 NA NA User defined minimum value of Input 1 custom value range R/W
X.11 Input 1 High -21.000/21.000 10.000 V or mA NA Correlates Input 1 Data Hi to the Input 1 Raw value R/W
X.12 Input 1 Low -21.000/21.000 0.000 V or mA NA Correlates Input 1 Data Low to the Input 1 Raw value R/W
X.13 Input 2 Scaled -3000.0/3000.0 0.0 NA NA Input 2 scaled to user units R
X.14 Input 2 Analog -21.000/21.000 0.000 V or mA NA Input 2 in electrical units (volts or milliamperes) R
X.15 Input 2 Percent -105.00/105.00 0.00 NA NA Input 2 as a percentage of configured range R
X.16 Input 2 Raw -32768/32768 0 NA NA Input 2 unscaled R

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 275

Appendix A Parameter Information

Min./Max. Default Units Read/Write

No.(1) Name Values Value Enum Text Description Access
±10V Input 2 set to voltage mode with range of -10V to +10V
10V Input 2 set to voltage mode with range of 0V to 10V
5V Input 2 set to voltage mode with range of 0V to 5V
X.17 Input 2 Range 0/5 1 NA R/W
1…5V Input 2 set to voltage mode with range of 1V to 5V
0…20 mA Input 2 set to current mode with range of 0mA to 20mA
4…20 mA Input 2 set to current mode with range of 4mA to 20mA
Offset value of Input 2 subtracted from the Input 2 Raw value. (positive offset lowers
X.18 Input 2 Offset -10000/10000 0 NA NA R/W
the resulting value)
X.19 Input 2 Data Hi -3000.0/3000.0 1000.0 NA NA User defined maximum value of Input 2 custom value range R/W
X.20 Input 2 Data Lo -3000.0/3000.0 0.0 NA NA User defined minimum value of Input 2 custom value range R/W
X.21 Input 2 High -21.000/21.000 10.000 V or mA NA Correlates Input 2 Data Hi to the Input 2 Raw value R/W
X.22 Input 2 Low -21.000/21.000 0.000 V or mA NA Correlates Input 2 Data Low to the Input 2 Raw value R/W
±10V Output 1 set to voltage mode with range of -10V to +10V
10V Output 1 set to voltage mode with range of 0V to 10V
X.23 Output 1 Range 0/4 1 NA 5V Output 1 set to voltage mode with range of 0V to 5V R/W
0…20 mA Output 1 set to current mode with range of 0mA to 20mA
4…20 mA Output 1 set to current mode with range of 4mA to 20mA
X.24 Output 1 Select 0/15999 1 NA NA Selects the parameter used to drive Output 1 R/W
Output level when the selected parameter (Output 1 Select) reaches "Output 1 Data
X.25 Output 1 High -20.000/20.000 10.000 V or mA NA R/W
Hi"
Output level when the selected parameter (Output 1 Select) reaches "Output 1 Data
X.26 Output 1 Low -20.000/20.000 0.000 V or mA NA R/W
Lo"
-300000000/ Level of the selected parameter (Output 1 Select) corresponding to an output of
X.27 Output 1 Data Hi 480 V or mA NA R/W
300000000 "Output 1 High"
-300000000/ Level of the selected parameter (Output 1 Select) corresponding to an output of
X.28 Output 1 Data Lo 0 V or mA NA R/W
300000000 "Output 1 High"
X.29 Output1 Setpoint 0/65535 0 NA NA Raw value sent to Output 1 when "Output 1 Select" is set to "Disabled" R/W
±10V Output 2 set to voltage mode with range of -10V to +10V
10V Output 2 set to voltage mode with range of 0V to 10V
X.30 Output 2 Range 0/4 1 NA 5V Output 2 set to voltage mode with range of 0V to 5V R/W
0…20 mA Output 2 set to current mode with range of 0mA to 20mA
4…20 mA Output 2 set to current mode with range of 4mA to 20mA
X.31 Output 2 Select 0/15999 1 NA NA Selects the parameter used to drive Output 2 R/W
Output level when the selected parameter (Output 2 Select) reaches "Output 2 Data
X.32 Output 2 High -20.000/20.000 10.000 V or mA NA R/W
Hi"
Output level when the selected parameter (Output 2 Select) reaches "Output 2 Data
X.33 Output 2 Low -20.000/20.000 0.000 V or mA NA R/W
Lo"
-300000000/ Level of the selected parameter (Output 2 Select) corresponding to an output of
X.34 Output 2 Data Hi 480 V or mA NA R/W
300000000 "Output 2 High"
-300000000/ Level of the selected parameter (Output 2 Select) corresponding to an output of
X.35 Output 2 Data Lo 0 V or mA NA R/W
300000000 "Output 2 High"
X.36 Output2 Setpoint 0/65535 0 NA NA Raw value sent to Output 2 when "Output 2 Select" is set to "Disabled" R/W
In1 Over
In1 Under
In2 Over
Lets you enable the Input/Output faults
In2 Under
X.37 Fault Enable 0/255 0 NA 0 = Fault Disabled R/W
Out1 Shorted 1 = Fault Enabled
Out1 Open
Out2 Shorted
Out2 Open

276 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Parameter Information Appendix A

Min./Max. Default Units Read/Write

No.(1) Name Values Value Enum Text Description Access
In1 Over
In1 Under
In2 Over
Lets you enable the Input/Output alarms
In2 Under
X.38 Alarm Enable 0/255 0 NA 0 = Alarm Disabled R/W
Out1 Shorted 1 = Alarm Enabled
Out1 Open
Out2 Shorted
Out2 Open
In1 Over
In1 Under
In2 Over 0 = Do not attempt a restart after fault is cleared
In2 Under 1 = Attempt a restart after fault is cleared
X.39 Restart Enable 0/255 0 NA R/W
Out1 Shorted Note: Restart Attempts, Parameter 133 and Restart Delay, Parameter 134 must also
Out1 Open be configured
Out2 Shorted
Out2 Open
If Input 1 exceeds this level for the time period set in the In1 Over F Dly parameter,
X.40 In1 Over F Lvl -3000.0/3000.0 1050.0 NA NA an In1 Over fault is signaled. The In1 Over bit must be set in the Fault Enable R/W
Parameter
The time period that Input 1 must exceed the In1 Over F Lvl to signal a fault. The In1
X.41 In1 Over F Dly 0.1/99.0 3.0 sec NA R/W
Over bit must be set in the Fault Enable Parameter
If Input 1 exceeds this level for the time period set in the In1 Over A Dly parameter,
X.42 In1 Over A Lvl -3000.0/3000.0 1000.0 NA NA an In1 Over alarm is signaled. The In1 Over bit must be set in the Alarm Enable R/W
Parameter
The time period that Input 1 must exceed the In1 Over F Lvl to signal a fault. The In1
X.43 In1 Over A Dly 0.1/99.0 3.0 sec NA R/W
Over bit must be set in the Fault Enable Parameter.
If Input 1 remains below this level for the time period set in the In1 Under F Dly
X.44 In1 Under F Lvl -3000.0/3000.0 -50.0 NA NA parameter, an In1 Under fault is signaled. The In1 Under bit must be set in the Fault R/W
Enable Parameter
The time period that Input 1 must remain below the In1 Under F Lvl to signal a fault.
X.45 In1 Under F Dly 0.1/99.0 3.0 sec NA R/W
The In1 Under bit must be set in the Fault Enable Parameter
If Input 1 remains below this level for the time period set in the In1 Under A Dly
X.46 In1 Under A Lvl -3000.0/3000.0 0.0 NA NA parameter, an In1 Under alarm is signaled. The In1 Under bit must be set in the R/W
Alarm Enable Parameter
The time period that Input 1 must remain below the In1 Under F Lvl to signal a fault.
X.47 In1 Under A Dly 0.1/99.0 3.0 sec NA R/W
The In1 Under bit must be set in the Fault Enable Parameter.
If Input 2 exceeds this level for the time period set in the In2 Over F Dly parameter,
X.48 In2 Over F Lvl -3000.0/3000.0 1050.0 NA NA an In2 Over fault is signaled. The In2 Over bit must be set in the Fault Enable R/W
Parameter
The time period that Input 2 must exceed the In2 Over F Lvl to signal a fault. The In2
X.49 In2 Over F Dly 0.1/99.0 3.0 sec NA R/W
Over bit must be set in the Fault Enable Parameter
If Input 2 exceeds this level for the time period set in the In2 Over A Dly parameter,
X.50 In2 Over A Lvl -3000.0/3000.0 1000.0 NA NA an In2 Over alarm is signaled. The In2 Over bit must be set in the Alarm Enable R/W
Parameter
The time period that Input 2 must exceed the In2 Over F Lvl to signal a fault. The In2
X.51 In2 Over A Dly 0.1/99.0 3.0 sec NA R/W
Over bit must be set in the Fault Enable Parameter
If Input 2 remains below this level for the time period set in the In2 Under F Dly
X.52 In2 Under F Lvl -3000.0/3000.0 -3000.0/ NA NA parameter, an In2 Under fault is signaled. The In2 Under bit must be set in the Fault R/W
3000.0
Enable Parameter
The time period that Input 2 must remain below the In2 Under F Lvl to signal a fault.
X.53 In2 Under F Dly 0.1/99.0 0.1/99.0 sec NA R/W
The In2 Under bit must be set in the Fault Enable Parameter
If Input 2 remains below this level for the time period set in the In2 Under A Dly
X.54 In2 Under A Lvl -3000.0/3000.0 -3000.0/ NA NA parameter, an In2 Under alarm is signaled. The In2 Under bit must be set in the R/W
3000.0 Alarm Enable Parameter

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 277

Appendix A Parameter Information

Min./Max. Default Units Read/Write

No.(1) Name Enum Text Description
Values Value Access
The time period that Input 2 must remain below the In2 Under F Lvl to signal a fault.
X.55 In2 Under A Dly 0.1/99.0 0.1/99.0 sec NA R/W
The In2 Under bit must be set in the Fault Enable Parameter
Ready Waiting for command to set defaults
X.56 Parameter Mgmt 0/1 0/1 NA R/W
Set Defaults Set all writable parameters to factory default values
(1) X indicates the Control Module port number in which the Cat. No. 150-SM3 Analog I/O option module is installed. Allowable ports = 7 or 8.

278 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Appendix B

Option Modules

Introduction The SMC-50 controller has three expansion ports for optional modules. These
ports let you add control modules (such as additional inputs and outputs
(I/O), simple start/stop parameter configuration capability, and ground fault).
Brief functional explanations are provided here with the wiring termination
identifications. See Chapter 6 for more detailed functional and configuration
information. See Figure 103 for compatible port locations of the selected
module.

ATTENTION: There is the potential to have voltage values above 220V AC on

the option modules. Before removing the control module cover to access
option modules, disconnect ALL power to the SMC-50 Controller.

Figure 103 - Port Number Identification

Expansion Port for 20-HIM-A6 (DPI Port 1)

DPI Port 4
Control Module
Expansion Port 7

Control Module Control Module

Expansion Port 8 Expansion Port 9

Table 160 - Port Location for Compatible Option Modules

Compatible Control Module Port Maximum Number of this Type of

SMC-50 Control Module Compatible Option Modules Cat. Nos.
Port 7 Port 8 Port 9 Option Module per Control Module
150-SM2: Ground Fault/PTC/External CT Yes Yes No 1
150-SM3: Analog I/O Yes Yes Yes 3
150-SM4: Digital I/O Yes Yes Yes 3
150-SM6: Parameter Configuration Yes Yes Yes 1
20-COMM-X(1) (2) Communications No No Yes 1
(1) See Chapter 9 for a list of compatible 20-COMM-X modules.
(2) When installed in an SMC-50 controller, 20-COMM-X modules physically reside in the space assigned to Port 9, but connects to DPI Port 4 with the ribbon cable that is
supplied with the module.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 279

Appendix B Option Modules

Cat. No. 150-SM4 Digital I/O A Cat. No. 150-SM4 Digital I/O Option Module provides four 120...240V
AC digital on/off inputs and three relay outputs to provide additional auxiliary
Module control or indications (e.g., up-to-speed (UTS), alarm, etc.) functions. The
150-SM4 module can be located in any of the three control module option
ports (See Figure 103). Up to three 150-SM4 modules can be used with a
single control module. The 150-SM4 module terminal block used to wire the
I/O is removable.
TIP When installed in Control Module Port 7, the orientation of the module
terminal block is rotated 180° along with its terminals.
The Cat. No. 150-SM4 Digital I/O Module can NOT be configured using a
150-SM6 PCM. This module can be configured using a 20-HIM-A6, network
card, or communications software.

Figure 104 - Optional Digital I/O Module Terminal Identification

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12

N.C.

InCOM
InA1

InA2

InA3

InA4
Aux A1 Aux A2 Aux A3

120/240V AC Inputs Relay Outputs

Terminal Number Description

A1(1) Optional Input #1 (120/240V AC)
A2(1) Optional Input #2 (120/240V AC)
A3(1) Optional Input #3 (120/240V AC)
A4(1) Optional Input #4 (120/240V AC)
A5(2) Input Common
A6(2)(3) Optional Auxiliary Relay Contact #1
A7(2)(3) Optional Auxiliary Relay Contact #1
A8(2) (3) Optional Auxiliary Relay Contact #2
A9(2)(3) Optional Auxiliary Relay Contact #2
A10(2)(3) Optional Auxiliary Relay Contact #3
A11(2) Optional Auxiliary Relay Contact #3
A12 NO CONNECT
(1) Do not connect additional loads to this terminal. Parasitic loads may cause problems with operation.
(2) RC snubbers are required when inductive loads are connected to terminal.
(3) When set to external bypass mode, the auxiliary contact is used to control a properly sized external contactor and overload once
the motor is at full speed.

Optional Cat. No. 150-SM3 An optional Cat. No. 150-SM3 Analog I/O Module provides two analog
inputs (voltage or current) and two analog outputs (voltage or current).
Analog I/O Module
The 150-SM3 module can be located in any of the three control module
option ports (See Figure 103). You can use up to three 150-SM3 modules with
a single control module. The 150-SM3 module terminal block used to wire the
I/O is removable.

280 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Option Modules Appendix B

TIP When installed in Control Module Port 7, the orientation of the module
terminal block is rotated 180° along with its terminals.
The Cat. No. 150-SM3 Analog I/O Module can NOT be configured using a
150-SM6 PCM. This module can be configured using a 20-HIM-A6, network
card, or communications software.

Figure 105 - Analog I/O Module Wiring Diagram

Voltage or Voltage or Voltage Voltage

Current Load Current Load Transmitter Transmitter
+ - + - +
or
- +
or
-
Current Current
Transmitter Transmitter

NC

B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12

V/I V/I V/I V/I V I V/I V I V/I NC Control
OUT OUT OUT OUT IN IN IN IN IN IN Ground
1+ 1- 2+ 2- 1+ 1+ 1- 2+ 2+ 2-
{
{
{
{
Output 1 Output 2 Input 1 Input 2

Cat. No. 150-SM2 Positive An optional Cat. No. 150-SM2 module provides connectivity to external PTC
motor winding temperature sensors, ground-fault, and current transformer
Temperature Coefficient sensors.
(PTC), Ground-Fault, and
External Current Transformer The 150-SM2 module can be located in control module Port 7 or 8. Only one
150-SM2 module can be used with the control module (See Figure 103). All of
Option Module the individual terminal blocks (TB2, TB3, and TB4) are removable. The
RG25U female connector provides a connection point for the male-to-male
cable provided with the 825-MCM current sensor/converter module.
TIP When installed in Control Module Port 7, the orientation of the module
terminal block is rotated 180° along with its terminals.
The Cat. No. 150-SM2 Option Module can NOT be configured using a
150-SM6 PCM. This module can be configured using a 20-HIM-A6, network
card, or communications software.
Figure 106 - 150-SM2 Circuit Board
150-SM2 Module Circuit Board RG25U
Female
TB2 TB3 TB4
TB2 TB3 TB4
825-MCMxx
Ground Fault

Ground Fault
PTC

PTC

PTC and Ground

Cable

Control Ground
Fault Shield
Wire

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 281

Appendix B Option Modules

Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) Sensor — Motor Temperature Sensing:

The optional 150-SM2 module lets the SMC-50 controller interface with
motor PTC sensors. It is common for motor manufacturers to embed PTC
thermistor sensors in motor stator windings to provide temperature
monitoring of the motor windings. Because PTC thermistor sensors react to
the actual motor winding temperature, enhanced motor protection can be
provided to address conditions like obstructed motor cooling and high
ambient temperature. Table 161 defines the required PTC thermistor input
and response ratings for operation with the 150-SM2 module.

Table 161 - PTC Thermistor Input & Response Ratings

Thermistor Input Response Ratings

Response Resistance: 3400 Ω ± 150 Ω
Reset Resistance: 1600 Ω ± 100 Ω
Short-circuit Trip Resistance: 25 Ω ± 10 Ω
Maximum Voltage at PTC Terminals: (RPTC = 4 K ohms): < 7.5V
Maximum Voltage at PTC Terminals: (RPTC = open): 30V
Maximum Number of Sensors Connected in Series: 6
Maximum Cold Resistance of PTC Sensor Chain: 1500 Ω
Response Time: 800 ms

Figure 107 shows the required PTC sensor characteristics for operation with
the 150-SM2 Option Module, per IEC-34-11-2.

Figure 107 - PTC Sensor Characteristics per IEC-34-11-2

4000

1330

550
250

100

20
10
TNF -5K
TNF +5K
TNF -20K
0 °C
-20 °C

TNF +20K

TNF

For additional information concerning the configuration and diagnostic

information provided by the PTC part of the 150-SM2 Option Module, see
Chapter 6, Programming.

282 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Option Modules Appendix B

Ground Fault Sensing

In isolated or high impedance-grounded systems, core-balanced current sensors

are typically used to detect low-level ground faults that could be due to motor
insulation breakdown or entry of foreign objects. Detection of ground faults
can prevent further damage or alert personnel to perform maintenance.

The SMC-50 controller can provide ground fault indication when you use it
with the 150-SM2 Option Module and the 825-CBCT External Ground
Fault (Core Balance) Current Sensor. The ground fault current sensor mounts
separately from the SMC-50 controller and must be placed within three meters
of the SMC-50 controller. A customer-supplied cable for wiring the ground
fault sensor to the 150-SM2 module must meet the requirements outlined in
Table 162.

ATTENTION: The ground fault sensing feature of the SMC-50 controller is

intended for monitoring purposes only. It is not intended as a ground fault
circuit interrupter for personnel protection as defined in Article 100 of the
National Electric Code (NEC) and has not been evaluated to UL 1053.

Table 162 - Ground Fault Sensor Cable Requirements

Wire Type(1): Shielded, twisted pair

Wire Size: 0.2…2.5 mm2 (#24…14 AWG)
Terminal Torque: 0.8 N•m (7.0 lb•in.)
(1) See Figure 111 on page 286 for wiring details.

Figure 108 - 825-CBCT Dimensions

+ - 35
(1.38)
150
(5.91) Ø 9.0
(0.35)
200
(7.87)
175
(0.69)

Ø 110 80
(4.33) (3.15)

175
(6.90)

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 283

Appendix B Option Modules

External Current Transformer — Current Sensing in Bypass Mode

The 150-SM2 Option Module and an external current sensing device such as
an 825-MCM converter can be used to provide current feedback to the
SMC-50 controller when it is used with an external bypass contactor. The
external current feedback device provides all current measurement and current
protection functions while the controller is in external bypass mode (running).
A single 825-MCM converter provides external current feedback from all three
motor phases. In all other modes (starting, stopping, slow speed, etc.), the
SMC-50 controller’s internal current feedback signals are used.
TIP External current transformers (CTs) can be used and enabled even without
an external bypass.

Table 163 shows which 825 converter to use based on the motor FLC range.

Table 163 - 825 Converter Selection

Motor FLC Range Catalog Number

30…180 A 825-MCM180
181…520 A 825-MCM20(1)
(1) User-supplied current transformers with 5 A secondary are required. See Figure 109.

Figure 109 - Current Transformer Connection to Converter Module

Current Transformer
Another current transformer connects L2 and T2, and another connects L3 and T3.

L1 L2 L3
Converter Module
The converter module, Cat No. 825-MCM20, must be
used in these applications.

T1 T2 T3

To enable the 150-SM2 External CT function, the CT Enable parameter in the

150-SM2 must be set to "Enable" and the 825-MCM hardware must be
correctly configured. When the 150-SM2 External CT function is enabled, the
SMC-50 controller calibrates the external CT for scaling, phase shift, and
inversion during the SMC-50 controller tuning cycle. The tuning cycle will
automatically occur before the first start after the controller installation, after a
"Load Default" parameter occurs, or when you force tuning of the SMC-50
controller through the Force Tuning parameter or the control module’s Hold
to Reset button. The scaling is displayed relative to the unit’s rating where 1.00
indicates that the external CTs and the internal CTs are scaled the same.

284 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Option Modules Appendix B

Figure 110 shows the connection of the 825-MCM Converter to the SMC-50
controller’s 150-SM2 Option Module.

Figure 110 - Converter to Option Module Connection

825 Converter Module

RG25U Male
Connection

150-SM2 Option
Module 825-MCA Connection Cable (1)
Provided as standard with the 825 Converter Module

(1) The cable length is fixed at 4 meters. Only the cable provided with the converter can be used. The use of any other cable will result
in incorrect data from the converter and incorrect controller operation.

Table 164 provides the terminal and wire specifications for the 150-SM2
(terminals TB2, TB3, and TB4).

Table 164 - Control and Option Module Wiring Specifications

Wire Size 0.2...2.5 mm2 (#24...14 AWG)

Maximum Torque 0.8 N•m (7 lb•in.)
Maximum Wire Strip Length 7 mm (0.27 in.)
Screw Type M3 Slotted

Figure 111 provides information for wiring all sensors to the 150-SM2 module.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 285

Appendix B Option Modules

Figure 111 - Combined Wiring Diagram of all 150-SM2 Sensors

150-SM2 Module Circuit Board (5) 5

RG25U
TB2 TB3 Female TB4
TB2 TB3 RG25U TB4
Male
1 2 1 2

Shield To Control
Module Terminal
(1) #3 Ground
Shield
Motor PTC Sensor Cable

825-MCMxx Cable (1) (2) Shield

Black
White

(1) (2)
T1/2 L1/1
SMC-50 Controller Fast-acting SCR fuses (1)
Circuit
825-MCMxx

(optional)
Motor (1) Protective
T2/4 L2/3 Device (1)

T3/6 L3/5

External Bypass (1) (4) 4 825-CBCT Core (1) (3) (6)

Balance Ground
Fault Sensor

(1) Customer supplied.

(2) The 825-MCM can be used with or without an external bypass contactor. If an external bypass contactor is used then the 825-MCM
must be installed in order to use current-based motor protective features including the motor overload feature. Cable length is 4
meters. Only the cable provided with the 825-MCM is compatible with the 150-SM2. See Figure 112 for 825-MCM dimensions.
(3) The 825-CBCT Core Balance Sensor mounts separately from the SMC-50 controller and must be placed within 3 meters of the
SMC-50 controller. When connecting the 825-CBCT ground-fault sensor, the secondary of the CT must be shorted until
connection to the 150-SM2 module is complete.
(4) See Figure 42 on page 64 for additional bypass configurations (such as emergency run-off bypass) and application considerations.
(5) To meet product susceptibility requirements, a single ferrite core must be placed around any or all sensor (such as, PTC, ground
fault, etc.) wires connected to the 150-SM2 Option Module. The recommended core is a Fair-Rite Products Corp Part Number
0431167281 or equivalent.
(6) Ensure the 150-SM2 Turns Ratio, Parameter X.5, is configured to match the 825-CBCT Turns Ratio 100:1 (X.5=100).

286 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Option Modules Appendix B

Figure 112 - 825-MCM180 and -MCM20 Dimensions

Ø 5.3
(0.2)

5.3 55.0
(0.2) (2.2) 118.0 (4.6)
or
85 (3.4)

72.0 (2.8)
38.5 or 66.0 (2.6)
(1.5) 102.0
100.0 (4.0)
(3.9)
120.0
(4.72)

Cat. No. 150-SM6 Parameter The Cat. No. 150-SM6 PCM provides simple and limited configuration of the
SMC-50 controller. You can insert this PCM into any control module option
Configuration Module (PCM) port (7, 8, or 9).

This module contains five rotary dials and three banks of two-position, eight-
switch DIP switches.

Parameters that are configured by the PCM will appear as read-write

parameters to other configuration devices whose values represent the switch
settings. The parameter values set by the PCM are stored in the control
module memory. If any of these parameters are changed by an external device,
the value will revert to the PCM setting.

Parameters that are not defined and therefore are not configurable by the
PCM can be configured through other means (like Human Interface Module
(HIM), Connected Components Workbench software, or DriveExecutive
software), if necessary.

Only one 150-SM6 Option Module can be installed in the control module.
Any of the three control module expansion ports can be used. A fault is
generated if you attempt to install more than one 150-SM6 into the control
module.

You can use a single PCM to configure multiple SMC-50 controllers. After
setup of the initial SMC-50 controller is complete, remove all power and move
the PCM to the next SMC-50 controller that needs to be programmed. Upon
powerup of the initial SMC-50 controller, the parameters set by the PCM are
retained.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 287

Appendix B Option Modules

Notes:

288 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Appendix C

Using DeviceLogix

Introduction DeviceLogix is a standard feature in the SMC-50 controller (firmware 4.002

and higher). DeviceLogix can be used to control and monitor the SMC-50
controller. Program DeviceLogix for the SMC-50 controller through a
DeviceLogix Editor component ( icon), available in Connected Components
Workbench software version 6 and later. You cannot use other DeviceLogix Editors,
such as RSNetWorx for DeviceNet.

Table 165 - Basic features:

SMC-50 controller 4.002 and later

DeviceLogix Library Version 5
Maximum number of function blocks 32
20 ms (fixed): 1…10 blocks
Program update time per number of 30 ms (fixed): 11…21 blocks
blocks used
40 ms (fixed): 22…32 blocks

The SMC-50 controller DeviceLogix implementation provides basic logic

capability for applications. A 20…40 ms scan time is provided depending on
program size. You can use DeviceLogix in both networked and stand- alone
environments. DeviceLogix continues execution independent of the SMC-50
controller’s state (such as starting, running, fault)

There is no data retention in DeviceLogix during a power cycle. Timer and

counter accumulators, calculation results, latched bits, etc. are cleared.

Controlling the SMC-50 controller operating modes (starting, stopping, slow

speed etc.) through DeviceLogix requires you to set bit #14 of the “Logic
Mask” (parameter #148).

Parameters See Table 155 on page 268 for DeviceLogix parameter descriptions.

Function Block Elements The following function block elements are available:

• Bit and Analog I/O(1)

• Process

(1) Bit and Analog I/O do not count against the Function Block total. All other elements count, with each instance counting as one
Function Block.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 289

Appendix C Using DeviceLogix

• Select/Limit

• Timer/Counter

• Compare

• Compute/Math

• Move/Logical

• Macro Block

The DeviceLogix Editor provides a graphical interface for configuring

Function Blocks to provide local control within the drive. DeviceLogix Editor
navigation and programming basics are not covered in this manual. Refer to the
DeviceLogix user manual, publication RA-UM003 for additional information.

Macro Blocks

You can create up to five Macro Blocks and you can use each five times. The
selections are empty until you create a Macro Block. You also create the icon
text associated with each Macro Block.

Bit and Analog I/O Points

The DeviceLogix controller in Port 14 uses (32) bit inputs, (18) bit outputs,
(24) analog inputs, and (2) analog outputs.

290 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Using DeviceLogix Appendix C

Bit Inputs

Available bit inputs to the DeviceLogix program include:

Bit Inputs Name Description

Input 1, Input 2 State of the 2 inputs on the control module.
Status indicating that the expansion card installed into
P7 Ready, P8 Ready, P9 the corresponding expansion port is functioning and
(17) Hardware Boolean Inputs Ready Ready
Status of the Boolean inputs from the expansion cards
PX input 1 – PX input 4 – See the Expansion Card Mapping table below
Running
Phase Rotation
Phase Detection
Starting
Stopping
Alarm These Boolean inputs correspond to the statuses listed
in Table 117 on page 220
Fault
(15) Network Boolean Inputs At Speed
Start
Bypass
Ready
Network Bit 1
Network Bit 2 These Boolean inputs correspond to the statuses listed
Network Bit 3 in Table 118 on page 221
Network Bit 4

The function of the expansion port inputs depends on the card installed in the
given port. Table 166 shows how the bit inputs are mapped for each card type:

Table 166 - Bit Input Mapping

Digital I/O PTC / Ground Fault Parameter Config

Bit Input Analog I/O (150-SM3)
(150-SM4) (150-SM2) (150-SM6)
PX Input 1 Input #1 DAC #1 Open Status PTC Status None (always 0)
PX Input 2 Input #2 DAC #1 Shorted Status CT Loss Status None (always 0)
PX Input 3 Input #3 DAC #2 Open Status None (always 0) None (always 0)
PX Input 4 Input #4 DAC #1 Shorted Status None (always 0) None (always 0)

Bit Outputs

Bit Outputs are used to connect to real-world output devices (pilot lights,
relays, etc.) that are wired to an auxiliary relay in the SMC-50 controller.
Available bit outputs are shown in Table 167.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 291

Appendix C Using DeviceLogix

Table 167 - Bit Output Mapping

Bit Outputs Name Description

Aux 1, Aux2 Auxiliary Relays available on the control board.(1) ?
(11) Hardware Boolean Outputs Auxiliary Relays #1 - #3 available on the Digital I/O
PX Aux1 – PX Aux3 (150-SM4) Expansion Card(1)
Coast
Start
Stop These outputs can be used to control the SMC-50
controller in the same way a PLC can control the SMC-50
(7) Network Boolean Outputs CLR Fault controller. See Table 118 on page 221 for a definition of
Slow Speed these control bits.
Emergency Run
Motor Heater
(1) The Auxiliary Relays must be programmed to “Device Logix” to allow the DeviceLogix program to control each specific relay. For
example, if you want to control Aux 1 on the control module you must configure “Aux1 Config” (parameter #172) to “Device
Logix”. Similarly, to control Aux 1 in a Digital I/O (150-SM4) expansion card you must configure “Aux 1 Config” (parameter #6 in
the expansion card) to “Device Logix”.

Analog Inputs

Available analog inputs to the DeviceLogix program are all 32-bit integers and
include the data points shown in Table 168.

Table 168 - Analog Input Data Points

Analog Inputs Name Description

Volt PP Ave Average Phase to Phase Voltage (Param #1 - Volts)
I Ave Average Current (Param #5 – Amps)
Torque Average Torque (Param #9 - %)
Real Power Total Real Power (Param #10 – kWatts)
Power Factor Average Power Factor (Param #17 – in hundredths)
(22) Network Analog Inputs Volt PN Ave Average Phase to Neutral Voltage (Param #265 – Volts)
Reactive Power Total Reactive Power (Param #277 – kWatts)
Apparent Power Total Apparent Power (Param #286 – kWatts)
DLX In 1, DLX In 2 DLX General-purpose Input parameters (Param #335, #336)
DLX DL1 – DLX DL6 DLX Datalink Input Parameters (Param #337-342)
PX In 1 – PX In 2 Analog inputs from the expansion cards – See Table 169

The function of the expansion port inputs depends on the card installed in the
given port. Table 169 shows how the analog inputs are mapped for each card
type.

Table 169 - Expansion Card Input Mapping

Digital I/O Parameter Config

Bit Input Analog I/O (150-SM3) PTC / Grd Fault (150-SM2)
(150-SM4) (150-SM6)
PX In 1 None (always 0) Analog In #1 (Param X.6) Ground Current (Param #11) None (always 0)
PX In 2 None (always 0) Analog In #2 (Param X.16) None (always 0) None (always 0)

292 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Using DeviceLogix Appendix C

Analog Outputs

Available analog outputs from the DeviceLogix program are all 32-bit integers
and include the data points in Table 170.

Table 170 - Analog Output Data Points

Analog Outputs Name Description

(2) Network Analog Outputs A Out 1 – A Out 2 General-purpose Output parameters (Param #343, #344)

Tips Data Types

The SMC-50 controller DeviceLogix implementation supports 32-bit integers

only.

DeviceLogix Scratchpad Registers

The SMC-50 controller provides 2 input (parameter #335, #336) and 2

output (parameter #343, #344) scratchpad registers. The input parameters can
be written by any configuration or network device and used as an input to
DeviceLogix. The output parameters can be written by DeviceLogix and
displayed on configuration devices or read using network devices.

SMC-50 Controller DeviceLogix Input Datalinks (P337…P342)

The SMC-50 controller provides parameters directly to DeviceLogix as analog

inputs. Additional parameters from the host and expansion cards can be made
available through the DeviceLogix Datalink inputs. The value of the parameter
linked to by the datalink is made available to DeviceLogix. For example,
configuring a datalink to “Mtr Therm Usage” (parameter #18) would make the
motor thermal usage value available to DeviceLogix.

Program Examples Example 1: Selector Switch Operation

This example demonstrates how a selector switch could be used to select one or
four parameters to write to one of the scratchpad output parameters.

Table 171 represents the inputs and outputs for a 4 position selector switch.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 293

Appendix C Using DeviceLogix

Table 171 - Four-position Selector Switch I/O

Inputs Outputs
Input 1 Input 2 Output Selection Selector Switch Output
0 0 0 Volt PP Ave
0 1 1 Volt Phase A-B
1 0 2 Volt Phase B-C
1 1 3 Volt Phase C-A

Parameter Configuration

Because the individual phase voltage parameters are not directly available in
DeviceLogix (only the average voltage – Volt PP Ave is) we use three of the
DeviceLogix Datalink parameters to make those values available to
DeviceLogix as shown in Table 172

Table 172 - DeviceLogix Datalink Parameters

Parameter No. Parameter Value Description

337 DLX DL Input 1 Port 0: Volts Phase A-B Value for Selection 01
338 DLX DL Input 2 Port 0: Volts Phase B-C Value for selection 10
339 DLX DL Input 3 Port 0: Volts Phase C-A Value for selection 11

Figure 113 - Function Block Programming

294 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Using DeviceLogix Appendix C

Example 2: Diverter Operation

This example demonstrates basic control logic to operate a diverter in a

conveyor system using a in Digital I/O (150-SM4) option module card
installed in Port #8. The diverter directs parts from an upstream conveyor to
one of two downstream conveyors. The parameter “DLX Input 1” (parameter
# 335) defines the total number of boxes diverted to conveyer “A” (when the
diverter control signal is off ). The parameter “DLX Input 2” (parameter #
336) defines the total number of boxes diverted to conveyer “B” (when the
diverter control signal is on).

Figure 114 - Diverter Operation

Sensor
Diverter

Upstream Conveyor
Downstream Conveyor

The application consists of the discrete I/O that is shown in Table 173

Table 173 - Diverter I/O

Type Name Description

Identifies that a part is present – Connected to Input #1 on an Digital I/O
Inputs Part Present Sensor (150-SM4) card installed in Port #8
Controls the diverter actuator to direct the flow of parts – Connected to
Outputs Diverter Actuator Aux #1 on an Digital I/O (150-SM4) card installed in Port #8

Example logic requirements:

• When Part Present Sensor transitions to ON increment the parts
counter
• If parts counter is greater than or equal to “DLX Input 1” then set the
diverter actuator
• When the counter reaches “DLX Input 1” + “DLX Input 2” reset the
counter.

Parameter Configuration

The parameters in Table 174 are configured for this example.

Table 174 - Diverter Parameter Configuration

Port Parameter Parameter Value Description

No.
335 DLX Input 1 5 Send 5 boxes down conveyor “A”
336 DLX Input 2 5 Send 5 boxes down conveyor “B”
8.6 Auxiliary #1 is used to control the Diverter. In
Port #8 Aux 1 Config Device Logix order for Device Logix to control the Auxiliary it
Parameter #6 must be configured to “Device Logix”.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 295

Appendix C Using DeviceLogix

Figure 115 - Function Block Programming

Example 3: Wet Well Operation

This example demonstrates how you can use basic control logic for motor
control. It is assumed that a Digital I/O (150-SM4) option module is installed
in Port #8.

Figure 116 - Wet Well

Inflow

Critical High Level Sensor

High Level Sensor

Low Level Sensor

Outflow

The application consists of the discrete I/O that is listed in Table 175

296 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Using DeviceLogix Appendix C

Table 175 - Wet Well Discrete I/O

Type Location of I/O Name Description

Indicates a critically high level. It is normally a backup to
Port #8 Input #2 Critical High Level sensor the High Level sensor and is also used to detect whether
the High Level sensor is faulty.
Indicates the well is at a high level and it is time to start
Port #8 Input #3 High Level sensor
Inputs pumping using the SMC-50 controller.
When OFF, it is used to indicate that the well is empty
(as long as the High and Critical High Level sensors are
Port #8 Input #4 Low Level sensor also OFF). The SMC-50 controller stops operating (end of
pumping cycle).
Indicates that there is a problem with either the High
Port #8 Aux #1 Sensor Failure pilot light Level or Low Level sensors
Outputs Port #8 Aux #2 Critical Level Pilot light Indicates that the Critical Level Sensor is active.
No External Wiring Start Start signal to the SMC-50 controller.
No External Wiring Stop Stop signal to the SMC-50 controller.

Example logic requirements:

• Start the motor when the High Level Sensor is ON.
• Stop the motor when all the level sensors are OFF.
• Annunciate a Sensor Fault condition and Stop the SMC-50 controller
when any of these conditions exist:
– The Low Level sensor is OFF when either the High Level or Critical
High Level sensors are ON
– The High Level sensor is OFF when the Critical High Level sensor is
ON
• Activate the Critical High Level Pilot when the Critical High Level
sensor is active.
• Reset alarms / faults with a Reset push button input

Parameter Configuration

The parameters that are listen in Table 176 are configured for this example.

Table 176 - Wet Well Parameter Configuration

Port Parameter No. Parameter Value Description

0.148.14
Host Parameter #148 “Logic Mask” Set bit #14 Allow DeviceLogix to control the motor.
Bit #14
8.6 Auxiliary #1 is used to control the Sensor Failure
Port #8 “Aux 1 Config” “Device Logix” pilot light. In order for DeviceLogix to control the
Parameter #6 Auxiliary it must be configured to “Device Logix”.
8.10 Auxiliary #2 is used to control the Critical Level
Port #8 “Aux 2 Config” “Device Logix” pilot light. In order for DeviceLogix to control the
Parameter #10 Auxiliary it must be configured to “Device Logix”.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 297

Appendix C Using DeviceLogix

Figure 117 - Function Block Programming

298 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Appendix D

Real Time Clock (RTC) Battery Replacement

The SMC-50 Control Module comes standard with a RTC used to time and
date stamp Faults and Alarms. When the control power is not applied to the
SMC-50, the operation of the RTC is maintained by an off-the-shelf Lithium™
CR2032 coin cell battery. The battery must be replaced if the SMC-50’s low
battery alarm is activated.

To replace the battery:

1. Perform the steps that are required to remove the control module. See
the control module installation instructions, publication 150-IN078.
2. Locate the battery on the circuit board. Note the positive symbol is
facing upward.
Bottom Side of SMC-50
Remove and replace battery with postive (+)
symbol facing upward.

3. Remove the existing battery, disposing of it according to local

environmental codes.
4. With the positive symbol of the new battery facing upward, properly
seat the battery into place.
5. Perform the steps that are required to replace the control module. See
the control module installation instructions, publication 150-IN078
6. Reprogram/reset the clock.

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 299

Appendix D Real Time Clock (RTC) Battery Replacement

Notes:

300 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Index

Numerics configuration
controller parameter 32
150-SM2 ground fault module
keypad and LCD 33
parameter information 274 parameter configuration option module 33
150-SM2 PTC module 281 PC programmable software 33
150-SM3 analog I/O module 280 control inputs and outputs 34
wiring diagram 281 optional inputs 35
150-SM4 digital I/O module 280 standard and optional outputs 35
parameter information 269 standard inputs 34
150-SM6 33 control options 90, 98
parameter information 269 control wiring 48
150-SM6 parameter configuration module specifications 48
287 standard control terminal block 48
20-HIM-A6 33 controller overview 75, 121
20-HIM-A6, 20-HIM-C6S, and Configuration controller parameter configuration 32
Software 122 Controller Power Structures 117
Current and Thermal Ratings 107
Current Imbalance Protection—Fault and
A Alarm 131
Accu-Stop 25, 93 current limit start 18, 82
timing diagram 25 programming parameters 170
Accu-Stop option timing diagram 18
sequence of operation 103 current transformer interface 36
wiring diagrams 65 CWE 4 converter module
additional resources 11 with overload protection 126
Alarm Indication 236
alarms 32
Altitude 107
D
application considerations 107 design philosophy 107
Application Uses 117 device peripheral interface
Atmospheric Protection 108 DeviceLogix 30
auxiliary relay function block element 289
alarm indication 236 parameters 289
using 289
output fault 236
diagnostics 125, 130, 225
Auxiliary Relay Output Fault 236
DPI.See device peripheral interface
dual ramp start 20
B description of 86
programming parameters 175
backspin timer 88
timing diagram 20
braking wiring diagram of 52
external 25
braking control modes 23
Accu-Stop 25 E
external braking control 25 electromagnetic compatibility 42
slow speed with braking 24
additional requirements 42
smart motor braking 24
enclosure 42
wiring 42
C electronic motor overload 31
EMC.See electromagnetic compatibility
changes, summary of 14 emergency run 27, 98
clear fault 228
Enabling Option Module Functional Faults
coast 21 and Alarm 125
coast-to-stop 22, 89
Enabling Starter and Motor Faults and
communications 30 Alarms 122
device peripheral interface
enclosure 42
DeviceLogix 30
excessive starts per hour 31
explosion hazard 13

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 301

Index

external braking control 25, 95 internal bypass mode 25

external bypass – optional run operation 26 internal bypass modes 95
external bypass control 95 Internal Motor Winding Heater 111
external bypass power wiring 44
External Motor Winding Heater 111
J
jam detection 31
F
fan
wiring 73 L
fan wiring 73 Line Power Overvoltage Protection—Fault
integrated bypass units 73 and Alarm 131
solid-state units 73 Line Power Undervoltage Protection 130
upgraded units 73 line voltage 107
fault
linear acceleration 79
auxiliary relay output 236
buffer 228 linear speed (linear deceleration) 90
display 227 linear speed acceleration
fault display explanation 238 timing diagram 17
faults 32 linear speed deceleration 22
features 16 timing diagram 23
motor and starter protection 27 linear spped acceleration 17
motor protection 31 linerar speed 79
starter protection 28 timing diagram 80
full voltage start 20, 83
description of 88
timing diagram 20 M
Mechanical Shock and Vibration 107
metering 203
G modes
General 11 starting 16
General Precautions 11 stopping 21
ground fault 36 Motor Overload Protection 108
motor protection
electronic motor overload 31
H excessive starts per hour 31
High and Low Line Power Frequency stall protection and jam detection 31
Protection—Fault and Alarm 133 underload 31
user-configurable alarms and faults 32
human interface module 211 motor protection features 31
human interface module (HIM) 216 motor tuning 75
connecting the HIM to the controller 216 Motor Winding Heater 111
motor winding heater
I function 88
Multiple motors 109
indicators
controller 15
inputs N
control 34
optional 35 Noise and Radio Frequency (RF) Immunity
standard 34 107
inputs and outputs
control 34
installation 37, 107
Intelli-Brake option
description 90
Intelli-Stop option
wiring diagrams 68
Intell-Stop
wiring diagrams 67

302 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

 Index

O protection and diagnostics 125

overload 126
operating modes 75
stall and jam 134
internal bypass 25 underload 129
motor configuration 75 protective modules 41
motor tuning 75
PTC outputs 36
resistive loads 76
starting 16 pump control
starting modes 79 wiring diagrams 67
stopping 21 pump control mode 19
option module timing diagram 19
parameter configuration 33 pump control start and stop 85
option modules 279 pump stop 23
optional inputs 35 timing diagram 23
options 211
outputs
control 34
R
current transformer 36 resistive loads 76
ground fault 36 three-phase balanced loads 77
PTC 36 resistor loads 27
standard and optional 35 running modes 95
overload protection 126
emergency run 27
overview resistor loads 27
product 15 solid-state 26

P S
parameter scr control
electrically erasable programmable read- energy saver run 26
only memory (EEPROM) 161 SCR control - energy saver run operation 26
management of 197 SCR control - normal run operation 26
modification of 168
random access memory (RAM) 160 selectable kickstart 19, 81
read-only memory (ROM) 160 timing diagram 19
parameter information 245 sequence of operation 98
150-SM2 ground fault module 274 Setup 108
150-SM3 analog I/O module 275 slow speed with braking 24, 92
150-SM4 digital I/O module 269 timing diagram 24
150-SM6 PCM 269 smart motor braking 24, 91
SMC-50 Controller 245 timing diagram 24
perchlorate material 13 SMB.See smart motor braking
Phase Reversal Protection 133 soft start 16, 80
Pollution 108 timing diagram 17, 81
port locations 15 soft start option
power 37 description of 79
Power Factor Correction Capacitors 114 soft stop 22
power module (and interface board) timing diagram 22
resistance check 244 wiring diagrams 67
soft stop option
preparation 244
shorted SCR test 244 description 90
power wiring with external bypass sequence of operation 99
soft stop/pump control/Intelli-Brake
delta-connected motors 47
line-connected motors 44 options
Precautions 11 wiring diagrams 62, 63
preset slow speed 21, 92 solid-state (SCR) control 95
timing diagram 21 solid-state running modes 26
preset slow speed option external bypass – optional run operation 26
sequence of operation 100 SCR control - energy saver run operation 26
wiring diagrams 65 SCR control - normal run operation 26
product overview 15 solid-state units
Protection and Diagnostic Functions 121 fan wiring 73
Special Motors 109

Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017 303

Index

specifications torque control start 18, 84

control wiring 48 timing diagram 18
stall protection 31 trip curves 130
stall protection and jam detection 31 troubleshooting 237
stall protection and jam protection 134 fault display explanation 238
standard and optional outputs 35 flowchart 237, 238
standard control terminal block 48 troubleshooting tables 242, 243
standard controller wiring diagrams 50, 52,
53, 54, 55, 56, 58, 60, 61, 67 U
standard controller wiring options 64 underload 31, 129
standard inputs 34 upgraded units
start timer (start delay) 87 fan wiring 73
starter protection user-configurable alarms and faults 32
communications 30
metering system 29
overvoltage 28 V
undervoltage 28
voltage unbalance 28 viewing metering data 203
starting modes 16, 79 Voltage Unbalance Protection—Fault and
current limit start 18 Alarm 132
dual ramp start 20
full voltage start 20
linear speed acceleration 17 W
liner speed 79 wiring 37, 42
preset slow speed 21
pump control mode 19 control 48
selectable kickstart 19 electromagnetic compatibility 42
soft start 16 fan 73
torque control start 18 power 37
stopping modes 21, 89 power wiring with external bypass 44
protective modules 41
coast 21 terminal locations 37
linear speed deceleration 22 wiring diagrams
pump stop 23
soft stop 22 standard controller 50

T
terminal locations 37
180A through 360A 37
wiring 37
terminology 11
three-phase balanced loads 77
timed start 88
timing diagram
Accu-Stop 25
coast-to-stop 22
current limit start 18
dual ramp start 20
full voltage start 20
linear speed acceleration 17
linear speed deceleration 23
liner speed 80
preset slow speed 21
pump control mode 19
pump stop 23
selectable kickstart 19
slow speed with braking 24
smart motor braking 24
soft start 17, 81
soft stop 22
torque control start 18

304 Rockwell Automation Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

.

Rockwell Automation Support

Use the following resources to access support information.

Technical Support Center Knowledgebase Articles, How-to Videos, FAQs, Chat, User https://rockwellautomation.custhelp.com/
Forums, and Product Notification Updates.
Local Technical Support Phone Numbers Locate the phone number for your country. http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/support/get-support-now.page
Find the Direct Dial Code for your product. Use the code to
Direct Dial Codes route your call directly to a technical support engineer. http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/support/direct-dial.page

Installation Instructions, Manuals, Brochures, and

Literature Library http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/literature-library/overview.page
Technical Data.
Product Compatibility and Download Get help determining how products interact, check
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/support/pcdc.page
Center (PCDC) features and capabilities, and find associated firmware.

Documentation Feedback
Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better. If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document, complete the
How Are We Doing? form at http://literature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/du/ra-du002_-en-e.pdf.

Rockwell Automation maintains current product environmental information on its website at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/about-us/sustainability-ethics/product-environmental-compliance.page.

Allen-Bradley, Connected Components Workbench, DeviceLogix, DPI, DriveExplorer, DriveExecutive, PowerFlex, Rockwell Software, Rockwell Automation, RSNetWorx, SCANPort, SMC, SMC-50, and SMC Flex are trademarks of Rockwell
Automation, Inc.
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A.Ş., Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat:6 34752 İçerenköy, İstanbul, Tel: +90 (216) 5698400

Publication 150-UM011D-EN-P - November 2017

Supersedes Publication 150-UM011C-EN-P - March 2014 and 150-AT002C-EN-P - March 2013 Copyright © 2017 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.